# Set up the Tella MCP server for your AI agent Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/ai-onboarding Connect Claude, ChatGPT, Claude Code, Codex, or Cursor to the Tella MCP server at https://api.tella.com/mcp. Point your agent at this page and it sets up Tella for you. Point your AI agent (Claude, ChatGPT, Claude Code, Codex, or Cursor) at this page and it connects to your Tella workspace through the Tella MCP server and walks you through setup, one step at a time. It won't change your videos: it asks before it edits anything. Paste this into a new chat: ```text theme={"system"} Read https://www.tella.com/docs/ai-onboarding.md and follow its steps to set up Tella for me. If you can run commands, fetch it with curl so you get the whole page. ``` | Version | Published | | - | - | | 1.1.0 | November 3, 2026 | ## Instructions for your agent **Agent: these are steps for you to follow, not a page to summarize for the user.** If your fetch tool gave you a summary instead of this page, fetch the raw Markdown if you can (`curl -sL https://www.tella.com/docs/ai-onboarding.md`) and follow that. If you can't, follow the steps as best you can from what you have. The user shared this page because they want you to work with their Tella videos: find them, read transcripts, edit clips, and export or share the result. If they asked you to review, summarize, or compare this page instead, treat it as a document and don't run setup. ### How the conversation goes Setup takes four messages from you; signing up or recording a first video adds one or two more. Each one ends by waiting for the user, so never send two in a row. Do the work between them quietly: no narration of tool calls or research. 1. **Connect:** how to connect Tella in this app, and how to sign up if they don't have an account yet (step 1). Skip this message if you already have Tella tools. 2. **Choose:** say they're connected and ask how much to set up (step 2). 3. **Pick a video:** say what you set up, then show their three latest videos to pick from (steps 3–5). 4. **Result:** something useful about the video they picked, then two prompts to try next (steps 5–6). Keep each message short (two to four sentences, plus any choices or code block) and written for someone new to Tella and to AI tools. Use your platform's clickable choices or ask-user tool for decisions, with the recommended option first; use a numbered list only if you have no choice interface. Never ask for a password or API key: sign-in happens in their browser. Ask before you edit, delete, publish, or share a video, and before anything that spends credits. ### 1. Connect the Tella MCP server **If you already have Tella tools** (such as `list_videos`), use them and go to step 2. Don't add a second Tella server. **If the user doesn't have a Tella account yet**, sign them up first (see [Sign the user up](#sign-the-user-up)). You can't tell from here, so end message 1 with: "No Tella account yet? Tell me and I'll help you sign up." Otherwise, connect Tella's MCP server, `https://api.tella.com/mcp`, for the app you're running in. The user signs in to Tella in their browser and picks the workspace you'll use. Do the parts you can yourself: * **Claude:** ask the user to open [Tella in Claude's Connector Directory](https://claude.ai/directory/tella), select **Connect**, sign in, and tell you when it's done. * **ChatGPT:** ask the user to open [Tella in ChatGPT](https://chatgpt.com/plugins/plugin_asdk_app_6a7026f78434819186579d93d20ab38b?open_in_app), connect it, sign in, and tell you when it's done. * **Claude Code:** run `claude mcp add --transport http --scope user tella https://api.tella.com/mcp`. No sign-in opens on its own: ask the user to type `/mcp`, pick **tella**, choose **Authenticate**, and sign in in the browser. * **Codex:** add the server to `~/.codex/config.toml` yourself, which doesn't start a sign-in: ```toml theme={"system"} [mcp_servers.tella] url = "https://api.tella.com/mcp" ``` Then ask the user to run `codex mcp login tella` in their own terminal, sign in in the browser, and restart Codex so the Tella tools load. Don't run `codex mcp add` or `codex mcp login` yourself and pass on the link they print: the link returns to a local port that closes when your command ends, so the sign-in fails. * **Cursor and other clients:** follow the [MCP server setup](https://www.tella.com/docs/mcp-server.md) for the client. If sign-in gets stuck, follow [Tella MCP Server troubleshooting](/docs/help/integrations/mcp-server#troubleshooting-authentication). ### 2. Choose how much to set up Once the Tella tools work, call `get_account` for the user's name and workspace. ChatGPT and Codex don't offer `get_account`; if it isn't in your tool list, call `list_videos` and use the number of videos you can see instead. Then send one message that confirms the connection and asks one question, and wait for the answer: "You're connected to \[workspace] as \[name] ✅. How much should I set up?" Leave out "as \[name]" if you don't have one. | Option | In coding agents (Claude Code, Codex, Cursor) | In the Claude and ChatGPT apps | | - | - | - | | Full setup (Recommended) | I'll add Tella's video editing skills and save a short note so every new chat knows to use Tella. | I'll give you a short note to save in your settings, so every new chat knows to use Tella. | | Just connect | Tella stays connected here. Nothing else is installed or saved. | Tella stays connected here. Nothing else is saved. | For **Full setup**, do steps 3 and 4 without messaging the user in between. Either way, message 3 is in step 5. ### 3. Add the Tella skills Skip this step in the Claude and ChatGPT apps, and anywhere else you can't run commands. Read the [MCP server guide](https://www.tella.com/docs/mcp-server.md) before your first edit instead. [tellahq/skills](https://github.com/tellahq/skills) teaches you how to inspect a video before editing it, which tool fits which edit, and how to check the result. The main `tella` skill hands specialized jobs (cutting mistakes, layouts, motion graphics, launch videos) to the other skills in the repo, so install all of them. Run this, with `claude-code`, `codex`, or `cursor` after `-a`: ```bash theme={"system"} npx skills add tellahq/skills -g -a claude-code -y ``` `-y` skips the installer's prompts, which fail when there's no terminal to answer them. If your sandbox can't reach the network, give the user the command to run in their own terminal. ### 4. Save a note so future chats use Tella Future chats won't know about Tella unless they're told. The note: ```text theme={"system"} I record and edit videos in Tella. When I ask about my videos, recordings, transcripts, or edits, use the Tella tools (https://api.tella.com/mcp) instead of guessing. Ask before you edit, delete, publish, or share a video, or spend credits. ``` * **Claude Code:** append it to `~/.claude/CLAUDE.md` (the user-level file, not one in a repo). * **Codex:** append it to `~/.codex/AGENTS.md`. * **Claude and ChatGPT apps:** save it in your built-in memory if you have one. Also show it in a single code block, word for word, and say where to paste it: * **Claude:** click your name in the bottom left, then **Settings** → **Account**, and paste it into **Instructions for Claude**. * **ChatGPT:** click your photo or initials in the bottom left, then **Personalization**, scroll to **Custom instructions**, and paste it there. * **Other apps:** find where its custom instructions live; don't guess. Add to what's already there; don't replace or reword the user's other instructions. If the note is already there, leave it as it is. ### 5. Show one real result Prove the setup works on the user's own videos. **Message 3:** in one short message, say what you set up (for example "Tella's editing skills are installed and new chats will know to use Tella", or the note to paste in the Claude and ChatGPT apps), then show their three latest videos as choices. `list_videos` returns the most recently updated first. Ask which one to summarize, and wait. **Message 4:** call `get_video` with `includeTranscript` and `includeChapters` on the video they pick, and give a short summary of what it covers. Don't edit it. Then finish with step 6 in the same message. **If they have no videos yet**, message 3 offers to make their first one instead. If they agree, create a video with `create_video`, give them the link from `get_recording_link`, and ask them to tell you when they've finished recording. Then summarize it with `get_video` and `includeTranscript` as message 4; if the transcript isn't there yet, it's still processing, so wait a minute and try again. If they don't want to record now, finish with step 6. ### 6. Wrap up At the end of message 4, say in one line what's set up, then offer two prompts they can try next, for example: * "Find the video where I talk about pricing and cut the part where I misspoke." * "Remove the filler words and long pauses from my latest video." ### Sign the user up Every new account starts with a 7-day free trial, with no credit card. * **If you can run commands** (Claude Code, Codex, Cursor): ask for the email address they want to use and sign them up yourself with Tella's agent registration. Follow [https://www.tella.com/auth.md](https://www.tella.com/auth.md) step by step: you register with their email, give them the claim link it returns, and they sign up on that page and read you the code it shows. The claim code isn't a password, so it's fine for them to read it to you. Once the claim completes, Tella creates their account and a workspace. Then connect Tella in your client as in step 1: they sign in with the account they just created. * **Anywhere else** (the Claude and ChatGPT apps): send them to [sign up for Tella](https://www.tella.tv/api/signup?utm_source=ai-agent), ask them to come back once they have an account, and then connect Tella as in step 1. Don't ask for their email. Never ask for the password they chose. ## Questions agents ask ### What is the Tella MCP server URL? `https://api.tella.com/mcp`. It's a hosted, remote MCP server over Streamable HTTP with OAuth sign-in, so most clients connect with just the URL. ### How do I connect Claude or ChatGPT to Tella? Use the official app: [Tella in Claude's Connector Directory](https://claude.ai/directory/tella) or [Tella in ChatGPT](https://chatgpt.com/plugins/plugin_asdk_app_6a7026f78434819186579d93d20ab38b?open_in_app). Select **Connect** and sign in to Tella. No commands or API key needed. ### How do I add Tella to Claude Code, Codex, or Cursor? Claude Code: `claude mcp add --transport http --scope user tella https://api.tella.com/mcp`, then `/mcp` to sign in. Codex: add `[mcp_servers.tella]` with `url = "https://api.tella.com/mcp"` to `~/.codex/config.toml`, run `codex mcp login tella` in your terminal, and restart Codex. Cursor and other clients: see the [MCP server guide](/docs/mcp-server). ### Can my agent sign me up for Tella? Yes. An agent that can run commands follows [https://www.tella.com/auth.md](https://www.tella.com/auth.md): you open the link it gives you, sign up, and read it the code on the page. Tella then creates your account and workspace with a 7-day free trial, and the agent can start working right away. In the Claude and ChatGPT apps, [sign up yourself](https://www.tella.tv/api/signup?utm_source=ai-agent) and then connect. ### Can my agent upgrade my plan or buy credits? It can create a Stripe Checkout link with [`create_checkout_link`](/docs/mcp-tools/billing). You pay on Stripe's page without signing in to Tella, and the plan or credits apply as soon as the payment goes through. Only a workspace owner can buy, and only a workspace without a paid plan can buy a plan; change an existing plan on the [billing page](https://www.tella.tv/settings/billing). ChatGPT doesn't offer this tool. ### Does my agent need an API key? No. Chat apps and coding agents sign in through the browser. Use an [API key](/docs/help/integrations/api-keys) only for scripts, CI, or clients that can't open a browser. ## Reference ### Authentication Every Tella account belongs to a person. They can sign up themselves, or an agent can sign them up (see [Sign the user up](#sign-the-user-up)). The agent authenticates in one of three ways: * **OAuth** (recommended for chat assistants): when the agent's client connects to the MCP server, a browser opens, you sign in to Tella, and you pick a workspace (or your default one is used). Nothing to copy. * **API key** (for clients that can't open a browser, scripts, and CI): create one under **Settings → API Keys** and pass it as a Bearer token. See [Create and manage API keys](/docs/help/integrations/api-keys). * **Agent registration** (for agents that can run commands, including for someone with no Tella account yet): follow [https://www.tella.com/auth.md](https://www.tella.com/auth.md). The person claims the registration in their browser, and the agent exchanges it for short-lived access tokens it sends as a Bearer token. If they have no account, Tella creates one, plus a workspace. See [WorkOS access tokens](/docs/authentication#workos-access-tokens). > [!NOTE] > > One connection sees one workspace. OAuth binds the agent to the workspace you chose; an API key belongs to the workspace it was created in. The agent has exactly the signed-in user's permissions: it can read what they can see and edit what they can edit. ### What the MCP server covers The server covers the library and the editor: find videos, read transcripts and timelines, cut clips, add zooms, layouts, B-roll, text and sound, upload new material, send a recording link, and export finished files. Setup for every client and the full tool reference are in the [MCP server guide](/docs/mcp-server). ### Tella docs for agents * **Markdown:** every page has a markdown version. Append `.md` to any URL, such as `https://www.tella.com/docs/mcp-server.md`. * **llms.txt:** the index is `https://www.tella.com/docs/llms.txt`, and every page in one file is `https://www.tella.com/docs/llms-full.txt`. * **Docs MCP server:** for structured search over the docs from any MCP client, `https://www.tella.com/docs/mcp`. ### Skills The official Tella skills (step 3) drive the MCP server. Once installed, ask for an edit directly: `/tella Tighten the pacing of my latest video and make it 9:16 for mobile`. The [Skills directory](https://www.tella.com/skills) collects open-source community workflows for editing local video files: cutting dead air, adding zooms, finding B-roll, and publishing your latest Tella recording to YouTube. They run on files on your machine rather than through the MCP server, so they don't need a Tella account. # Get the account Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/account/get-the-account /openapi.json get /v1/account The signed-in user, their workspace and role in it, the workspace's plan (and when a trial ends) and its agent credits: the balance, the monthly allowance and the packages an owner can buy. Use it to tell when a request needs a paid plan or more credits. # List a video's agent chats Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/agent-chats/list-a-videos-agent-chats /openapi.json get /v1/agent-chats The editor agent chats in a video, most recently active first, each with its `status` and `lastReply`. Poll it to follow a chat you started: `idle` means its turn ended. # Start an agent chat Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/agent-chats/start-an-agent-chat /openapi.json post /v1/agent-chats Start a chat with Tella's editor agent in a video you can edit, as if you had typed `prompt` in its agent chat; without `videoId` it first makes a new, empty video. The agent works in the background and spends the workspace's AI Credits. Follow it with `GET /v1/agent-chats?videoId=`. # Get video analytics Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/analytics/get-video-analytics /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/analytics Viewing analytics for one video: plays, unique sessions, watch time, plays per day, retention per one-percent slice, geography, referrers, UTM traffic sources, and call-to-action clicks. Available to the video's creator, its collaborators, and workspace members it is shared with. Dates are whole UTC days; omit both for all time. # Get workspace analytics Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/analytics/get-workspace-analytics /openapi.json get /v1/analytics Viewing analytics aggregated across videos: by default every video shared with the workspace, or with scope=mine only the videos you created. Includes the same summary, plays per day, retention, geography and referrer breakdowns as a single video, plus the videos ranked by plays. Only topVideos is paginated; pass pagination.nextCursor as cursor for the next page. Dates are whole UTC days; omit both for all time. # Report an Auto Capture take Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/auto-capture/report-an-auto-capture-take /openapi.json post /v1/auto-captures/{sourceId}/reports Tell Tella that a take went wrong, so the cause gets found and fixed in Auto Capture. That covers what it filmed (the wrong page or feature, a step that was asked for missed or cut off, stopping short of the result) and how the recording came out (choppy playback, frozen or black frames, a cursor that doesn't match what happened). Reporting changes nothing on the take, starts nothing and costs nothing; to get a better take, revise it over the MCP server. A take can be reported more than once, by the person who started it or anyone in the workspace it was made in. A take that is still running can't be reported (400). Any other source, or a take you can't see, answers 404. # List available backgrounds Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/backgrounds/list-available-backgrounds /openapi.json get /v1/backgrounds Returns personal uploads, workspace uploads, and Tella's default image and animated backgrounds in named categories. Each item includes a preview URL and a background value that can be passed directly to the clip update endpoint. # Add a blur to a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/add-a-blur-to-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/blurs Adds a blur mask to a clip. Targets the footage in the clip's Screen slot at startTimeMs: the screen recording, or b-roll media a layout puts there. # Add a clip from an uploaded source Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/add-a-clip-from-an-uploaded-source /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips Add a new clip to a video. Create a source via `POST /v1/sources`, PUT the bytes, then pass the returned `sourceId` here. # Add a highlight to a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/add-a-highlight-to-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/highlights Adds a highlight mask to a clip. Targets the footage in the clip's Screen slot at startTimeMs: the screen recording, or b-roll media a layout puts there. # Add a layout to a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/add-a-layout-to-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/layouts Adds a layout to a clip. Provide both startTimeMs and durationMs for a time-ranged layout, or omit both for a clip-spanning layout. # Add a shape overlay to a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/add-a-shape-overlay-to-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/shape-overlays Adds a square, circle, triangle, diamond, star, hexagon or arrow on top of a clip, filled with any clip background and with an optional border and shadow. # Add a sound effect to a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/add-a-sound-effect-to-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/sound-effects Adds a sound effect to a clip from Tella's curated catalog (`presetId`) or your own audio (`sourceId`). # Add a text overlay to a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/add-a-text-overlay-to-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/text-overlays Adds a text overlay to a clip. Nothing needs uploading — pass the copy directly. Font, color, position and size all fall back to the editor's defaults. # Add a zoom to a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/add-a-zoom-to-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/zooms Adds a zoom to the footage in the clip's Screen slot at startTimeMs — the screen recording, or b-roll media a layout puts there (the camera is unaffected). Use `manualZoom` with a `focusPoint`, or `trackingZoom` to follow the cursor. # Add an overlay to a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/add-an-overlay-to-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/overlays Adds an image or video overlay to a clip. Upload the bytes via `POST /v1/sources` (`kind: image` or `kind: video`) and pass the `sourceId`; the overlay type follows the source's kind. # Auto-crop a clip's screen recording Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/auto-crop-a-clips-screen-recording /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/auto-crop Detects the visible content at a frame and applies the recommended crop to the clip's screen recording. The frame time uses the clip playback timeline, with cuts already removed. Existing masks and custom-layout geometry are adjusted with the crop. # Auto-generate zooms from mouse activity Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/auto-generate-zooms-from-mouse-activity /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/zooms/auto Generates tracking zooms from the mouse clicks in the clip's screen recording — the API twin of the editor's "Generate zooms". Every click opens a zoom window; nearby windows are merged. Requires the clip to contain a screen recording; returns an empty list when it has no usable mouse clicks. # Correct transcript words Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/correct-transcript-words /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/transcript/words Correct what a clip's transcript says, one or more words at a time (at most 100 per request). Each edit addresses a word by its transcript `index` and sets either `text` (the corrected wording, which also unhides the word) or `hidden` (whether the word appears in captions and subtitles). Edits change the transcript, captions and subtitles only — never the audio or the clip's timing; use cut-by-transcript to remove spoken words from the video. Visibility and wording are independent: hiding a word preserves any correction made to it. The whole batch is applied atomically as a single transaction, so a request never changes only some of its words. A `500` does not by itself mean nothing changed — the words can land and a later step of the commit still fail — so treat the outcome as either fully applied or not applied at all. Every edit assigns a word outright, so re-sending the identical request is safe and settles it. # Cut clip ranges by transcript word indices Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/cut-clip-ranges-by-transcript-word-indices /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/cut-by-transcript Cut one or more ranges from a clip by referencing word indices in the transcript. The server reads each word's exact `startTimeMs` / `endTimeMs` and merges the resulting cuts — no padding is applied to word boundaries. Zooms, blurs, highlights and overlays (text, images, media, sound effects) placed entirely on footage the cut removes are deleted with it; clearing the cuts later does not bring them back. # Cut one or more time ranges from a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/cut-one-or-more-time-ranges-from-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/cut Cut one or more time ranges from a clip in a single request. Pass `cuts: [{fromMs, toMs}, ...]` for multiple ranges or the legacy `fromMs`/`toMs` pair for a single range. Overlapping or adjacent ranges are merged into the clip's existing cuts. Zooms, blurs, highlights and overlays (text, images, media, sound effects) placed entirely on footage the cut removes are deleted with it; clearing the cuts later does not bring them back. To clear all cuts, call updateClip with cuts: []. # Delete a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/delete-a-clip /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId} Removes a clip from its video. The underlying recording is preserved. # Delete a text preset Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/delete-a-text-preset /openapi.json delete /v1/text-presets/{presetId} Deletes one of the authenticated user's saved text presets. Built-in `default:` presets can't be deleted. Text overlays already styled with the preset keep their look. # Duplicate a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/duplicate-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/duplicate Duplicates an existing clip in its video. By default the new clip is inserted right after the source. # Get a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/get-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId} Returns a single clip in a video. # Get a clip storyboard Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/get-a-clip-storyboard /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/storyboard Returns a signed 4x4 WebP storyboard whose 16 tiles are sampled evenly across the requested window (`durationMs`/16 apart; every 5 seconds for the default 80s window) from a rendered clip, including its layouts, b-roll, zooms, and masks. `startTimeMs` is on the clip's playback timeline (cuts applied). Only `startTimeMs` and `durationMs` control the storyboard; tile count, dimensions, and format are fixed. By default returns a 302 redirect — set `?response=json` to get `{url, columns, rows, intervalMs}` JSON instead. # Get a clip thumbnail or animated preview Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/get-a-clip-thumbnail-or-animated-preview /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/thumbnail Returns a signed CDN URL for a still image (jpg/png/webp) or animated preview (gif/mp4) of a clip — the rendered composite with the clip's layouts, zooms, and masks. By default returns a 302 redirect to the URL — set `?response=json` to get `{url}` JSON instead. `startTimeMs` is on the clip's playback timeline (cuts applied). `durationMs` only applies to gif/mp4. # Get a source thumbnail or animated preview Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/get-a-source-thumbnail-or-animated-preview /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/sources/{sourceId}/thumbnail Get a thumbnail of a source. If you pass `width`/`height`, the aspect ratio must match the source's native ratio. Omit both to default to the source's native size. # Get audio levels in a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/get-audio-levels-in-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/audio-levels Returns how loud a clip's voice track is over a stretch of its playback timeline (cuts applied, the same times as the transcript and silences endpoints): the peak level in dBFS for each step (0 is full scale; speech is usually above about -30, room tone well below -40; null where there is no audio). Levels come from stored waveform buckets about 5 ms long (`resolutionMs`), so a step right next to a cut can include a little of the cut audio. Use it to check what is left at a cut or to find a breath, click or filler the transcript misses. # Get clip color filters Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/get-clip-color-filters /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/filters Get the editor's Style → Filters settings for a clip's camera and screen recordings, including presets, sliders and LUTs. # Get clip transcript Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/get-clip-transcript /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/transcript Returns the words spoken in a clip with cuts applied — what viewers actually hear. Times are in ms relative to the clip's playback start. Word indices are stable identifiers for cut-by-transcript; they don't shift when cuts change. Pass `startTimeMs`/`endTimeMs` to read a long clip in windows; a word belongs to the window its start time falls in. Pass `view=text` for every word with its index as plain text, one sentence per line, about a seventh of the size: read a whole long clip that way (to find retakes, repeats or where something is said), then the words view for a stretch where you need exact times. `view=sentences` gives one row per sentence instead. Pass `includeCut=true` to also get the words cuts removed, with their times in the source recording. Answers 503 while a clip that was just recorded is still being transcribed; retry after about 30 seconds. # Get silent ranges in a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/get-silent-ranges-in-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/silences Returns silent ranges in a clip's audio, in ms on the clip's playback timeline (cuts applied) — pass ranges directly to the cut endpoint. Silences already removed by cuts are not reported. # Get the audio waveform JSON for a source Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/get-the-audio-waveform-json-for-a-source /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/sources/{sourceId}/waveform Returns the audio waveform JSON for a source in BBC audiowaveform format. Use the `data` array to render a custom waveform visualization. # List blurs on a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-blurs-on-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/blurs Returns the blur masks on a clip. # List clips for a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-clips-for-a-video /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips Returns the clips of a video in playback order. # List faces in a clip's camera Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-faces-in-a-clips-camera /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/camera-faces Returns where the presenter's face is in the clip's camera recording, one sample per keyframe (usually 1-2 s apart), mapped onto the clip's playback timeline (cuts applied). Boxes are percentages of the camera frame, not of the video canvas: where the camera sits on the canvas depends on the clip's layouts. Keyframes in cut-out footage are dropped. Returns an empty list when the clip has no camera or its recording has no face detections yet. Pass `startTimeMs`/`endTimeMs` to read a window; a window returns the same samples the whole-clip response has in that range. # List highlights on a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-highlights-on-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/highlights Returns the highlight masks on a clip. # List key presses on a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-key-presses-on-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/key-events Returns the keys pressed during the clip's screen recording, mapped onto the clip's playback timeline (cuts applied): each key going down or up with the modifiers held (such as command+C), and each change in held modifiers. Keys typed into Tella's own window are left out, and only the key's label is returned, never the typed characters. Key presses can reveal what was typed, so only the video's creator and editors can read them. Only Mac app recordings capture the keyboard; other clips return an empty list. Pass `startTimeMs`/`endTimeMs` to read a window. # List layouts on a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-layouts-on-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/layouts Returns the layouts (sections) attached to a clip. # List mouse events on a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-mouse-events-on-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/mouse-events Returns the cursor path and clicks recorded with the clip's screen recording, mapped onto the clip's playback timeline (cuts applied). Positions are percentages of the screen recording's dimensions — the same coordinate space as zoom focus points. Events during cut-out footage are dropped, and move events are sampled (default one per 100ms, `intervalMs=0` for every event). Use `types=clicks` to return only clicks. Returns an empty list when the recording has no mouse data (camera-only clips, uploads, older recorder versions). Pass `startTimeMs`/`endTimeMs` to read a long recording in windows; a window returns the same events the whole-clip response has in that range. # List overlays on a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-overlays-on-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/overlays Returns the image and video overlays on a clip. # List shape overlays on a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-shape-overlays-on-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/shape-overlays Returns the shape overlays (squares, circles, stars…) on a clip. # List sound effects on a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-sound-effects-on-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/sound-effects Returns the sound effects (audio overlays) on a clip. # List sources for a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-sources-for-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/sources Returns the underlying sources used by a clip's layers, each with the volume it plays at in this clip. # List text overlays on a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-text-overlays-on-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/text-overlays Returns the text overlays on a clip. # List text presets Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-text-presets /openapi.json get /v1/text-presets Returns Tella's built-in text styles and the authenticated user's saved text presets — the tiles the editor's Text panel shows. Pass a presetId as `presetId` when adding or updating a text overlay to style it in one call; `fontSizeScale` is relative to the editor's default size so a preset reads the same on every canvas. # List zooms on a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/list-zooms-on-a-clip /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/zooms Returns the zoom effects on a clip. # Remove a blur Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/remove-a-blur /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/blurs/{maskId} Removes a blur mask from a clip. # Remove a highlight Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/remove-a-highlight /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/highlights/{maskId} Removes a highlight mask from a clip. # Remove a layout Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/remove-a-layout /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/layouts/{layoutId} Removes a layout from a clip. # Remove a shape overlay Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/remove-a-shape-overlay /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/shape-overlays/{shapeOverlayId} Removes a shape overlay from a clip. # Remove a sound effect Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/remove-a-sound-effect /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/sound-effects/{soundEffectId} Removes a sound effect from a clip. # Remove a text overlay Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/remove-a-text-overlay /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/text-overlays/{textOverlayId} Removes a text overlay from a clip. # Remove a zoom Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/remove-a-zoom /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/zooms/{zoomId} Removes a zoom effect from a clip. # Remove an overlay Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/remove-an-overlay /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/overlays/{overlayId} Removes an image or video overlay from a clip. # Remove filler words from a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/remove-filler-words-from-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/remove-fillers Detects filler words ('um', 'uh', 'hmm', etc.) and adds cuts that bracket each filler. New cuts are merged with any existing cuts. Returns the updated clip. # Remove silences from a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/remove-silences-from-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/remove-silences Detects silent pauses in the clip's audio and adds cuts that remove them, like the editor's Remove silences tool. `mode` controls aggressiveness: natural cuts pauses longer than 800ms, fast longer than 500ms, faster longer than 300ms (default natural). New cuts are merged with any existing cuts. Returns the updated clip. # Reorder a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/reorder-a-clip /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/reorder Moves a clip to a new position within its video. Other clips are renumbered to keep ordering contiguous. # Save a text preset Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/save-a-text-preset /openapi.json post /v1/text-presets Saves a personal text preset, like the editor's "Save style" on a text overlay. The style starts from an existing text overlay when `videoId` and `textOverlayId` are given (keeping a custom font and reading the size relative to that video's canvas), else from the editor's default text look; every style field sent alongside overrides it. The preset then appears in GET /v1/text-presets and in the editor's Text panel. # Set clip color filters Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/set-clip-color-filters /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/filters Grade camera, screen or both. Only supplied fields change. A preset replaces the entire filter first. Pass null to remove a filter. Apply to each clip to grade a whole video, and check the result with a clip frame preview. # Split a clip in two Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/split-a-clip-in-two /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/split Split a clip in two at a time on its playback timeline, like the editor's split at the playhead. The clip keeps everything before `atMs`, and a new clip inserted right after it continues from there. Each cut, layout, zoom, blur, highlight and overlay goes to the part it sits on. One that spans `atMs` is split too: each part keeps its side, and a video, audio or sound effect overlay keeps playing in the second clip from where the first stopped. Both parts must play for at least 200 ms. Returns both clips in playback order; the first keeps the original clip's id. # Update a blur Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/update-a-blur /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/blurs/{maskId} Update a blur mask's timing, position, or size. Only the fields you send are changed. # Update a clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/update-a-clip /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId} Update a clip's name, ordering, cuts, background, transition, audio, or frame styling (corner rounding and border style). At least one field must be provided. # Update a highlight Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/update-a-highlight /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/highlights/{maskId} Update a highlight mask's timing, position, or size. Only the fields you send are changed. # Update a layout Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/update-a-layout /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/layouts/{layoutId} Update a layout's shape, timing, transition style, or media. `transitionStyle` and `media` are only valid on time-ranged layouts, not on the base (clip-spanning) layout. Updating the base layout also changes every layout that reports `followsBase: true`. # Update a shape overlay Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/update-a-shape-overlay /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/shape-overlays/{shapeOverlayId} Update a shape overlay's outline, fill, corners, border, shadow, timing, position, size, animation, depth or stacking order. Only the fields you send are changed. # Update a sound effect Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/update-a-sound-effect /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/sound-effects/{soundEffectId} Update a sound effect's name, timing, or volume. Only the fields you send are changed. # Update a text overlay Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/update-a-text-overlay /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/text-overlays/{textOverlayId} Update a text overlay's copy, font, color, timing, position, or dimensions. Only the fields you send are changed. # Update a zoom Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/update-a-zoom /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/zooms/{zoomId} Update a zoom's type, timing, focus point, or scale. Only the fields you send are changed. # Update an overlay Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/clips/update-an-overlay /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/overlays/{overlayId} Update an overlay's name, timing, position, or dimensions. Only the fields you send are changed. # Add a source to the library Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/library/add-a-source-to-the-library /openapi.json post /v1/library Saves an uploaded source to the library so it can be listed and reused later, both here and in the editor's media panels. Create the source via `POST /v1/sources` and upload the bytes first, then pass its `sourceId`. Without this a source is only reachable through the clips that already reference it. To bring in an image you saved in a connected Pinterest, Are.na or mymind account instead, pass `from` with the service and `sourceId` set to the item's `id` from `GET /v1/library?scope=`; Tella copies the image into your `private` library (default), the `workspace` library, or with `scope: "video"` the library of the video named by `videoId`. Only images can be brought in: Pinterest image pins, Are.na image blocks, and mymind images or the screenshot mymind took of a saved page. # Capture a web page or social post Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/library/capture-a-web-page-or-social-post /openapi.json post /v1/library/screenshots Deprecated: use `POST /v1/library/imports`, which takes the same `url` and `scroll` and also imports video links. Captures a public web page or a single post on X, Instagram, LinkedIn or TikTok and saves it to the caller's private library. Pages are captured above the fold; social posts are cropped to their embed card. Set scroll=true to record a scrolling web page as video (ignored for social posts). Returns a finished image or video library item with a sourceId for overlays or layout media. Unlike AI generation, capture completes in this request, with no polling; allow up to two minutes. Private pages and social profiles/feeds are not supported. Use an Idempotency-Key when retrying to avoid duplicate captures. # Generate media with AI Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/library/generate-media-with-ai /openapi.json post /v1/library/generations Starts generating an image, a short video clip or a sound effect from a text prompt with the same AI generators the editor's media panels use. Generation is asynchronous: the response is a `generation` whose `id` is the private library item the result is saved as. Poll `GET /v1/library/generations/{id}` every few seconds (images usually take 30-90 seconds, sound effects 10-30, video several minutes) until `status` is `completed`, then pass `item.sourceId` anywhere a source is accepted — `POST /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/overlays` for an image or video overlay, `POST /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/layouts` with `media` for b-roll, `POST /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/sound-effects` for a sound effect. The finished item also appears in `GET /v1/library?scope=private`. Each generation counts against the caller's weekly AI generation allowance, which depends on the plan; exceeding it answers 403 with the reset time. A video is also charged in the workspace's AI Credits and is refused with a 403 while the balance is empty. # Get a generation's status Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/library/get-a-generations-status /openapi.json get /v1/library/generations/{id} Returns the current status of a generation started with `POST /v1/library/generations`. Poll until `status` is `completed` (then `item` holds the finished library item) or `failed` (then `error` says why; start a new generation). # Get an import's status Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/library/get-an-imports-status /openapi.json get /v1/library/imports/{id} Returns the status of an import started with `POST /v1/library/imports`. Pass the same `videoId` it was started with. Poll until `status` is `completed` (then `item` holds the library item) or `failed` (then `error` says why; start a new import to retry). # Import media from a URL Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/library/import-media-from-a-url /openapi.json post /v1/library/imports Brings media into Tella from a link. A public web page is captured above the fold at 1920×1080 (or, with `scroll=true`, recorded scrolling as video); a single post on X, Instagram, LinkedIn or TikTok is cropped to its embed card. These finish in this request (allow up to two minutes) and answer 201 with `status: completed`. A link to a single video is downloaded in the background and answers 202 with `status: running`: poll `GET /v1/library/imports/{id}?videoId=…` every 5-10 seconds until it is `completed` or `failed`. Video links need `videoId` and land in that video's library; everything else lands in your private library unless you pass `videoId`. Place `item.sourceId` as an overlay or layout media. Only import media you own or have the rights to use. Private pages, social profiles and feeds, and private, members-only or age-restricted videos are not supported. Use an Idempotency-Key when retrying to avoid duplicate imports. # List library items Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/library/list-library-items /openapi.json get /v1/library Returns a page of reusable media saved to the library — images, videos, screenshots, sound effects, music and LUTs — for one scope. Items added through the API include a `sourceId` you can pass anywhere a source is accepted, including images. Editor-added images, screenshots, music and LUTs expose a hosted `url` instead. URL captures from `POST /v1/library/screenshots` are placeable `image` or `video` items. Media still being generated in the editor is omitted. `scope=default` returns Tella's curated sound effect and background music catalogs instead of stored media: those items carry a `presetId` to place them with (`sound-effect` items via `POST /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/sound-effects`, `music` items via `PUT /v1/videos/{id}/background-music`), a `category`, and a publicly fetchable `url` for previewing, and arrive as a single page; filter with `type=sound-effect` or `type=music`, or omit `type` for both. Tella's default backgrounds are not part of this catalog — they are placed as a background rather than as a source, and are listed by `GET /v1/backgrounds`. `scope=pinterest`, `scope=arena` and `scope=mymind` list the images you saved in that service once you connect it under Settings → Connections: your newest saves, or matches for `query`, as one page. Their `id` is the service's own ID; bring one into Tella with `POST /v1/library` and `from` before placing it. A service you haven't connected returns 503 `unavailable`. # Remove a library item Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/library/remove-a-library-item /openapi.json delete /v1/library/{id} Removes an item from the library. This removes the library entry only — clips already using the underlying source keep working. # Create a playlist group Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlist-groups/create-a-playlist-group /openapi.json post /v1/playlist-groups Create a sidebar group to organize playlists into. Use the groupId field on PATCH /v1/playlists/{id} to move playlists into it. # Delete a playlist group Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlist-groups/delete-a-playlist-group /openapi.json delete /v1/playlist-groups/{id} Delete a playlist group. Playlists in the group are not deleted, they just become ungrouped. # List playlist groups Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlist-groups/list-playlist-groups /openapi.json get /v1/playlist-groups Returns the sidebar playlist groups for the authenticated user, in sidebar order. Personal groups are only visible to you; org groups are shared with the whole workspace. # Rename or reorder a playlist group Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlist-groups/rename-or-reorder-a-playlist-group /openapi.json patch /v1/playlist-groups/{id} Rename a playlist group and/or move it to a position in its sidebar section (0 = top) # Add a video to a playlist Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlists/add-a-video-to-a-playlist /openapi.json post /v1/playlists/{id}/videos Adds an existing video to the specified playlist # Create a new playlist Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlists/create-a-new-playlist /openapi.json post /v1/playlists Create a new playlist for the authenticated user # Delete a playlist Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlists/delete-a-playlist /openapi.json delete /v1/playlists/{id} Permanently delete a playlist. Videos in the playlist are not deleted. # Get playlist details Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlists/get-playlist-details /openapi.json get /v1/playlists/{id} Returns detailed information about a playlist including its videos # List all playlists Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlists/list-all-playlists /openapi.json get /v1/playlists Returns a list of all playlists for the authenticated user # Playlist created Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlists/playlist-created /webhooks.json webhook playlist.created Triggered when a new playlist is created in your workspace. # Remove a video from a playlist Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlists/remove-a-video-from-a-playlist /openapi.json delete /v1/playlists/{id}/videos/{videoId} Removes a video from the specified playlist. The video itself is not deleted. # Update a playlist Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlists/update-a-playlist /openapi.json patch /v1/playlists/{id} Update a playlist's name and/or description # Video added to playlist Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/playlists/video-added-to-playlist /webhooks.json webhook playlist.video_added Triggered when a video is added to a playlist. # Create a source upload (video, audio, image, or LUT) Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/sources/create-a-source-upload-video-audio-image-or-lut /openapi.json post /v1/sources Returns a `sourceId` and a pre-signed S3 URL. PUT the file bytes to `uploadUrl`, then reference `sourceId` from clips, layouts (b-roll media), overlays, or backgrounds. For a 3D .cube LUT use `kind: "lut"`, omit dimensions and duration, upload unchanged, then save it with `POST /v1/library` and apply the returned item id with `PATCH /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/filters`. Use `kind: "image"` for images (no `duration`); Tella hosts the bytes for rendering, so you never deal with raw image URLs. To reuse an uploaded source in other videos, save it to the workspace library with `POST /v1/library` (`scope: "workspace"`); `GET /v1/library` then finds it from any video. # Get a source's processing status Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/sources/get-a-sources-processing-status /openapi.json get /v1/sources/{sourceId} Returns whether a source from `POST /v1/sources` is ready to use, however it was placed (clip, b-roll, overlay, background, background music or sound effect). Poll it after placing a newly uploaded source: while it is `processing`, frames and previews of videos that use it answer not-ready instead of rendering. # Get a streaming upload storyboard Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/sources/get-a-streaming-upload-storyboard /openapi.json get /v1/sources/{sourceId}/storyboard Returns a signed 4x4 WebP storyboard whose 16 tiles are sampled evenly across the requested window (`durationMs`/16 apart; every 5 seconds for the default 80s window) from a streaming upload source owned by the caller or their workspace. `startTimeMs` is relative to the source. Only `startTimeMs` and `durationMs` control the storyboard; tile count, dimensions, and format are fixed. By default returns a 302 redirect — set `?response=json` to get `{url, columns, rows, intervalMs}` JSON instead. # Get a thumbnail of a source on no clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/sources/get-a-thumbnail-of-a-source-on-no-clip /openapi.json get /v1/sources/{sourceId}/thumbnail Get a thumbnail or animated preview of a streaming upload source owned by the caller or their workspace, without a video or clip — for a source that isn't on any clip yet. `startTimeMs` is relative to the source. If you pass `width`/`height`, the aspect ratio must match the source's native ratio. Omit both to default to the source's native size. By default returns a 302 redirect — set `?response=json` to get `{url}` JSON instead. # Get the audio waveform JSON for a source on no clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/sources/get-the-audio-waveform-json-for-a-source-on-no-clip /openapi.json get /v1/sources/{sourceId}/waveform Returns the audio waveform JSON, in BBC audiowaveform format, for a streaming upload source owned by the caller or their workspace, without a video or clip — for a source that isn't on any clip yet. # Get the beats of an audio or video source Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/sources/get-the-beats-of-an-audio-or-video-source /openapi.json get /v1/sources/{sourceId}/beats Returns the tempo, every beat and every bar's first beat (downbeat) of an audio or video source owned by the caller or their workspace, in ms of source time. Each source is analyzed once and cached; the first request can take a few seconds, and answers 503 `unavailable` if the analysis is still running, so retry. # Get the transcript of a source on no clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/sources/get-the-transcript-of-a-source-on-no-clip /openapi.json get /v1/sources/{sourceId}/transcript Returns the words spoken in a streaming upload source owned by the caller or their workspace, without a video or clip: for a source that isn't on any clip yet, such as an imported video. Times are in ms of source time and no cuts apply. Answers 503 while the source is still being transcribed. Takes the same `startTimeMs`/`endTimeMs` window and `view=sentences` or `view=text` as the clip transcript. # Add a tag to a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tags/add-a-tag-to-a-video /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/tags Tag a video. Requires edit access to the video. Adding a private tag only affects the authenticated user's library. # Create a new tag Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tags/create-a-new-tag /openapi.json post /v1/tags Create a workspace or private tag. When no color is given, one is derived deterministically from the name. # Delete a tag Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tags/delete-a-tag /openapi.json delete /v1/tags/{id} Permanently delete a tag and remove it from all videos. Private tags can only be deleted by their creator. # List a video's tags Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tags/list-a-videos-tags /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/tags Returns the tags on a video that are visible to the authenticated user # List all tags Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tags/list-all-tags /openapi.json get /v1/tags Returns all tags visible to the authenticated user: the workspace's shared tags plus the user's private tags # Remove a tag from a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tags/remove-a-tag-from-a-video /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/tags/{tagId} Untag a video. Requires edit access to the video. Private tags can only be removed by their owner. # Update a tag Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tags/update-a-tag /openapi.json patch /v1/tags/{id} Update a tag's name, color and/or description. Private tags can only be updated by their creator. # Add a Tella Motion clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/add-a-tella-motion-clip /openapi.json post /v1/motion/clips Adds a clip at the end of a video that plays a blank Tella Motion document of its own, or your document `documentId` that no video plays yet, and returns the clip and its document. With `documentId` and no `videoId`, it makes a new video for the document, as large as its canvas, and returns its `videoId` and `editUrl`. Build what it shows with `POST /v1/motion/documents/{id}/commands`. The clip routes that edit layouts, cuts, zooms, overlays or the transcript refuse a Tella Motion clip; it can still be renamed, moved and deleted. # Create a Tella Motion document Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/create-a-tella-motion-document /openapi.json post /v1/motion/documents Creates a blank document, 10 s long (the `canvas.set` op changes that). With `videoId` it is the video's, as large as the video unless sized, for an overlay or b-roll you build in place. Without it the document is yours and in no video yet (1920×1080 unless sized); the first video it is placed in takes it over. Edit it with `POST /v1/motion/documents/{id}/commands`, then show it with `POST /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/overlays` (`motionDocumentId`) or a layout's `media: {type: "motion", documentId}`. It plays there live, so later edits show in the video as you make them. # Download a Tella Motion document Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/download-a-tella-motion-document /openapi.json get /v1/motion/documents/{id}/download Returns the whole stored document and its `seq`. Large: pull out what you need rather than reading it in full. Its shape is `GET /v1/motion/schema?schema=document`. # Duplicate a Tella Motion document Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/duplicate-a-tella-motion-document /openapi.json post /v1/motion/documents/{id}/duplicate Copies a document under the same owner and optionally edits the copy in the same request with `commands`. Use it to reuse a design with other content, such as the same title card with another heading. The copy is independent of the original. # Edit a Tella Motion document Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/edit-a-tella-motion-document /openapi.json post /v1/motion/documents/{id}/commands Applies a batch of ops and the editor's own commands as one transaction and one undo step; nothing applies unless everything does. Prefer a command for anything the editor does (titles, shapes, media, keyframes and easing, effects, masks, text animation, fades), since it keeps the editor's conventions; use ops (`node.patch`, `node.move`, `node.insert`, …) for the rest. `GET /v1/motion/schema?schema=edits&type=…` gives each one's fields. Pass `baseRevision` to refuse the batch with 409 if the document changed since you read it, and `dryRun` to check it without saving. # Get a frame or preview of a Tella Motion document Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/get-a-frame-or-preview-of-a-tella-motion-document /openapi.json get /v1/motion/documents/{id}/thumbnail Returns a signed CDN URL for a still image (jpg/png/webp) or animated preview (gif/mp4) of the document on its own, at a time on its own clock: any document you can edit, also one no video plays yet. Width and height follow the document's canvas; a time at or past its end shows its end. By default returns a 302 redirect — set `?response=json` to get `{url}` JSON instead. # Get a node's stored fields Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/get-a-nodes-stored-fields /openapi.json get /v1/motion/documents/{id}/nodes/raw Returns one node with every stored field, its window, the composition it sits in and, for an instance, the outline of the composition it opens. Use it with ops such as `node.patch`; for the inspector's view with units and keyframes use `GET /v1/motion/documents/{id}/nodes`. # Get a Tella Motion JSON schema Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/get-a-tella-motion-json-schema /openapi.json get /v1/motion/schema Returns the JSON schema of a document (`schema=document`), of every edit a commands batch takes (`schema=edits`), or of one op or command (`schema=edits&type=node.patch`). # Inspect a composition Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/inspect-a-composition /openapi.json get /v1/motion/documents/{id}/compositions/{compositionId} Returns a composition asset's node outline and the instances that play it. Editing it changes all of them. # Inspect a node's properties Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/inspect-a-nodes-properties /openapi.json get /v1/motion/documents/{id}/nodes Returns a node as the editor's inspector shows it at a time: properties with units, values and keyframes, its effect stack, expressions and style. Read a node this way before changing its look, animation or sound. # List a document's media Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/list-a-documents-media /openapi.json get /v1/motion/documents/{id}/media Returns the videos, sounds and images already in the document, with the `mediaId` the `addMedia` command places. # List Tella Motion documents Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/list-tella-motion-documents /openapi.json get /v1/motion/documents Lists Tella Motion documents you can edit, newest first. With `storyId`, a video's: its Tella Motion clips' and the documents its overlays and b-roll play. Without it, your documents that no video plays yet. Every one plays live where the video uses it, so an edit shows in the video at once. Tella Motion media in the library is a frozen snapshot, which becomes a new document of the video's when placed. # List Tella Motion effects Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/list-tella-motion-effects /openapi.json get /v1/motion/effects Returns the effect kinds the `addEffect` command puts on a node's stack, each with its parameters' names, types, ranges, units and defaults, and its presets by name. `kind` returns one effect with its presets' values, and `kind` with `preset` one preset's. # List Tella Motion fonts Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/list-tella-motion-fonts /openapi.json get /v1/motion/fonts Returns the fonts a title can be set in: the catalog's by slug, and the fonts uploaded to your library or your workspace's by id. # Summarize a Tella Motion document Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/tella-motion/summarize-a-tella-motion-document /openapi.json get /v1/motion/documents/{id} Returns the document's canvas, the outline of its nodes, its compositions and assets, the editor's state per node and `seq`, the revision to pass as `baseRevision` when editing. # Add a collaborator to a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/add-a-collaborator-to-a-video /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/collaborators Grants access to a video for the specified user. The user must be a member of your workspace. # Apply a subtitle preset Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/apply-a-subtitle-preset /openapi.json put /v1/videos/{id}/subtitle-preset Apply a preset returned by GET /v1/subtitle-presets. Built-in presets restore style, font, weight, and size, preserving position, grouping, and lines per block. Personal presets also restore those saved layout settings. Does not change transcript text or whether subtitles are enabled. Changes sync to open editors; reapplying the same preset is safe. # Apply many video edits Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/apply-many-video-edits /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/edits Adds up to 200 sound effects, text overlays, zooms, blurs, highlights, and image/video overlays across clips in one video. Operations run in array order and commit as one editor revision. Use this instead of repeated single-add requests. # Cancel a scheduled publish Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/cancel-a-scheduled-publish /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/publish Cancels a publish made with `scheduledAt` before it goes out. Only a publication that is still `queued` with a `scheduledAt` can be cancelled; once it starts going out this returns 409. Returns the publication with status `cancelled`. Requires edit access to the video. # Create a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/create-a-video /openapi.json post /v1/videos Create a new video. From an uploaded source: create a source (POST /v1/sources), PUT the video bytes to its uploadUrl, then call this endpoint with the sourceId, which becomes the new video's first clip. Without a sourceId the video is empty, as the editor's New video makes; add clips with POST /v1/videos/{id}/clips (an uploaded source) or POST /v1/motion/clips (Tella Motion). # Delete a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/delete-a-video /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id} Permanently delete a video # Download video captions Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/download-video-captions /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/captions Returns ready, non-empty captions as a SubRip or WebVTT attachment. # Duplicate a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/duplicate-a-video /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/duplicate Creates a copy of the specified video. Optionally specify a new name for the duplicate. # Export ready Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/export-ready /webhooks.json webhook export.ready Triggered when a video export completes and is ready for download. # Get a live preview link Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/get-a-live-preview-link /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/live-preview A link to the video's live preview: a player of the editor's preview that shows each saved edit a moment later, without re-rendering. It plays without signing in until expiresAt (24 hours), so share it only with the person editing. Requires edit access. # Get a recording link Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/get-a-recording-link /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/recording-link A link the user opens to record a new clip, added at the end of the video. It opens the user's own recorder: the browser, or the Tella Mac or Windows app when they record there. A browser recording ends on a page that sends them back to the agent. The user must be signed in to Tella. To record into a new video, create an empty one first. Requires edit access. # Get a video storyboard Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/get-a-video-storyboard /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/storyboard Returns a signed 4x4 WebP storyboard whose 16 tiles are sampled evenly across the requested window (`durationMs`/16 apart; every 5 seconds for the default 80s window) on the video's playback timeline (cuts applied, cumulative across clips). Only `startTimeMs` and `durationMs` control the storyboard; tile count, dimensions, and format are fixed. By default returns a 302 redirect — set `?response=json` to get `{url, columns, rows, intervalMs}` JSON instead. # Get a video thumbnail or animated preview Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/get-a-video-thumbnail-or-animated-preview /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/thumbnail Returns a signed CDN URL for a still image (jpg/png/webp) or animated preview (gif/mp4) of a video at a time on the video's playback timeline (cuts applied, cumulative across clips). By default returns a 302 redirect — set `?response=json` to get `{url}` JSON instead. # Get a video's timeline Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/get-a-videos-timeline /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/timeline Returns a compact ordered timeline outline by default: video identity, version, dimensions and duration plus every clip's video-timeline start, playback duration and content counts. Use `include` to fetch specific video or clip details, optionally scoped by `clipIds`; the complete outline remains in every response. Use `include=all` for the complete edit state. Effect and word times are ms on each clip's playback timeline (cuts applied). Raw cuts retain the source-recording timing used by the clip endpoints. # Get the beats of the background music Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/get-the-beats-of-the-background-music /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/background-music/beats Returns the tempo, every beat and every bar's first beat (downbeat) of the video's background music, in ms on the video's playback timeline: the track starts at 0 and restarts every `trackDurationMs` until the video ends, so the beats repeat with it. Use them to cut, start overlays or animate on the beat. Each track is analyzed once and cached; the first request for a new track can take a few seconds, and answers 503 `unavailable` if the analysis is still running, so retry. # Get video chapters Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/get-video-chapters /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/chapters Returns chapters ordered by timestamp in seconds on the final video timeline. Chapter IDs are intentionally omitted because they are not stable across reads. # Get video export status Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/get-video-export-status /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/exports/{exportId} Returns the current status and progress of an export. The download URL appears when the export is complete. The export ID contains slashes and must be percent-encoded as a single path segment. Requires edit access to the video, or viewer access to a video with downloads (or raw downloads) enabled. # Get video information Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/get-video-information /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id} Returns detailed information about a video including chapters, transcript, and thumbnails # List all videos Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/list-all-videos /openapi.json get /v1/videos Returns a paginated list of all videos for the authenticated user. Use playlistId query parameter to filter videos by playlist. # List connected social accounts Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/list-connected-social-accounts /openapi.json get /v1/social-accounts Lists the social accounts you have connected in Tella that POST /v1/videos/{id}/publish can post with: each one's `id` (pass it as `accountId`), its name, and the destinations it posts to. Accounts are connected in Tella (Settings → Connections); this API can't connect one. # List social publications Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/list-social-publications /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/publish Lists the latest publish of the video to each social destination and account, including publishes made in the Tella app. Poll this after POST /v1/videos/{id}/publish until the publication's status is `completed` (with the post `url`) or `failed` (with `error`). Requires edit access to the video. # List subtitle presets Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/list-subtitle-presets /openapi.json get /v1/subtitle-presets Returns Tella's built-in subtitle presets and the authenticated user's saved presets. Each includes a captionStyle preview. Apply by presetId to restore the full preset, including typography and saved layout settings. # List video exports Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/list-video-exports /openapi.json get /v1/videos/{id}/exports Lists all exports for the specified video with their current status, progress, and download URL when ready. Requires edit access to the video, or viewer access to a video with downloads (or raw downloads) enabled. # Publish a video to social media Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/publish-a-video-to-social-media /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/publish Posts the video to one of your connected social accounts: YouTube, YouTube Shorts, LinkedIn, X, Instagram (post, reel or story) or Facebook (post or story). This posts under your own account, so check the destination, text and privacy before calling it. It uploads an export with the `export` settings, reusing a finished or running one or starting one, so there is no need to export first. The account must already be connected in Tella (Settings → Connections, or Share → Publish in the editor); a 403 means it isn't, or that the plan doesn't include the export's resolution or frame rate. With several accounts connected for a destination, pass `accountId` from GET /v1/social-accounts; without it the oldest connected one posts. To post to several accounts, call once per account. TikTok can only be published from the Tella app, because TikTok requires its consent form. Returns 202 with a `queued` publication, which stays `queued` while the export renders; poll GET /v1/videos/{id}/publish for the result. To post later, pass `scheduledAt`: the publication stays `queued` with that `scheduledAt` until then, and DELETE /v1/videos/{id}/publish cancels it before it goes out. One publish per destination and account runs at a time. Requires edit access to the video. # Remove a video's custom thumbnail Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/remove-a-videos-custom-thumbnail /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/thumbnail Removes the custom thumbnail (uploaded image or picked frame) and reverts the video to its default auto-generated thumbnail. # Remove background music Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/remove-background-music /openapi.json delete /v1/videos/{id}/background-music Removes the video's background music track. # Replace video chapters Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/replace-video-chapters /openapi.json put /v1/videos/{id}/chapters Replaces the complete chapter list. Timestamps are seconds on the final video timeline and must be non-negative, ascending, and within the video duration. Pass an empty array to clear all chapters. # Save a subtitle preset Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/save-a-subtitle-preset /openapi.json post /v1/subtitle-presets Saves a subtitle look as a personal preset, like the editor's "Save as preset". Pass `videoId` to snapshot that video's current subtitles (style, font, weight, size, position, grouping and lines per block), `captionStyle` to build one from scratch on the style's defaults, or both — explicit caption fields override the video's. Omit `name` for the editor's default (the matching built-in's name, numbered). The preset then appears in GET /v1/subtitle-presets and in the editor's Subtitles panel, and can be applied to other videos with PUT /v1/videos/{id}/subtitle-preset. # Search videos Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/search-videos /openapi.json get /v1/videos/search Search the authenticated user's direct video library by title or indexed transcript sentences. # Set a video's thumbnail Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/set-a-videos-thumbnail /openapi.json put /v1/videos/{id}/thumbnail Sets the video's thumbnail from either an uploaded image or a frame of the video itself. Provide exactly one of `sourceId` (an image source from `POST /v1/sources` with `kind: "image"` — upload the image bytes to its `uploadUrl` first) or `inpointMs` (a time on the video's playback timeline). Setting one mode clears the other. # Set background music Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/set-background-music /openapi.json put /v1/videos/{id}/background-music Sets the video's background music track. It loops over the whole video and is included in exports. Volume is 0-1 and defaults to 0.2. Omit `sourceId` and `presetId` to change only the current track's volume or name. # Start a video export Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/start-a-video-export /openapi.json post /v1/videos/{id}/exports Starts an export of the specified video. Export processing is asynchronous: poll GET /v1/videos/{id}/exports/{exportId} for status and a download URL, or listen for the export.ready webhook. Creators and editors can always export. Viewers can only start an export if the video's download settings allow it: `video` and `clips` granularity require downloads to be enabled; `tracks` and `raw` require both downloads and raw downloads to be enabled. # Transcript ready Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/transcript-ready /webhooks.json webhook transcript.ready Triggered when a video's transcript has been generated and is ready. # Update a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/update-a-video /openapi.json patch /v1/videos/{id} Update a video's settings including viewer options, download permissions, access controls, and metadata. Some features require Premium plan. # Video created Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/video-created /webhooks.json webhook video.created Triggered when a new video is created in your workspace. # Video viewed Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/video-viewed /webhooks.json webhook video.viewed Triggered for each view received on one of your videos. # View milestone reached Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/videos/view-milestone-reached /webhooks.json webhook video.milestone Triggered when a video's view count crosses a threshold of 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, or 500. # Create a webhook endpoint Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/webhooks/create-a-webhook-endpoint /openapi.json post /v1/webhooks/endpoints Creates a new webhook endpoint owned by the authenticated API key's user. Events are routed to the user context that emits them; playlist.video_added is delivered to the user who adds the video, who may be a playlist editor rather than its owner. Returns the endpoint ID and signing secret. # Delete a webhook endpoint Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/webhooks/delete-a-webhook-endpoint /openapi.json delete /v1/webhooks/endpoints/{id} Permanently deletes a webhook endpoint # Get a specific webhook message Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/webhooks/get-a-specific-webhook-message /openapi.json get /v1/webhooks/messages/{id} Returns details of a specific webhook message by ID # Get endpoint signing secret Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/webhooks/get-endpoint-signing-secret /openapi.json get /v1/webhooks/endpoints/{id}/secret Retrieves the signing secret for a webhook endpoint. Use this to verify incoming webhook payloads. # List recent webhook messages Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/webhooks/list-recent-webhook-messages /openapi.json get /v1/webhooks/messages Returns a list of recently sent webhook messages for debugging purposes # List webhook endpoints Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/webhooks/list-webhook-endpoints /openapi.json get /v1/webhooks/endpoints Lists the webhook subscriptions owned by the authenticated API key's user. Endpoints are scoped per user rather than shared across the workspace. Events are routed to the user context that emits them; playlist.video_added is delivered to the user who adds the video, who may be a playlist editor rather than its owner. # Update a webhook endpoint Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/api-reference/webhooks/update-a-webhook-endpoint /openapi.json patch /v1/webhooks/endpoints/{id} Updates the delivery URL, subscribed event types, or delivery status for a webhook endpoint. # Authentication Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/authentication Secure your API requests with Bearer tokens # Authentication The Tella API uses Bearer token authentication. Send a Tella API key or a WorkOS access token in the `Authorization` header. ## Getting your API key 1. Sign in to [Tella](https://www.tella.tv) 2. Navigate to **Settings** > **API Keys** 3. Click **Create key** 4. Copy and securely store your key > [!WARNING] > > API keys are shown only once when created. If you lose your key, you'll need > to generate a new one. ## Using your API key Include your API key in the `Authorization` header of every request: ```bash theme={"system"} Authorization: Bearer tella_pk_xxxxx... ``` ### Example request ```bash theme={"system"} curl -H "Authorization: Bearer tella_pk_your_api_key" \ https://api.tella.com/v1/videos ``` ## WorkOS access tokens You can also send a WorkOS access token as a Bearer token to `/v1` endpoints. A claimed WorkOS agent-registration token authenticates as the Tella user who claimed it, in the workspace identified by its `org_id` claim, or in the user's default workspace if the token has no `org_id` or its `org_id` isn't a Tella workspace. If the person who claimed it has no Tella account yet, Tella creates one for them, plus a workspace if they don't belong to one. Unclaimed registrations cannot authenticate to the public API. See [Tella's agent authentication guide](https://www.tella.tv/auth.md) for the registration and claim flow. ## API key format Tella API keys follow this format: ``` tella_pk_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ``` * Prefix: `tella_pk_` (identifies it as a Tella public API key) * Suffix: 32 random alphanumeric characters ## Security best practices > [accordion] Never expose your API key > > * Don't commit API keys to version control > * Don't include them in client-side code > * Use environment variables to store keys > [accordion] Use environment variables > > ```bash theme={"system"} > # Set the environment variable > export TELLA_API_KEY="tella_pk_your_api_key" > > # Use it in your code > curl -H "Authorization: Bearer $TELLA_API_KEY" \ > https://api.tella.com/v1/videos > ``` > [accordion] Rotate keys regularly > > Generate new API keys periodically and revoke old ones. This limits the impact > if a key is compromised. > [accordion] Use separate keys for different environments > > Create separate API keys for development, staging, and production environments. ## Idempotent requests A request that creates or changes something (`POST`, `PATCH`, `PUT`, `DELETE`) can be resent safely by sending an `Idempotency-Key` header: any string of at most 255 characters that is unique for your credential, such as a UUID. If the first attempt completed but its response was lost (timeout, dropped connection), the resend returns the stored outcome instead of applying the change again. For a claimed agent registration, keys remain scoped to the same registration when its access token rotates. ```bash theme={"system"} curl -X POST https://www.tella.tv/api/public/v1/videos/vid_abc123/clips \ -H "Authorization: Bearer $TELLA_API_KEY" \ -H "Idempotency-Key: $(uuidgen)" \ -H "Content-Type: application/json" \ -d '{"sourceId": "src_xyz"}' ``` * The outcome is stored for 24 hours and replayed for an identical request (same method, path, query string and body). * Reusing a key with a different request returns `400 bad_request`. * Resending while the first attempt is still running returns `409 conflict`; retry after a moment. * `429 rate_limited`, `409 edit_conflict` and pre-execution `503 unavailable` outcomes are not stored, so those requests can be retried with the same key. * A generic `500 server_error` is stored and replayed because the failure may have happened after the change was applied. Check whether it applied before trying again with a new key. * If the key itself cannot be recorded, the request is not executed and answers `503 unavailable` with a `Retry-After` header; resend it unchanged. * A key whose first attempt ended without recording an outcome (for example, the request was cut off) keeps returning `409 conflict` rather than running the request again. If a resend still answers `409` after a few minutes, check whether the change applied, then continue with a new key. Requests without the header are never deduplicated. MCP tool calls use the same mechanism through `_meta.idempotencyKey`; see [MCP server](/docs/mcp-server#retrying-tool-calls-safely). ## Error responses ### 401 Unauthorized Returned when the Bearer credential is missing or invalid: ```json theme={"system"} { "error": "unauthorized", "description": "Invalid API key" } ``` **Common causes:** * Missing `Authorization` header * Incorrect API key format * Revoked or expired API key ### 403 Forbidden Returned when the API key doesn't have permission for the requested resource: ```json theme={"system"} { "error": "forbidden", "description": "Access denied to this resource" } ``` ### 409 Conflict Returned when the request conflicts with the resource's current state, for example a resend whose first attempt under the same `Idempotency-Key` is still in progress: ```json theme={"system"} { "error": "conflict", "message": "A request with this Idempotency-Key is still in progress" } ``` ### 503 Service Unavailable Returned when a dependency refused before the request did anything, for example when an `Idempotency-Key` could not be recorded. Unlike a `500`, nothing was executed: resend the same request after the `Retry-After` delay. ```json theme={"system"} { "error": "unavailable", "message": "The Idempotency-Key could not be recorded and the request was not executed; retry it" } ``` ### 404 Not Found Returned when the API path doesn't exist: ```json theme={"system"} { "error": "not_found", "message": "API endpoint not found", "resolution": "Use the OpenAPI description to find a supported path and method.", "docsUrl": "https://api.tella.com/openapi.json" } ``` Use the [`docsUrl`](https://api.tella.com/openapi.json) value to find the supported endpoint and method. ## Revoking API keys To revoke an API key: 1. Go to **Settings** > **API Keys** 2. Find the key you want to revoke 3. Click **Revoke** Revoked keys immediately stop working for all requests. # Product Changelog Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/changelog All our latest features, fixes, and improvements. **October 30, 2026** ## Tella Agent, Tella Motion, and Auto Capture [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvr7iez4003n02nfebtgavqm/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvr7iez4003n02nfebtgavqm/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) The Tella Agent, Tella Motion, and Auto Capture launched together: edit your video by chatting with the agent, have it build animated graphics, and let an AI film a product demo of any web page. Plus publishing to Instagram and Facebook, shapes, backward playback, a fullscreen preview, a new way to review mistakes, and more included credits. * **Tella Agent**: Launched alongside Tella Motion and Auto Capture. The agent can now ask you to upload a file it needs, like a logo or brand font, share PDFs and other documents for you to download, open the recorder with a script it wrote already in your speaker notes, draw maps, including a globe that flies between places, and offer an upgrade or credit top-up when you ask. Rate any reply with 👍 or 👎. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) * **Tella Motion**: Choose **Add clip → New Tella Motion clip** and describe what you want. The Tella Agent builds animated titles, text, shapes, and motion graphics, as full clips, overlays, or b-roll. Titles can use fonts you uploaded to your library, at any weight from 100 to 900. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/tella-motion) * **Auto Capture (beta)**: Ask the Tella Agent, or Claude, ChatGPT, or another AI app connected to Tella, to film a walkthrough of a web page. An AI opens the page in its own browser, plans the demo, and records it with an animated cursor, with no one at the keyboard. Available on paid plans, with no access to request. [Learn more](/docs/help/integrations/auto-capture) * **Publish to Instagram and Facebook**: In **Share → Publish**, post to Instagram as a post, reel, trial reel or story, and to a Facebook Page as a post or story. One Facebook connection covers both, and you can pick a default Page and Instagram account under **Settings → Connections**. Also available through the API and MCP. [Learn more](/docs/help/sharing/publish-to-instagram-and-facebook) * **Shapes**: Add a square, circle, triangle, diamond, star, hexagon, or arrow from **Overlay → Shapes**, then set its fill, corners, border, and shadow. Also available through the API and MCP. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/shape-overlays) * **Play backward**: Press **J** to play the editor backward, with sound, and press again to go faster. **K** pauses and resets to 1x, and holding **K** while you tap or hold **J** or **L** steps one frame or plays in slow motion. In the editor, copying the video link moves to **Shift + L**. [Learn more](/docs/help/tips/keyboard-shortcuts) * **Fullscreen preview**: Click the new fullscreen button in the playbar, or press **F**, to watch your edit full screen with only the playback controls. Press **Esc** to leave. * **Review mistakes in the script**: **Remove mistakes** now offers **Review**, where the Tella Agent marks mistakes in the transcript for you to accept or decline one by one, and **Cut & review**, where it cuts them all and you restore any you want back. Deciding takes no extra agent messages. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-a-video#step-2-use-ai-cutting-tools-optional-faster) * **Start a video from My videos**: Type a prompt at the top of **My videos**, attach files or record, and the Tella Agent opens a new video and starts working on it. New sign-ups land there too. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent#start-a-new-video-from-my-videos) * **More included credits**: Pro now includes 4,500 credits per seat each month and Premium 9,000, up from 3,000 and 6,000. Free trials get 4,500. [Learn more](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits) ### Updates * **Plan a Video**: A new **Plan a Video** starter helps you work out the point, script, and storyboard before you record. * **Community skills**: Paste a skill's ID from [tella.com/skills](https://www.tella.com/skills) into an agent chat to try it without adding it to your library. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent#use-a-community-skill-in-one-chat) * **Media library**: Browse **Stickers** and **GIFs** in the library, see everything at once under **All**, and drag media from the Library panel onto the canvas. Files you attach in the agent chat appear in the video's library, and overlay search includes results from your connected Pinterest, Are.na, and mymind accounts. The Library's upload, generate, and link buttons are now one **Add media** menu. * **Transcripts in more languages**: French, Spanish, Portuguese, German, and Italian transcripts now keep retakes and filler words, so Remove mistakes can find and cut them. * **Playlists**: Adding a video to a playlist shows your playlists right away, and the video's playlist badge updates as you click. * **Shadows**: The Subtle and Deep shadow styles are softer, in the editor, on the watch page, and in exports. * **Eye contact**: Eye contact is now available to everyone. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/eye-contact) * **Saved confirmations**: Settings that save automatically now show a **Saved** message. * **Blank video names**: A video started blank takes its name from its first clip instead of staying "Untitled video". * **Embed API**: Control captions and speed in embedded videos with new commands, events, and URL parameters. [Embed API](/docs/embed-api) * **More control in the API and MCP**: Get a live preview link to watch an edit as it happens (with quality, mute, and volume controls), read the beats and tempo of background music, check your plan and credit balance, create an empty video, hand someone a recording link, search community skills, start and list agent chats, add text overlays with a transition, and crop uploaded videos in layouts. The deprecated auto layouts tool is removed; agents use the tella-auto-layouts skill instead. The rate limit is now 200 requests a minute. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) ### Bug fixes * **Overlays**: Arrow keys move a selected overlay again instead of moving the playhead. * **Subtitles**: Chinese, Japanese, and Thai captions no longer put a space between every word, and words you cut no longer show in the captions right after the cut. * **AI cutting**: Remove silences no longer leaves short audio blips next to existing cuts, Remove filler words no longer cuts long stretches of music or demo audio, and all-caps words like "ER" are no longer treated as fillers. * **Watch page**: Videos on iPhone and iPad no longer reload and restart mid-playback, 4K videos start playing sooner, and dragging the playhead in Slack's mobile app scrubs the video instead of moving the embed. * **Editor playback**: Audio resumes where it stopped after a pause, sped-up audio no longer has small blips, cut parts don't play while the tab is in the background, and playback no longer stutters at layout changes in Source quality. * **Cut timeline**: A trim handle no longer stays stuck to the cursor when the mouse release is missed. * **Animated cursor**: Window-resize cursors from Mac recordings show as resize cursors, not arrows. * **Web recorder**: A recording now stops when screen sharing ends, instead of saving sound with no picture, and recordings started from **New video** after opening a watch page save as their own video instead of failing. * **Uploads**: MP3 files with large embedded cover art now upload and process instead of staying Pending. * **YouTube publishing**: A large YouTube upload that gets interrupted now picks up where it left off instead of failing. * **Tella Agent**: The chat shows the agent's thinking and each step as it's written, instead of looking stuck for a minute or more. * **Duplicating videos**: Duplicating a video with many Tella Motion overlays works reliably, and a failed duplicate shows an error instead of spinning. * **Settings**: A removed member disappears from the Members page right away, and TikTok publish options toggle when you click their label, and deleting your account no longer archives videos other people shared with you. * **Images**: SVG images larger than 8 MB show in the editor preview. **October 23, 2026** ## Keystrokes on screen, AI video generation, and extra monthly credits Show your keystrokes on screen, generate video clips with AI, pick a new editing quality, add extra credits every month, and choose from new auto zoom presets. Plus interactive cards in the agent chat, Remove mistakes with the Tella Agent, and a round of fixes. * **Show keystrokes**: Show the shortcuts or every key you pressed in a Mac app recording as an on-screen overlay, from **Effect → Keystrokes**. Choose keycaps or pills, Mac or Windows key names, size, position, how long keys stay on screen, and In and Out animations. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/show-keystrokes) * **Generate video with AI**: In the media panel's **Generate** box, switch to **Video** to make a short clip from a prompt with Seedance 2.5, or the faster, cheaper Seedance 2.0 Fast and Mini models. Also available through the API and MCP. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-media#generate-media-with-ai) * **Editing quality**: Pick **Low-res (fastest)**, **Hi-res (1080p)**, or **Source (slowest)** for the editor preview. Your viewers always see full quality. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/low-res-mode) * **Extra monthly credits**: Pro and Premium workspaces can add extra credits every month on top of their seat credits, from 25,000 credits up, with discounts on larger amounts. [Learn more](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits) * **Auto zoom presets**: **Generate zooms** offers Subtle, Moderate, Focused, and Intense presets that group zooms around your clicks, each with a matching zoom animation. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom#generate-zooms-automatically) * **Interactive agent cards**: The Tella Agent can ask you questions with a form of sliders, pickers, and image choices, and show live controls that adjust your video as you drag them, without another message. Answered forms stay in the chat with your picks. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent#answer-questions-and-fine-tune-with-cards) * **Remove mistakes with the Tella Agent**: **Remove mistakes** in Cut and the Script panel's ⋯ menu now asks the Tella Agent to find repeated phrases and retakes, then lets you approve or keep each cut in the chat. Click a cut's time to jump to it. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-a-video#find-and-remove-mistakes) * **Import videos from X, Instagram, and TikTok**: Paste a post that holds a video and choose **Import video** to bring the video itself into your edit, or **Import screenshot** for the post card. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/import-a-youtube-video#which-x-instagram-and-tiktok-links-can-i-import) ### Updates * **Agent replies in your language**: The Tella Agent answers in the language you write in, not the language of the video. * **Image attachments**: Click an image you attached in the agent chat to open it full screen. * **Overlay panel**: With the Overlay panel open, you can click or drag your screen or camera to move it. * **Link previews in Apple Messages**: Public videos without a custom thumbnail now play a short looping preview in Messages. * **Inter weights**: Inter text overlays and subtitles get the weight slider, and weights like 300 or 800 show as themselves. * **Studio Voice**: Studio Voice Low now enhances recordings up to 3 hours long. * **Credits**: Tella Agent credits and AI credits are now just called Credits. * **Auto Layouts**: The **Generate** button no longer has a template menu; it uses the clip's editing style. * **Agent models**: Claude Fable 5.1 is no longer offered in the model picker. * **More control in the API and MCP**: Split clips (and cuts now remove the zooms, blurs, and sound effects on removed footage), set call-to-action buttons, hide the view count and publish date, set motion blur amount, set smooth or hard-cut transitions on blurs and highlights, configure the keystroke overlay, and restack overlays in one batch. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) ### Bug fixes * **Sign-in**: Signing in with Google works again instead of showing "Your authentication session has expired". * **Highlights**: Highlights and blurs on full-screen clips keep the clip's rounded corners. * **Exports**: Exports no longer fail on videos with the click spring set to None, or on some videos edited before and after an update. * **Playback**: A clip with one media file that can't be opened no longer buffers forever in the editor. * **Library**: Uploaded sound effects play in the preview again. * **Batch exports**: Download links in the "Your videos are ready" email no longer show Access Denied for some older accounts. * **Auto zooms**: **Generate** stops spinning and shows an error when zooms can't be generated. * **Web recorder**: Speaker notes no longer scroll under the notes controls, and Tella warns you before you leave the page while parts of a recording haven't been saved yet. * **Uploads**: Uploading an audio-only file as a new video now explains that it needs a video track, instead of converting forever. * **Tella Agent**: Trial workspaces can use the agent again, attached SVG files no longer break the chat, and asking for subtitles in another language updates the editor's captions. * **Tella Transfer**: Loom videos whose Tella copy you deleted can be transferred again. * **Account settings**: Deleting your account or workspace shows the real reason when it's blocked, and branding logo links work without `https://`. **October 16, 2026** ## Tella Agent public beta, scheduled publishing, and YouTube imports The Tella Agent is now open to everyone in public beta, with reusable skills, and can run on your own ChatGPT or Claude plan. You can also schedule posts to your social accounts, import YouTube videos into your media library, and add an ambient background. Plus overlay speed, copy and paste for overlay styles and crops, and a round of editor fixes. * **Tella Agent public beta**: Everyone can now edit with the Tella Agent. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) * **Use your ChatGPT or Claude plan**: Connect a ChatGPT plan or a Claude Pro/Max plan from the agent's Credits window or **Settings → Connections → AI subscriptions**, and the Tella Agent's models from that provider run on your plan, so each message uses far fewer credits. [Learn more](/docs/help/integrations/use-your-chatgpt-or-claude-plan) * **Agent skills**: Save an editing job you do often as a skill, then type **/** in the agent chat or open the **Skills** button to run it again. Share skills with your workspace, and manage them from Claude, ChatGPT, Cursor, and other MCP clients too. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent#skills-reusable-editing-workflows) * **Scheduled publishing**: In **Share → Publish**, choose **At a time I pick** to post up to 30 days ahead. Each destination shows its scheduled time and a **Cancel** button. Also available through the API and MCP. [Learn more](/docs/help/sharing/publish-to-social-media#schedule-a-post) * **Import YouTube videos**: Paste a YouTube link into the media library's link field to bring the video itself into your edit and place it like any other clip. Through the API and MCP, you can import media from any page, post, or video link. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/import-a-youtube-video) * **Ambient background**: Pick **Ambient** under **Style → Background → Animated** to fill the background with a heavily blurred copy of your screen recording, or your camera when the screen is hidden. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-an-ambient-background) * **Keep face centered**: Turn on **Keep face centered** in **Layout → Adjust** so your camera follows you as you move. It now works on uploaded footage too, and keeps up with you instead of lagging behind. * **Overlay speed**: Speed up a video overlay from 1× to 4× in its Trim dialog. Pitch stays natural in playback and exports. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays#speed-up-a-video-overlay) * **Copy and paste overlay properties**: Right-click an overlay and choose **Copy properties**, then paste all of them, or just the style, size and position, or animation, onto another overlay. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays#copy-properties-to-another-overlay) * **Copy and paste crops**: Copy a crop in the crop window and paste it onto another clip, from the menu or with **⌘/Ctrl+C** and **⌘/Ctrl+V**. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/adjust-your-camera-frame#apply-your-crop-to-other-layouts-and-clips) * **Perspective cut-out layouts**: Turn on **Perspective** for the **Cut out** layouts on landscape videos to give your presenter and screen a subtle 3D tilt. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background) * **Glass border style**: Give your camera a liquid glass border, now available to everyone in the Border style picker. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-borders) * **Plain and Pylon help centers**: Save generated documents as draft articles in Plain or Pylon, alongside Intercom. Connect them with an API key under **Settings → Connections**. Learn more for [Plain](/docs/help/integrations/save-generated-documents-to-plain) and [Pylon](/docs/help/integrations/save-generated-documents-to-pylon). ### Updates * **Consistent right-click menu**: Right-clicking a timeline selection shows the same actions in Layout, Edit, Zooms, and Overlays mode, including adding a layout and copying. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline#right-click-a-selected-range) * **Eye contact in the crop window**: Turn **Eye contact** on or off right from the camera's crop window. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/eye-contact#turn-on-eye-contact) * **Auto layouts**: Generating Auto layouts clip by clip continues in your open Tella Agent chat instead of starting a new one each time, so it uses far fewer credits. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-auto-layouts) * **Agent chat in dark mode**: Your messages and the send button now follow dark mode. * **Animation previews**: The overlay animation picker shows a still of each animation without needing to hover. * **Font picker**: Uploaded fonts are now shown in their own typeface. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/text-overlays#upload-your-own-font) * **Tidier panels**: Subtitle tools sit in the subtitles title row, with less-used actions in a ⋯ menu. **Copy transcript** has moved into the Script panel's ⋯ menu. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-the-transcript-of-a-tella-video#copy-the-whole-transcript) * **YouTube publishing**: Your custom thumbnail is now sent to YouTube, and Tella explains when YouTube refuses an upload because your channel hit its daily limit. [Learn more](/docs/help/sharing/publish-to-youtube#use-your-custom-thumbnail-on-youtube) * **Transcription**: Transcripts now use a newer, more accurate speech model for everyone. * **Watch page**: The player stays pinned to the top only on phones, so titles and descriptions stay readable on tablets and small laptops. * **More control in the API and MCP**: Set a video's Studio Voice level, reframe or mirror the camera, read where the presenter's face is, start video b-roll partway into its source, place new overlays behind the presenter, and set ambient or gradient backgrounds and perspective layouts. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) ### Bug fixes * **Publishing**: Publish progress now updates instead of staying stuck. * **Audio sync**: Uploads that start with a delay in their video track, such as some Ecamm recordings, no longer play with the picture behind the sound on the watch page and in exports. * **Playback**: Videos that combine a blurred camera background with an overlay behind the presenter play again. * **Watch page**: Video overlays now play their sound. * **Editor performance**: Timeline edits no longer freeze the editor on long recordings with lots of cursor movement, and playback no longer stalls in browsers without a software video decoder. * **Uploads**: Portrait uploads now get a portrait canvas even if you last used a landscape ratio. * **Canvas and text**: The canvas no longer stretches when you change aspect ratio, and fixed-size text boxes grow when you add lines instead of hiding them. * **Timeline**: Splitting overlays at the playhead works on clips with cuts, and adding a layout from a selection no longer fails with "Selection too short". * **Mirrored cameras**: Cropping a mirrored camera now crops the side you see. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/mirror-or-flip-your-camera) * **Find mistakes**: Cutting a repeated phrase no longer leaves the last word of the first take behind. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-a-video) * **Chrome extension**: Finishing a recording no longer shows a "problem finishing" error. * **Library**: Sidebar video and playlist counts refresh after you delete videos or change playlists, and links in playlist access emails no longer 404. **October 9, 2026** ## Eye contact, 4K playback, and connected media libraries Look toward the camera while reading your notes, share videos in 4K, and bring images from mymind, Pinterest, and Are.na into your edits. Plus punch-in zooms, subtitle breaks, and multi-account publishing. * **Eye contact**: Turn on **Eye contact** in **Layout → Adjust** to redirect your gaze toward the lens across your webcam recordings. Once processing finishes, the correction carries through playback and exports. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/eye-contact) * **4K playback**: Viewers can watch eligible Premium videos in **4K (2160p)** on the shared page and in embeds, with **Auto** or **HD (1080p)** also available in the Quality menu. Requires a source recording larger than the video's canvas; Safari chooses quality automatically. [Learn more](/docs/help/sharing/change-playback-quality) * **Connected media libraries**: Connect **mymind**, **Pinterest**, or **Are.na** under **Settings → Connections → Media**, then open that source from the media library's **More** menu to browse and bring saved images into your video. * **Punch-in zooms**: Open a zoom's **Advanced** settings to choose **Smooth** or **Hard cut** separately for its **Intro** and **Outro**. Cut straight into a close-up without changing how your other zooms move. Also available through the API and MCP. * **Publish to multiple accounts**: Connect and name several accounts under **Settings → Connections**, then choose which YouTube, LinkedIn, or X accounts to post to in **Share → Publish**. Track each destination's progress without keeping the window open. * **Subtitle breaks**: Press **Enter** at a word boundary to start a new subtitle block, or **Backspace** at the start of a block to join it to the one above, within your lines-per-caption limit. Manual breaks carry through playback, exports, and subtitle downloads. Also available through the API and MCP. * **Camera backgrounds after recording**: Blur the room behind you or replace it with a solid colour using **Camera background** in the camera's Style settings. Keep your camera frame, border, and shadow intact. * **Cut out uploaded footage**: Use **Cut out** on uploaded presenter footage, not just webcam recordings. You can also place overlays behind the presenter in an uploaded clip. * **Bulk text styling**: **⌘/Ctrl-click** text overlays on the canvas to select several, then change their font, size, colour, background, and other styling together. Undo the change in one step. ### Updates * **Transfer videos between workspaces**: Workspace owners can move selected videos from the library with **Move to workspace**, or transfer all their own videos from **Settings → General → Videos → Transfer videos**, without deleting the workspace. Moved videos leave the old workspace's playlists. * **Saved text styles**: Rename, update, or delete a saved style from the Text panel's **⋯** menu. Style tiles now preview their actual font, including uploaded fonts. * **Custom fonts in the API and MCP**: Upload fonts to your personal or workspace library, list them, and use them in text overlays. You can also set camera styles on layouts, including a cut-out presenter. ### Bug fixes * **Background music**: Editor playback now respects your music's volume instead of playing it at full volume. * **Editor loading**: Videos with unfinished uploads no longer prevent the editor from opening. * **Long videos**: Subtitle exports no longer fail when a scene runs past about 65 minutes. * **Library**: Video lists no longer repeat the first page after videos are moved or filtered, and Trash refreshes when you return to it. **October 2, 2026** ## Studio Voice levels, transcript downloads, and more ways to style text Choose how strongly Studio Voice works on your voice, download your transcript as plain text, and style text and subtitles with outlines, shadows, and italics. Plus font families, separate zoom and layout animation, and a round of editing and watch page fixes. * **Studio Voice levels**: Studio Voice now has **Off**, **Low**, and **High**. **Low** works in any room and is the default for new videos, while **High** sounds most natural with a good mic. Switch any time to regenerate the enhanced audio. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/studio-voice-audio-enhancement) * **Download transcripts**: Choose **Transcript (.txt)** in the Download window to save your video's text without timestamps. Cut words are left out, and you can download a translated transcript by selecting its subtitle language. * **Text outlines and shadows**: Add an **Outline** and choose its colour in a text overlay's **Decoration** settings. Text can now cast a shadow without needing a background box. * **Italic subtitles**: Turn on **Italic** in the subtitle Text panel. It carries through the editor, watch page, and export, including with custom fonts. * **Upload a font family**: Select several `.ttf` or `.otf` files at once. Weights of the same font become one family in your library, with a Weight control for text overlays instead of a separate entry for every file. * **Separate zoom and layout animation**: Choose how gentle or snappy your zooms feel independently of layout transitions, with seven styles for each. Also available through the API and MCP. * **Animated captions**: Backdrop, Highlight, Mono, Cannes, and Classic subtitles now spring in and out, and word highlights ease in instead of switching instantly. * **Lightweight embed**: Turn on **Lightweight embed** in **Share → Embed** to show a thumbnail that loads the player only when someone clicks play — ideal for keeping a website's hero section fast. [Learn more](/docs/help/sharing/customize-embed-settings) ### Updates * **Two-factor authentication**: Turn on **Two-factor authentication** under **Security** in **Settings → Profile** to require a code from an authenticator app like 1Password, Google Authenticator, or Authy when you sign in with your email and password. [Learn more](/docs/help/account/two-factor-authentication) * **Duration before playback**: The watch page and embeds now show how long a video takes to watch before you press play, adjusted for its default playback speed. * **Mobile watch page**: The title appears once below the video, the view count sits next to the creator's name, and landscape videos stay pinned to the top as you scroll. * **AI apps in Connections**: Connect ChatGPT and Claude from their app directories, and find setup steps for Claude Code, Cursor, and Codex, under **Settings → Connections → AI apps**. [Learn more](/docs/help/integrations/mcp-server) * **More control in the API and MCP**: Set a clip's corner rounding and border style, change the stacking order of overlays, and read a clip's transcript and mouse events for just part of the video. * **Smaller web recordings on Apple Silicon**: Web recordings on Apple Silicon Macs now take up about 30% less space at the same quality. * **Workspace names**: Signing up with a work email now names your new workspace after your company. ### Bug fixes * **Editing**: Switching tools no longer pauses playback, a selected clip stays selected after you cut it, and dragging the start of a layout no longer leaves tiny invisible layout changes behind. Full-screen media no longer reverts to your recording after layouts are reset. * **Layouts**: A favorite layout that hides your screen or camera is now remembered as the starting layout for new recordings. * **Playback**: Editor audio recovers on its own after a network stall, and voices no longer break up at cuts in heavily edited videos. Cut-out presenters no longer flicker or stutter, and videos with unusual colour tags, such as Remotion exports, keep their correct colours. * **Crop**: The crop window keeps its buttons on screen when you switch between cropping the screen and the camera. * **Watch page and embeds**: The player plays again after you come back from the editor, keeps the right shape when you move between videos, and stops playing in Safari when you leave the page. Hovering the ends of an embed's progress bar no longer cuts off the preview. * **Web recorder on iPad**: The recording controls stay compact instead of stretching across the screen. * **Subtitle language**: Your default subtitle language now saves correctly in Viewer settings. * **Recording from a watch page**: Starting a recording from a video's command menu now creates a new video instead of adding to the one you were watching. **September 30, 2026** ## Direct publishing, subtitle translations, and the Blob camera [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmunxjpj800460agm53g82kk3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmunxjpj800460agm53g82kk3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Publish your video to several social platforms at once without downloading it first, translate your subtitles into almost any language, and give your camera a frame that moves with you. * **Direct publishing**: Click **Share**, open the **Publish** tab, and pick YouTube, YouTube Shorts, LinkedIn, X, or TikTok — or several at once. Preview the post on each platform, write one title and description for every destination or tailor each one, then choose the resolution, frame rate, speed, and whether to burn in subtitles. Tella exports once and posts to every platform you picked. YouTube posts can add your chapters to the description and upload each subtitle language as its own caption track. Also available through the API and MCP. [Learn more](/docs/help/sharing/publish-to-social-media) * **Subtitle translations**: In the **Subtitles** panel, open the **Subtitle language** menu and choose **Add translation**. Edit the translated text, burn any language into your export, download it as SRT or VTT, or let viewers pick it from **Captions** on your shared video. Choose **Viewer's language** and Tella shows each viewer their own language when it's available. Available on paid plans. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/translate-subtitles) * **Blob camera**: Choose **Blob** under **Camera style** in **Layout → Customize layout** for a softly wobbling camera frame that swells toward your hands as you gesture. Turn on **Outline** for a hand-drawn edge. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-blob-camera-style) * **Snake border**: Pair it with last week's glowing **Snake** border, which pulses around your camera frame. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-borders) **September 25, 2026** ## Color filters and LUTs [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmugw9lfn00wq0agm3ekweegq/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmugw9lfn00wq0agm3ekweegq/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Give your camera, screen recording, and media a new look with **Filters** in the **Style** panel. Pick a preset like Warm, Crisp, or Mono, fine-tune exposure, contrast, saturation, temperature, and tint, or apply a LUT — choose a built-in film look (Portra, 800T, or Wes) or upload your own `.cube` file and set its intensity. Filters apply across matching clips, or turn on **Apply to this clip** to change just one. Also available through the API and MCP. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/color-filters) ### Also in this update * **Reuse clips from your library**: Open the new **Clips** tab in the media library to browse videos, preview their clips, and add one as b-roll or an overlay in your current video. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/remix-and-reuse-videos-and-clips) * **Video backgrounds**: Upload MP4 or MOV backgrounds from **Style → Background → Browse all → Animated**, then keep them personal or share them with your workspace. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/pick-a-background#how-do-i-upload-an-animated-background) * **Animated camera borders**: Add a glowing **Snake** border around your camera frame, then tune its colour, thickness, glow, pulse length, and speed. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-borders) * **More precise cropping**: Choose **This layout only** in the crop tool to reframe one layout while leaving your other layouts untouched. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/crop-screen-recordings#choose-how-far-the-crop-reaches) * **Zooms and blurs on media layouts**: Zooms, blurs, and highlights now apply to the media shown in a media layout, including on camera-only clips. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-media) * **Favorite media layouts**: Star a **Media** layout to reuse it from **Favorites** on camera-only, screen-only, and uploaded clips. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-media#save-and-reuse-a-media-layout) * **Save documents to Intercom**: Turn a video into a draft Intercom help article, with the video embedded at the top, from the same menu as Notion and Linear. [Learn more](/docs/help/integrations/save-generated-documents-to-intercom) ### Updates * **Pause web recordings**: Pause and resume a web recording with the button next to the timer or by pressing **P**. The paused section is left out of your video and doesn't count toward your recording limit. In the Chrome extension, press **Option/Alt + Shift + P** from any tab. [Learn more](/docs/help/recording/record-a-video-using-the-web-app) * **Quicker timeline work**: Hover the playbar in Setup to preview any moment, and the Cut timeline playhead now snaps to clip edges while you scrub (hold **Option/Alt** to scrub freely). * **Reset all blurs and highlights**: Clear every blur and highlight in a clip from the **⋯** menu on the Effect timeline, and undo it in one step. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting) * **Watch page subtitles**: Subtitles on the watch page now look the same as in your exports, including custom fonts. * **Publishing date on embeds**: Embedded videos now show their date when **Publishing date** is turned on in viewer settings. [Learn more](/docs/help/sharing/customize-embed-settings) * **Safer uploads**: Tella now warns before you close or reload the page while a manual upload is still running. * **Quicker replies**: Press **⌘/Ctrl + Enter** to submit comments, replies, and other forms. Comment notification links now open the Comments tab directly. * **Text presets and subtitle styling in the API and MCP**: List, apply, and save text presets, and set subtitle font, weight, exact size, and lines per caption. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-tools/text-overlays) ### Bug fixes * **Playback**: The editor falls back to software decoding when your computer's hardware video decoder is busy, audio no longer drops out after cuts in long videos with many cuts, and editor tabs left open for more than a day keep playing instead of stalling. * **Exports**: Videos duplicated after re-recording a clip with a blur, and videos with very short media overlays, export again. Fading layouts no longer briefly reveal what a blur is covering. * **Audio and transcripts**: Re-running Studio Voice now plays the new enhanced audio in the editor, and trimmed iPhone clips no longer have their waveform and transcript shifted late. * **Recordings**: iPad recordings made in Safari keep their correct orientation. * **Overlays behind the presenter**: These now take effect in the editor as soon as the cut-out is ready, instead of staying in front. * **Sharing**: Turning off reactions or comments now applies to embeds straight away, and share links keep your custom domain after you edit a video. * **Library**: Videos deleted with bulk actions disappear right away, and duplicated videos show up when you return to the library. The **Add to playlist** window no longer jumps in size or hides the playlist you just added. * **Auto zooms**: **Generate** is available straight away on Mac and Windows recordings, and web recordings explain that auto zooms need the desktop apps. * **Subtitles**: Backdrop captions light up each word as it starts, so seeking to a word shows that word highlighted. * **Changing your email**: If the new address is already in use, Tella now says so instead of asking you to try again. **September 21, 2026** ## Tella in ChatGPT Tella is now an official app in [ChatGPT's app directory](https://chatgpt.com/plugins/plugin_asdk_app_6a7026f78434819186579d93d20ab38b?open_in_app). Add it in one click, sign in to your workspace, then mention **@Tella** in any chat to find videos, pull transcripts, edit clips, organize playlists, export videos, and more. No MCP URL or config file needed. You can also add it from **Settings → Connections → AI apps**. [Learn more](/docs/help/integrations/mcp-server) **September 21, 2026** ## One-click custom domains with Cloudflare [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmubpc5q100000agm3ko61i1i/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmubpc5q100000agm3ko61i1i/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Connecting a custom domain no longer means copying DNS records by hand. If your domain is hosted on Cloudflare, Tella now uses Domain Connect to set it up for you: enter your domain in **Settings → Domain**, click **Connect with Cloudflare**, approve the change, and your domain is verified and used on every video page and playlist you share. More providers, including Vercel, are coming soon. Available on Tella Premium. [Learn more](/docs/help/admin/add-your-custom-domain#set-up-automatically) **September 18, 2026** ## The new editor is now the default, edit together in real time, and cut out your camera background [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmu5lymiv00rn0agmgnex80oi/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmu5lymiv00rn0agmgnex80oi/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Videos now open in Tella's new editor by default, with its faster preview and latest editing tools, and teammates with edit access can now work in the same video at the same time. There are also three new ways to place yourself on the canvas: drop your camera background entirely, rise out of a shaped frame, or tuck a title behind your head. Plus website and social captures, adjustable blurs and highlights, and analytics through the API. * **Edit videos together in real time**: Invite teammates with **Can edit** access and work in the same video at the same time. Everyone's saved changes stay in sync as you edit, without locking the editor to one person. The editor now also shows **Saving…** while your latest changes are still being saved. [Learn more](/docs/help/teams/how-can-i-add-a-team-member-as-an-editor-of-your-video#edit-a-video-together) * **Cut out your camera background**: Pick a **Cut out** layout to remove the background from your camera recording and stand directly on your canvas or screen recording, with no camera frame. In a clip with both screen and camera, choose which side to stand on. Tella prepares the cut-out once per recording and you can keep editing while it works. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background) * **Pop-out camera frames**: Turn on **Pop-out** to rise out of a smaller camera frame. Keep your original camera background inside the frame or swap it for a colour, set how far the frame drops behind you, and add an outline. Switch the frame between Circle, Square, Landscape, and Portrait, and its corners follow the shape you picked in Style. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/create-a-pop-out-camera-effect) * **Overlays behind the presenter**: Every visual overlay now has a **Depth**. Set it to **Behind presenter** to send a title behind your head, tuck a logo behind your shoulder, or let a sticker peek out from behind you. The Overlay timeline gains a dashed **Presenter** row — drag a card across it, or press Arrow Up and Arrow Down, to change depth. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter) * **Capture websites and social posts**: Paste a link and Tella captures the page or post straight into the video's media library, instead of screenshotting, downloading, and uploading it again. Capture a web page above the fold or as a scrolling video, or grab a public post from X, Instagram, LinkedIn, or TikTok. Also available through the API and MCP. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/capture-websites-and-social-posts) * **Blur and highlight intensity**: Blurs and highlights take an **Intensity** slider — darken everything outside a highlight, or make a blur heavier. A blur never gets lighter than its default, so whatever it covers stays hidden at every setting. Available through the API and MCP too. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting) * **Animated gradient backgrounds**: Choose moving gradient presets from **Style → Background → Browse all → Animated**. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/pick-a-background#animated-backgrounds) * **Analytics in the API and MCP**: Read a single video's plays, unique viewers, average percentage viewed, watch time, retention, geography, referrers, traffic sources, and CTA clicks — or the same breakdowns across your whole workspace, with your top videos ranked by plays. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-tools/analytics) * **Features leaving beta**: Auto Layouts and animated cursor controls no longer carry beta labels. [Learn more about Auto Layouts](/docs/help/editing/use-auto-layouts) and [animated cursors](/docs/help/editing/customize-animated-cursor) ### Updates * **Bulk tagging and playlists**: Select several videos and tag them in one go from the selection bar, and add videos to another playlist from inside a playlist. [Learn more](/docs/help/account/bulk-select-videos) * **Crop against the whole clip**: The crop tool now has a timeline under the preview, so you can scrub to other moments and check that nothing important falls outside the crop. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/crop-screen-recordings) * **Shorter silences removed**: Removing silences now cuts brief dead pauses that were previously left in, so **Faster** and **Fast** trim closer to what you hear. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/remove-silences-automatically) * **Videos without clips**: You can now delete the last clip in a video. The editor shows an empty canvas with the three ways to add a clip back, rather than refusing to remove it. * **Sharing feels instant**: People you add as video editors or playlist members appear in the list straight away instead of after a pause. * **Playlist sidebar**: Public and password-protected playlists show their globe icon and video count again, and a chevron beside **Playlists** collapses the list. ### Bug fixes * **Subtitles**: Outlined letters no longer grow spikes at sharp angles, the corners of X and Y keep their points, and a subtitle background colour now reaches full opacity when you pick it. Preview and export match. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/style-subtitles) * **Zooms over fullscreen screens**: A zoom that starts just before the screen goes fullscreen now follows the new layout instead of keeping the old one's framing. * **Transcripts**: If the transcription provider fails a video, Tella now submits it again rather than waiting on the failed attempt, so a provider outage no longer leaves an empty Script panel. * **ProRes clips**: Videos with ProRes recordings now play through the same optimized preview as every other format, which also stops a Chrome crash while editing them. * **Preview recovery**: If the browser's graphics device drops out, the editor restarts its preview on its own instead of showing an error. Slow media downloads no longer stall startup, and Linux users who cannot get a graphics adapter now see the exact Chrome flag to enable. [Learn more](/docs/help/troubleshooting/video-slow-to-load-editor#why-does-the-editor-show-an-error-instead-of-my-video) * **Connections**: Settings → Connections no longer renders empty when one provider fails to report its status. * **Re-recording a deleted video**: Finishing a re-record whose original video was deleted now saves into a new video instead of failing repeatedly. **September 17, 2026** ## Pause recordings in the Chrome extension [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmu61fuwq00bf0agmaen0cede/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmu61fuwq00bf0agmaen0cede/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Take a break mid-recording without ending the clip. Click **Pause** in the extension popup or the floating recording controls, then **Resume** when you're ready — the timer freezes and the paused section is left out of your video. Pausing also doesn't count toward your recording limit. [Learn more](/docs/help/recording/record-a-video-using-the-chrome-extension) **September 11, 2026** ## Better subtitles, steadier edits Subtitles are easier to shape and reuse, and a few everyday editing flows now hold up better around cuts and collaboration. * **Subtitle styles and presets**: Edit subtitle text from the Script panel, choose from new styles, set one to three lines per caption, and preview changes as you make them. Pick from more fonts and weights, upload personal or workspace fonts, and save, rename, duplicate, or reuse your own subtitle presets. * **Media overlays across cuts**: Video, audio, and animated overlays now keep playing for their full length when they cross a cut, rather than ending at the cut. Text and image overlays continue to follow the footage beneath them. * **Duplicating scenes**: Duplicating or pasting a scene no longer causes your next edit to be lost when collaborators are editing the same video. The timeline also shows when a duplicate is still being created. * **Loom imports**: Paste Loom embed and playlist links as well as share links. Deleted or private videos now fail quickly with a clear explanation instead of retrying for several minutes. * **Support chat**: Start a new conversation or ask for a human from the chat composer, write longer questions in a multiline message box, and expand sources only when you want to see them. * **Animated cursor defaults**: New videos start with a larger cursor and calmer motion by default. Your existing videos and saved preferences stay the same. **September 10, 2026** ## Screen effects Zooms, animated cursors, blurs, and highlights now live together in a new **Effect** panel, with motion blur and camera shrinking alongside them. Click **Effect** in the sidebar or press `E`. * **One panel for every screen effect**: Add manual or automatic zooms, turn on the animated cursor and pick its style, and add blurs and highlights from the same place. The Effect timeline shows zoom, blur, and highlight cards together, so you can line up their timing at a glance. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom) * **Advanced zoom settings**: Motion blur softens fast zooms, pans, and cursor movement, from Subtle to Strong, and **Shrink camera during zooms** makes your camera bubble smaller while a zoom plays. Both apply to the whole video, or turn on **Adjust this clip** to change only the clip you're on. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/add-motion-blur) * **Blur & highlight**: Add a blur with one click, then switch its **Type** to Highlight without recreating it. Each effect shows a preview of what it covers, with Smooth or Hard cut transitions a click away. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting) * **Cursor styling**: Choose macOS Sequoia, Tahoe, Golden Gate, Windows, or Touch and set the size, then expand **Advanced cursor settings** for smoothing, tilt, click spring, click ripple, and hiding the cursor while it's idle. Available on Mac and Windows app recordings made with **Animated cursor** or **Hide cursor**. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/customize-animated-cursor) ### Also in this update * **Overlay panel**: Media, text, stickers, and sounds have their own **Overlay** panel (press `V`). Each section previews what it offers, and selecting an overlay opens it in a detail view with a preview, its settings, and Duplicate and Delete. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/overlays) * **Stickers**: Drop in emoji, shapes, illustrated objects, GIFs, and memes from the new sticker library. Stickers now start at a compact size so they do not cover your recording. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/animated-stickers) * **Animated stickers**: Pick an animated template, upload a Lottie animation, or create your own with AI. You can also select an animated sticker and refine it with another prompt. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/animated-stickers) * **Sound and music tiles**: Sound effects and Tella music show a waveform tile you can preview before adding. * **Media library**: Switch between **Personal** and **Team** media, and move items between the two from an item's menu. ### Bug fixes * **Safari editor audio**: Pressing **Play** now restores editor audio after a call, device lock, or another tab interrupts Safari's audio session. **September 4, 2026** ## Join your team's workspace, richer editing for agents, and steadier timeline edits Sign up with a work email and Tella now finds the workspace your team already uses, agents get a visual overview of your videos and can make many changes in one go, and a round of editor and playback fixes. * **Join your team's workspace**: Sign up with a work email that matches an existing workspace and Tella offers to join it instead of creating a new one. Owners approve or dismiss requests from Settings → Members → Requests, can let anyone on the domain join automatically from Settings → Security, and can verify the domain so new colleagues land in the right workspace. Already in Tella? Find and join matching workspaces from the workspace switcher. [Learn more](/docs/help/admin/join-an-existing-workspace) * **Storyboards in the API and MCP**: Get a 16-frame visual overview of a video, clip, or source over any time range, and let agents inspect publicly shared videos too. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Batched video edits**: Add, update, and remove overlays, effects, sound effects, and layouts in one request. Agents can also apply your saved favorite layouts, set transitions, and choose Auto size for a video. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Automatic zooms after recording**: Turn on **Auto-apply zooms** in Preferences to add click-based Auto Zooms as a recording finishes, using the zoom intensity you last chose. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom#apply-zooms-automatically-after-recording) * **Video overlays at their full length**: Adding a video from your library as an overlay now keeps as much of the clip as fits in the scene, instead of stopping after five seconds. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays#add-an-overlay) ### Updates * **Cursor spring controls**: Movement tilt and Click spring sliders join the animated cursor settings, each with its own on/off toggle. * **Faster animated backgrounds**: Animated video backgrounds now load in a fraction of the time in the editor. * **Specific preview guidance**: When the preview cannot start on an older Safari or without a hardware graphics adapter, the editor now says exactly what to do — update Safari or use Chrome, or enable hardware acceleration — and offers a support shortcut. [Learn more](/docs/help/troubleshooting/video-slow-to-load-editor#why-does-the-editor-show-an-error-instead-of-my-video) * **Tab titles**: The browser tab title updates when you rename a video. ### Bug fixes * **Timeline edits**: When you trim a cut, zoom, effect, or layout, the playhead now stays where you left it while the preview follows the edge you're moving. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/trim-and-split-clips#trim-the-start-or-end) * **Overlays and subtitles around cuts**: Overlays fully removed by a cut no longer appear later in the video, and subtitles on audio layers now show in the editor. * **Sped-up playback**: Speech stays intelligible at 2x and 3x in the editor instead of turning to mush. * **Playback controls**: A quick pause and play no longer leaves the video frozen, small backward seeks no longer stall the editor, switching from Layout to Style pauses playback properly, and animated cursors always glide back to their starting position at the end of a loop. * **Transcript panel**: The language picker no longer covers the search bar or the Find Mistakes buttons. * **Account email changes**: Changing your account email now requires a confirmation code sent to the new address. [Learn more](/docs/help/account/change-email) **August 28, 2026** ## Animated cursors, multi-layer editing, and clip muting Give your cursor its own motion style, edit several overlays as one group, and mute a clip without touching its volume controls — plus feature requests in support chat and a round of editing, playback, and export fixes. * **Animated cursor controls**: Choose the cursor style and size, tune movement smoothing and click ripples, fade it while inactive, return it at the end of a loop, and add motion blur or shrink the camera during zooms. The same settings are available through the API and MCP. * **Edit overlays together**: Cmd/Ctrl-select several overlays to move, split, copy, and paste them as a group while keeping their timing, spacing, and stacking. Visual overlays can also be dragged between tracks or moved up and down, with clearer edge snapping and alignment guides. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline) * **Mute a clip**: Right-click a clip or open its ⋯ menu to mute or unmute all of its audio in one undoable step. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/adjust-audio-levels#mute-an-entire-clip) * **Request a feature in support chat**: The AI assistant now includes an **I'd like to request a feature** shortcut and a guided form, so you can send an idea directly to the support team without leaving the conversation. [Learn more](/docs/help/support/ai-assistant#requesting-a-feature) ### Updates * **Text backgrounds that follow every line**: Multiline text backgrounds now hug each line instead of drawing one large box around the whole text area, with smooth joins and shadows across the shape. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/text-overlays#add-a-background-box) * **Highlights and blurs during zooms**: Add a highlight or blur while zoomed in and it now appears in the visible part of the frame, ready to drag, instead of landing off-canvas. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting#use-blur-and-highlight-with-crops-layouts-and-zooms) * **Clearer preview failures**: If the editor preview cannot start, it now explains whether the browser, graphics, or media is the problem and offers Retry instead of leaving a blank canvas. [Learn more](/docs/help/troubleshooting/video-slow-to-load-editor#why-does-the-editor-show-an-error-instead-of-my-video) ### Bug fixes * **Editor connection interruptions**: Brief network changes or realtime service restarts no longer block editing. The editor keeps syncing changes in the background and reconnects automatically. * **Remove buffers**: Removing start and end buffers no longer mistakes a pause in the middle of a clip for trailing silence and cuts into the next sentence. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-a-video#step-2-use-ai-cutting-tools-optional-faster) * **Cursor motion across cuts**: Animated cursors now glide across cuts using your chosen smoothing instead of jumping to the next position. * **Cursor icon changes**: Animated cursors now follow sustained pointer changes, such as hovering over a link, while filtering out brief icon flicker and preserving changes around clicks. Chrome tab recordings also preserve zoom-in and zoom-out pointers, and all three macOS styles now draw those pointers with accurate artwork, hotspots, colors, and shadows. * **Firefox editing**: Video playback in the editor stays in order on Firefox, and unsupported video formats report a useful error instead of retrying forever. [Learn more](/docs/help/troubleshooting/video-slow-to-load-editor#why-does-the-editor-show-an-error-instead-of-my-video) * **Script and subtitle panels**: The final lines can scroll clear of floating controls, and a ready clip's script stays editable while another clip is still being transcribed. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-the-transcript-of-a-tella-video#accessing-the-transcript) * **Playback from the beginning**: Seeking back to the start no longer leaves the editor stuck loading or lands several seconds ahead. * **Exports**: Untitled videos now finish exporting and send a download email, while damaged optional overlays are skipped instead of failing the whole video. [Learn more](/docs/help/account/notification-settings#export-notifications) * **Smaller editor windows**: Auto Layouts keeps its Generate button available on short screens. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-auto-layouts#how-to-generate-auto-layouts) **August 21, 2026** ## Adaptive zooms for everyone, a rebuilt recorder toolbar, and support in one conversation Auto Zoom now follows your clicks by default, the web recorder's camera controls and speaker notes have a proper home, and the AI assistant and our support team finally share one thread — plus a new set of free tools, and a round of editor and export fixes. * **Adaptive zooms by default**: The Adaptive auto-zoom style — zooms that follow the clicks in your recording instead of a fixed rhythm — is now available to everyone and selected by default. Subtle, Moderate, and Intense are still in the picker, and if you've already chosen one, it stays. * **A better web recorder**: Camera controls while sharing your screen now live in one settings popover — background effects, blur strength, fit/fill, and mirror together in the same place. Speaker notes can be resized, hidden, and brought back, and the teleprompter gains play/pause, picks up from wherever you scroll, and reads at 120, 160, or 200 words per minute. Your notes height, text size, and speed are remembered for next time. * **One support conversation**: Your chat with the Ask AI assistant is now saved to your account rather than a single browser, so it's there when you come back or switch devices. When you hand off to a human, the whole conversation goes with you, and the team's reply lands back in that same thread with an unread badge instead of only arriving by email. [Learn more](/docs/help/support/ai-assistant) * **Free tools**: A new directory at [tella.com/tools](https://www.tella.com/tools) gathers every free tool in one place, including a video speed changer, an online teleprompter, and video compressors for [Discord](https://www.tella.com/tools/video-compressor-for-discord) and [email](https://www.tella.com/tools/compress-video-for-email). They run entirely in your browser; nothing is uploaded. [Learn more](/docs/help/tips/compress-videos-for-discord-and-email) ### Updates * **Waveforms on long recordings**: The editor now draws timeline waveforms progressively for the part of the video you're looking at, instead of decoding the whole recording up front, so hours-long videos stay responsive. * **System appearance in the command menu**: A **Use system appearance** action lets you switch Tella back to following your device's light or dark setting without opening preferences. * **Sharper AI features**: Auto Layouts, video Q\&A, Find Mistakes, chapters, and titles now run on newer models. * **Crop on smaller screens**: The crop window's Position and Size controls move into a ⋯ menu when there isn't room for them inline, instead of wrapping. ### Bug fixes * **Exports starting black**: Exported videos now show their first frame immediately instead of opening on a brief empty moment. * **Audio across format changes**: Recordings that change sample rate or channel count partway through no longer drop a fragment of audio at the boundary. * **Blurs and highlights around cuts**: Blurs and highlights now line up with the timeline after cuts are removed, stay visible on the final frame when playback stops at the end of a scene, and one added at a playhead parked inside a cut starts where the footage resumes. * **Screen Fit on Auto-ratio layouts**: Fit stays available on later full-screen camera bubble sections, so you don't lose the crop you set. * **Upload progress**: A partly finished upload no longer reads "100%" — the percentage is rounded down, so 100% means done. * **Seeking during playback**: Seeking no longer waits on video segments already being downloaded, so scrubbing lands where you asked without stalling. * **Editing in Firefox**: Videos in formats Firefox supports now play smoothly and in the correct order in the editor instead of appearing blank, stalling, or replaying finished frames out of order. If Firefox cannot decode a format such as HEVC, the editor now explains the problem and suggests using Chrome. * **Stuck transcripts**: A recording whose transcript failed to save now reports the failure and offers to transcribe again, instead of sitting on Loading indefinitely. ### API & MCP * **Batched edits**: A new `apply_video_edits` tool and `POST /v1/videos/{id}/edits` endpoint apply up to 200 sound effects, text overlays, zooms, blurs, highlights, and media overlays as a single edit. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Accurate click events**: `get_mouse_events` now reports a click once, at the moment the button goes down, instead of repeating it for every sample of a drag. Cursor positions are unchanged. **August 19, 2026** ## Backgrounds for text overlays, and waveforms back on sound effects Put your text on a solid background box with its own shape and shadow, and see the waveform inside every sound effect clip again. * **Text overlay backgrounds**: Text overlays can now sit on a solid background, with a Regular or Squircle shape and the same shadow presets used elsewhere in the editor. The shape and shadow controls appear once a background is set, and one click removes the background again. Backgrounds carry through the preview, exports, and duplicated videos, and are available through the API and MCP. * **Waveforms on overlay clips**: Sound effect and video overlays draw their waveform inside the card again, so lining a sound up with what's happening on screen isn't guesswork. Sounds from Tella's library show their waveform the moment you drop them on the timeline. ### Bug fixes * **Loom imports**: Imports that spun forever and left an empty library now finish. If one of yours got stuck, run the import again. * **Recorder errors**: When a camera or microphone can't be opened — because another app has claimed it, or a Continuity Camera drops mid-setup — the recorder now says so instead of sitting there with no camera. * **Menus behind notifications**: Dropdown menus opened while a notification is on screen no longer render underneath it. **August 14, 2026** ## A sound effects library, custom fonts, and every layout in one place Drop in a sound from Tella's own library, bring your brand's typefaces into text overlays, and browse the full set of layouts in one sheet — plus a big round of timeline, overlay, and export improvements. * **Sound effects library**: The Sound Effects panel now includes a library of Tella sounds, grouped into Interface, Transitions, Reactions, Atmosphere, and Everyday. Hit play on a tile to hear it, or click the tile to drop it on the timeline at the playhead. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects) * **Custom fonts for text overlays**: Upload your own `.ttf` or `.otf` fonts to a personal or workspace library, search and preview them, and use them in any text overlay. Your fonts carry through the editor preview, duplicated videos, and exports. * **Browse all layouts**: A new **Browse all** button in the Presets header opens a sheet listing every layout in one scroll, grouped under the same family names, with anything new gathered at the top — dozens of layouts instead of the handful of tiles the panel has room for. * **Background and borders across the whole video**: Background, shape, and border style now apply to the entire video by default, with a **this clip only** checkbox when you want one clip to differ. ### Updates * **Text alignment**: Text overlays can be aligned left, center, or right, both on the canvas and in the preview. * **Smooth blurs and highlights**: Blurs and highlights now offer Smooth or Hard cut transitions, so they fade in and out instead of snapping on. Existing masks keep their current hard cut. * **Rotate overlays**: Image and video overlays can be rotated on the canvas. * **Timelines on long videos**: The editor timelines stay readable on hours-long recordings — the time ruler thins out as you zoom, the waveform reads as a clean silhouette instead of dense noise, and the transcript row collapses on videos with no speech. * **Reset all, on every tool**: Every timeline toolbar now ends with the same ⋯ menu containing a reset for that tool, and each reset shows an undo toast so one click is never a dead end. * **Named backgrounds**: Built-in solid, gradient, image, animated, and shader backgrounds now have real names, shown on hover in the background picker. * **Overlay panel**: The Effect panel is now called **Overlay**, matching what it actually holds — text, media, sound effects, highlights, and blurs. * **Chrome extension**: Cancelling or restarting a recording now asks for confirmation first, and tab recordings capture cursor movement and clicks alongside the video. * **Clearer clip upload states**: Preparing, uploading, and finished states use consistent icons and copy, including progress across multiple files. * **Faster Layout mode**: Editing in Layout mode no longer slows the editor to a crawl on longer videos. * **API and MCP**: Text overlays, microphone and system audio volumes, and transcript word corrections are now available to agents, alongside a new consolidated timeline read and clip-level mouse events. Errors also carry structured codes, so a client can tell a retryable failure from a fatal one. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) ### Bug fixes * **Export sync**: Downloaded videos no longer play with the video running two frames ahead of the audio. * **Uploads on slow networks**: Browser uploads that used to freeze at 0–2% on slow or flaky connections now retry and finish. * **Find Mistakes on long recordings**: Videos longer than about an hour now return real results instead of reporting no mistakes found. * **Adding an existing clip**: Picking a clip through **Add clip → Select from existing** no longer fails after you've removed a clip from the video. * **Camera resolution**: The Chrome extension no longer hides 1080p after a momentary camera hiccup. * **Playback and exports**: Recordings containing an empty segment now play and export instead of failing outright. * **Exporting with overlays**: Export waits for overlay media to finish uploading, instead of starting without it. * **Short editor windows**: The layout picker and editor chrome stay usable on short screens. * **Comments**: Long commenter names no longer push the timestamp onto a second line, and times read compactly ("22h ago"). * **Embeds**: Embedding and oEmbed now work with `/view` links and bare video IDs. **August 7, 2026** ## Faster embeds, snappier subtitle editing, and a media library API Embedded videos load quicker and pull far less data before anyone presses play, subtitle editing stays responsive in long videos, and your media library is now available through the public API and MCP. * **Faster embeds**: Embedded videos now load on a lean page built just for embeds, with the poster image prioritized and pre-play buffering capped. An idle embed downloads roughly a third of what it used to, and the first frame appears noticeably sooner. * **Snappier subtitle editing**: Clicking a word, seeking, playing, and saving edits in the subtitle editor stay fast in long, word-heavy videos instead of slowing down as the transcript grows. * **Media library in the API**: Browse and manage your media library through the public API and MCP. List and remove every kind of item — images, videos, sound effects, music, and LUTs — and add images, videos, and sound effects from your uploads. Anything you add is available in the editor's Media library and Sound effects panels, and can be dropped straight into a video. ### Updates * **Better AI title emoji**: Auto-generated titles now only pick an emoji that reflects what the video is about, never one inferred from the speaker's name. * **Page size in video listings**: Listing videos through the public API and MCP now honors the limit you ask for instead of always returning 15. ### Bug fixes * **Seeking past cuts**: Seeking in the editor now lands exactly where you asked, instead of jumping to a nearby point when the playhead crosses a cut. * **MCP connections**: Stricter MCP clients, including Codex CLI, can now connect to Tella's MCP server instead of failing during setup. * **Recording uploads**: Fixed a processing failure that could stop high-detail screen recordings from finishing their upload. * **Studio Voice**: Enhanced audio is now saved per recording, so a hiccup on one clip no longer re-runs enhancement on the clips that already finished. **August 6, 2026** ## Tella in Claude's Connector Directory Tella is now available in [Claude's Connector Directory](https://claude.ai/directory/tella). Connect your workspace without copying an MCP URL or editing a config file, then ask Claude to browse and manage videos, edit clips, organize playlists, export videos, and more. **August 4, 2026** ## Text Layers Add titles, labels, captions, and callouts directly on top of your recording. Type on the canvas, then customize the font, color, size, position, timing, and transition — and layer multiple pieces of text wherever you need them. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/text-overlays) **July 31, 2026** ## Variable fonts for text overlays, a new Perspective layout, and more Style your text with a bigger font library and fine-grained weight and width control, reach for a new 3D-tilt layout, and frame your camera exactly how you want while recording — plus editing refinements and a batch of fixes. * **Variable fonts for text overlays**: Text overlays now use an expanded font library with full variable-font control. Pick a named weight (like SemiBold · 600) and width (like Condensed · 82), scrub the exact values, and see each option previewed in its own typeface. * **Perspective layout**: A new **Perspective** layout adds a subtle 3D tilt to your camera and screen, available in the layout picker with its own thumbnail. * **Frame your camera while recording**: A new fit/fill toggle in the recorder's camera preview lets you choose whether your camera fills the frame or fits inside it. ### Updates * **Confirm before cancelling a recording**: The web recorder now asks for confirmation before you cancel a recording, so you can't lose one by accident. * **Clearer recording storage errors**: When your browser runs out of storage mid-recording, Tella now stops cleanly and explains what happened instead of failing silently. * **Raw recording exports per scene**: The **Raw recordings (with cuts)** export now delivers separate camera and screen files for each scene, grouped into numbered folders. * **Remove uploaded backgrounds**: You can now delete your own uploaded backgrounds from the style picker. * **Scrubber thumbnails**: Hovering the timeline on the view and embed pages now previews the frame under your cursor. ### Bug fixes * **Transparent WebM overlays**: Transparent WebM video overlays now keep their transparency instead of rendering on a solid background. * **ProRes 4444 overlays**: ProRes 4444 overlays now display correctly in the editor. * **Exports from 10-bit sources**: Videos with 10-bit source footage no longer export as blank frames. * **SVG images**: SVG images now render in your video instead of dropping the frame. * **Silent sections**: Videos with sections that have no audio now render reliably. * **Playback speed shortcut**: The spacebar keeps controlling playback after you pick a playback speed. ### API & MCP * **Captions in the API**: The public API and MCP now expose caption settings and can download rendered subtitle files (SRT and VTT). * **Background catalog**: Browse and apply Tella's built-in backgrounds through the public API and MCP. * **Auto crop**: Turn on auto crop for your videos through the public API and MCP. ### Support * **Close your own tickets**: You can now mark your own support tickets as resolved from the support portal when you've sorted things out. **July 24, 2026** ## Export raw recordings, select all your videos, connect your AI tools, and more Export your original camera and screen recordings with cuts applied, select every video at once, and set up Tella in your favorite AI tools — plus editing improvements and a batch of fixes. * **Export raw recordings**: A new **Raw recordings (with cuts)** export gives you separate camera and screen video files with your timeline cuts applied and no layout, crop, overlays, or effects. Optionally keep studio sound applied. * **Select all videos**: A new **Select all** button in the selection bar fetches and selects every video across My videos, Workspace videos, playlists, and Trash. Press **⌘A** to select the videos already loaded on the page. * **Connect Tella to your AI tools**: A new **Tella MCP** settings page walks you through connecting ChatGPT, Claude, Cursor, Codex, and other MCP clients, with copy-ready setup commands. Linear and Notion now live under a dedicated **Connections** page. ### Updates * **Remembered library sort**: Your chosen library sort order now sticks across visits. * **Transcript selection**: In the trim transcript editor, double-click to select a word and triple-click to select a whole sentence. * **Media length limits**: Media and B-roll sections can no longer be dragged longer than their source, so clips stop unexpectedly looping. * **Requests on expired trials**: Recipients with an expired trial can still record and fulfill a pending Request from you. * **Export email links**: Export notification emails now include a link to your notification settings. ### Bug fixes * **Playback speed**: The view page no longer resets playback speed to 1x when the video source reloads. * **Volume when splitting**: Splitting a section now keeps each part's media volume. * **Emoji in text**: Emoji now render in text overlay layers. * **Subtitles in more languages**: Subtitles in scripts like Devanagari now render correctly instead of showing empty boxes. * **Transparent overlays**: Transparent ProRes overlays now render correctly. * **GIF exports**: Small GIF exports are no longer cropped at the corners. * **Video titles**: An empty AI-generated title no longer wipes your video's existing name. * **Library refresh**: Bulk delete and restore now update your library right away. * **Masks while zoomed**: Blur and highlight masks can be dragged onto parts of a layer that sit outside the canvas at zoomed timestamps, and stay anchored when you crop. * **Branding uploads**: Fixed a spinner that could get stuck when uploading branding images. * **White-label previews**: Social link previews for white-label videos use your own domain and drop Tella branding. ### API & MCP * **Chapters**: Read and set a video's chapters through the public API and MCP. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Webhooks**: List and update your webhook subscriptions through the public API and MCP. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) **July 17, 2026** ## Sound effect volume, faster timeline editing, smarter sharing, and more Fine-tune sound effects, get more editing actions from a right-click, keep your preferred canvas size for new videos, plus improvements to sharing, playback, exports, and the public API. * **Sound effect volume**: Each sound effect now has its own volume slider, so you can balance it against speech, music, and other audio without removing it. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects) * **Cut timeline context menu**: Right-click directly in the Cut timeline to split a selection, add a zoom or layout, or copy the selection to a new clip or video. * **Remembered canvas size**: When you choose a canvas ratio such as 16:9, 9:16, 1:1, or Auto, Tella remembers it and starts your next video with the same choice. * **Better controls on narrow videos**: Portrait videos and other narrow players now move speed, captions, and volume into a **More** menu, keeping play, time, and fullscreen controls easy to reach. * **Custom thumbnails in email shares**: Static email thumbnails and video posters now use your uploaded custom thumbnail instead of falling back to the video's first frame. ### Updates * **Copy selections without losing cuts**: Copying a transcript selection to a new clip or video now preserves any cuts already made inside the selection. * **Cleaner fast playback**: Pitch-preserved audio sounds less metallic when previewing at speeds other than 1x. * **Chrome recording controls**: Hide the floating recording controls once and they stay hidden across every tab until the recording ends. ### Bug fixes * **Copied subtitles**: Copying all subtitles no longer adds an extra space at the start of every line. * **Auto Layouts**: Auto Layouts can recover automatically when prepared video files have expired instead of failing repeatedly. * **API uploads**: Image sources no longer stay stuck on **Processing**, and stalled video or audio sources are retried when processing never started. * **GIF exports**: Fixed animated GIF exports that could fail after the first frame, and made colors more consistent from frame to frame. ### API & MCP * **Custom thumbnails**: Upload an image, choose a frame, or reset a video's thumbnail through the public API and MCP. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Background music**: Set or remove a video's looping background music track through the public API and MCP. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Export status**: List a video's exports and poll an export by ID, including with the new MCP status tool. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Mute sound effects**: Sound-effect volume now accepts zero through the public API and MCP. **July 12, 2026** ## Product Update: July 2026 [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmrexagbu013z04l77ccg750u/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmrexagbu013z04l77ccg750u/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Grant walks through the biggest updates from the past few weeks: automatic canvas sizing, a rebuilt cut timeline, and a wave of new features for the Windows app and Chrome extension. * **Auto Canvas**: Tella now sizes the canvas for you based on your screen recording and layout, instead of locking you to 16:9, 9:16, or 1:1. Pick a full-screen layout and the canvas wraps perfectly to your recording — so you can drop the background entirely. * **Redesigned timeline**: The cut timeline has been rebuilt from the ground up. It's faster and snappier, with a higher-resolution waveform, timestamps so you always know where you are, and a bigger workspace that makes trimming and cutting easier. * **Windows app**: Pause and resume mid-recording, add Auto Zoom effects in the editor (previously Mac only), and read from an invisible teleprompter with speaker notes. * **Chrome extension**: Blur or replace your camera background (or upload your own), turn off the countdown, and see yourself in a picture-in-picture preview while you screen record. * **Organize with tags and drag-and-drop**: Drag videos straight into playlists one at a time or in bulk, and add tags to organize your library however you like. * **Skills directory**: A new home for open-source video workflows built and tested for Claude Code, including skills to edit local files and publish your latest Tella recording to YouTube. **July 10, 2026** ## Video tags, self-serve SSO, batch export, camera cropping, and more Organize your library with tags, set up SSO and directory sync yourself, export videos in bulk, crop your camera in the editor, record from your phone, plus a long list of editor, playlist, and API improvements. * **Video tags**: Organize your library with tags. Create workspace tags your whole team can use or private tags just for you, add them to any video, and filter **My Videos** by tag. Tags also appear on video thumbnails and inside playlists. [Watch the video demo on the community](https://community.tella.tv/c/product-updates/organize-your-videos-with-tags) * **Self-serve SSO & directory sync**: Workspace owners can now set up single sign-on (SAML) and SCIM directory sync themselves from Settings, no back-and-forth required. Each is available as a \$125/month add-on to your workspace subscription, and both are included on Enterprise plans. [Learn more](/docs/help/admin/set-up-sso) * **Batch export**: Select multiple videos in your library and export them in one go. Each renders as an MP4 and you get an email with a link to download them all as a zip. [Learn more](/docs/help/export-videos/batch-export-videos) * **Camera crop**: You can now crop your camera and set its focus point in the editor — the same controls you already have for screen recordings and uploads — making it easy to reframe a webcam. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/adjust-your-camera-frame) * **Record on mobile**: The web recorder now works on phones and tablets. Open it on mobile to capture a quick camera-and-mic video and go straight to sharing. * **Transcript search**: Search within a video's transcript from the script editor. Matching words are highlighted and counted, and an AI mode can find the moments you mean even when your words don't match the transcript exactly. * **Camera backgrounds in the Chrome extension**: The Chrome extension recorder can now blur or replace your camera background, and shows a floating picture-in-picture recording HUD with quick controls while you record. [Learn more](/docs/help/recording/blur-your-camera-background) ### Updates * **Playlist groups**: Group related playlists together in the sidebar to keep a large workspace organized. * **Auto aspect ratio**: A new **Auto** ratio sizes a video's canvas to its first clip automatically, so vertical and square recordings aren't boxed into 16:9. * **Paste to upload**: Paste image or video files with **Cmd/Ctrl+V** directly into the media library to upload them. * **Trim timeline**: Split a clip at the playhead, toggle **Show cuts / Hide cuts** in the timeline toolbar, and right-click a selection to copy it to a new clip or video. * **Faster trial extensions**: If your trial has expired, the in-app AI support chat can now extend it for you on the spot instead of opening a ticket. * **Public playlist view**: Choose whether a shared playlist opens in a grid or list layout by default. ### Bug fixes * **Loom imports**: Fixed imported Loom recordings that were cut off early, or played back fast or frozen on multi-clip videos. * **Chapters**: Fixed the chapter editor closing and discarding your changes when you pressed Enter. * **Camera backgrounds**: Fixed picking a white camera background when an image background was already selected. * **Exports**: Fixed exports that could hang on videos using looped animated backgrounds. * **Shared playlists**: Custom thumbnails now show correctly on shared playlist grids and lists instead of being hidden behind the hover preview. ### API & MCP * **Upload your own media**: The public API and MCP server can now upload images and other media as sources and create a video from an uploaded source, instead of relying on externally-hosted URLs. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Remove silences**: New API and MCP tools remove silences from a clip. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Video tags**: List, add, and remove a video's tags through the public API and MCP. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **One playback timeline**: Overlay, sound-effect, and edit times in the public API now consistently use the playback timeline in milliseconds. **July 3, 2026** ## Camera backgrounds, ProRes uploads, smoother overlays, and more New camera background options in the web recorder, ProRes `.mov` playback in the editor, smoother overlay controls, plus fixes across recording, editing, embeds, and exports. * **Camera backgrounds**: In the web recorder, you can now choose blur, a solid color, or a preset image for your camera background. The background effect also starts more reliably and avoids black-camera fallbacks while it loads. [Learn more](/docs/help/recording/blur-your-camera-background) * **Cleaner screen audio**: Browser recordings now keep shared tab and system audio unprocessed, so music and product audio sound less muffled. * **ProRes in the editor**: ProRes `.mov` uploads now play and seek in the web editor instead of being rejected by browser playback. * **Media fit controls**: Media layouts now have a Cover/Letterbox control, so B-roll can fill the frame or preserve its full aspect ratio. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-media) * **Overlay transitions**: Image and video overlays can use Smooth or Hard cut transitions, and Smooth fades are now the default for new overlays. * **New onboarding**: New users now see a full-screen onboarding flow for goals, style, recording, and plan selection. ### Updates * **Trim timeline polish**: The newer trimming timeline has a raised playhead, clearer cut styling, better drag feedback, real timestamp tooltips, and more useful waveforms for dense edits. * **Overlay waveforms**: Sound effects and video overlays now show waveforms on the timeline, making it easier to place and trim them precisely. * **Re-record wording**: The clip context menu now says **Re-record** instead of **Replace clip**, making the action clearer. ### Bug fixes * **Script panel actions**: Fixed the selection-toolbar menu in the script panel so **Edit subtitle text**, **Keep only this**, **Copy to new video/clip**, and **Remove all filler words** work again. * **Recorder device menus**: Long camera or microphone names no longer overflow the device dropdown, and tall device lists are easier to scroll. * **Video overlays**: Video overlays now respond correctly when you pause or seek in the editor, and trimming an overlay no longer loops past the source video's real duration. * **Exports and uploads**: Fixed non-16:9 videos exporting with a mismatched logo size, and improved handling for recordings, uploads, and transcripts that previously got stuck or created empty videos in edge cases. * **Embeds**: The embed play button is visible on light backgrounds, and full-size video embeds fit more precisely. ### API & MCP * **Generate auto layouts and auto zooms**: The public API and MCP server can now generate AI layouts and click-based zooms for a clip, and Studio Sound can be enabled for a video or disabled per clip. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Overlays and sound effects**: New API and MCP tools let you list, add, update, and remove clip overlays and sound effects. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Safer zoom creation**: Adding a zoom through the API or MCP now requires the fields needed for playback and export, so incomplete zooms are rejected instead of creating broken videos. **June 26, 2026** ## Transfer video ownership, a smarter AI support assistant, and a batch of fixes You can now hand a video off to a teammate, the AI support chat resolves more questions on its own, plus a long list of editor, export, upload, and viewer fixes. * **Transfer video ownership**: A video's creator can now transfer ownership to another workspace member — Google Docs-style. Add them as an editor, then choose **Transfer ownership** from their access dropdown; you stay on as an editor so you keep access. * **"My Videos" creator filter**: A new **All / Created by me / Shared with me** filter on My Videos makes it easy to see which videos you still own after transferring some away. * **Smarter AI support chat**: The Ask AI assistant now diagnoses your actual video status before escalating, confirms before handing off to a human, gives clearer billing and refund guidance, and is less likely to invent menus or shortcuts that don't exist. [Learn more](/docs/help/support/ai-assistant) ### Updates * **Muted audio in the B-roll trim preview**: The trim modal now reflects a clip's real (effective) volume and shows a clear muted indicator when the B-roll's audio is off. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-media) ### Bug fixes * **More uploads convert reliably**: Certain Android recordings with unusual color tags that previously got stuck in processing now convert, and some HDR uploads no longer come out washed-out or crushed. * **Exports with external images**: Fixed exports that failed with a "broken asset" error when a video used externally-hosted images. * **Exporting mid-conversion**: Starting an export while one of its recordings was still finishing conversion no longer fails — we now wait for it to be ready. * **Lost web recordings**: Fixed a rare case where a browser recording could silently lose its footage when local storage stalled; it now falls back to a backup store so the recording is preserved. * **Timestamped links**: `?t=` links now jump to the right moment again on shared video pages served from cache. * **Embedded media fit**: Fixed full-size embeds that were cropping their media instead of fitting it. * **Thumbnails**: Fixed thumbnails failing to load on custom domains and embeds, and stale thumbnails not refreshing after you edit a video. * **Dropdown polish**: Fixed dark-mode styling on several dropdowns and a small upward jump when opening grouped sort/filter menus. ### API & MCP * **Simpler B-roll via `add_layout`**: The `layout` argument is now optional — omit it and we apply the right full-frame B-roll layout for the clip automatically, so adding B-roll is just a clip, a time range, and the media. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) **June 19, 2026** ## A big Chrome extension update, regenerate titles from the view page, subtitle word editing, and more A faster and more capable Chrome extension, regenerating a video's AI title without opening the editor, deleting or restoring individual subtitle words, plus a long list of editor, export, and upload fixes. * **Chrome extension upgrade**: The extension now loads and opens dramatically faster, adds resolution pickers for your camera (480p–1080p) and screen (up to 4K), supports quick mode (stop recording and land straight on the view page), and has a friendlier permissions flow with clear guidance when camera or mic access is blocked. [Get it here](https://try.tella.com/chrome) * **Regenerate the title from the view page**: Creators and editors can now regenerate (or cancel) a video's AI-generated title directly on the view page — no need to jump back into the editor. * **Delete or restore single subtitle words**: Right-click a word in the subtitle editor for **Delete** and **Restore** actions, so you can drop a stray word or bring one back without editing the whole line. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/edit-the-transcript-of-a-tella-video) ### Updates * **Trim B-roll clips inline**: Right-click a B-roll video and choose **Trim** to open a dedicated trim modal with a video preview, waveform timeline, draggable playhead, trim handles, and editable in/out time inputs. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-media) * **Type exact blur & highlight timing**: Selecting a blur or highlight effect now shows editable **Start** and **End** timestamp fields, so you can type precise timing instead of only dragging the timeline handles. * **Full-width sidebar tabs on mobile**: The video view sidebar's tabs now use the full available width on smaller screens. ### Bug fixes * **Studio Voice per clip in the preview**: Disabling Studio Voice for a single clip now affects the editor preview audio of uploaded video clips, matching how it already worked on export. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/studio-voice-audio-enhancement) * **Timeline seeking**: Clicking the timeline now lands the playhead exactly under your cursor instead of a few pixels to the right. * **B-roll in camera-only clips**: Fixed fit/fill of image and video B-roll in camera-only scenes, and stopped empty placeholders from lingering behind real media. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-media) * **Custom layout exports**: Fixed exports that could hang indefinitely when a B-roll section used a Custom layout. * **Stuck uploads**: Fixed several cases where uploads could get stuck at "processing" — odd-dimension recordings, very small frames, certain bitstreams, and very high-bitrate source files (e.g. ProRes) now convert reliably. * **Filler words in exported subtitles**: Exported videos no longer show filler or false-start words in burned-in subtitles that already looked clean in the editor. * **Clip rename overflow**: Long names typed while renaming a clip now stay inside the clip tile. * **Embed autoplay**: Embedded videos with autoplay and mute parameters now reliably start playing instead of being blocked by the browser. ### API & MCP * **No more MCP re-auth loops**: MCP clients (Cursor, Claude, and others) now receive a refresh token, so connections stay authenticated silently instead of dropping and re-prompting every few minutes. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) **June 12, 2026** ## Vertical 50/50 layouts, transparent uploads, B-roll on every clip, and more First-class Side-by-Side layouts on portrait and square videos, transparent video uploads, video dimensions in the API, and a long list of fixes. * **Side-by-Side 50/50 on portrait and square**: The vertical 50/50 split is now a first-class layout — adding or replacing media no longer collapses your camera into a bubble, and a new Camera **Top/Bottom** control lets you flip the halves. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-layouts) * **Transparent video uploads**: WebM uploads with an alpha channel now keep their transparency instead of being flattened — perfect for overlay B-roll that composites cleanly over the rest of your video. * **B-roll on camera-only and screen-only clips**: Media sections now work on every clip type, with independent **Screen** and **Camera** source controls per section — your camera stays visible as a bubble while the B-roll plays. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-media) * **Add a zoom until the end**: Hold **Cmd/Ctrl** on the zoom toolbar's Add Zoom button to extend the new zoom from the playhead all the way to the next zoom or the end of the clip. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom) * **Static captions**: A new "Word-by-word highlighting" toggle on the Backdrop caption style lets you show whole lines at full opacity — an accessibility-friendly alternative to the animated default. * **Play button on email thumbnails**: The Share → Email modal has a new toggle that overlays a play button on animated and static thumbnails, so recipients immediately see it's a video. ### Updates * **Self-serve trial extension**: Workspace owners can extend an active trial by 7 days — or restart an expired one — once per workspace at [tella.tv/extend-trial](https://www.tella.tv/extend-trial). * **Clip durations at a glance**: Hovering a clip in the editor's clip strip now shows its duration (with cuts excluded) in the tooltip. * **Know why a recording stopped**: If your screen share ends or your camera or mic disconnects mid-recording, the recorder now tells you exactly what happened instead of silently stopping. * **Faster transcript editing**: Clicking, seeking, and play/pause in the transcript editor are now instant on long videos. ### API & MCP * **Set video dimensions via `update_video`**: Pass `dimensions: {width, height}` to resize a video (e.g. 16:9 → 9:16) — every clip's layouts are remapped to the new ratio automatically, just like the editor's Size switcher, and the video response now includes the current dimensions. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **Vertical side-by-side via `add_layout`**: Portrait and square clips now accept `kind: "side-by-side"` with the camera on top or bottom, and `list_layouts` round-trips these sections instead of returning `null`. * **Smarter thumbnail defaults**: Thumbnail endpoints now derive default dimensions from the video's own aspect ratio, so default requests on portrait and square videos no longer fail. ### Bug fixes * **ZIP exports on Windows**: Clips with characters like `?` or `:` in their names are no longer hidden or missing when opening exported ZIPs in Windows Explorer. * **Password-protected downloads**: Viewers can now download password-protected videos when downloads are enabled, including on custom domains. * **Timelapse re-exports**: Re-exporting a timelapse no longer returns the full-length video. * **View milestone emails**: Crossing several view milestones at once now sends a single email for the highest one instead of one per milestone. * **Remove silences**: Silence removal no longer leaves dead air before sentences, and Faster mode detects short pauses between words again. * **Zoom resize handles**: Fixed zooms that couldn't be resized when an adjacent zoom was hidden inside a cut. * **AI output language**: Chapters and generated documents now reliably follow the transcript's language, and document-type suggestions are back. * **Background music in cut mode**: Fixed background music blasting at full volume when previewing past heavy cuts in the editor. * **Embed scrollbars on Windows**: Fixed scrollbars flickering in embedded videos whenever a new subtitle line appeared. **June 8, 2026** ## Studio Voice per clip With Studio Voice enabled, you can now turn it off for individual clips while keeping it on across the rest of your video. Check **Disable for this clip** in the Studio Voice panel when a clip already sounds the way you want — handy for clips with music, sound effects, or audio you'd rather leave untouched. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/studio-voice-audio-enhancement) **June 5, 2026** ## Restore removed clips, Tella for Windows in the recorder, and a batch of fixes You can now bring back clips you removed from a video, the Windows app is surfaced right in the recorder, there's a new filter for reusing only your own clips, analytics is out of beta, and a long list of editor and export fixes. * **Restore removed clips**: Removed a clip and want it back? The "Add clip" menu now has a **Restore removed clip** option that opens a grid of everything you've taken out, so you can drop any of them back onto the timeline. Removing a clip also shows an **Undo** toast for an instant one-click revert. * **Record with the Windows app from the web**: When you click record, Windows users now see a **Tella for Windows** card on the Choose screen, alongside the browser recorder. [Learn more](/docs/help/recording/record-a-video-using-the-windows-app) * **Set your default recorder on Windows**: The **Recorder** preference — choose the default recorder for new videos and clips — is now available on Windows, with a "Windows app" option. * **"Only my videos" filter for existing clips**: The "Select from existing" clip modal has a new toggle (on by default) that shows only clips from your own videos instead of everything shared across your team. ### Updates * **Analytics is out of beta**: The beta banner and related copy are gone — analytics is now a first-class part of the product. ### API & MCP * **Layouts keep your camera, screen, and audio**: Inserting video or image B-roll into a section via `add_layout` / `update_layout` no longer drops the other layers (camera, screen, narration) for that section. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) ### Bug fixes * **Separate clips ZIP exports**: Fixed "Separate clips (.zip)" exports that could intermittently return the wrong clips, too few clips, or the full video. [Learn more](/docs/help/sharing/share-and-download-a-video) * **Silent sound effects in exports**: Fixed sound effects playing as silence in rendered videos. * **Add clip → Record new clip**: With the "Always ask" recording preference, this now opens the Choose screen instead of jumping straight into the browser recorder. * **Chapter regeneration banner**: The "regenerate chapters" banner now survives a page reload, and you can save after deleting the last chapter. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/chapters) * **Color picker overlap**: Fixed the color picker dropdown overlapping or being clipped in workspace and viewer settings. * **Workspace name & logo**: Changing your workspace name or logo now updates the sidebar immediately. **May 29, 2026** ## Auto-layout B-roll controls, persistent AI chat, and more Finer control over auto-layout B-roll, an Ask AI assistant that remembers your conversation, and a few editor improvements. * **B-roll toggle for auto layouts**: A new switch in the auto layouts options lets you turn AI-generated image B-roll on or off. It's on by default and remembers your choice. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-auto-layouts) * **Camera audio in camera-only B-roll**: Camera-only B-roll sections now keep your camera audio while hiding the source video. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/adjust-audio-levels) * **Persistent AI support chat**: The Ask AI assistant now keeps your conversation across closing the sidebar and reloading the page, with a **New chat** button to start fresh. [Learn more](/docs/help/support/ai-assistant) * **Aspect-ratio B-roll placeholders**: Empty B-roll placeholders now match your story's aspect ratio, so the framing you see matches the final export. **May 22, 2026** ## Export improvements, social safe zones, B-roll volume, and more A bigger, more reliable export flow, a new previewing tool for portrait videos, finer audio control over B-roll, and a long list of editor and API improvements. * **Cancel exports and close the window**: While an export is preparing you can now close the modal and we'll keep working in the background — signed-in users get an email with the download link when it's ready. There's also a new **Cancel** button in the progress modal. If a teammate is exporting the same video, you'll both get the finished file and either of you can cancel without affecting the other. [Learn more](/docs/help/sharing/share-and-download-a-video) * **Social safe zones for portrait videos**: Toggle on platform-accurate overlays for Instagram Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts, and LinkedIn so you can see exactly where captions, buttons, and your profile chrome will sit on top of your 9:16 video. Available from the Setup sidebar on portrait stories. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/social-safe-zones) * **B-roll volume controls**: New media volume sliders in the audio sidebar let you set the volume of video clips used as B-roll — at the story level or per clip — independently from your mic and system audio. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/adjust-audio-levels) * **Media on the base layout**: You can now drop a media placeholder on the base layout directly. Picking Media from the base layout creates a section at the playhead and places the media there. * **Smarter silence detection**: Silence detection now combines waveform amplitude with on-device voice activity detection, so noisy mics no longer hide real pauses and quiet word-final consonants are no longer falsely cut. ### API & MCP * **Multi-range clip cuts**: `POST /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/cut` now accepts `cuts: [{fromMs, toMs}, …]` so you can apply many cuts in a single call. The legacy single-range body still works. [API reference](/docs/api-reference/clips/cut-one-or-more-time-ranges-from-a-clip) * **Cut by transcript words**: New `POST /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/cut-by-transcript` takes word index ranges against the uncut transcript and resolves them to exact timestamps — no need to compute milliseconds. * **MCP**: `cut_clip` exposes the multi-range form; new `cut_clip_by_transcript` tool wraps the transcript-word endpoint. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) ### Updates * **Subtitle position input**: Set the subtitle's vertical position by typing an exact percentage, alongside drag-to-place. * **Sticky transcript actions**: When you've selected text in the transcript and scroll the selection out of view, the action buttons pin to the top so they stay reachable. * **Crop aspect ratios**: The crop tool now offers 16:10, 4:5, and 9:16 alongside the existing presets. (5:4 has been removed.) [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/crop-screen-recordings) * **Switch from Loom guide**: A new step-by-step migration guide at [tella.com/switch](https://www.tella.com/switch) for teams moving from Loom to Tella, with pitches to leadership and internal launch templates. ### Bug fixes * **Playlist badge on My Videos**: Videos added to shared playlists now show the playlist badge on the My Videos tab instead of "Add to playlist". * **B-roll crop position**: Fixed a mismatch where higher-resolution image and video B-roll could render with the wrong crop compared to what you set in the editor. * **HDR & 10-bit exports on Mac**: Fixed an issue where high-resolution HDR (e.g. iPhone Dolby Vision) and other 10-bit uploads could time out during processing. **May 15, 2026** ## A second CTA, clips in your media library, and more You can now add a second default call-to-action, reuse rendered clips across videos, and scope background changes to a single clip. * **Second default CTA**: Add a second call-to-action to your workspace branding. Both CTAs are inherited by new videos and shown side-by-side in the picker. [Learn more](/docs/help/admin/customize-your-branding) * **Clips in your media library**: Rendered clips now land in the media library so you can drop them into other videos as B-roll or intros — no re-recording needed. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/remix-and-reuse-videos-and-clips) * **"Apply to this clip only" for backgrounds**: Background picks broadcast to every clip by default. Toggle the new checkbox to scope a background to just the active clip, or uncheck it to re-sync with the rest of the video. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/pick-a-background) ### Updates * **Smoother background music slider**: The background music volume slider now uses an exponential curve, so the typical 3–5% range has real room to fine-tune instead of being crammed into the leftmost sliver of the track. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/add-background-music-to-your-video) * **Calmer active chapter styling**: The active chapter in the viewer uses a lighter background, and hover/active states no longer flicker on the chapter you're already on. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/chapters) * **Cleaner subtitle behavior on the viewer**: Subtitles on shared video pages can no longer be highlighted or selected by accident while watching. * **Settings pages always visible**: Workspace settings pages now stay visible to everyone with clearer permission states, so it's easier to see what's available on your plan and who to ask for access. * **Chrome extension v4.2.8**: Latest version of the Chrome recorder extension is now live. [Get it here](https://chromewebstore.google.com/detail/tella/enejkfhimljloggnimhebadbjajhgkad) **May 18, 2026** ## Auto layouts v2 A redesigned auto layouts engine is now on by default for everyone — smarter editing decisions, more canvas support, and AI-generated image B-roll. * **Portrait and square support**: Auto layouts now works on portrait (9:16), square (1:1), and round canvases in addition to landscape (16:9). Landscape supports all recording types; square and round support two-track and camera-only recordings. * **Structured editing styles**: Product demo, tutorial, presentation (including a TV-show presenter variant on landscape), and intro & outro styles are tuned per canvas and recording type. **Auto** still picks the best style for you. * **Image B-roll**: Product demo and presentation styles can insert AI-generated still images over abstract concepts, benefits, and examples — automatically, when there's nothing on screen to inspect. * **Better pacing**: Edits use the base layout as the home shot and add timed accents (screen reveals, camera cutaways, punch-ins, B-roll) instead of covering every transcript topic. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-auto-layouts) **May 13, 2026** ## Upload videos through the API You can now bring your own video footage into Tella programmatically — useful for ingesting recordings from another tool, adding B-roll to a layout, or building automated editing pipelines. * **`POST /v1/sources`**: Get a pre-signed S3 URL to upload a video file directly from your environment. Once uploaded, reference the returned `sourceId` from anywhere that accepts video media. [API reference](/docs/api-reference/sources/create-a-source-upload-video-audio-image-or-lut) * **Create clips from uploaded video**: `POST /v1/videos/{id}/clips` (introduced in [the May 8 Clip API](#clip-api)) now accepts a `sourceId` body parameter to create a clip from an uploaded source instead of a recorder payload. The clip goes through the same processing pipeline as recorder uploads, so transcripts, layouts, and exports work out of the box. * **Video media in layouts**: `add_layout` and `update_layout` now accept `{ type: "video", sourceId }` media — perfect for adding B-roll, intros, or outros over your main recording. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) * **New MCP tools**: `create_source` and `upload_clip` so AI agents can ingest and place video content end-to-end. **May 8, 2026** ## Clip API The public API and MCP server now expose clips (the individual recordings inside a video) as first-class resources, so you can script the same edits you'd make in the editor. * **Clip CRUD**: List, create, duplicate, reorder, and delete clips on a video via `/v1/videos/{id}/clips`. The video response also includes ordered `clipIds` so you can discover clips without a second call. [API reference](/docs/api-reference/clips/list-clips-for-a-video) * **Cuts**: `POST /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/cut` removes a time range from a clip (in milliseconds). Overlapping cuts are merged automatically. * **Transcripts**: `GET /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}/transcript` returns words in both `cut` (playback) and `uncut` (recording) timelines. * **Zooms, blurs, highlights**: Full CRUD for manual and tracking zooms, blur masks, and highlight masks on a clip. * **Layouts**: Direct CRUD over layout sections on a clip, bypassing the editor's base-layout cascade. * **MCP tools** for every endpoint above so agents can drive edits end-to-end. [MCP reference](/docs/mcp-server) **May 1, 2026** ## Additional branding options, and more A new branding option, a redesigned onboarding email series, and a long list of polish across the recorder, editor, and viewer. * **View page background color**: Set a custom background color for your shared video pages so the viewer matches the rest of your brand. [Learn more](/docs/help/admin/customize-your-branding) * **Quick mode on by default for new accounts**: New users now land in [Quick mode](/docs/help/recording/record-faster-with-quick-mode) automatically so they can hit record without configuring layouts first. Existing accounts keep their current preference. ### Updates * **Smarter human-escalation in the AI assistant**: When you ask to talk to a human, the assistant now opens a support ticket immediately, captures one quick line of context, and routes broken-behavior reports through the structured bug report form so the team has what it needs to help. * **Inline playback timeline in the editor**: The collapsed scrubber now sits on the same row as the play button, time, and Script toggle * **Faster public view pages**: Tightened up data fetching on shared video pages so cold loads and cache fills are noticeably quicker. * **Branding preview polish**: Empty logo slots now show a clear upload affordance, and the navbar preview falls back to your favicon when no full logo is set, matching how the actual view page renders. [Learn more](/docs/help/admin/customize-your-branding) ### Bug fixes * **Recorder layout polish**: Fixed bottom spacing under the recorder bar, dark-mode styling on the scenes bar, and a stuck "editor locked" dialog that could appear over the recorder * **Branding & view-page polish**: Restored dark-mode styling on the editor's video title dropdown, stopped the share/embed CTA preview from overflowing on narrow screens, and brought back the original optical size of the viewer's play/pause buttons **April 29, 2026** ## View page background color You can now customize the background color of your video view page. Pick from a set of curated palettes — light, dark, and color presets — or choose a custom color with the color picker or eyedropper to match any color on your site. [Learn more](/docs/help/admin/customize-your-branding) **April 27, 2026** ## View notification controls and new view webhooks You now have finer control over view-related emails, plus two new webhook events for building integrations around viewer activity. * **Independent notification toggles**: Settings → Notifications splits view emails into two independent toggles — **Milestones notifications** (email at 1, 10, 100, and 500 views) and **View notifications** (email for every view) * **`video.milestone` webhook**: Fires when a video crosses a view-count threshold of 1, 10, 100, or 500. [Learn more](/docs/webhooks) * **`video.viewed` webhook**: Fires for each view received on one of your videos, with the view's all-time rank in the payload. [Learn more](/docs/webhooks) **April 27, 2026** ## More camera bubble positions You can now place your camera bubble in any of nine positions on the canvas — four corners, four edges, and the center — using the new 3×3 position grid in the layout picker. The grid and Small/Medium/Large size selector work for landscape, portrait, and square stories. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-layouts) **April 24, 2026** ## AI support assistant A smarter way to get help — plus a round of editor fixes. * **AI support assistant**: "Get support" now opens an AI assistant that answers questions instantly using the help center. If it can't help, you can escalate to our team without leaving the chat. [Learn more](/docs/help/support/ai-assistant) ### Updates * **Smoother layout edits**: When you create a new layout, the playhead now lands in the middle of the layout so you can preview it immediately ### Bug fixes * **404 for missing videos**: Opening a link to a deleted or renamed video now shows a proper 404 page instead of a generic error * **Copy to new video**: Fixed "Copy to new video" in the cut tool so selections are copied into a new video as expected * **Scene playback flash**: Fixed a brief black background flash when transitioning from Idle to Paused during playback * **Story auto-play**: Fixed story progress jumping ahead when auto-play was enabled * **Script panel crash**: Fixed a rare crash in the transcript sidebar when editing sentences **April 17, 2026** ## New layouts, editor improvements, and bug fixes New layout options and a round of quality-of-life improvements across the editor. * **Side-by-side 50/50 layout**: A new layout that splits the screen evenly between your screen recording and camera — horizontal in landscape, vertical in portrait. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-layouts) * **TV Presenter full-frame variants**: New "Full" variants of the TV Presenter layout where your camera fills the entire canvas while the screen floats on top. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/use-layouts) ### Updates * **Helpful tooltips on disabled tools**: Disabled sidebar buttons now explain why they're unavailable instead of just showing the tool name * **Dark mode for Auto Cut**: The mistakes toolbar and highlighted errors in Auto Cut now display correctly in dark mode * **Cleaner trimming mode**: Trim-only controls like "hide deleted words" and "reset all cuts" now only appear when you're actively trimming, keeping the editor uncluttered during other tasks * **Better comment editing**: Comment textareas now auto-size to fit existing content when you enter edit mode, and long comments scroll instead of pushing controls out of view ### Bug fixes * **Blur and highlight masks during zooms**: Fixed masks drifting out of position when a zoom is applied — they now follow the video correctly. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting) * **Dark mode upgrade button**: Fixed the upgrade button's text becoming unreadable on hover in dark mode **April 16, 2026** ## New website We've launched a brand new [tella.com](https://www.tella.com). A fresh design, clearer messaging, and a faster experience — the new site better reflects what Tella is today and where it's headed. **April 16, 2026** ## New editor design & transcript sidebar [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmnyfb7tz00re04jm8tebdkwz/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmnyfb7tz00re04jm8tebdkwz/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) We've refreshed the Tella editor with a new look. The toolbar now lives on the left side with redesigned icons, and the overall UI is cleaner and lighter — borders removed, less visual noise, more focus on your video. Moving the toolbar to the left also makes room for a new persistent transcript sidebar on the right, so you can navigate and edit straight from your script without flipping panels. **April 14, 2026** ## Intercom integration Embed Tella videos directly in your Intercom Help Center. Walk customers through features, troubleshoot issues, or onboard new users with rich video content — right where they're looking for help. [Learn more](/docs/help/integrations/intercom-integration) [https://www.tella.tv/video/embed-tella-videos-in-intercom-1s4s/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/embed-tella-videos-in-intercom-1s4s/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) **April 10, 2026** ## Workspace deletion, and sharing improvements New features and quality-of-life improvements across the editor and sharing experience. * **Email sharing with video embed**: Share videos via email directly from the share modal, complete with an embedded video preview * **Workspace deletion**: Workspace owners can now delete their workspace directly from settings. [Learn more](/docs/help/admin/delete-workspace) ### Updates * **Export settings remembered**: Your export settings (format, quality, etc.) are now saved between sessions — no need to reconfigure each time * **Smarter transcript trimming**: Cutting words from the transcript now also trims surrounding silence for cleaner results * **Email change confirmation**: Changing your email now requires you to type the new address twice for added safety * **Improved view page layout**: The view page has been refined with better breakpoints, spacing, and chapter interactions across screen sizes ### Bug fixes * **Burned-in subtitles**: Fixed an issue where burned-in subtitles could go missing from exported videos * **Email styling**: Fixed notification emails picking up dark mode styles when they shouldn't * **CTA button picker**: Fixed the CTA picker showing an empty state when no workspace-level CTA was configured * **Editor downloads**: Fixed workspace editors being unable to download videos in certain sharing configurations * **Share modal access state**: Fixed the share modal not correctly displaying the "Private" access state * **Zoom crop position**: Fixed zoom crop calculations using the wrong coordinate space, which could cause misaligned zooms * **Subtitle hover**: Fixed subtitles shifting position when hovering near the top of the video player **April 3, 2026** ## Sharing & collaboration improvements A batch of updates to make sharing, collaborating, and viewing videos smoother. * **Copy chapters with descriptions**: A new "Copy with descriptions" option in the chapters menu includes chapter descriptions alongside titles — handy for sharing detailed outlines. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/chapters) * **Upgrade viewers to editors from the share modal**: Workspace owners can now upgrade a viewer to an editor seat directly from the share modal — no need to go to workspace settings first * **Editors can manage roles**: Editors on a shared video can now change collaborator roles, not just the video creator * **Workspace favicon on all plans**: Your workspace favicon now appears on video view pages for all plans, not just Premium * **Copy link for playlist viewers**: Viewers on a playlist now see a simple "Copy link" button instead of the full sharing interface * **Embed domain warnings**: When restricting embed domains, you'll now see a warning that this may affect link previews in Slack, messaging apps, and social media. [Learn more](/docs/help/sharing/domain-restriction-for-embedded-videos) * **Improved view page sidebar**: Video titles are no longer cut off, descriptions show more text before collapsing, and the date shown reflects when the video was last updated ### Bug fixes * **Blur and highlight masks**: Fixed a mismatch where blur and highlight masks could appear in slightly different positions in the rendered video compared to the editor preview. [Learn more](/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting) * **Chrome extension**: Fixed compatibility issues on sites using Tailwind v4 and certain React frameworks — the extension now loads reliably across more pages * **Safari video playback**: Fixed an issue where videos could get stuck in a loading state when Safari blocks autoplay * **Silence detection on older videos**: Fixed silence detection spinning indefinitely on videos recorded before waveform generation was available * **Custom layout filtering**: Custom layouts saved at one resolution no longer incorrectly appear when editing at a different resolution with the same aspect ratio * **Download filenames**: Fixed garbled download filenames in Safari for videos with special characters in the title **March 26, 2026** ## Reactions [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmn7mchos003204l8a25ihfxx/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmn7mchos003204l8a25ihfxx/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Add reactions to your videos. Viewers can now respond with emoji reactions while watching — a lightweight way to get feedback and engagement without requiring comments. **March 18, 2026** ## Background Blur Camera background blur is now available in the web app. Keep the focus on you while recording — no need to worry about what's behind you. **March 17, 2026** ## In-App Support Portal Manage your support tickets directly inside Tella. View your full conversation history, reply with file attachments, and track ticket status — all without leaving the app. Access it from the help button, settings menu, or at [tella.tv/support](https://tella.tv/support). **March 17, 2026** ## Workspace Backgrounds Upload backgrounds once and share them across your entire workspace. Any member can add or remove shared backgrounds, and they'll appear in the background picker for everyone on the team. **March 16, 2026** ## Create Workspaces Create additional workspaces directly from Tella. Organize your videos by team or client — all from one account. **March 9, 2026** ## Copy Link Button Control whether viewers see the copy link button on your videos. Find the new toggle under Viewer options in your video's share settings. **March 4, 2026** ## Dark Mode [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmmbwpbf1000c04kzf58x7rti/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmmbwpbf1000c04kzf58x7rti/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Tella now has dark mode. Switch between light and dark themes in your settings, or let it follow your system preference. The entire editor and dashboard adapt to your chosen theme. **February 26, 2026** ## Linear Integration [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmm3b72m9005704le24o43u46/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmm3b72m9005704le24o43u46/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Tella now integrates with Linear through Document Generation. Record a video of a bug and file a bug report in Linear directly from Tella — ready for an agent or teammate to pick up. **February 26, 2026** ## Notion Integration [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmm1b236i006004l5e69wcoar/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmm1b236i006004l5e69wcoar/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Tella now integrates with Notion through Document Generation. Record a product update or recap and create a Notion page directly from Tella — no copy-pasting required. **February 10, 2026** ## Analytics [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmlgjxiht009104icaya7bkz2/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmlgjxiht009104icaya7bkz2/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Today we're launching video analytics. Track views, viewers, total watch time and average duration. Monitor view counts over time, video engagement, and conversion from video open to CTA click. See who viewed your videos, where they're located, and how they found your video. Compare stats across your videos and time periods, and switch between video, playlist and account level analytics. **February 6, 2026** ## List View & Keyboard Shortcuts [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmlb4e6v400sf04l81hizff6n/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmlb4e6v400sf04l81hizff6n/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Toggle between grid view and a compact list view for your videos. New keyboard shortcuts make bulk actions faster: Command+A to select all, Shift+Click for range selection, and Escape to deselect. **January 23, 2026** ## AI Document Generation [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmkr02hvr01ak04jlhr0k56y4/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmkr02hvr01ak04jlhr0k56y4/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Generate text-based content directly from your videos. Create summaries, documentation, or ideas with a single click. Available on your video's view page, and your viewers can use it too. **January 21, 2026** ## Google Workspace Embeds & Video Sorting [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmkn9pajx00ks04le7y0s39lf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmkn9pajx00ks04le7y0s39lf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Embed Tella videos in Google Docs, Slides, and Sheets as smart clips. ### Also in this update * **Sort and filter videos**: Sort your videos alphabetically, by last modified, or creation date. Filter by all videos or videos not in a playlist. **January 20, 2026** ## Logo Watermark [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmkn4hffm01qs04gydee839y0/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmkn4hffm01qs04gydee839y0/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Add your own logo to videos. Position it in any corner, adjust size and padding, and choose to hide it on specific clips. **January 12, 2026** ## Animated Previews & Mobile Access [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmkb5rttw00pr04l8egvdco3b/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmkb5rttw00pr04l8egvdco3b/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Every Tella video has an animated preview based on the first few seconds. Now you can pick which timestamp the animated preview is based on. It shows up on embedded videos, share links, and in your library. ### Also in this update * **Mobile access**: Browse all your videos and access settings from your phone. **January 7, 2026** ## New Year Updates A batch of improvements to kick off the new year. * **Chapters in embeds**: Video chapters now work in embedded videos * **Keyboard shortcuts on embeds**: Navigate embedded videos with keyboard shortcuts * **Embed settings memory**: Tella remembers your embed settings between sessions * **Auto-generated passwords**: Automatically generate secure passwords for protected videos * **Audio-only downloads**: Download just the audio from your video * **Clip downloads**: Download individual clips from the timeline * **Raw recording downloads**: Editors can now download raw recordings * **Custom thumbnails**: Custom thumbnails now display on the videos page * **Logo redirect**: Premium users can set a URL for where the logo links on video pages * **Session management**: Sign out of active sessions and see which devices are signed in * **Sign-in alerts**: Get email alerts for sign-ins from unrecognized devices **December 24, 2025** ## Blurring and Highlighting [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmjjy6ve500pi04l5hg0c7ii1/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmjjy6ve500pi04l5hg0c7ii1/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 12, we shipped blurring sensitive information and highlighting parts in screen recordings into beta. **December 23, 2025** ## Auto Generated Chapters [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmjirc5p300n804lefu1bfxg0/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmjirc5p300n804lefu1bfxg0/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 11, we shipped auto-generated chapters, with the ability to create new videos from individual chapters. **December 22, 2025** ## Trash [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmjheofu500h204l8apqwad1d/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmjheofu500h204l8apqwad1d/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 10, we shipped a trash can which sends deleted videos to a trash bin instead of being permanently removed. Videos are permanently deleted after 30 days. **December 19, 2025** ## Playlist Organization [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmjcr9hw5002e04jx7axncg9q/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmjcr9hw5002e04jx7axncg9q/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 9, we shipped playlist organization which allows you to drag-and-drop to reorder playlists and sort videos by date, name, or custom order. **December 18, 2025** ## API and MCP [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmja8p3dt00k004l7049ng5y9/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmja8p3dt00k004l7049ng5y9/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 8, we shipped our public API and MCP, which allow you to access videos, transcripts, and playlists via API — with an MCP server, SDK, and a Zapier integration. **December 17, 2025** ## Quick Mode [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmj9yeclb004004l51rzv9jin/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmj9yeclb004004l51rzv9jin/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 7, we shipped quick mode which allows you to stop a recording and open the view page immediately with the link copied to share. **December 16, 2025** ## Background Music [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmj8jk5ks000504l7grcv5t87/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmj8jk5ks000504l7grcv5t87/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 6, we shipped the ability to add built-in tracks or your own files with independent volume controls for music, mic, and system audio. **December 15, 2025** ## Migration Tool [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmj7f42di001504lb3m3ochiq/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmj7f42di001504lb3m3ochiq/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 5, we shipped the ability to migrate videos directly from Loom into Tella by pasting a public video or folder link. Map migrated videos into the correct Tella playlist. You can also batch-upload video files from your desktop. **December 12, 2025** ## Transcript Dictionary, Find and Replace [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmj0824yr000604l84vl19ywu/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmj0824yr000604l84vl19ywu/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 4, we shipped a word dictionary for better transcriptions along with find and replace to fix mistakes in bulk. **December 11, 2025** ## Timelapse Exports [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmiyqvz6u003r04jsdg14doxv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmiyqvz6u003r04jsdg14doxv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 3, we shipped Timelapse Exports, which allows you to export videos at faster playback speeds from 1.2x to 8x with optional audio removal. **December 10, 2025** ## Squircles [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmiynxhmj004104l1bzld03n3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmiynxhmj004104l1bzld03n3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 2, we shipped Squircles, which give your webcam smooth rounded corners across all layouts. **December 9, 2025** ## Comments Redesign [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmiyi26zy008u04l5fnk9fkwr/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmiyi26zy008u04l5fnk9fkwr/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Over 12 days in December, we shipped a new feature every day. On day 1, we redesigned and rebuilt comments from the ground up. Threaded replies, timestamped comments, extra admin control for deleting viewer comments, and improved comment notifications and settings. **November 20, 2025** ## Custom Layouts [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmi4tg61d002t04l8594odzyj/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmi4tg61d002t04l8594odzyj/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Create, save and reuse your own layouts. With Custom Layouts you can be more creative and make videos that are unique to you. Create, save, reuse, rename, update and delete your very own custom layouts. ### Also in this update * **New backgrounds**: A beautiful set of hazy, colorful blends and gradients by Will Neeteson * **Viewer referrals**: When someone watches your video they can share it from the view page with a single click * **Tella YouTube channel**: We're restarting the Tella YouTube channel with new tutorials and tips **November 11, 2025** ## 2025 Quality of Life [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmbs4ljvh000z0dlj1ythg5po/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmbs4ljvh000z0dlj1ythg5po/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) * **Custom Keyboard Shortcuts**: Customize keyboard shortcuts in the Mac app. * **Fullscreen Window Support**: Tella for macOS now works with fullscreen windows during presentations. * **UI Changes**: Aspect Ratio and Edit options moved under Settings for a cleaner editor interface. * **Quick Link Sharing**: Press L in the editor to instantly copy the share link. * **Setup Panel**: New setup panel for configuring your recording setup. * **Download GIF**: Download GIFs of your Tella videos instead of just copying to clipboard. **October 24, 2025** ## Layouts V2 [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmh4r8r58002f04l1b2lc6yp6/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmh4r8r58002f04l1b2lc6yp6/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) The next evolution of Layouts dramatically simplifies how you add and edit layouts. Adding a layout is now a single action: click-and-drag. What used to be three clicks and a lot of mousing around the screen has become a single click. ### Also in this update * **New Auto Layout templates**: A new category of Auto Layout templates for intros and outros * **Editor playback speed**: Adjust playback speed during editing — useful for reviewing long recordings * **Command menu**: A new command menu for quick access to editor actions * **Copy chapters for YouTube**: Copy chapter markers in YouTube format for easy pasting into video descriptions **September 24, 2025** ## Auto Zooms V2 [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmfxjxwdt00100cl59tdo8vyb/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmfxjxwdt00100cl59tdo8vyb/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) A big update to automatic zooms with a new algorithm, style presets, animation settings and more. ### Features * **Style presets**: Choose between subtle (less zooms, less movement) and intense (more zooms, more extreme movement) * **Animation control**: Adjust the animation style for zooms and layout transitions — pick snappy for fast-paced or gentle for mellow * **Drag to add**: Add a zoom exactly where you want it by hovering over the timeline and clicking and dragging * **Remember last configuration**: When adding zooms one-by-one Tella remembers your last configuration * **RAW file downloads**: Download the original, unedited video and audio files from your recordings **September 5, 2025** ## Zoom Controls, Performance Boosts & UI Refinements [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmf6qx1g4003d0blg2me87avo/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmf6qx1g4003d0blg2me87avo/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) We've shipped improvements to zoom editing, increased processing capacity, and refined the interface design. The editor is now more stable with several bug fixes addressing timeline, transcription, and media handling issues. ### Features * **Auto-zoom intensity preferences**: Videos remember your preferred zoom intensity (Subtle, Moderate, or Energetic) across sessions, with click-based zooms automatically matching your selected style * **Copy/paste for zoom effects**: Copy zoom effects between scenes using standard keyboard shortcuts, with intelligent handling of overlapping effects * **View page meta descriptions**: Shared links now display descriptions in social media previews and search results for better discoverability ### Bugfixes * **Zoom panel stability**: Fixed crashes when no subject layer was selected - the panel now handles empty states properly * **Timeline scrollbar on Windows**: Removed unwanted vertical scrollbar that was causing accidental scrolling disruptions * **Subtitle editor layering**: Editor now displays above other UI elements instead of being hidden behind components * **Video seek accuracy**: Playhead now maintains correct position when switching between trimming, clip editing, and other modes * **Audio waveform permissions**: Fixed permission errors that prevented waveform generation for media files * **Text wrapping in transcripts**: Words no longer break awkwardly mid-line in transcripts and story panels * **Sidebar title alignment**: Corrected misaligned titles that were affecting interface consistency * **Fallback thumbnails**: Videos display alternative thumbnails when primary versions fail to load **August 29, 2025** ## Editor shortcuts & performance updates We've added keyboard shortcuts for faster editing and improved performance across the platform. ### Features * **Faster editing with shortcuts**: Use single keys like C for Cut, Z for Zoom, and B for Background to jump straight into tools. ### Performance * **Faster social media shares**: Previews and thumbnails generate more efficiently, so shared links load quicker. ### Fixes & Improvements * **Clearer trial ending**: Expired trial users now see a status message instead of being redirected away. * **Smarter AI chapters**: Chapter titles now match your transcript's language automatically. **August 26, 2025** ## Studio Voice & View Page [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmesh67ml001y0blihkmdd9s2/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmesh67ml001y0blihkmdd9s2/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Studio Voice is like having an AI-powered sound engineer work on every video you make. It removes background noise, boosts volume, and enhances the quality. Record from almost anywhere — with any microphone — and never worry about bad audio. ### Also in this update * **AI-generated video chapters**: Video chapters make it easier to navigate your video. Create them by hand or generate them from the transcript using AI * **Viewer transcripts**: Video transcripts are now shareable and accessible to viewers, making it easy to repurpose content * **View page redesign**: The video view page has been redesigned with a wider layout and easier navigation **August 22, 2025** ## Transcript clips, Thai language support, and account management We've added the ability to create clips directly from transcript selections and introduced Thai language support. Account deletion is now available for all users, along with numerous performance improvements and fixes. ### Features * **Create clips from transcript selections**: Select any portion of your transcript and instantly create a new video clip from it. Highlight the text, right-click, and choose 'Copy to new video' to extract key moments or create shorter versions. * **Thai language support**: Full support for Thai language detection, proper font display, and text handling that respects Thai's unique sentence structure for transcriptions. * **Account deletion**: Permanently delete your account and all associated data from the Profile page. ### Bugfixes * **Video player controls**: Controls now correctly appear when the player is idle, fixing the issue where controls wouldn't show when expected. * **Tooltip performance**: Tooltips appear faster and more reliably, fixing delays and failures to display. * **Invite referral system**: The 'invite a friend' feature now sends referral invites correctly after a period of malfunction. * **Duplicate email handling**: Clearer error messages when changing to an existing email, with helpful links to resolution articles. * **Large video conversion**: Videos larger than 4K now maintain proper aspect ratios during conversion, fixing distortion in ultra-wide or tall videos. ### Performance Improvements * **Video playback switching**: Videos load more reliably when switching between clips or stories with improved content handling. * **Enhanced video viewer**: Faster loading with duration displayed upfront and improved player interface adaptation. * **Video page optimization**: Faster page loads with optimized chapter display and smoother transitions. **July 22, 2025** ## Auto Cut [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmdefeyqu001o0bjsfa7w1i2h/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmdefeyqu001o0bjsfa7w1i2h/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Auto Cut is a new way to edit that improves how you record. It analyzes your video to find mistakes, repeated lines, interruptions and more, then removes them with a single click. Auto Cut eliminates annoying editing so you can record in peace. ### Also in this update * **Pausing**: Pause your recording in situations where you don't want to restart or add another clip — now available in the Tella macOS app * **Improved timeline zooming**: Zooming in on the timeline now keeps you at your current position instead of jumping to the start **July 10, 2025** ## Auto Layouts [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmcxibme1000t0bl46i0l7nn8/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmcxibme1000t0bl46i0l7nn8/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) With Auto Layouts, Tella does the editing for you. Just pick a template then hit Generate. Tella will apply layouts and transitions throughout your video with a little help from AI. What took 30 minutes now takes 30 seconds. ### Also in this update * **Revamped screen cropping**: More accurate cropping with aspect ratio presets, fine-tune position and size, and every layout re-aligns perfectly * **Custom audio delay**: Set a custom audio delay for your microphones in the Mac app — useful for XLR mics with audio interfaces **June 6, 2025** ## Collaboration and playlist security [https://www.tella.tv/video/cma3y94hg000s0bjv73935ity/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cma3y94hg000s0bjv73935ity/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Email updates, password-protected playlists & more layouts: * Invite your team to collaborate on video editing (note: only one editor allowed to edit at a time) * Password-protect entire playlists * Update your email address directly from account settings * Upload files up to 5GB (increased from 1GB) * Choose from over 40 new layouts * Stay tuned - you're going to love our next updates! **May 13, 2025** ## Search Results Redesign [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmamofgr300000cl74a9zg3ft/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmamofgr300000cl74a9zg3ft/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Redesigned search results UI for finding your videos faster. **February 19, 2025** ## Chrome extension update & editor performance [https://www.tella.tv/video/cm796ydds002e0aiecwdw33jb/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cm796ydds002e0aiecwdw33jb/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Tella for Chrome is now compatible with Chrome's Manifest V3. This update to the extension also includes: * Record multi-clip videos simply by stopping the current clip then starting a new one * Record quick videos by pushing "Preview" either during the recording (this will also stop the recording) or after you've already stopped the recording * Improved device (camera, mic) selection — should be a lot more stable We've also made a major update to the performance of the editor. Working on long videos with extensive edits is a lot more performant (faster). Navigating throughout the video and adding additional edits will feel smoother and responsive. In this update we also fixed a bug with how audio was being captured in screen-only recordings. **February 19, 2025** ## Editor Performance & Chrome Update [https://www.tella.tv/video/cm7c1cjo800000al2211sej23/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cm7c1cjo800000al2211sej23/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) One big new feature, two nice improvements, and a couple of fun updates. ### Features * **Editor performance**: The editor is way faster — working on long videos with lots of edits is now just as snappy as short videos * **Tella for Chrome**: Spring cleaning for the Chrome extension with improved stability and performance **February 13, 2025** ## Password protected videos [https://www.tella.tv/video/cm73fdx4y00150al22cpxhwgh/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cm73fdx4y00150al22cpxhwgh/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Protect your videos with a password. With this update you can: * Share video links publicly, but behind a password * Add, remove or update passwords at any time * Copy the password to your clipboard (easier to share with viewers) * Use passwords on embedded videos We also fixed a bug in the trim mode sidebar and added a warning when you attempt to add a video background larger than 75MB. **December 20, 2024** ## Fast Exports & Teams [https://www.tella.tv/video/cm4wksmgr003q0al15na36oup/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cm4wksmgr003q0al15na36oup/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) The fastest video exporter in the world? Hour-long videos in under 3 minutes, and quick 5-minute videos in sub 30 seconds. ### Also in this update * **Faster editing**: Performance improvements for the editor to handle longer and more elaborate videos * **Teams**: Collaborate with your team on Tella — share videos, manage members, and work together **October 10, 2024** ## Teleprompter & Mac Improvements [https://www.tella.tv/video/cm2300niw000703l25xetegvh/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cm2300niw000703l25xetegvh/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Four big improvements to Tella for Mac, including a teleprompter and quick-access preferences. ### Features * **Teleprompter**: Write a whole script then play it back line-by-line. Move it wherever you want, adjust width, text size and playback speed — and it's completely invisible in screen recordings * **Quick preferences**: See and change resolution, system audio and cursor preferences at the top of the app before recording * **Internal audio**: Record system audio on Mac — capture the sound of the app you're recording alongside your mic * **Camera swap**: Switch between multiple connected cameras without restarting your recording **September 24, 2024** ## Auto Zoom [https://www.tella.tv/video/cm1gdwjo9000003lg2s7gajl8/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cm1gdwjo9000003lg2s7gajl8/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Tella's Auto Zoom applies zooms for you. It analyzes clicks and cursor movement in your video to figure out where the action is and what to zoom into. Whether it's a 15-second demo or a 15-minute tutorial, your viewers will get a close-up of all the important stuff, automatically. Auto Zoom is available on videos recorded with Tella for Mac. ### Also in this update * **AI-powered Help Center**: A revamped Help Center with new articles, videos, and an AI-assisted way to find answers * **Always-on 60 FPS**: 60 FPS is now available for all recordings, not just screen recordings **August 5, 2024** ## Summer 2024 Updates * **Multi-Select Videos**: Select multiple videos at once to bulk-add them to playlists or delete them. * **Automatic Titles**: AI-powered video title suggestions from your transcription. **August 4, 2024** ## Subtitles 2.0 [https://www.tella.tv/video/clz5k90jv000009kyemfp3eo3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clz5k90jv000009kyemfp3eo3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) We released the first of a series of improvements to our subtitles feature. Now you can: * Edit subtitles in the editor * Edit subtitles inline (no more separate input field) * Completely disable subtitles when you don't want or need them * Choose from 2 new and improved styles * …and customize the appearance of those styles **July 31, 2024** ## Subtitles in the Editor [https://www.tella.tv/video/clz8xb2dv000009lagrwrg09a/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clz8xb2dv000009lagrwrg09a/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Subtitles are officially in the editor. Customize your subs in the same place you customize the rest of your video. New styles and an improved editing experience make eye-catching subtitles possible without exporting to another app. ### Also in this update * **60 FPS export**: Buttery smooth exports at 60 frames per second * **Video trimming**: Trim the start and end of your video right from the editor **June 13, 2024** ## Public Playlists Playlists can now be made public, letting you share multiple videos at once. Premium users get custom branding and custom domain on public playlists. **May 30, 2024** ## Custom Domains [https://www.tella.tv/video/clws49cvc04ly09lcfncmfinp/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clws49cvc04ly09lcfncmfinp/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Custom domains for all Tella Premium customers. Connect a domain with a few simple steps, then start sharing your videos as a seamless part of your brand. **May 17, 2024** ## Tella Premium [https://www.tella.tv/video/clwah6nrl005409mb03jrd642/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clwah6nrl005409mb03jrd642/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Tella Premium is a new way to host and share videos that look and feel like your own brand. Add your logo, color scheme and custom domain to share and embed videos as a native component of your brand. ### Also in this update * **AI editing**: AI-powered editing features to speed up your workflow * **Timeline zoom**: Zoom into the timeline for more precise editing * **Playback speed**: Adjust playback speed during editing **May 8, 2024** ## Text-Based Editing [https://www.tella.tv/video/clvxzgvzj01pb0cid14ty1npf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clvxzgvzj01pb0cid14ty1npf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Edit videos by editing text. Scan the transcript, click to cut words, phrases, or sentences, and work clip-by-clip. **May 2, 2024** ## AI Editing Tools [https://www.tella.tv/video/clvl5q5td00qn0clbfa0lamvg/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clvl5q5td00qn0clbfa0lamvg/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) * **Auto-Trim Recording**: Automatically trim the moments at the start and end where you're starting or stopping the recording. * **Remove Filler Words**: Automatically detect and cut filler words like ums and ahs. * **Remove Silences**: Automatically cut silences from your videos. * **Auto-Cut Start & End**: Automatically cut quiet buffers at the start and end. **April 30, 2024** ## 5 Features in 5 Days [https://www.tella.tv/video/clvlhu39v00uv0djuhyweg6v3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clvlhu39v00uv0djuhyweg6v3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) A shipping spree — 5 features in 5 days. ### Features * **Webcam blur**: Blur your webcam background to hide the mess * **Re-record with Mac app**: Launch re-recordings and add new clips in the editor using the Tella macOS app * **Camera re-framing**: Re-frame and zoom into your webcam after recording — useful when recording from a distance or wanting to crop to the shoulders * **AI clip titles**: AI-generated titles for each clip in your video, making it easier to navigate long recordings * **Playlists**: Organize your videos into playlists to create courses, series, or collections **March 22, 2024** ## More languages [https://www.tella.tv/video/clu2w9byw025s0fl6f8pf1ezf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clu2w9byw025s0fl6f8pf1ezf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) We've got 13 new subtitle languages now available in Tella, bringing the total to 20 supported languages. The new languages include Hindi, Japanese, Chinese, Korean, Finnish, Ukrainian, Polish, Russian, Turkish, Vietnamese, along with Australian English, British English, and American English. You can also select your preferred default subtitle language in your account settings. **February 28, 2024** ## Transitions [https://www.tella.tv/video/clt5ga3lb01r70fjn63s41j61/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clt5ga3lb01r70fjn63s41j61/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Transitions are the latest game-changer in how you craft your videos with Tella. Now, every new video you create will have smooth transitions between layouts, automatically bringing your content to life. To retrofit this magic onto your old videos, just hit the "Transitions" button in Layout mode, and voila, your videos are instantly upgraded. For now, we're rolling out with two types of transitions. Hard cut keeps things sharp and direct. Smooth introduces sleek, automatic transitions that glide your audience from scene to scene effortlessly. **January 15, 2024** ## Audio pops Some of you noticed (and told us) that every now and then tiny annoying pops and glitches would show up in the audio of your videos. Today we are happy to tell you that they should never show up again! Note: old videos and exports won't automatically have this fix applied, you'll have to re-render your videos to fix them. Re-rendering can be done by making a small change in the editor. **January 9, 2024** ## Multi-Layouts [https://www.tella.tv/video/clr6ao4td00000fjw1239b6j3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clr6ao4td00000fjw1239b6j3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) The biggest ever update to the editor. Multi-Layouts lets you create story-propelling, multi-shot videos with just a few clicks. Switch between layouts throughout your video to keep viewers engaged and drive your story forward. ### Also in this update * **Twitter/X video embeds**: Share Tella videos directly on Twitter/X with native video embeds * **Video library improvements**: Browse and manage your videos more easily with the updated library **December 20, 2023** ## Multi-layouts [https://www.tella.tv/video/clqdnpyen00000fjygdqjehpk/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clqdnpyen00000fjygdqjehpk/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Multi-layout is a new way of editing your videos in Tella. It lets you combine multiple layouts, and multiple shots in a single clip so that you can make more dynamic videos, more engaging videos, way faster. You can switch from a shot of your camera to just a shot of your screen, and then maybe you can switch to a shot of your screen and camera side by side. You can just repeat this process throughout your clip as many times as you want to get the effect that you want. And the cool thing about it is that you don't need to worry about it at all during the recording. You can just quickly make these edits after you've done the recording, so you can just focus on doing your best demo, doing your best pitch, whatever it is. **November 28, 2023** ## Gear Guide & Viewer Downloads [https://www.tella.tv/video/clphgzbhx00000gjvgkygdsbe/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clphgzbhx00000gjvgkygdsbe/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) New features and resources including an interactive video gear guide and the new viewer download feature. ### Features * **Viewer downloads**: Let viewers download your videos directly from the view page * **Video gear guide**: An interactive guide to help entrepreneurs set up their on-screen setup * **Video course**: New tutorials on looking good on camera and making great tutorials **November 21, 2023** ## Search engine indexing [https://www.tella.tv/video/clqf8phi800pj0fk1f42d06w3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clqf8phi800pj0fk1f42d06w3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Many of you share your Tella videos on the web, posting them on websites and including them in documents. This helps search engines like Google find and list your videos. But if you want to make your videos even easier to find, you can use the 'search engine indexing' feature. When you turn this on, it sends a message to Google asking them to add your video to their search results. After a while, Google should start showing your video when people search for it. If you turn off this feature, your video gets a tag that tells search engines not to show it in search results. This way, you can control whether your video appears in Google searches or not. **November 1, 2023** ## Viewer downloads [https://www.tella.tv/video/clofsz0gg003a0fjp44km7s9a/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clofsz0gg003a0fjp44km7s9a/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Viewer downloads allow viewers of your videos to download them directly. Simply enable the 'Allow Downloads' option in the view settings of your video. Once this is done, anyone watching your video will have the option to download it in various formats, including subtitles and 4K quality. For added convenience, we've included an option in your account settings to allow downloads by default for all new videos. Please use this setting carefully, as it means all your new videos will be downloadable by anyone you share them with. **September 29, 2023** ## Animated Backgrounds [https://www.tella.tv/video/cln3e6xjh002m0fmg08k75uvk/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/cln3e6xjh002m0fmg08k75uvk/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Animated backgrounds are short videos that loop perfectly behind your main content. They look great and add extra engagement to your videos — an effect normally found in videos from top YouTubers, now available with the click of a button. We also open-sourced all the original animation files, free to use however you like. ### Also in this update * **New video renderer**: A completely rebuilt video renderer for faster and higher quality exports * **Screen crop**: Crop your screen recordings to focus on the important parts **September 25, 2023** ## Video backgrounds [https://www.tella.tv/video/clmqdgg7r006l0gl30zkz9nwn/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clmqdgg7r006l0gl30zkz9nwn/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) Our new video background section is in its first version, currently offering a limited selection of video backgrounds, with plans to expand this collection significantly over the coming weeks. These backgrounds are designed to loop perfectly, adding dynamic visuals to your videos. We also upgraded our background & color picker. It now includes a 'Recently Used' section, allowing you to browse through and quickly switch to images you've used before. We've also introduced a section for macOS wallpapers, featuring selections from recent operating systems, with potential additions from classic ones in the future. The color picker now provides a more extensive library for your saved colors and gradients. **April 18, 2023** ## Burned-in subtitles [https://www.tella.tv/video/clgm2dwsi013f0fjjdl6l5rdu/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clgm2dwsi013f0fjjdl6l5rdu/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) The subtitles you see in your videos are automatically transcribed by Tella and now can be included in your exported video file. When you're ready to download your video, there's an option to burn the subtitles into the export. Turn on this feature in your next export and your video will include the subtitles, perfectly formatted and ready to share on platforms like YouTube or Twitter. **April 18, 2023** ## Mac App Updates * **Performance**: Significantly reduced memory usage for better stability. * **Window to Front**: The Mac app brings the selected recording window to the front automatically. * **New UX**: Simplified recording interface by removing recording modes. * **Improved Window Selection**: Window outline makes it easier to confirm the right window is selected. **March 23, 2023** ## Zooms [https://www.tella.tv/video/clfl82pi700c50fl36woy0jgv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1](https://www.tella.tv/video/clfl82pi700c50fl36woy0jgv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0\&o=1) You can now add zoom-in and out effects in Tella videos. To use it, simply click on 'Zoom' in the editor. This feature also allows 'connected' zooms, meaning smooth transitions between different zoom points without fully zooming out. Zooms adapt to different canvas sizes, making them suitable for mobile or square video formats. It's flexible and integrates well with other Tella features like multiple clips, clip styles, and layout adjustments. **February 14, 2023** ## February 2023 Updates * **Video File Uploads**: Upload video files directly to Tella by dragging and dropping MP4 files. * **Turbo Exports**: Accelerated export pipeline for 1080p and 4K — the biggest improvement to export speed since 4K support launched. * **Default Sharing Settings**: Set default preferences for subtitles, views, and comments visibility that apply to all new videos. * **Screen Crop: Apply to All**: Apply screen crop settings to every clip at once with a single click. * **New Embed Options**: Configure video embeds with title visibility, autoplay, animated thumbnails, and looping. **December 7, 2022** ## Comments Leave, edit, and delete comments on videos. Email notifications when someone comments on your video. **December 6, 2022** ## Tella for Mac A fully native Mac app for screen, camera, or screen+camera recording. Includes system audio recording, 4K support, live camera preview, invisible speaker notes, and multi-mode recording. All hooked up to the Tella web app for editing, sharing, and export. **November 30, 2022** ## Fall 2022 Updates * **New Recorder & Slack App**: Brand new recorder with a fresh UI, better quality recordings, and faster final renders. Plus: Tella for Slack is now live on the Slack App Directory. * **New Chrome Extension**: Biggest Chrome extension update with a phone-camera-inspired UI, quick mode for fast sharing, multi mode for step-by-step videos, and no account needed. * **Subtitle Editing**: Edit auto-generated subtitles directly in Tella. * **Subtitle Timestamps & Links**: See timestamps for each caption and copy a shareable link that starts playback from that point. * **Camera Cropping**: Crop your camera to adjust the frame and focus on what matters. # Mac App Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/changelog/mac-app What's new in the Tella macOS app. **October 12, 2026** ## 2.37 * Fixed an echo when recording system audio while FineTune is running **October 6, 2026** ## 2.36 * Recordings no longer break when your microphone changes its channel count partway through **October 6, 2026** ## 2.35 * Stability and performance improvements **September 16, 2026** ## 2.34 * Your camera now keeps one format for a whole recording, so clips no longer come out at different sizes or with black bars when the camera changes format on its own * The "No sound detected" warning now also appears when you start recording with a keyboard shortcut or from the menu bar while the window is closed **September 9, 2026** ## 2.33 * Recordings now use the animated cursor by default, for smoother cursor movement. You can still pick System or Hidden in your cursor settings * Fixed the animated cursor stopping short of where you left it at the end of a recording **September 8, 2026** ## 2.32 * Fixed your microphone or camera occasionally switching while the app was in the background **July 30, 2026** ## 2.31 * Fixed problems resizing Chrome windows when setting up a recording **July 21, 2026** ## 2.30 * Warns you when your disk is almost full instead of starting a recording that can't be saved * Stops a recording safely if space runs out while you're recording, so you don't end up with a corrupted file **July 14, 2026** ## 2.29 * Added a setting to control automatic update checks * The app window now snaps to your camera's aspect ratio while resizing * Clearer error message when window resizing fails **June 24, 2026** ## 2.28 * Uploads now recover automatically if credentials expire mid-upload * Warns when you start recording while Low Power Mode is on **June 18, 2026** ## 2.27 * Fixed screen recording resolution limits for non-16:9 displays **June 16, 2026** ## 2.26 * More reliable recording stop/finish handling during server errors * Added a new "Natural" teleprompter speed option **June 10, 2026** ## 2.25 * Fixed the microphone level meter for multi-channel audio interfaces **June 3, 2026** ## 2.24 * Microphone selection can now recover a session that failed to start * Device warnings only show for devices actually being recorded * Camera and microphone button labels now reflect your selection more accurately * Prevents starting a recording with no valid device selected **June 1, 2026** ## 2.23.1 * Stability and performance improvements **May 27, 2026** ## 2.23 * Stability and performance improvements **May 26, 2026** ## 2.22 * Camera preview now switches to mini mode automatically when the camera is disabled * Settings now explain how Quick mode works **May 19, 2026** ## 2.21 * Refined camera preview design * Fixed Studio Display cameras that failed to start * Fixed a feedback loop when rapidly toggling Center Stage * Added a portrait effect toggle for the camera * Improved camera resolution switching **May 12, 2026** ## 2.20 * Quick mode preference now syncs across devices * Prevents selecting cameras with no usable video format **May 6, 2026** ## 2.19 * Fixed a crash when canceling a recording before it fully started * Fixed a crash during screen capture in certain conditions **April 14, 2026** ## 2.18 * Reduced memory usage when uploading recordings **April 7, 2026** ## 2.17 * Fixed a launch crash when the Uploads folder couldn't be created * Fixed a crash caused by concurrent update checks **March 25, 2026** ## 2.16 * Fixed stream availability incorrectly resetting when the device list changed **March 24, 2026** ## 2.15 * Added a status bar menu with recording controls * Fixed upload streams incorrectly showing as done during active recording * Fixed Upload Activity summary bar clipping under the title bar * Window size now persists across quit and relaunch * Added a Video Effect button to open the system video effects menu **March 16, 2026** ## 2.14 * Added an Upload Activity window to track upload progress (Cmd+U to toggle) * Shows clear error messages when uploads fail or credentials can't be fetched * Upload streams now show recording labels * Failed upload credentials are retried automatically on reconnect **March 6, 2026** ## 2.13 * Upload streams now show device names * Recording-interruption alerts now float above other windows * Paused time no longer counts toward the recording limit * Added a 6-hour recording limit for paid users **March 3, 2026** ## 2.12 * Stability and performance improvements **March 3, 2026** ## 2.11.1 * Stability and performance improvements **March 2, 2026** ## 2.11 * Fixed an upload reliability issue affecting file transfer tracking **February 25, 2026** ## 2.10 * Fixed external cameras spontaneously flipping to portrait format * Help menu now opens the Tella help center * Moved the display label position in the cover view **February 23, 2026** ## 2.9 * Fixed window resizing when opening or closing the settings overlay **February 18, 2026** ## 2.8.2 * Stability and performance improvements **February 11, 2026** ## 2.8.1 * Stability and performance improvements **February 5, 2026** ## 2.8 * Stability and performance improvements **January 28, 2026** ## 2.7.1 * Stability and performance improvements **January 27, 2026** ## 2.7 * Fixed the menu not appearing over full-screen windows * Fixed window size and position not being restored correctly **January 20, 2026** ## 2.6 * Tella's window is now resizable, with the UI adjusting responsively * Fixed toggling your camera off and back on * Removed camera landscape mode **January 16, 2026** ## 2.5 * Added a submenu to quickly switch workspaces, with an overlay shown while switching **January 14, 2026** ## 2.4 * Added a warning when using a virtual webcam * Improved error messages **December 11, 2025** ## 2.3 * Added a warning when recording without a display * Fixed a bug that could slow down display recording **December 11, 2025** ## 2.2.1 * Added Quick Mode for faster screen recording * Improved cursor detection accuracy **December 9, 2025** ## 2.1 * Improved detection of macOS cursors * Countdown animation is smoother, and you can now cancel a recording during the countdown * Screen crop now snaps to the pixel grid for sharper recordings **December 3, 2025** ## 2.0.1 * You can now drag a window by its label **December 3, 2025** ## 2.0 * New countdown view with sounds, and a keyboard shortcut to cancel it * Windows now center themselves while resizing * Added a maximize button to the resize menu * Added the option to dim the screen around your selected display * Fixed the menu position on secondary displays * Fixed the scale factor for cropped display recordings **November 28, 2025** ## 1.81 * Recorded cursor types are now sent along with mouse events * Added a warning for lower-resolution (720p) camera recording **November 28, 2025** ## 1.80 * Added a warning for the MacBook Pro M4 built-in camera **November 19, 2025** ## 1.79 * Active subscriptions no longer have a recording time limit * Recording now waits for the display/window list to load instead of failing to start **October 28, 2025** ## 1.78 * New borderless design with bigger, easier-to-hit buttons * Your camera now locks in place when starting a session or switching devices **October 21, 2025** ## 1.77 * Uploads now use a new, more reliable storage location **October 15, 2025** ## 1.76 * Improved camera format selection for better quality and orientation handling **October 13, 2025** ## 1.75 * Fixed paywall styling on older macOS versions **October 8, 2025** ## 1.73 * Hid the small purple ScreenCaptureKit indicator on macOS Tahoe * Displays are now sorted by their on-screen position * Fixed the landscape camera preview height on Tahoe * Fixed toggles jumping on hover on macOS Tahoe * Added a menu option to reset tokens **October 1, 2025** ## 1.72 * Fixed the window shifting down when toggling mini mode on macOS 26 * Camera preview now matches the active recording configuration **September 26, 2025** ## 1.71 * Stability and performance improvements **September 25, 2025** ## 1.70 * Added a new app icon for macOS Tahoe, with a fallback on older versions * Fixed top menu appearance on Tahoe * Cropping a display recording can no longer extend past the edge of the screen * Screen crop now snaps to the pixel grid * Fixed corner radius rendering on Tahoe **September 24, 2025** ## 1.69 * Recording setup now remembers your last used display and camera * Added a progress indicator for slow app startup **August 28, 2025** ## 1.67 * Fixed an issue that could cause partial uploads of recording segments **July 25, 2025** ## 1.66.3 * Fixed a crash related to microphone audio **July 25, 2025** ## 1.66.2 * Added a workaround for a microphone audio crash some users experienced **July 23, 2025** ## 1.66.1 * Fixed a default app visibility setting **July 23, 2025** ## 1.66 * Fixed crashes related to pausing recordings * Quick Preferences now shows top options in mini mode * Improved upload reliability when only some parts finish **July 23, 2025** ## 1.65.2 * Fixed pausing issues * Added MotivMix to the list of supported audio loopback apps **July 17, 2025** ## 1.65.1 * Fixed an issue with out-of-order video frames **July 17, 2025** ## 1.65 * Stability and performance improvements **July 16, 2025** ## 1.64 * Added a keyboard shortcut to pause and resume recording * Improved the pause overlay and resume button styling * Simplified the recording timer display **July 7, 2025** ## 1.62 * Fixed an error where cancelling an upload could fail with a missing file error **June 30, 2025** ## 1.61.2 * Stability and performance improvements **June 30, 2025** ## 1.61.1 * Stability and performance improvements **June 24, 2025** ## 1.61 * Renamed Preferences to Settings * Prevented camera format changes while recording * Added microphone delay settings, adjustable in milliseconds and saved per device * Advanced microphone options now only appear when applicable **June 4, 2025** ## 1.60 * Fixed a crash that could occur when taking a screenshot of a window * Fixed incorrect timestamps in mouse event tracking * The app now displays your configured app name instead of a hardcoded name **May 27, 2025** ## 1.58 * Enabled window recording through the improved recording engine * Clip status now shows the name of longer clips without overflowing * Fixed a crash that could occur from recording state changes **May 22, 2025** ## 1.57 * Fixed an issue with multichannel microphones **May 21, 2025** ## 1.56 * Fixed an issue with multichannel microphones **May 20, 2025** ## 1.55 * Kept the green recording border visible when the app isn't active * Fixed an issue where the app could open off-screen when starting without a camera preview * Added the ability to exclude specific apps from audio loopback and screen recording overlays **May 12, 2025** ## 1.54 * Improved reliability of screen, camera, and microphone recording * Applied maximum video dimensions when recording the camera * Fixed incorrect quality labels for camera settings * Added the ability to exclude Grammarly from screen recordings **May 6, 2025** ## 1.53 * The main app window can now appear above fullscreen apps **May 1, 2025** ## 1.52 * Added an alert when login fails * Improved logout handling on authentication errors **April 29, 2025** ## 1.51 * Fixed menu button styling on macOS 13 Ventura * The countdown, cropper, speaker notes, and border windows can now appear above fullscreen apps and on all Spaces * Fixed Quick Settings styling on macOS 13 Ventura **April 17, 2025** ## 1.50 * The app no longer alerts or logs an error when you manually stop screen recording from macOS's system controls * Fixed "Select Area" button styling * Added an animation to the record button when toggling states **April 16, 2025** ## 1.49 * Redesigned the Preview button and its behavior * Added an audio indicator in the top bar while recording * Added a timer and clip status to the top bar * Updated the recording button design **April 14, 2025** ## 1.48.4 * Stability and performance improvements **April 14, 2025** ## 1.48.2 * The app now logs out automatically if your session becomes invalid * Fixed a hover bug affecting mouse interactions * Added a low disk space warning if a recording fails to save **April 9, 2025** ## 1.48 * Added support for beta app updates * Added a live screen preview showing what's being captured, with a preview toggle in Settings * Improved screenshot rendering for the screen/window selection picker on macOS 13 **April 2, 2025** ## 1.47.1 * Fixed camera preview flickering **April 2, 2025** ## 1.47 * Improved the hover state and styling of Quick Preferences * The app can now be launched via URL even if no main window is open * The app no longer closes the main window when launched at login **March 26, 2025** ## 1.46 * Added a low disk space alert when stopping a recording * Fixed an issue where stopping a screen recording could loop while resending frames **March 25, 2025** ## 1.45 * Stability and performance improvements **March 24, 2025** ## 1.44 * Added customizable keyboard shortcuts for common actions. * Fixed recording start/stop via keyboard shortcut triggering before your camera, microphone, and screen were ready. * Server errors now show full details in the alert. * Minor UI polish to the settings button and transitions. **March 10, 2025** ## 1.43.4 * Fixed an issue where a stale sample from a previous microphone could incorrectly affect the silent-microphone warning. **February 28, 2025** ## 1.43.3 * Fixed a bug that could cause recordings to be silent right after previewing the microphone. **February 18, 2025** ## 1.43 * Show the correct error message when aborting a recording. * Fixed a microphone preview issue. **February 17, 2025** ## 1.42 * Recording now aborts cleanly if a critical error occurs while writing the file. * Switched support from live chat to email. * Added an audio level indicator to the microphone button. * Fixed the audio level indicator going out of bounds. **February 11, 2025** ## 1.41 * Improved keeping your Mac awake during recording. **February 6, 2025** ## 1.40 * Stability and performance improvements **January 20, 2025** ## 1.39 * Added an audio level indicator to the microphone button. * Fixed the audio level indicator going out of bounds. * Improved the audio level indicator's appearance. **January 10, 2025** ## 1.38.2 * Stability and performance improvements **December 19, 2024** ## 1.38.1 * Stability and performance improvements **December 18, 2024** ## 1.38 * Fixed the "Uploads in progress" prompt showing when there was nothing left to upload. **December 11, 2024** ## 1.37 * Recording now checks for a valid session before starting. **November 26, 2024** ## 1.36 * Added a warning when macOS Voice Isolation is enabled on Sequoia, since it can affect recordings. * Fixed the camera getting stuck when its format couldn't be changed. **November 12, 2024** ## 1.35 * Stability and performance improvements **October 31, 2024** ## 1.34 * Fixed the microphone not being detected when the MacBook lid is closed. **October 31, 2024** ## 1.33 * Uploads now retry automatically after a failure. **October 30, 2024** ## 1.32 * Fixed device buttons so clicking the right side re-enables that device. * Added a "gather logs" option to the Help menu. **October 23, 2024** ## 1.31 * Stability and performance improvements **October 15, 2024** ## 1.30 * Fixed handling of a device disconnecting during the countdown or start of a recording. * Show a clearer error message when a recording stops due to a network error. * Requests that fail due to network errors are now automatically retried. * Recordings now always stop locally, even if the network request fails. **October 7, 2024** ## 1.29 * Added speaker notes with an auto-scrolling teleprompter, adjustable text size and transparency. * Added a screen highlight option to visually mark the selected screen while recording, with a full-screen selector. * Added a recording status pill showing idle and in-progress states. * Added options to skip the countdown or choose which screen it appears on. * Added a warning before discarding a recorded video. * Fixed the speaker notes transparency default and a crash when notes were larger than the view. **September 25, 2024** ## 1.28 * Introduced Quick Preferences and a redesigned Preferences window, including launch-at-login and countdown sound options. * Added support for recording your mouse and keyboard input alongside screen, camera, and microphone. * Added clip re-recording and a two-hour recording limit. * Added audio loopback support for WaveLink and RODE Connect, plus a warning when no microphone sound is detected. * Added a Presenter Overlay, colored recording borders, and support for recording a specific window. * Various camera, upload, and stability fixes. # Windows App Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/changelog/windows-app What's new in the Tella Windows app. **October 13, 2026** ## 0.15.0 * Single Window recording now works on Windows 10 * The animated cursor now works when you record a single window * Fixed system audio going missing or out of sync after you pause a recording while nothing is playing **October 7, 2026** ## 0.14.3 * Fixed more webcams showing a black preview or failing to record **October 2, 2026** ## 0.14.2 * Fixed some webcams showing a black preview or failing to record * Tella now tells you when your camera is in use by another app * Fixed recording from the wrong input on microphones and audio interfaces with more than one input * Fixed audio slowly drifting ahead of the video in longer recordings * The animated cursor no longer misses clicks while the Tella window is in front * Window recordings now show your cursor when the animated cursor is selected * Fixed the Record button sometimes being hidden when no camera is selected **September 30, 2026** ## 0.14.1 * Screen recording now works on more PCs with multiple graphics cards, even when the default card doesn't support screen capture * Improved camera recording at high resolutions, with fewer dropped frames on supported USB cameras * Tella now warns you during a recording if your camera stops sending video or your microphone is losing audio * The "No sound detected" warning now works during recordings and clears when sound is detected * Fixed pausing no longer working after canceling or restarting a paused recording, and recordings sometimes stopping when you resumed **September 24, 2026** ## 0.14.0 * Single Window recording * Several fixes around microphone recording **September 16, 2026** ## 0.13.1 * Fixed the app closing when you clicked Log In, Sign Up or a menu link and your browser couldn't be opened. Tella now shows the link so you can copy it instead * Logging in, signing up, switching workspace and menu links no longer stop working for the rest of the session when a browser is slow to open * Fixed a crash when pausing or resuming a recording that was stopping at the same time, for example after disconnecting a display * Updates now tell you when they couldn't be installed, and ask you to finish your recording first instead of doing nothing **September 11, 2026** ## 0.13.0 * Added an animated cursor mode for smoother cursor movement in recordings, with correct pointer shapes throughout the whole recording **July 30, 2026** ## 0.12.0 * Your camera now always records from its color sensor, so cameras with a Windows Hello infrared sensor no longer record in black and white * Fixed recordings that ended up with no camera video on those devices **July 28, 2026** ## 0.11.0 * You can now set your own keyboard shortcuts for starting and stopping, pausing and resuming, canceling, and restarting a recording, and for opening speaker notes * Tella tells you when a shortcut is already taken by another app, and lets you know if one couldn't be registered **July 22, 2026** ## 0.10.0 * Warns you when your disk is almost full instead of starting a recording that can't be saved * Stops a recording safely if space runs out while you're recording, so you don't end up with a corrupted file * Fixed crashes that could happen when a recording was canceled or stopped unexpectedly **July 15, 2026** ## 0.9.6 * The app now stays running in the tray when you close the window, so uploads keep going in the background * Canceling or re-recording now properly stops the in-progress upload * Fixed the recording countdown and overlay sometimes showing up inside screen recordings * Tray icon now shows recording status, a first-run tip, and confirms before quitting **July 10, 2026** ## 0.9.5 * Added a Speaker Notes teleprompter window, with a transparency option and a Ctrl+Shift+S shortcut * Recordings now recover a partial clip instead of being lost if the camera fails or drops * Fixed a crash with system audio capture on certain audio devices * Fixed pause/resume sometimes dropping microphone audio after resuming * Fixed the app hanging when restarting or canceling a recording * Fixed settings occasionally resetting after being saved * Fixed a freeze that could occur during long recordings of an unchanging screen * Renamed "Mic off" to "Microphone off" on the mic button **July 3, 2026** ## 0.9.4 * Recordings now open directly into quick share mode when finished * Pause/resume and mouse-click recording are now enabled by default * Fixed camera-related crashes during recording, including when the GPU changes mid-recording **June 30, 2026** ## 0.9.3 * Camera white balance no longer locks during recording, so lighting changes are handled better **June 30, 2026** ## 0.9.2 * Uploads now recover automatically from expired credentials with smarter retry timing * Camera auto-exposure now stays active during recording instead of being capped **June 25, 2026** ## 0.9.1 * Fixed the bottom control bar flickering when resizing the window * Smoother, correctly-ordered transition when toggling the camera or entering mini mode * Refined the main control bar with a bigger chevron hover target and a simpler pause button * Window controls now hide while Settings is open **June 23, 2026** ## 0.9.0 * Redesigned the bottom bar with a frosted acrylic look and new Fluent-style device and recording controls * Recording controls now stay visible during the countdown so you can cancel it * Added a warning that recording 4K screen plus camera together may overload an integrated GPU * Fixed crashes and hangs when canceling a recording or when the camera preview failed * Camera recording now degrades gracefully instead of aborting when frames drop **June 19, 2026** ## 0.8.0 * Added support for choosing your video encoder * Added virtual camera support, with a smoother preview and improved recording timing * Screen capture now scales by actual pixel area instead of a fixed 16:9 box * Added a "Natural" teleprompter speed option between Slow and Medium * Fixed the camera list jumping when re-sorted, and handled virtual cameras that report "not streaming" more gracefully **June 12, 2026** ## 0.7.2 * Added mini mode, which collapses the recorder window when no camera is active * Reworked the recording countdown and record button to match the Mac app * Restyled the top bar with a cleaner hamburger menu, title, and floating timer * Fixed controls sometimes needing two clicks when the window wasn't focused * Fixed the window restoring off-screen after being saved while minimized * Fixed crashes when canceling a recording or re-recording after canceling the countdown * Cleaned up microphone names shown in the device list **May 27, 2026** ## 0.7.1 * Fixed the recording countdown sometimes appearing at the start of recordings * More stable software-encoded recording, plus manual frame-rate control **May 26, 2026** ## 0.7.0 * Stability and performance improvements **May 19, 2026** ## 0.6.6 * Stability and performance improvements **May 19, 2026** ## 0.6.5 * Added quality level presets (Low/Medium/High/Ultra) matching the Mac app * Added a dim-around-selected-screen option and highlight overlays when choosing a display * The recording countdown now shows on the selected display * Settings panel can now be closed with Esc * Fixed camera preview issues when switching formats **May 13, 2026** ## 0.6.4 * Fixed webcam recording appearing upside down * Removed the "hide app from capture" setting from the UI **May 11, 2026** ## 0.6.3 * Fixed microphone and system audio recording being blocked when no camera was selected **April 30, 2026** ## 0.6.2 * Added system audio recording, with a toggle in Settings * Your computer no longer sleeps or dims the display during recording * Added a screen plus microphone recording mode that doesn't require a camera * Fixed a crash when stopping a recording * Fixed the UI freezing when canceling a recording * Fixed a "camera unavailable" message briefly flashing at the start of recording **April 28, 2026** ## 0.6.1 * Improved screen-capture compatibility with older Windows versions, including Windows 10 **April 24, 2026** ## 0.6.0 * Stability and performance improvements **April 23, 2026** ## 0.5.5 * Fixed a screen-recording issue caused by a frame-size mismatch **April 22, 2026** ## 0.5.3 * Recording now falls back to a software encoder when hardware encoding isn't available **April 19, 2026** ## 0.5.2 * Fixed recording issues on computers set to non-English regional formats * System audio recording is now off by default **April 17, 2026** ## 0.5.1 * Improved camera and screen recording sync at start * Fixed a trailing-frame timing issue in recordings **April 17, 2026** ## 0.5.0 * Added camera stall detection that stops the recording and offers a fix when the camera freezes * Added a camera memory setting to help with stalls on certain systems * Fixed an issue that could produce corrupted recording files **April 16, 2026** ## 0.4.1 * Fixed settings sometimes being lost when saved **April 15, 2026** ## 0.4.0 * Fixed camera recording duration and timing issues **April 10, 2026** ## 0.3.1 * Improved sync across camera, microphone, and screen when recording multiple sources together **April 10, 2026** ## 0.3.0 * Added camera, microphone, and screen recording with automatic upload * Recording quality and system audio options are temporarily disabled while stabilizing **March 26, 2026** ## 0.2.3 * Added the initial Tella for Windows app: sign in, camera/mic recording, and upload to Tella * Added auto-update support * Redesigned recording controls, device buttons, and window chrome to match the Mac app * Added workspace switching and a full settings panel * Window position and size are now remembered across launches # Embed API Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/embed-api Control embedded Tella videos with JavaScript # Embed API The Tella Embed API allows you to control embedded videos using JavaScript's `postMessage` API. This enables you to build custom video experiences, synchronize playback with your application, and respond to playback events. ## Quick start ```html theme={"system"} ``` If you embed the player from your [custom domain](/docs/help/admin/add-your-custom-domain), use that domain's origin (for example `https://videos.example.com`) instead of `https://www.tella.tv`. ## Commands Send commands to the embedded player using `postMessage`. All commands are sent as JSON objects with a `type` field. Wait for the `ready` event before sending commands: the player ignores commands that arrive earlier. It also ignores commands from other frames on your page; only the page that embeds the player can control it. ### Hello Ask the player to send `ready` again. Use it when your code may start listening after the player loaded, for example in a component that mounts later. A player that isn't ready yet sends `ready` when it is. ```javascript theme={"system"} iframe.contentWindow.postMessage({ type: "hello" }, "https://www.tella.tv"); ``` ### Play Start video playback. ```javascript theme={"system"} iframe.contentWindow.postMessage({ type: "play" }, "https://www.tella.tv"); ``` ### Pause Pause video playback. ```javascript theme={"system"} iframe.contentWindow.postMessage({ type: "pause" }, "https://www.tella.tv"); ``` ### Seek Jump to a specific time in the video. | Parameter | Type | Description | | - | - | - | | `time` | number | Time in seconds to seek to | ```javascript theme={"system"} // Seek to 30 seconds iframe.contentWindow.postMessage( { type: "seek", time: 30 }, "https://www.tella.tv", ); ``` ### Mute Mute the video audio. ```javascript theme={"system"} iframe.contentWindow.postMessage({ type: "mute" }, "https://www.tella.tv"); ``` ### Unmute Unmute the video audio. ```javascript theme={"system"} iframe.contentWindow.postMessage({ type: "unmute" }, "https://www.tella.tv"); ``` ### Set volume Set the video volume level. | Parameter | Type | Description | | - | - | - | | `volume` | number | Volume level from 0 (muted) to 1 (full volume) | ```javascript theme={"system"} // Set volume to 50% iframe.contentWindow.postMessage( { type: "setVolume", volume: 0.5 }, "https://www.tella.tv", ); ``` ### Captions on and off Show or hide captions. Captions only appear if the video has them. ```javascript theme={"system"} iframe.contentWindow.postMessage({ type: "captionsOn" }, "https://www.tella.tv"); iframe.contentWindow.postMessage({ type: "captionsOff" }, "https://www.tella.tv"); ``` ### Set playback rate Set the playback speed. | Parameter | Type | Description | | - | - | - | | `playbackRate` | number | One of the player's speeds: `0.5`, `0.8`, `0.9`, `1`, `1.1`, `1.2`, `1.5`, `1.7`, `2` or `2.5`. Other values use the nearest of these | ```javascript theme={"system"} iframe.contentWindow.postMessage( { type: "setPlaybackRate", playbackRate: 1.5 }, "https://www.tella.tv", ); ``` ## Events The embedded player sends events to the parent window. Listen for these events using `window.addEventListener`. ```javascript theme={"system"} window.addEventListener("message", (event) => { // Verify the message is from your Tella player if (event.origin !== "https://www.tella.tv") return; if (event.source !== iframe.contentWindow) return; const { type, namespace, ...data } = event.data; console.log("Event:", type, data); }); ``` Every event has `"namespace": "tella"`, so you can tell Tella's messages apart from other widgets' on the same page. With several players on one page, compare `event.source` with each iframe's `contentWindow` to see which player sent the event. ### Ready Sent when the player is initialized and ready to receive commands, and again in reply to `hello`. ```json theme={"system"} { "type": "ready", "namespace": "tella" } ``` ### Pointer down Sent when a viewer presses inside the embedded player. This signals an interaction, not that playback has started. ```json theme={"system"} { "type": "pointerDown" } ``` If you use this event to reveal a hidden player, verify both `event.origin` and `event.source === iframe.contentWindow` so only your own player can trigger it. ### Playback state Sent when the playback state changes (play, pause, stop, etc.). | Field | Type | Description | | - | - | - | | `state` | string | Current state: `idle`, `playing`, `paused`, `stopped`, `seeking`, or `stalled` | | `currentTime` | number | Current playback position in seconds | | `duration` | number | Total video duration in seconds | ```json theme={"system"} { "type": "playbackState", "state": "playing", "currentTime": 15.5, "duration": 120.0 } ``` ### Time update Sent approximately every 250ms during playback to report the current time. | Field | Type | Description | | - | - | - | | `currentTime` | number | Current playback position in seconds | | `duration` | number | Total video duration in seconds | ```json theme={"system"} { "type": "timeUpdate", "currentTime": 16.25, "duration": 120.0 } ``` ### Captions change Sent when captions are turned on or off, by the viewer or by a `captionsOn`/`captionsOff` command. | Field | Type | Description | | - | - | - | | `enabled` | boolean | Whether captions are now on | ```json theme={"system"} { "type": "captionsChange", "enabled": false } ``` ### Playback rate change Sent when the playback speed changes, by the viewer or by a `setPlaybackRate` command. | Field | Type | Description | | - | - | - | | `playbackRate` | number | The new playback speed | ```json theme={"system"} { "type": "playbackRateChange", "playbackRate": 1.5 } ``` ## Keep the viewer's captions and speed across videos Each embed starts with the video's own captions and speed settings. To carry the viewer's choices from one embed to the next (for example, lessons in a course), save them from the `captionsChange` and `playbackRateChange` events and pass them to every embed with the `captions` and `speed` [URL parameters](#embed-url-parameters): ```html theme={"system"} ``` ## Complete example Here's a complete example showing how to build a custom video controller: ```html theme={"system"} Custom Tella Player ``` ## Live preview player The live preview player shows a video as it is being edited. Each saved edit appears a moment later, with no re-render. Get its URL from the MCP tool [`get_live_preview_link`](/docs/mcp-tools/videos#get_live_preview_link) or from `POST /v1/videos/{id}/live-preview`. Load that URL in your iframe exactly as returned: the access token is in its `#token=` fragment. The live preview uses the same `postMessage` protocol as the embed player, with these differences: * It sends `ready`, `playbackState` and `timeUpdate`, and ignores `captionsOn`, `captionsOff` and `setPlaybackRate`. It also sends `playbackState` after each edit appears, so a changed `duration` shows up there. * Any `https` page can embed it in an iframe. * Its control bar has the editor's quality button, left of the volume control: pick **Low-res (fastest)**, **Hi-res (1080p)** or **Source (slowest)**. It starts on what the video's editor plays, and a pick only changes this player, never the video's editing quality. See [Edit faster with low-res mode](/docs/help/editing/low-res-mode). * The link stops working at the `expiresAt` time it came with (24 hours later), or as soon as the person who requested it loses edit access to the video. > [!WARNING] > > Anyone with the link can watch the video without signing in, so share it > only with the person you're editing for. ## Security considerations > [!WARNING] > > When receiving messages, check both `event.origin` (`https://www.tella.tv`, > or your custom domain) and `event.source === iframe.contentWindow`, so that > only your own player can drive your page. When sending commands, pass the exact origin rather than `'*'`, so a command never reaches a page that isn't the player: ```javascript theme={"system"} iframe.contentWindow.postMessage({ type: "play" }, "https://www.tella.tv"); ``` ## Embed URL parameters You can customize the initial embed behavior using URL parameters: | Parameter | Values | Description | | - | - | - | | `autoLoad` | `0`, `1` | Set to `0` to skip prebuffering video before playback. Defaults to `1` | | `autoPlay` | `true` | Auto-play the video on load | | `captions` | `0`, `1` | Start with captions off (`0`) or on (`1`), even when a translated caption language is picked for the viewer. Defaults to the video's captions setting | | `loop` | `1` | Loop the video when it ends | | `muted` | `1` | Start the video muted | | `speed` | number | Start at this playback speed, e.g. `1.5`. Takes the same values as [`setPlaybackRate`](#set-playback-rate) | | `t` | seconds | Start playback at a specific time | ```html theme={"system"} ``` Setting `autoLoad=0` still loads the player iframe; it does not create a click-to-load thumbnail. To generate that HTML, turn on **Lightweight embed** in **Share** → **Embed** and use **Copy code**. See [Customize embed settings](/docs/help/sharing/customize-embed-settings#lightweight-embed). # Bulk select videos Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/bulk-select-videos Check videos, Shift-click a range, or press Cmd/Ctrl+A on My videos, Workspace videos, Trash, or a playlist, then use the bottom toolbar to copy links, tag, add to playlists, change access, export, or delete them together. You can select many videos at once on **My videos**, **Workspace videos**, **Trash**, or inside a playlist, then act on them together from the toolbar at the bottom of the screen: copy links, add tags or playlists, share, change access, export, restore, or delete. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvm9676b00ae07jw22u24mj8/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvm9676b00ae07jw22u24mj8/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Select multiple videos * **Click to toggle:** click the checkbox on a video to add it to your selection. Click it again to deselect. * **Shift-click for a range:** select one video, then hold **Shift** and click another video further down (or up) the list. Every video between the two is selected. * **Cmd+A** (macOS) or **Ctrl+A** (Windows): select the videos that are already loaded. In list view, this selects the current page. In grid view, it selects every page you've loaded by scrolling. ## Select every video in a library or playlist Select at least one video, then click **Select all** in the bottom toolbar. Tella loads and selects every video in the current library section or playlist, including any active filters and pages you haven't loaded yet. While Tella is loading a large selection, click **Stop** in the toolbar to keep the videos selected so far. ## Where does bulk select work? * **My videos:** your personal videos * **Workspace videos:** videos shared in your workspace * **Trash:** deleted videos waiting to be permanently removed * Inside any playlist > [!NOTE] > > Bulk selection is available on desktop. On mobile, use each video's menu to manage videos individually. ## What can I do with selected videos? ### On My videos, Workspace videos, and playlists * **Copy links:** copy share links for every selected video at once. * **Add to playlist:** add the selected videos to one or more playlists. This also works inside a playlist, so you can add several videos from one playlist to another at once. * **Tags:** add or remove tags across the selected videos. See [organize your videos with tags](/docs/help/account/video-tags). * **Add user:** share the selected videos with someone. * **Access:** change the link visibility for the selected videos. * **Export:** export the selected videos together as a zip. See [batch export videos](/docs/help/export-videos/batch-export-videos). * **Delete videos:** move the selected videos to Trash. **Tags**, **Add user**, and **Export** only appear when you're the creator or an editor of every selected video. Inside a playlist, you'll also see **Remove from playlist**. ### On Trash * **Restore videos:** move the selected videos back to My videos. * **Delete now:** permanently delete the selected videos right away, instead of waiting for the 30-day window. Only appears when you're the creator of every selected video. ## Clear your selection Click the **X** at the start of the bottom toolbar (next to the count) to deselect every video at once. ## Combine bulk select with filters Bulk select pairs well with [sort and filter](/docs/help/tips/sort-filter-and-view-videos). For example, filter to **Not in a playlist**, select one video, click **Select all**, and add the whole filtered group to a playlist in one go. Switching to **List view** also makes large selections easier to scan. # Change your Tella email Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/change-email Change your account email in Settings → Profile: click the pencil icon next to your email, then confirm the 6-digit code sent to the new address. Change your account email in **Settings → Profile**: click the pencil icon next to your email, then confirm the 6-digit code Tella sends to the new address. ## 1. Open your profile settings 1. Sign in to [Tella](https://tella.com) with your current email address. 2. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar. 3. Select **Settings** from the dropdown. It opens on your **Profile** page. ## 2. Request the change 1. Click the **pencil icon** next to your current email address. 2. Enter your new email address in both fields. 3. Click **Send code**. > [!NOTE] > > Your account email does not change until you confirm the code sent to the new address. ## 3. Confirm your new email 1. Open the inbox for your new email address. 2. Find the six-digit confirmation code from Tella. 3. Enter the code in the **Change email** window. 4. Click **Confirm**. If you see **That code didn't work. Double-check it or request a new one.**, check that you entered it correctly. You can close the window and start the process again to request a new code. If you see **Too many attempts. Please wait 15 minutes before trying again.**, wait before trying another code. You can make up to 10 confirmation attempts in 15 minutes. ## 4. Sign in with your new email After your email is confirmed, click **Log in with new email**. Sign in with your new email address and the same password. ## If you cannot send a code If you see **An account with this email address already exists.**, the new address is already in use, even if you cannot find a Tella account for it. [See what to do with an address already in use.](/docs/help/account/change-your-email-to-one-that-already-exists) If you see **Too many attempts. Please wait an hour before trying again.**, wait before requesting another code. You can try to send a code up to five times in one hour. # Can I change my email to an address already in use? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/change-your-email-to-one-that-already-exists No. An email already used by a Tella account can't be moved to another account; delete the other account first, or contact support if you can't access it. No. You cannot change your Tella email to an address that is already in use by another account. The **An account with this email address already exists.** message can also appear if a sign-in was started with that address but no Tella account was completed. ## If you have another account with that email If you own the other Tella account and no longer need it: 1. Sign in to the account using the email you want to switch to. 2. [Delete that account](/docs/help/account/delete-account) only if you no longer need its content. 3. Sign in to your original account and [change your email](/docs/help/account/change-email). ## If you cannot sign in with that email If you see the address-in-use message but cannot find or access another Tella account with that address, contact [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com). Repeatedly requesting a code will not make an address in use available. # Does Tella have dark mode? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/dark-mode Yes. Set Appearance to System, Light, or Dark in Settings → Preferences, or switch from the Cmd+K / Ctrl+K command menu. Yes. Set **Appearance** to **System**, **Light**, or **Dark** in **Settings → Preferences**; the theme applies across the dashboard, editor, and settings. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqxlwn0001408l9cxeofmsw/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqxlwn0001408l9cxeofmsw/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Turn on dark mode 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar and select **Settings**. 2. Go to **Preferences**. 3. Under **General → Appearance**, pick one of the options: * **System:** matches your operating system's light/dark setting and updates automatically when you change it. This is the default. * **Light:** always uses the light theme. * **Dark:** always uses the dark theme. The change applies instantly across every page. ## Use the command menu You can also change your appearance without opening Settings: 1. Press **Cmd+K** (macOS) or **Ctrl+K** (Windows) to open the command menu. 2. Search for `dark`, `light`, `theme`, or `appearance`. 3. Select **Switch to dark mode** or **Switch to light mode**. To go back to following your operating system, search for `system` and select **Use system appearance**. That action only appears while Light or Dark is selected. ## Where does dark mode apply? The Appearance setting controls the look of your Tella account everywhere you sign in: the dashboard, editor, settings, and recorder. It does not change how your **shared video pages** look to viewers. Those follow your [workspace branding](/docs/help/admin/customize-your-branding) instead. ## Does dark mode sync across devices? Your Appearance preference is saved to your account, so it syncs across every device you sign in on. If you set Dark on your laptop, you'll get Dark on your desktop too. # Delete a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/delete-a-video Choose Delete from the video's ⋯ menu or its name menu. The video moves to the Trash for 30 days before it's permanently deleted; only the creator can delete a video. To delete a video, choose **Delete** from its **⋯** menu in your library or from its name menu on the video page. Deleting moves it to the **Trash**, where it stays for 30 days before Tella removes it for good, so a delete you regret can be undone. ## Delete a video from your library [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwj00be002x08l8cdup4mkc/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwj00be002x08l8cdup4mkc/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) 1. Go to **My videos** or **Workspace videos**. 2. Open the video's **⋯** (More actions) menu: * In **Grid** view, hover over the video and click **⋯** on the thumbnail. * In **List** view, click **⋯** at the right end of the video's row. 3. Choose **Delete**. 4. Confirm with **Yes, delete**. The video disappears from your library immediately, without a page refresh. If deletion fails, it reappears in your library. When you return to **Trash** after deleting a video elsewhere in Tella, the list refreshes automatically to show the deleted video. You don't need to reload the page. To reverse a library deletion, click **Undo** in the **Video moved to trash** notification. The notification closes immediately, and the video returns once it's restored. You can also [restore it from the Trash](/docs/help/account/recover-deleted-video) within 30 days. > [!NOTE] > > On a phone, Grid view has no hover controls, so the **⋯** button doesn't appear on thumbnails. Switch to **List** view with the view toggle at the top of the page, or open the video and delete it from its name menu (below). ## Delete a video from its view page or the editor [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqy3vjy001y08l2dlo80tyv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqy3vjy001y08l2dlo80tyv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) 1. Open the video, either on its view page or in the editor. 2. Click the video's name in the top bar to open its menu. 3. Choose **Delete**, then confirm with **Yes, delete**. > [!NOTE] > > Only the video's creator can delete it. If you were given **Editor** access to someone else's video, the menu shows **Leave** instead: that removes your access, and the video stays in the creator's library. ## Delete several videos at once Select the videos you want to remove, then click **Delete videos** in the toolbar at the bottom of the screen. See [bulk select videos](/docs/help/account/bulk-select-videos) for the ways to build a selection, including selecting every video that matches a filter. ## Delete a video permanently [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwj0778003808l83mkoa7wt/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwj0778003808l83mkoa7wt/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) Videos in the Trash are deleted for good after 30 days. To remove one sooner: 1. Open **Trash** below your playlists in the sidebar. 2. Remove the video: * In **Grid** view, hover over the video and click **Delete now** on the thumbnail. * In **List** view, click **Delete** at the right end of the video's row. 3. Confirm with **Permanently delete**. The Trash uses whichever view you last chose in your library; it has no view toggle of its own. To empty several at once, select them in the Trash and click **Delete now** in the bottom toolbar. Permanent deletion can't be undone. > [!NOTE] > > Only the video's creator can delete it permanently. When a creator deletes a video you have **Editor** access to, it also appears in your Trash, but without **Delete now** or **Delete**: you can restore it, and it's removed for good after 30 days or when the creator deletes it permanently. The bulk **Delete now** button appears only when you're the creator of every selected video. ## Related articles * [How can I recover a deleted video?](/docs/help/account/recover-deleted-video) — restore a video from the Trash within 30 days * [Bulk select videos](/docs/help/account/bulk-select-videos) — act on many videos at once * [Delete your Tella account](/docs/help/account/delete-account) — a different action that removes your account and every video in it # Delete your Tella account Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/delete-account Delete your account from the Danger zone in Settings → Profile. It permanently deletes your account and all videos and cancels active subscriptions immediately. Delete your account from the **Danger zone** at the bottom of **Settings → Profile**. This permanently deletes your account and all your videos, and cancels any active Tella subscriptions immediately. > [!WARNING] > > This action cannot be undone. ## Delete your account 1. Log in to your Tella account. 2. Go to [**Settings → Profile**](https://www.tella.tv/settings/profile). 3. Scroll to **Danger zone** and click **Delete account**. 4. Enter your email address to confirm. 5. Click **Delete**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/cmelf1a7a000y0cl94u6lg8dg/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/cmelf1a7a000y0cl94u6lg8dg/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Why can't I delete my account? If you see **You cannot delete your account while you are a member of a workspace which has other members.**, you're still in a shared workspace. There's no button to leave a workspace yourself: ask an owner to [remove you](/docs/help/admin/remove-member-from-tella-workspace), or, if you're the owner, remove the other members or [delete the workspace](/docs/help/admin/delete-workspace), then try again. # Which email am I logged in with on the Mac app? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/mac-app-account Click the three-dot (…) menu in the top right of the Tella Mac app; the Account item shows the email you're signed in with. Click the three-dot (`…`) menu in the top right of the Tella Mac app. The **Account** item in that menu shows the email you're signed in with, for example **Account ([you@company.com](mailto:you@company.com))**. ![Screenshot 2025-10-30 at 07.52.16.png](https://mintcdn.com/tella/Isiu-Cd8qYEzKYhq/help/images/account/screenshot-2025-10-30-at-07-52-16.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=Isiu-Cd8qYEzKYhq\&q=85\&s=b5456d9ca7374b6a1cbfc51ad7984b85) ## Switch to a different account in the Mac app If you're signed in with the wrong account: 1. Click the three-dot (`…`) menu in the top right of the Mac app. 2. Click **Logout**. 3. Sign in again with the correct account. ## Switch workspaces in the Mac app If your account belongs to more than one workspace, the same menu shows **Switch workspace**. Pick the workspace you want to record into. # Manage active sessions Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/manage-sessions See every device signed in to your Tella account in the Devices section of Settings → Profile, and log out one device or all other devices. The **Devices** section of **Settings → Profile** lists every device signed in to your Tella account, and lets you log out any one of them or all other devices at once. Use it if you forgot to log out on a shared computer or want to revoke access from an old device. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvw2effq003202jgarxhhhj2/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvw2effq003202jgarxhhhj2/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## See your active devices 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar and select **Settings**. It opens on your **Profile** page. 2. Scroll to the **Devices** section. Each row shows the browser and operating system Tella detected for that sign-in (for example, *Chrome on macOS* or *Firefox on Windows*), and when the device was last active. Your current device is marked **This device** and labelled **Now**. If you have more than five devices signed in, click **Show … more devices** (the button shows how many are hidden) to expand the list, **Load more devices** if there are more to fetch, and **Show fewer devices** to collapse it again. ## Sign out a single device Next to any device that isn't your current one, click **Log out**. The device is signed out immediately and removed from the list. ## Sign out everywhere else To sign out of every other device at once while staying signed in on your current one, click **Log out other devices** at the bottom of the section. This doesn't sign you out of the device you're using right now. To sign out here too, click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar and select **Sign out**. ## What if I don't recognize a device? Log it out, then [reset your password](/docs/help/account/reset-your-password). Completing a password reset signs your account out on every device, so the old session can't be reused. Sessions also expire after a period of inactivity, so old devices you haven't used in a while may drop off the list on their own. # Notification settings Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/notification-settings Turn Tella's emails for views, view milestones, exports, comments, and product tips on or off in Settings → Notifications; owners also control member-joined emails. Turn each of Tella's notification emails on or off in **Settings → Notifications**: views, view milestones, exports, comments, and product tips, plus member-joined emails for workspace owners. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqx3gdk000102pffm0u8f94/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqx3gdk000102pffm0u8f94/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Open notification settings 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar and select **Settings**. 2. Go to **Notifications**. You'll see a **Personal** section that controls emails sent to you, and (if you're a workspace owner) a **Workspace** section for emails sent to all owners. ## Personal notifications These toggles only affect emails sent to your account. ### View notifications Get an email for every view on your videos. Useful if you're sharing one-off videos and want to know the moment someone watches. **Default:** Off ### Milestones notifications Get an email when one of your videos hits a view milestone: 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, or 500 views. A lower-volume alternative to **View notifications** if every-view emails are too noisy. **Default:** On > [!TIP] > > If you want some signal without an email for every view, leave **View notifications** off and **Milestones notifications** on (the defaults). ### Export notifications Get an email when an export you started is ready to download. Especially useful for long exports where you've closed the **Preparing download** modal. The email gives you the link when it's done. See [Share & download](/docs/help/sharing/share-and-download-a-video) for the full export flow. If your video has no title, the email and download filename use **Untitled video**. **Default:** On ### Comment notifications Get an email when someone comments on one of your videos. See [Comments](/docs/help/sharing/comments) for the full commenting flow. **Default:** On ### Product tips Get occasional emails about ways to get more out of Tella, including new AI skills and workflows. This includes the welcome email Tella sends when you first connect an external AI assistant through the [Tella MCP server](/docs/mcp-server). **Default:** On ## Workspace notifications These toggles are only visible to workspace **Owners** and control emails sent to every owner of the workspace. ### Member joined notifications Send an email to workspace owners when a new member joins. Handy for tracking onboarding when you have an open invite link or SCIM provisioning in place. **Default:** On ## Related * [Subscribe to a plan](/docs/help/billing/subscribe-to-a-plan): start a paid plan or resubscribe after your trial. * [Manage active sessions](/docs/help/account/manage-sessions): see and sign out other devices. # Set your preferences Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/preferences Settings → Preferences holds your personal defaults: appearance, which recorder opens, auto zooms and AI titles/descriptions/chapters, sharing defaults for new videos, and library display. **Settings → Preferences** holds your personal defaults: appearance, which recorder opens, what Tella generates after a recording, the sharing defaults new videos inherit, and how your library looks. They apply to your account only and do not change your teammates' settings. To open them, click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar, go to **Settings**, then **Preferences** under **Account**. > [!NOTE] > > Changes save as soon as you make them. There is no save button. A **Saved** message confirms each change. If a change can't be saved, you'll see an error and the setting goes back to its previous value. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqvdwe8000602ntc277fqyr/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqvdwe8000602ntc277fqyr/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## General **Appearance** sets your interface color scheme: **System**, **Light**, or **Dark**. See [dark mode](/docs/help/account/dark-mode) for details. ## Recording **Recorder** chooses which recorder opens when you start a new video or clip. You can pick: * **Always ask:** Tella asks each time whether to use the desktop app or the web app. * **macOS app** or **Windows app**: always use the desktop app. * **Web app:** always record in the browser. > [!NOTE] > > This setting only appears when you are on macOS or Windows, since it chooses between a desktop app and the web app. On other systems every recording uses the web app. **Auto-apply zooms** adds [click-based zooms](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom) to eligible screen recordings when you finish recording. Tella uses the last Auto Zoom style you selected in the editor. You can adjust or remove the generated zooms afterward. The three AI toggles decide what Tella writes for you after a recording finishes: * **Auto-generate chapters:** automatically generate [chapters](/docs/help/editing/chapters) for new videos. * **Auto-generate titles:** automatically generate a [title](/docs/help/video-metadata/edit-video-title) for new videos. * **Auto-generate descriptions:** automatically generate a description for new videos. Turning these off does not remove the feature. You can still generate a title, description, or chapters by hand on any video. ## Sharing These set the defaults that **new** videos inherit. Changing one does not alter videos you have already recorded. To change an existing video, open its [viewer settings](/docs/help/sharing/viewer-settings) instead. * **Show captions:** new videos have captions on by default. * **Show view count:** new videos show the view count. * **Show comments:** new videos have [comments](/docs/help/sharing/comments) enabled. * **Show reactions:** new videos have [emoji reactions](/docs/help/sharing/reactions) enabled. * **Show transcripts:** new videos show the transcript to viewers. * **Allow document generation:** viewers can [generate documents](/docs/help/sharing/document-generation) from new videos. * **Allow downloads:** viewers can download your videos. * **Allow raw downloads:** viewers can download the [raw source files](/docs/help/export-videos/export-raw-recordings). This option appears once downloads are allowed. * **Show copy link button:** new videos show the copy link button. * **Playback speed:** the default speed the player starts at. Viewers can still [change it themselves](/docs/help/sharing/adjust-viewer-playback-speed). ## Library **Always show playlists and tags** shows playlist and [tag](/docs/help/account/video-tags) badges on video thumbnails at all times, instead of only when you hover over them. ## Related settings Some settings that look like preferences live elsewhere: * Email and in-app notifications are on their own [Notifications](/docs/help/account/notification-settings) page. * Your transcription language and dictionary are under [Language](/docs/help/account/transcription-language). * Workspace-wide defaults, such as [default video permissions](/docs/help/admin/set-default-video-permissions), are set by an owner under **Workspace** and apply to everyone. # How can I recover a deleted video? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/recover-deleted-video Deleted videos stay in the Trash for 30 days. Open Trash in the sidebar and click Restore to move a video back to My videos. Yes, for 30 days. Deleted videos go to the **Trash**, where you can restore them until Tella permanently deletes them after 30 days. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqj5wuo008o08kz0nomhfp1/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqj5wuo008o08kz0nomhfp1/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Restore a deleted video 1. Open [**Trash**](https://www.tella.tv/videos/archived "https://www.tella.tv/videos/archived") below your playlists in the sidebar. 2. Find the video you want to recover. 3. Restore it: * In **Grid** view, hover over the video and click **Restore** on the thumbnail. * In **List** view, click **Restore** at the right end of the video's row. 4. The video moves back to **My videos**. ## Restore several deleted videos at once Select the videos in the Trash, then click **Restore videos** in the bottom toolbar. See [bulk select videos](/docs/help/account/bulk-select-videos). ## Why does it say "Upgrade to restore"? If your subscription has ended and the video has expired, the Trash shows **Upgrade to restore** instead of **Restore**. Subscribe to a paid plan to restore it. ## Can I recover a video after 30 days? No. After 30 days in the Trash a video is permanently deleted, as is any video you remove with **Delete now**. See [delete a video](/docs/help/account/delete-a-video). # Reset your Tella password Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/reset-your-password Click Reset password under Security in Settings → Profile to get a reset email, or use Forgot password? on the login page if you can't sign in. To reset your Tella password, click **Reset password** under **Security** in **Settings → Profile** and follow the link in the email. If you can't sign in, use **Forgot password?** on the login page instead. ## Reset your password from Settings 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar. 2. Select **Settings** from the dropdown. It opens on your **Profile** page. 3. Under the **Security** section, click **Reset password**. 4. A password reset email is sent to your account email address. 5. Check your inbox and follow the link in the email to set a new password. ## Reset your password when you can't log in 1. Go to the login page as you normally would. 2. Enter your email address. 3. Click the **Forgot password?** link. 4. Follow the instructions sent to your email to reset your password. ## Does resetting my password sign me out? Yes. When a password reset completes, Tella signs your account out on every device, so you need to log in again everywhere with the new password. ## Log in with a one-time code instead You can also log in without a password: 1. On the login page, enter your email address. 2. Choose the option to receive a one-time code. 3. Check your email for the code and enter it to log in. The login page reminds you of the login method you last used. # Switch from Google to email and password login Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/switch-from-google-to-email-password-login If you signed up with Google, set a password by clicking Reset password under Security in Settings → Profile, then log in with your email and that password. If you signed up with Google, set a password by clicking **Reset password** under **Security** in **Settings → Profile**, then log in with your email and the new password. ## Set a password for your account 1. Go to [tella.com](https://tella.com) and sign in with Google. 2. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar. 3. Select **Settings** from the dropdown. It opens on your **Profile** page. 4. Under the **Security** section, click **Reset password**. 5. A password reset email is sent to your account email address. 6. Check your inbox and follow the link in the email to set a new password. You can now log in to Tella using your email and the password you just created. ## Can I still use Google login after setting a password? Yes. Adding a password doesn't remove Google login. You can use either method to sign in going forward. # Set your transcription language Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/transcription-language Set the language Tella transcribes new videos in under Settings → Language. The default, Auto, detects the spoken language; the dictionary teaches it names and terms. Set the language Tella transcribes your new videos in under **Settings → Language**. The default, **Auto**, detects the spoken language; the same page has a dictionary for names and terms Tella would otherwise misspell. To open it, click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar, go to **Settings**, then **Language** under **Account**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqw88yl00b902m766tc46px/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqw88yl00b902m766tc46px/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Transcription language **Transcription language** chooses the language used for your videos' subtitles. Leave it on **Auto** to detect the language automatically, or pick the language you actually speak in, not the language you want subtitles translated into. This is your personal default and applies to videos you record from now on. It does not re-transcribe videos you have already recorded. > [!TIP] > > Already recorded a video in the wrong language? You do not need to record it again. [Re-transcribe it](/docs/help/editing/retranscribe-a-video) from the editor and pick the correct language there. ## Transcription dictionary The dictionary teaches transcription the words it cannot guess: people's names, your product and company names, and technical jargon. Add each term using the exact spelling and capitalization you want to see in the transcript. Do not add ordinary everyday words: the model already knows those, and padding the dictionary makes it less accurate, not more. > [!NOTE] > > The transcription dictionary is available in English, Spanish, Portuguese, French, German, and Italian. For how the dictionary behaves and when to use it, see [create your custom transcript dictionary](/docs/help/editing/create-your-custom-transcript-dictionary). # Set up two-factor authentication Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/two-factor-authentication Turn on two-factor authentication in Settings → Profile to require an authenticator code when you sign in with your email and password. Turn on **Two-factor authentication** under **Security** in **Settings → Profile** to require an authenticator code when you sign in with your email and password. ## Turn on two-factor authentication 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar, then select **Settings**. It opens on your **Profile** page. 2. Under **Security**, find **Two-factor authentication** and click **Set up**. 3. Scan the QR code with an authenticator app such as 1Password, Google Authenticator, or Authy. If you can't scan it, enter the displayed key in your authenticator app instead. Use **Copy key** to copy it. 4. Enter the current 6-digit code from your authenticator app. Tella submits it automatically once you enter all six digits. Two-factor authentication is only enabled after your code is accepted. You'll see an **On** badge next to **Two-factor authentication**. Starting setup without confirming a code doesn't change how you sign in. ## Sign in with two-factor authentication When you sign in with your email and password, you'll also be asked for a code from your authenticator app. Enter the current code for your Tella account. This setting doesn't apply to single sign-on (SSO). Workspace owners can't require everyone in their workspace to turn on two-factor authentication. ## Turn off two-factor authentication 1. Open **Settings → Profile**. 2. Under **Security**, click **Turn off** next to **Two-factor authentication**. 3. Enter the current 6-digit code from your authenticator app. Tella submits it automatically once you enter all six digits. After your code is accepted, two-factor authentication is off. Signing in with your email and password no longer requires an authenticator code. ## What if my authenticator code doesn't work? Enter the current code from your authenticator app, not a code sent to your email. If a code has expired, try the next code shown in the app. If you see **Too many attempts. Please wait 15 minutes before trying again.**, wait 15 minutes before entering another code. ## What if I lose access to my authenticator? Tella doesn't provide recovery codes. If you lose access to your authenticator, contact [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com) for help recovering access to your account. # Organize your videos with tags Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/account/video-tags Open a video's ⋯ menu and hover over Tags to add workspace tags (shared with your team) or private tags (only you), then filter My videos by tag. To tag a video, open its **⋯** menu in your library and hover over **Tags**. Tags organize your library without moving videos around: create shared **workspace tags** for your whole team or **private tags** just for yourself, add them to any video, and filter **My videos** by tag. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvm8ied4001u08l53vo2fd36/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvm8ied4001u08l53vo2fd36/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## What's the difference between workspace and private tags? * **Workspace tags** are shared with everyone in the workspace. Anyone can add or remove them on videos they can edit. Workspace viewers can only create private tags. * **Private tags** are only visible to you. Adding a private tag only affects your own library. Teammates won't see it. Each tag has a name, a color, and an optional description. ## Create a tag 1. In your library, open a video's **⋯** menu, hover over **Tags**, and click **Manage tags**, or open **Filter** on **My videos** and click the **Manage tags** button beside **Tags**. 2. Type a name for the new tag in the **Search or create a tag** box. 3. Click **Create "name"** for a workspace tag, or **Create private "name"** for a private tag. New tags get a color automatically. From the same tag manager you can rename a tag, change its color, add a description, share a private tag with the workspace (**Share with workspace**), or delete it. Deleting a tag removes it from every video it was on. > [!NOTE] > > Private tags can only be renamed or deleted by the person who created them. ## Add a tag to a video You can toggle a video's tags from two places: * **In your library:** open the video's **⋯** menu and hover over **Tags**. * **From the view page or editor:** click the video title in the top-left of the page and hover over **Tags** in the dropdown menu. This option is available if you are the video creator or an editor. Either way, check the tags you want to apply, or click **Manage tags** to create a new one. Tags appear on the video's thumbnail and as badge chips on video cards. By default the chips fade in on hover: to keep them always visible, turn on **Always show playlists and tags** from the **⋯** overflow menu next to the grid/list toggle, or in **Settings → Preferences → Library**. Tags also show up inside playlists that include the video. ## Tag multiple videos 1. Select the videos in your library or playlist. 2. Click **Tags** in the bottom toolbar. 3. Check a tag to add it to every selected video, or uncheck a shared tag to remove it from every selected video. You must be the creator or an editor of every selected video. You can also create a tag from this window and apply it to the full selection. Tags shared by every selected video appear checked. If you use **Select all** for videos that have not loaded yet, the tag list starts unchecked because Tella cannot compare their existing tags. ## Remove a tag Open the video's **⋯** menu, hover over **Tags**, and uncheck the tag. Removing a tag from a video doesn't delete the tag itself. ## Filter your library by tag On **My videos**, open **Filter** and pick one or more tags under **Tags**. Videos need to have **every** selected tag to appear in the results, so combining tags narrows the list. > [!TIP] > > Combine tag filters with the [sort and view options](/docs/help/tips/sort-filter-and-view-videos) or with [bulk select](/docs/help/account/bulk-select-videos) to act on a whole group of tagged videos at once. ## Tags in the API and MCP You can list, create, update, and delete tags (and add or remove them from videos) through the public API and MCP server. See the [MCP tag tools](/docs/mcp-tools/tags) for the full list. # Add your custom domain Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/add-your-custom-domain On Tella Premium, workspace owners connect up to 25 custom domains like videos.yourdomain.com in Settings → Domain. One is included; each additional domain is 10 USD/month, or 8 USD/month billed annually. Workspace owners on **Tella Premium** connect custom domains in **Settings → Domain**, so shared videos and playlists appear on your own URL, like `videos.yourdomain.com`. You add a DNS record (or let a supported provider add it automatically), then Tella verifies it. A workspace can connect up to 25 domains and choose which one each video or playlist uses. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvr6hrc800av02m6drp51ghp/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvr6hrc800av02m6drp51ghp/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Which plan do I need for a custom domain? Premium. On other plans you can set up one domain, but it won't go live until you upgrade. ## How much do additional domains cost? Premium includes one custom domain. Each additional domain costs **\$10/month**, or **\$8/month** on annual billing, and is added to your workspace's Premium subscription. When you add one, you tick a box agreeing to the charge, and the prorated amount for the current billing period is charged right away. Removing a domain credits the unused time to your next invoice. Every domain in a workspace shares its branding, CTA buttons, and members. If a brand or client needs its own, see [Should I add another custom domain or create a new workspace?](/docs/help/admin/custom-domain-or-new-workspace) Additional domains need an active Premium subscription: during a Premium trial you can connect only the included domain. Enterprise Premium workspaces have their domains covered by their contract. > [!NOTE] > > Only workspace owners can configure a custom domain. Other workspace members see the page in read-only mode and can see which owner to contact. ## 1. Open domain settings 1. Log in to your Tella account. 2. Click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner. 3. Go to **Settings** → **Domain**. 4. Click **Add domain**. ## 2. Choose your domain type You'll be asked to choose between two options: * **Subdomain**: use a subdomain on your website. Example: `videos.yourdomain.com` * **Root domain**: use a spare domain that you aren't using for your main website. Example: `yourcustomdomain.com` > [!TIP] > > **Most users choose a subdomain** because it's easier to set up alongside your main site. ## 3. Enter your domain Type in the subdomain or domain you'd like to use, such as `videos.yourdomain.com`. If this is an additional domain, tick the box to agree to its monthly charge. Then click **Add domain**. ## 4. Set up DNS After you add the domain, Tella checks whether your DNS provider supports automatic setup. ### Set up automatically If you see **Automatic DNS setup available**: 1. Click **Connect with** followed by your DNS provider's name, for example **Connect with Cloudflare**. 2. Review and approve the DNS changes with your provider. 3. Wait while Tella redirects you to **Domain** and verifies the setup. Watch the automatic setup from start to finish: [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmubpc5q100000agm3ko61i1i/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmubpc5q100000agm3ko61i1i/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) Automatic setup uses Domain Connect and is available for Cloudflare-managed root domains and subdomains. More providers, including Vercel, are coming soon. If you prefer to add the records yourself, click **Show manual DNS instructions**. ### Set up manually If automatic setup isn't available, Tella shows the exact DNS record to add with your domain provider. Which record you need depends on the domain type you chose: **Subdomain** (for example `videos.yourdomain.com`): | Field | Value | | - | - | | **Type** | `CNAME` | | **Domain** | `videos` *(the subdomain part you entered)* | | **Value** | `cname.tella.tv` | **Root domain** (for example `yourcustomdomain.com`): | Field | Value | | - | - | | **Type** | `A` | | **Name** | `@` | | **Value** | `76.76.21.21` | > [!NOTE] > > If you set up Cloudflare manually, set the record's proxy status to **DNS only** (proxy disabled). > [!WARNING] > > If the domain is already used by another site, Tella may ask for an additional verification record (usually a `TXT` record) to prove you own it. Add it to the domain you want to use for Tella. Adding it to your main website's domain would remove that domain from the other site. ## 5. Verify your domain Once you've added the DNS record: 1. Go back to Tella. 2. Click the refresh button next to the domain (**Check status**). 3. The status badge changes from **Pending** to **Verified** once the DNS is active. **Misconfigured** means the DNS record doesn't point to Tella yet. ## 6. Share videos from your domain Now when you share a video from your Tella workspace, it's hosted on your custom domain. This keeps your links branded and consistent with your website or company identity. ## Choose the default domain The **Default domain** setting in **Settings → Domain** decides which domain share links use unless a video or playlist picks another. It can be any connected domain or `tella.tv`. The first domain you connect becomes the default. The domain marked **Default** in the list is the current one. Videos open on every connected domain, so changing the default doesn't break links you've already shared. ## Use a different domain for one video or playlist * **Video**: open the video's **Share** dialog. In the **Link** field, click the domain at the start of the link and pick another one. **Workspace default** follows the default domain setting. * **Playlist**: open the playlist's **Share** dialog, go to **Publish**, and click the domain at the start of the link. Choosing a domain per video or playlist is a Premium feature, available to workspace members who can edit the video or playlist. ## Remove a domain Click the trash icon next to the domain and confirm with **Remove**. Links on that domain stop working, and videos and playlists that used it share on your default domain instead. If you removed the default domain, links fall back to `tella.tv` until you choose a new default. # Auto-connect Tella in Claude for your organization Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/auto-connect-tella-in-claude Claude Team and Enterprise admins can connect Tella for every member at once with Claude-issued auth (beta), so members use Tella in Claude without signing in or approving access. It needs a verified domain on your Tella workspace. Claude Team and Enterprise admins can connect Tella for their whole organization at once, so members use Tella in Claude with no sign-in page or consent screen. Claude calls this **Enterprise-managed auth**. Tella supports its **Claude-issued** identity source, which is in beta and needs no identity provider or SSO. > [!NOTE] > > Auto-connect is in beta. While it is, Tella support registers your organization's issuer URL for you (step 2 below). A setting in Tella will replace that step later. ## What you need before you start * **A Claude Team or Enterprise plan**, and someone who can open **Organization settings** in Claude. * **A Tella workspace with a verified domain.** A workspace owner verifies it in Tella under **Settings → Security → Verify your domain**. Once a domain is verified, anyone who signs in to Tella with an email on it joins your workspace automatically and takes a billable seat. * **Matching email addresses.** Claude matches each member by email. A member is connected only if their Claude email is the same as the email on their Tella account, that email is on your verified domain, and they're already a member of your Tella workspace. ## Does auto-connect add Tella members or seats? No. Auto-connect only signs in people who are already members of your Tella workspace. It never creates a Tella account or adds anyone to your workspace, so it can't change your seat count. Members without a matching Tella account see Claude's usual **Connect** prompt instead. ## Set up auto-connect 1. **Copy your issuer URL in Claude.** Go to **Organization settings → Connectors** and select **Tella**. On the **Configuration** tab, click **Set up** next to **Managed authorization**, choose **Claude-issued** under **Identity source**, and copy the issuer URL. It looks like `https://identity.anthropic.com/issuers/...`. 2. **Send it to Tella support.** Email [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com) with the issuer URL and your Tella workspace name. We'll reply once it's registered on your workspace. 3. **Leave the tenant field empty** unless Tella support gives you a tenant ID. 4. **Test the connection.** Back in Claude, click **Test connection**, then **Enable and continue**. 5. **Choose who gets Tella.** All roles get it by default. To try it with one team first, pick only that team's custom role. Before you announce it, ask two or three members to open a new chat and run a real request, such as "List my latest Tella videos". ## If the connection test fails Check these, in order: * The issuer URL you sent matches the one Claude shows now. Switching **Identity source** in Claude can change it. * Your Tella workspace has a verified domain. * The person running the test is a member of the Tella workspace, signed in with the same email as their Claude account, on the verified domain. If it still fails, email [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com) with the error Claude shows. ## What members see in Claude Tella is already connected the first time a member needs it, with no sign-in page or consent screen. Tella acts as that member and can do what they can do in Tella, including editing and sharing their videos. A member whose email doesn't match a Tella account sees the usual **Connect** prompt and can sign in to Tella themselves. ## When someone leaves your organization Remove them from your Claude organization and from your Tella workspace (**Settings → Members**). Removing them from Claude stops new sign-ins, but access Claude already has lasts until it expires. Remove them from Tella before their email address is given to someone else, or the new person could be signed in to the old account. ## What Claude checks before connecting a member Claude only checks that the person is a current member of your Claude organization. It doesn't check SSO or two-factor authentication. Claude recommends enforcing SSO on your Claude organization if you need that. ## Turn auto-connect off In Claude, open Tella's **Managed authorization** settings and choose **Disable**. Members then connect Tella themselves. To also remove the issuer from your Tella workspace, email [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com). ## Can I auto-connect through Okta instead? Not yet. Claude also offers an **IdP-managed** identity source, where Okta signs members in, but Tella doesn't support it yet. Claude-issued works whatever identity provider you use, including Google Workspace and Microsoft Entra ID. ## Related articles * [Tella MCP Server](/docs/help/integrations/mcp-server): connect Tella to Claude yourself, and the other AI tools Tella works with. * [Set up SSO](/docs/help/admin/set-up-sso): sign in to Tella with your identity provider. * Claude's guide: [Auto-connect your organization's apps to Claude](https://support.claude.com/en/articles/15537633-auto-connect-your-organization-s-apps-to-claude). # Create a new workspace Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/create-a-new-workspace Create a workspace from Join or create workspace in the workspace menu. Each workspace has separate billing, members, and videos and a 7-day Pro trial. To create a workspace, click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar, click **Join or create workspace**, then **Create a new workspace**. Each workspace has its own billing, members, and videos, so projects, teams, or clients stay separate. ## When to create a new workspace Creating a separate workspace is useful when you want to: * Keep videos for different clients or departments separate * Manage billing independently for each team * Set up different members and permissions per project If you only need links on another domain, add a custom domain instead. See [Should I add another custom domain or create a new workspace?](/docs/help/admin/custom-domain-or-new-workspace) Creating a new workspace does not affect your current workspace. All your existing videos, members, and settings remain unchanged. ## Create a workspace 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left corner of the sidebar. 2. Click **Join or create workspace** below the workspace list at the top of the menu. 3. Click **Create a new workspace**. 4. Enter a **Workspace name** (for example, your team or company name). 5. Click **Create workspace** to confirm. Once the workspace is created, you are automatically redirected into it. ## Does a new workspace need its own subscription? Yes. Each new workspace starts with a **7-day free trial** of Tella Pro. After the trial ends, subscribe in that workspace to keep using it. ## Who owns a workspace I create? You do. You are the **Owner** of any workspace you create and can [invite members](/docs/help/admin/invite-a-new-member-to-your-tella-workspace) from **Add & manage members**. ## Is there a limit on creating workspaces? Yes. You can create up to **3 new workspaces per hour**. ## Switch between workspaces 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left corner. 2. Click the workspace you want from the list at the top of the menu. The current workspace has a check mark next to it. If you have many workspaces, scroll the list to find the one you want. You can also switch from the editor or video page by opening the dropdown arrow next to the logo in the top left and selecting a workspace. # Set default CTA buttons for your workspace Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/cta-button Workspace owners set up to two default call-to-action buttons for every video in Settings → CTA button; individual videos can override them. Workspace owners set up to two default call-to-action (CTA) buttons for every video in the workspace in **Settings → CTA button**. A CTA is a clickable link shown alongside your video on the view page and in embeds, like "Book a demo" or "Visit our website". Every video inherits the defaults unless it has its own CTA. To set them, click your workspace name, go to **Settings**, then **CTA button** under **Workspace**. > [!NOTE] > > Only workspace owners can change the default CTAs. Everyone else sees the page in read-only mode, along with the owners to ask. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvr45cn300gf02p126awf3t0/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvr45cn300gf02p126awf3t0/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Add a default CTA 1. Go to **Settings → CTA button**. 2. Turn on **Enable default CTA 1**. 3. In **Link**, replace the suggested link with the full URL the button should open, including `https://`. 4. In **Label**, replace the suggested text with your button text. Keep it short and specific. "Book a demo" beats "Click here". 5. To add a second button, turn on **Enable default CTA 2** and fill in its link and label the same way. You can have up to two buttons. A live preview updates as you type, so you can see how the buttons will look to a viewer before you leave the page. ## Show the linked site's favicon **Show favicon** displays the small site icon from the linked website next to your button text. It makes the destination recognizable at a glance, useful when you link somewhere with a well-known logo, less so for a plain internal page. This option appears once at least one CTA is enabled, and applies to your buttons together. The favicon only shows on view pages for workspaces on a paid plan (Pro or above). ## Do default CTAs override a video's own CTA? No. Workspace defaults are inherited, not copied: * A video using the workspace default **follows it**. Change the default later and every one of those videos updates automatically. * Overriding or removing the CTA on a single video affects that video only. The workspace default and every other video are untouched. To change a CTA on one video, open the video's view page and click the CTA button to open the CTA editor. See [share and download a video](/docs/help/sharing/share-and-download-a-video) for the per-video options. ## Related * [Customize your branding](/docs/help/admin/customize-your-branding): logo and colors on the view page. * [Viewer settings](/docs/help/sharing/viewer-settings): the other controls for what viewers see. # Should I add another custom domain or create a new workspace? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/custom-domain-or-new-workspace Add another custom domain when the same team, brand, and billing just need more share URLs. Create a new workspace when you need separate members, branding, CTAs, billing, or videos. Add another custom domain when the same team, brand, and subscription just need more share URLs. Create a new workspace when something other than the link has to be different: who can see the videos, the logo and colors on the view page, the CTA buttons, security settings, or who pays. ## What changes with each domain, and what stays the same A custom domain only changes the address a share link uses. Everything else is set once per workspace and applies to every domain the workspace connects: | Setting | Per domain | Per workspace | | - | - | - | | Share link address (`videos.yourdomain.com`) | ✓ | | | Members and their roles | | ✓ | | Videos and playlists | | ✓ | | Branding: logo, favicon, view page theme, logo on video | | ✓ | | Default CTA buttons | | ✓ | | Default video permissions, SSO, SCIM | | ✓ | | Subscription and invoices | | ✓ | So two domains in one workspace show the **same** logo, favicon, colors, and CTA buttons. If you need a different look per brand, a domain alone won't give you that. ## When to add another custom domain Add a domain in **Settings → Domain** when: * You run several brands or product lines that can share one logo and CTA, and want links on each brand's website, like `videos.brand-a.com` and `videos.brand-b.com`. * You want a separate domain for a region or campaign, like `demo.yourdomain.com` for sales and `learn.yourdomain.com` for customer education. * You're moving to a new domain and want old links to keep working. Videos open on every connected domain, so you can switch the default without breaking anything you've shared. You pick the domain for each video or playlist from its **Share** dialog, and the **Default domain** covers everything else. See [Add your custom domain](/docs/help/admin/add-your-custom-domain). Premium includes one domain. Each additional one costs \$10/month, or \$8/month billed annually, up to 25 per workspace, all on the one subscription. ## When to create a new workspace [Create a new workspace](/docs/help/admin/create-a-new-workspace) when: * **Each brand needs its own logo, colors, favicon, or CTA buttons.** Branding is set per workspace. * **Different people should work on different videos.** Members, videos, and playlists belong to one workspace, so a separate workspace keeps them fully apart. * **You're an agency or freelancer working for clients.** A workspace per client keeps their videos, branding, and members separate, and makes it easy to hand the workspace over later with [Transfer workspace ownership](/docs/help/admin/transfer-workspace-ownership). * **Someone else pays.** Each workspace has its own subscription and invoices, so a client or department can be billed directly. * **A group needs different security settings**, such as its own SSO or default video permissions. Each workspace needs its own subscription, and a custom domain needs Premium in that workspace. Switch between workspaces from your workspace name in the top left. ## Can one custom domain be used in two workspaces? No. A domain can be connected to only one workspace at a time. To move it, remove it in **Settings → Domain** in the old workspace, then add it in the new one. Once it's verified there, it works only for videos and playlists in the new workspace. Links on that domain to videos that stayed in the old workspace stay broken, so share those again from their own workspace's domain or [move the videos](/docs/help/admin/move-videos-between-workspaces) first. ## Can I move videos to the new workspace? Yes. If you're an owner of the source workspace and belong to the new workspace, select your own videos in the library and click **Move to workspace**. To move all your videos, use **Settings → General → Videos → Transfer videos**. See [Transfer videos to another workspace](/docs/help/admin/move-videos-between-workspaces). # Customize your branding Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/customize-your-branding Workspace owners set the logo, favicon, view page theme, logo on video, and video backgrounds in Settings → Branding. Square logos show on any plan; Pro adds the theme; Premium adds full logos, a logo link, and a custom domain. Workspace owners customize branding in **Settings → Branding**: your logo and favicon, the view page theme, a logo on every new video, and shared video backgrounds. A square logo shows on any plan; Pro adds the view page theme, and Premium adds logos in any aspect ratio, a logo link, and a custom domain. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvr4qpwc004m02nycj1k39xc/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvr4qpwc004m02nycj1k39xc/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) > [!NOTE] > > Branding availability depends on your plan: > > * **Any plan**: a square view-page logo, including a dark-mode variant > * **Pro**: all of the above, plus the default logo on new videos, video backgrounds, and the view page theme: brand color, background, and Auto light / dark > * **Premium**: all of Pro, plus logos in any aspect ratio, a logo link, and a custom domain with its own favicon ## Where to find branding settings 1. Log in to your Tella account. 2. Click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner. 3. Go to **Settings** → **Branding**. On the left you'll see every setting described below. On the right you'll see a live preview showing how your changes will look on the video view page. > [!NOTE] > > Only workspace owners can change branding. Other workspace members can open this page in read-only mode and see which owner to contact. > [!NOTE] > > If you signed up with a work email, Tella suggests a logo and brand color from your company's website during onboarding, and you can adjust them in the **Style your video** step. Everything you set there can be changed later on this page. To fetch them again, click **Find from company domain** under **Brand**. > [!TIP] > > Click **Reset to defaults** (the refresh icon next to the Branding title) to clear all customization and go back to the default Tella look. ## Brand ### Logo Upload your logo image. It replaces the Tella logo in the top-left corner of every video view page in your workspace. Below Premium, logos are cropped to a square. Premium lets you use a logo in any aspect ratio. ### Logo (dark mode) When **Auto light / dark** is on (see [View Page Theme](#view-page-theme)), the view page switches between a light and dark variant based on the viewer's system preference. Upload a separate logo here for use on the dark variant, for example, a white version of your logo. If you leave it empty, your main logo is used in both variants. ### Logo link Set **Logo link** to the URL viewers should visit when they click your logo, usually your website homepage. You can type just the domain, like `example.com`, and Tella adds `https://` for you. Clear the field to remove the link. * If you created the video or have editor access and view it on `tella.tv`, clicking the logo takes you back to your videos instead. * Other viewers follow **Logo link**, whether they're on `tella.tv` or your custom domain. If no logo link is set, the logo takes them to the video's custom domain homepage when one is available, or Tella's home page otherwise. * On your custom domain, creators and editors follow the same logo destination as other viewers. > [!NOTE] > > The logo link only goes live on **Tella Premium**. ### Favicon Upload your favicon. This is the small icon that shows in the browser tab when someone views a video on your validated [custom domain](/docs/help/admin/add-your-custom-domain). Tella does not replace the favicon on the shared `tella.tv` domain. ## Image upload requirements Use a JPEG, PNG, or WebP image between 10×10 and 4032×4032 pixels for your logo, dark-mode logo, or favicon. After uploading, you can crop the image before applying it. If Tella can't upload the image, you'll see an error and can try again or choose another file. Unsupported formats and images outside the allowed dimensions show a more specific message. ## View Page Theme The View Page Theme controls the colors of your video view page: your brand color (used for accents like the play button, "Record your own" CTA, and links) and the background behind the video. ### Primary Pick a brand color, then choose a background that pairs with it. * **Brand color:** Pick from the curated swatches, or open the color picker (with eyedropper) to match an exact color from your site. * **Background:** Once you've picked a brand color, choose from the matching background palette. ### Mixed Browse curated brand-and-background pairs designed to look good together out of the box. Click a pair to apply both colors at once. ### Auto light / dark Turn this on to have the view page automatically switch between a light and dark variant based on the viewer's system preference. When off, the view page always uses the colors you picked. If you have a [dark mode logo](#logo-dark-mode) uploaded, it'll be used on the dark variant. ## Logo on video Add a logo that stays visible on top of your video content across all clips, similar to a TV channel watermark. Great for keeping your brand visible throughout the video. You can adjust: * **Position:** Anchor the logo to any of the four corners. * **Scale:** Make the logo larger or smaller. * **Padding:** Control the space between the logo and the edge of the video. > [!NOTE] > > The default watermark only applies to **new videos**. Existing videos aren't affected. You can also add or override a logo on individual videos in the editor. See [Add your logo to videos](/docs/help/editing/add-your-logo-to-videos). ## Video backgrounds Build a shared library of backgrounds (solid colors or images) available to everyone in your workspace as a quick-pick when recording. Upload your own image, or add presets from Tella's catalogue. The selected default applies to **new recordings**. Recorders can still swap to a different background per recording in the editor, where all of Tella's built-in animated backgrounds remain available in the [Background Picker](/docs/help/editing/pick-a-background). ## Custom domain Instead of sharing videos on `tella.tv`, connect your own domain so videos appear on a branded URL like `videos.yourdomain.com`. See [Add your custom domain](/docs/help/admin/add-your-custom-domain) for full setup instructions. > [!NOTE] > > Custom domains are only available on **Tella Premium**. ## Save your changes Click **Save branding** at the bottom of the page to apply your changes. The preview on the right updates in real time as you edit, but changes only go live after you save. Open one of your shared videos in a new tab to see the changes live on a real video. You can configure branding on any plan. A square view-page logo (with an optional dark-mode variant) shows on every plan; Pro adds the default logo on video, video backgrounds, and the view page theme. Premium adds unrestricted logo aspect ratios, a logo link, and a custom domain where your favicon is shown. # Default embed domains Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/default-embed-domains Workspace owners list the domains allowed to embed the workspace's videos under Default embed domains in Settings → Security. Restrictions are enforced on Premium plans. Workspace owners set which domains can embed the workspace's videos under **Default embed domains** in **Settings → Security**. The list applies to every video that doesn't have its own embed domain restriction, and individual videos can override it. > [!NOTE] > > Only workspace **owners** can change default embed domains. Other members see the page in read-only mode. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvr5azyq000508jwa0po95dm/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvr5azyq000508jwa0po95dm/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Set default embed domains 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner, then go to **Settings** → **Security**. 2. In **Default embed domains**, enter domains separated by commas or spaces (e.g. `example.com, yoursite.com`). 3. Click outside the field to save. There's no Save button. Leave the field empty to allow embedding on any domain. ## Which plan do I need? Domain restrictions are only enforced on **Premium** plans (including Enterprise Premium). On other plans, videos can be embedded on any domain even if you've entered a list. ## Does this apply to existing videos? Yes. The default is checked when a video is embedded, so it covers every video in the workspace that doesn't have its own embed domain list, including videos created before you set it. A video's own list, set from the **Embed** tab of its share window, replaces the default for that video. ## Will domain restrictions break link previews? They can. Restricting embed domains is not recommended if you often share video links in Slack, messaging apps, or social media. Those platforms embed a preview of your video, and domain restrictions may stop that from working. # Delete a workspace Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/delete-workspace Owners delete a workspace from Danger zone in Settings → General after removing all other members. Its subscription is cancelled; videos can be transferred to another workspace first. Workspace owners delete a workspace from **Danger zone** in **Settings → General**, after removing all other members. This removes the workspace and its settings immediately, cancels any active subscription, and lets you transfer its videos to another workspace you belong to first. > [!WARNING] > > Deleting a workspace cannot be undone in Tella. Transfer any videos you want to keep before proceeding. If you delete a workspace by mistake, contact support within 30 days to ask whether its videos can be recovered. ## Who can delete a workspace? * You must be the **Owner** of the workspace. * All other members must be [removed](/docs/help/admin/remove-member-from-tella-workspace) from the workspace before you can delete it. Otherwise you'll see **You must remove all other members before deleting this workspace.** ## Delete your workspace 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left corner of the sidebar. 2. Select **Settings**. 3. Go to the **General** tab. 4. Scroll down to the **Danger zone** section. 5. Click **Delete workspace**. 6. If you belong to another workspace, pick it under **Transfer videos to**, or leave **Delete all videos** selected (see below). 7. Type the workspace name exactly where it says **Type "…" to confirm**, then click **Delete**. ## Keep your videos before deleting Picking a workspace under **Transfer videos to** moves your videos there before the deletion completes. If you leave **Delete all videos** selected, they're removed from your library immediately and permanently deleted after 30 days. You don't need to delete a workspace to move videos out of it. To move some or all of them, or to consolidate one workspace into another, see [Transfer videos to another workspace](/docs/help/admin/move-videos-between-workspaces). ## What happens when you delete a workspace * The workspace, its members, and its settings are removed immediately. * Videos you did not transfer are removed from your library and scheduled for permanent deletion after 30 days. * All share links and embeds for deleted videos stop working. * Any active Stripe subscription is cancelled automatically. * Custom domains and integrations are removed. ## Recover videos after an accidental deletion If you deleted a workspace by mistake, contact [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com) as soon as possible. Include the email address on your Tella account, the workspace name, and approximately when you deleted it. Support may be able to move the deleted workspace's videos into one of your current workspaces during the 30-day recovery window. The deleted workspace itself, including its members, settings, custom domains, and integrations, cannot be restored. After 30 days, the videos and their media are permanently deleted and cannot be recovered. > [!NOTE] > > Deleting a workspace does not delete your Tella account. You can continue using other workspaces or [create a new one](/docs/help/admin/create-a-new-workspace). # Invite a new member to your Tella workspace Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/invite-a-new-member-to-your-tella-workspace Workspace owners invite people from Add & manage members under the workspace name. Invites are free until accepted; Owner and Member seats are billed, Viewer seats are free. Invite members from **Add & manage members** under your workspace name; only a workspace Owner sees that menu item. Sending an invite costs nothing. You are charged when someone accepts an **Owner** or **Member** invite, prorated for the rest of the billing period, unless they take a seat that's already paid for; **Viewer** invites are free. Revoke an invite before it is accepted and nothing is billed. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvr5vwbc000v08ich6b193nf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvr5vwbc000v08ich6b193nf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## When are you charged? Sending an invite doesn't add a charge. A pending invite costs nothing, and you can revoke it before it's accepted. When someone accepts an invite, billing depends on their role: * **Owner** and **Member** roles add a billable seat. * **Viewer** roles are free and don't count toward your seat total. On an active paid subscription, Tella charges the prorated price of the new billable seat for the time left in your current billing period. Your next renewal includes the seat at its full plan price. If you [removed a member](/docs/help/admin/remove-member-from-tella-workspace) earlier in the billing period, their seat stays paid until your next renewal. The next person who accepts an Owner or Member invite takes that seat at no extra cost. The top of the **Members** page, above the tabs, shows your **Paid seats**, **Seats in use** and **Next billing date**, so you can see how many paid seats are free. During a free trial without a card on file, accepting an Owner or Member invite doesn't charge you immediately. The seat is included if you start a paid subscription. ## Open Add & manage members 1. **Log in** to your Tella account. 2. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar. 3. Select **Add & manage members** from the dropdown menu (this item only appears if you're a workspace Owner). 4. The page opens on the **Members** tab. Pending invites are on the **Invites** tab, and requests to join are on the **Requests** tab. ## Invite people by email 1. Click **Invite**. 2. Enter the **email address** of the person you want to invite. * To invite **multiple people**, separate the emails with commas. * Example: `johnny@tella.com, michiel@tella.com` 3. Choose a **Role**. It applies to everyone in this invite, so send separate invites for people who need different roles: * **Viewer**: View and comment on videos. This is a free seat. * **Member**: Create, edit and share videos. This is a paid seat. * **Owner**: Manage billing and users. This is a paid seat. 4. Click **Invite**. The invites appear on the **Invites** tab as **Pending**. Click **Revoke** to cancel one before it's accepted; it stays on the tab marked **Revoked**. To send an invite again, revoke it and invite the person again. ## Review requests to join When someone requests to join your workspace, workspace owners receive an email notification. Click **Review request** in the email to switch to the requested workspace and open the **Requests** tab. > [!NOTE] > > Accepting a request adds the person as a Member and uses a billable seat. On an active paid subscription, Tella charges the prorated seat price for the rest of your current billing period, unless a paid seat is free. You can also review requests in Tella: 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar. 2. Select **Add & manage members**. 3. Open the **Requests** tab. 4. Click **Accept** to add the person or **Dismiss** to decline the request. ## What the invitee will see The invited user will receive an email that looks like this: > "You've been invited to join \[Your Name]'s workspace on Tella." Once they click **Open Tella** and set up their account, they'll be added to your workspace. If they accept as an Owner or Member on an active paid subscription, Tella adds the prorated seat charge automatically, or fills a free paid seat at no extra cost. # Join an existing workspace Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/join-an-existing-workspace Choose Join or create workspace from your workspace menu to find workspaces matching your work email domain, then click Join or Request to join. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar and choose **Join or create workspace** to see Tella workspaces that match your work email domain, then click **Join** or **Request to join**. Tella only shows matching workspaces you have not joined yet. ## Find a workspace 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left corner of the sidebar. 2. Click **Join or create workspace** below the workspace list at the top of the menu. 3. Find your team's workspace, then click **Join** or **Request to join**. ## What happens when I click Join or Request to join? * **Join:** You are added as a Member and Tella switches you to the workspace immediately. This option appears for verified workspaces and workspaces that allow people with a matching email domain to join automatically. * **Request to join:** Tella sends your request to the workspace owners. The workspace shows **Request sent** until an owner accepts or dismisses it. ## Can I join with a personal email address? No. Joining is matched on your work email domain. If you use a personal address such as Gmail, Tella can't suggest matching workspaces; ask an owner to invite you instead. ## Why can't I find my team's workspace? Tella only lists workspaces on your work email domain that you haven't joined yet. If none match, you'll see **No other workspaces on @yourdomain yet**; click **Create a new workspace** if your team does not have one. Otherwise, ask a workspace owner to [invite you](/docs/help/admin/invite-a-new-member-to-your-tella-workspace). # Transfer videos to another workspace Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/move-videos-between-workspaces Workspace owners move selected videos with Move to workspace in the library, or every video they own with Settings → General → Videos → Transfer videos. The source workspace stays in place. Workspace owners can move videos to another workspace they belong to: select videos in the library and click **Move to workspace**, or move every video they own with **Settings → General → Videos → Transfer videos**. The source workspace, its playlists, and its settings stay in place, so you don't need to delete anything. ## Who can transfer videos? * You must be an **Owner** of the workspace the videos are in. * You must already be a member of the destination workspace. If it's a new workspace, [create it](/docs/help/admin/create-a-new-workspace) or [accept an invite](/docs/help/admin/join-an-existing-workspace) first. * Only videos you own (you recorded or uploaded them, or they were transferred to you) can move. Being an editor on a video isn't enough. ## Move individual videos to another workspace 1. Switch to the workspace containing the videos using your **workspace name** in the top left. 2. Select the videos you want to move in your library. 3. Click **Move to workspace**. 4. Choose the destination under **Transfer videos to**, then click **Transfer**. 5. Review how many videos moved and how many couldn't be moved, then click **Done**. **Move to workspace** appears only when you're a workspace owner, every selected video is yours, and you belong to another workspace. ## Move all videos in a workspace to another workspace 1. Switch to the source workspace and open **Settings → General**. 2. Under **Videos**, click **Transfer videos**. 3. Choose the destination under **Transfer videos to**, then click **Transfer**. 4. Review the result and click **Done**. This moves every video you own in the workspace. Videos owned by other members stay put. If **Transfer videos** is disabled, join another workspace first. ## Move a whole workspace into another one To consolidate one workspace into another (for example, a personal workspace into your team's): 1. If other members own videos in the source workspace, [remove those members](/docs/help/admin/remove-member-from-tella-workspace) and transfer their videos to yourself when prompted. Their videos become yours. 2. [Transfer all your videos](#move-all-videos-in-a-workspace-to-another-workspace) to the destination workspace. 3. Optionally, [delete the source workspace](/docs/help/admin/delete-workspace). Its playlists, settings, custom domain, and integrations don't move, so recreate any you need in the destination first. ## What stays in the source workspace? The source workspace, its playlists, and its settings stay in place. Playlists don't move: transferred videos are removed from the source workspace's playlists and its library, so they appear only in the destination workspace. Add them to playlists there if you need to. People you shared a video with as an editor or viewer keep that access only if they're members of the destination workspace. Everyone else loses the access you shared with them, so share the video again if they still need it. You remain the owner of the transferred videos in the destination workspace. If a video stops being yours before the transfer reaches it, it won't move; the result shows how many videos couldn't be moved. ## I recorded in the wrong workspace Check the workspace switcher (your workspace name, top left). The video is in whichever workspace was active when you recorded. If you're an owner there, select it and click **Move to workspace**. If you can't use the transfer action because you aren't an owner of that workspace, ask an owner to [make you an owner](/docs/help/admin/transfer-workspace-ownership), or [download](/docs/help/sharing/share-and-download-a-video) the video and [upload](/docs/help/recording/upload-existing-videos) it to the right workspace. An upload is a fresh video: edits, layouts, and analytics don't carry over. ## Transfer videos when deleting a workspace Deleting a workspace also offers a **Transfer videos to** choice that moves your videos before the workspace is removed. See [Delete a workspace](/docs/help/admin/delete-workspace). Transferring first with **Transfer videos** lets you check the result before you delete anything. ## Can I move videos between two Tella accounts? Not directly. Videos move between workspaces, not accounts, and two Tella logins (e.g. a Google login and an email login for the same person) can't be merged. Invite the account that owns the videos to the destination workspace, accept the invite, then transfer from that account. If you're being charged on both accounts, contact support via the in-app chat and we'll sort out the billing side. # Remove a member from your Tella workspace Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/remove-member-from-tella-workspace Workspace owners remove members with the trash icon in Settings → Members. If the member has videos, you transfer them to another member or delete them. The seat stays paid until your next renewal, and you can give it to someone else at no extra cost until then. Workspace owners remove a member by clicking the **trash icon** on their row in **Settings → Members**. If the member has recorded videos in the workspace, you first choose whether to transfer those videos to another member or delete them. The seat stays paid until your next renewal, so you can give it to someone else at no extra cost until then. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmk8uq7ah001l04lk3osc8wwb/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmk8uq7ah001l04lk3osc8wwb/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Who can remove members? Only workspace **Owners**. You can't remove yourself. ## Remove a member 1. Click your workspace name in the top left. 2. Select **Settings**. 3. Click **Members**. 4. Find the member you want to remove, then click the **trash icon** at the end of their row. If the member has not recorded any videos in the workspace, they are removed immediately. ## What happens to a removed member's videos? If the member has recorded videos in your workspace, the **Remove member from workspace** window asks what to do with them before the member is removed: * **Transfer videos to another member**: choose the member under **Transfer to**, then click **Transfer and remove**. The videos are reassigned to that member and the person is removed. * **Delete all videos**: click **Delete videos and remove** to permanently delete every video they recorded in the workspace and remove them. ## Does removing a member change my bill? Yes, from your next renewal. Removing a member doesn't refund the rest of the current billing period (monthly or annual). Instead, the seat stays paid until the period ends: * Invite someone else before then and they take the paid seat at no extra cost. * At renewal, you're billed only for the members you have then. The seat's AI credits stay in your workspace until renewal too. If you upgrade from Pro to Premium before then, the empty seat moves to Premium with the others: you pay the difference for it, and you can still fill it at no extra cost. Switching from monthly to annual billing ends it, since the annual plan bills the members you have. ## Do shared links and embeds keep working after a transfer? Yes. If you transfer a departing member's videos to another member, existing share links and embeds keep working. The new owner can edit, download, and manage the transferred videos. ## Can I re-add a removed member and restore their videos? You can invite them back, but their videos stay with whoever you transferred them to. Transfer ownership back manually if needed. # SCIM provisioning Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/scim-provisioning Tella supports SCIM 2.0 directory sync to add and remove members from your identity provider. Owners enable it in Settings → Security; $125/month add-on on Pro and Premium, included on Enterprise. SCIM 2.0 directory sync adds and removes Tella workspace members automatically from your identity provider. Workspace owners enable it under **Settings → Security → Directory sync (SCIM)**; it's a paid add-on on Pro and Premium and included on Enterprise. > [!NOTE] > > SCIM is a paid add-on for Pro and Premium plans: \$125 per month on top of your subscription (billed annually on yearly plans), covering one directory connection. It requires an active paid subscription, so it can't be enabled during a trial. On Enterprise plans SCIM is included, with no add-on charge. Workspace owners can enable it self-service under **Settings → Security**. Enterprise customers looking to purchase multiple licenses can reach out to [sales@tella.com](mailto:sales@tella.com). ## What does SCIM do in Tella? With SCIM enabled, your identity provider becomes the source of truth for your Tella workspace membership: * **Provision users:** when you assign someone to Tella in your identity provider, they're automatically added to your workspace. * **Deprovision users:** when you remove someone, their Tella workspace access is revoked and their sessions are signed out. * **Keep attributes in sync:** names and roles in your directory are kept in sync with Tella. ## Which directories are supported? SCIM provisioning works with any SCIM 2.0-compatible directory, including: * **Okta** * **Azure Active Directory (Entra ID)** * **Google Workspace** * **OneLogin** * **JumpCloud** * **PingFederate** ## Set up SCIM 1. **Enable the add-on:** as a workspace owner, go to **Settings → Security**, select **Directory sync (SCIM)**, and click **Enable SCIM**. The \$125/month add-on is added to your existing workspace subscription, prorated for the current billing period (on Enterprise plans there's no charge. SCIM is included). SCIM is typically set up alongside [SSO](/docs/help/admin/set-up-sso). 2. **Connect your directory:** once the add-on is active, click **Connect your directory** to open the guided setup. Pick your identity provider and follow the steps; you'll get the SCIM endpoint URL and API token to enter in your provider's directory sync settings, and you'll be returned to Tella when you're done. 3. **Assign users:** assign users or groups to the Tella application in your identity provider. They'll be provisioned automatically. > [!NOTE] > > Need help, or on a custom enterprise agreement? [Contact us](mailto:sales@tella.com) and we'll set SCIM up with you. ## FAQ ### Do I need SSO to use SCIM? SCIM can be used independently, but most teams enable both SSO and SCIM together. While SSO handles sign-in and can add users when they first authenticate, SCIM goes further. It automatically revokes access when someone is removed from your identity provider, and keeps profile details in sync. ### What happens when a user is deprovisioned? Their access to the workspace is revoked. Their videos remain in the workspace and are still accessible to other members with appropriate permissions. ### Can I provision users in groups? Yes. If your identity provider supports group-based assignment, you can assign entire groups to Tella and all members of that group will be provisioned. ### How do I turn SCIM off? Workspace owners can disable SCIM under **Settings → Security**. This deletes the directory connection, stops provisioning immediately, and removes the add-on from your subscription. Existing members keep their access. ### Where can I find Tella's security documentation? Tella is [SOC 2 Type II compliant](/docs/help/admin/soc-2-compliance). Visit our [Trust Center](https://trust.tella.com) for details on security practices, compliance, and data protection, and to request the SOC 2 report. # Set default video permissions Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/set-default-video-permissions Workspace owners set who can view new videos by default (Private, Anyone with the link, or Workspace members) under Default video access in Settings → Security. Workspace owners set who can view new videos by default under **Default video access** in **Settings → Security**. You can also choose whether new videos are listed in the workspace library and which role members get on them. For embedding restrictions, see [Default embed domains](/docs/help/admin/default-embed-domains). > [!NOTE] > > Only workspace **owners** can change these settings. Other members see the page in read-only mode, along with which owner to contact. To configure defaults, click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner, then go to **Settings** → **Security**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqypxr8000108l6ebcugz6f/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqypxr8000108l6ebcugz6f/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Default video access Controls who can view new videos by default. When a member of your workspace creates a new video, it will automatically use this access level. | Option | Description | | - | - | | **Private (only me)** | Only the video creator can view the video. | | **Anyone with the link** | Anyone who has the video link can view it. | | **Workspace members** | Only members of your workspace can view the video. | Members can still change the access level on individual videos after creation. This setting only controls the default for newly created videos. ## Listed in workspace When default video access is set to **Workspace members** or **Anyone with the link**, you can choose whether new videos are automatically visible to all workspace members in the shared video library. * **On:** New videos appear in the workspace library for all members. * **Off:** New videos are not shown in the workspace library. This setting is hidden when default video access is set to **Private (only me)**. ## Default workspace role When default video access is set to **Workspace members** or **Anyone with the link**, you can set the default role that workspace members have on new videos: * **Viewer:** Members can watch the video but cannot make changes. * **Editor:** Members can edit the video. This setting is hidden when default video access is set to **Private (only me)**. # Set up SSO Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/set-up-sso Tella supports SAML and OIDC single sign-on (Okta, Entra ID, Google Workspace, and more). Owners set it up in Settings → Security; it's a $125/month add-on on Pro and Premium, included on Enterprise. Single sign-on (SSO) lets your team log in to Tella with Okta, Microsoft Entra ID, Google Workspace, or any SAML 2.0 / OIDC provider. Workspace owners set it up under **Settings → Security → Single sign-on (SSO)**; it's a paid add-on on Pro and Premium and included on Enterprise. > [!NOTE] > > SSO is a paid add-on for Pro and Premium plans: \$125 per month (or \$1,500/year on annual plans) on top of your subscription. On Enterprise plans SSO is included, with no add-on charge. Workspace owners can enable it self-service under **Settings → Security**. Enterprise customers looking to purchase multiple licenses can also reach out to [sales@tella.com](mailto:sales@tella.com). ## How does SSO work in Tella? Once SSO is enabled for your workspace, members sign in through your identity provider instead of using a separate Tella password. New members who authenticate through your identity provider get a Tella account automatically on their first sign-in. ## Which identity providers are supported? Tella supports SAML 2.0 and OIDC-based SSO with any compatible provider, including: * **Okta** * **Microsoft Entra ID (Azure AD)** * **Google Workspace** * **OneLogin** * **JumpCloud** * **PingFederate** * **Any SAML 2.0 / OIDC-compatible provider** ## Set up SSO Setting up SSO is self-serve and takes a few minutes. You'll need to be a workspace owner on an active paid subscription (SSO can be enabled once a trial converts to a paid plan). 1. **Open SSO settings:** go to **Settings → Security** and select **Single sign-on (SSO)**. 2. **Set up SSO:** click **Set up SSO** and confirm. On Pro and Premium plans this adds the \$125/month add-on to your subscription. You're not charged until your connection goes live. On Enterprise plans SSO is included, so there's no extra cost. 3. **Verify your domain:** add your company domain and follow the instructions to add the DNS record we give you. This proves you own the domain so sign-ins from it route to your identity provider. 4. **Connect your identity provider:** open the guided setup and follow the steps to connect Okta, Microsoft Entra ID, Google Workspace, or any SAML/OIDC provider. The flow walks you through adding Tella as an application in your provider and entering the required details. 5. **Test the connection:** once your connection is active, verify that your team members can log in through your identity provider. ## What happens after SSO is enabled * Members visit [tella.tv](https://tella.tv) and log in using your identity provider. * New members who authenticate through your identity provider are automatically added to your workspace. * Members can still belong to multiple Tella workspaces. ## Turn SSO off Workspace owners can disable SSO (or cancel an in-progress setup) under **Settings → Security → Single sign-on (SSO)**, in the **Danger zone**. Members go back to email or Google sign-in, the add-on is removed from your subscription, and unused time is credited. If you're still setting up and your connection hasn't gone live, nothing has been billed yet. ## FAQ ### Can members use email/password login alongside SSO? This depends on your workspace configuration. [Contact us](mailto:sales@tella.com) if you want to restrict login to SSO only. ### What happens to existing members when SSO is enabled? Existing members will be prompted to log in through your identity provider on their next session. Their videos and workspace access are preserved. ### Can I use SSO with multiple workspaces? Yes. Each workspace can have its own SSO connection, and members can belong to multiple workspaces. ### Should I set up SCIM too? Most teams enable both. SSO handles sign-in and can add users when they first authenticate, while [SCIM provisioning](/docs/help/admin/scim-provisioning) automatically removes members when they leave your directory and keeps profile details in sync. ### Where can I find Tella's security documentation? Tella is [SOC 2 Type II compliant](/docs/help/admin/soc-2-compliance). Visit our [Trust Center](https://trust.tella.com) for details on security practices, compliance, and data protection, and to request the SOC 2 report. # Is Tella SOC 2 compliant? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/soc-2-compliance Yes. Tella is SOC 2 Type II compliant on every plan, audited by Prescient Assurance. Enterprise customers can get the report under NDA. Yes. Tella is SOC 2 Type II compliant on every plan. Prescient Assurance, an independent auditor, tested our security controls over a three-month observation period (June 4 to September 4, 2026) and issued our report. ## What does SOC 2 Type II cover? A SOC 2 Type I report checks that controls exist on a single day. A Type II report checks that those controls actually ran over a period of months. Tella is audited again every year to keep the report current, and our controls are monitored continuously between audits. ## How do I get Tella's SOC 2 report? The SOC 2 Type II report is available to Enterprise customers under NDA: 1. Sign our NDA at [links.tella.com/soc2-nda](https://links.tella.com/soc2-nda). 2. Request the report in the [Tella Trust Center](https://trust.tella.com). You can also find both links in the app under **Settings → Security → Compliance**. ## Where can I find Tella's security documentation? The [Tella Trust Center](https://trust.tella.com) covers our security practices, compliance, and data protection, and is where Enterprise customers request the SOC 2 report. ## Does Tella have a data processing agreement (DPA)? Yes. Our standard [data processing agreement](https://www.tella.com/legal/data-processing-agreement) covers how Tella processes personal data on your behalf, including under GDPR. ## What security features can my workspace use? * [Single sign-on (SSO)](/docs/help/admin/set-up-sso) with SAML or OIDC providers like Okta, Entra ID, and Google Workspace. * [SCIM provisioning](/docs/help/admin/scim-provisioning) to add and remove members from your identity provider. * [Default video permissions](/docs/help/admin/set-default-video-permissions) so new videos start with the right access level. * [Default embed domains](/docs/help/admin/default-embed-domains) to control where your videos can be embedded. For Enterprise plans, the SOC 2 report, security reviews, or questionnaires, [contact our sales team](https://www.tella.com/enterprise). # Transfer workspace ownership Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/admin/transfer-workspace-ownership There is no single transfer button: make the other person an Owner in Add & manage members, then have them change your role or remove you. To transfer a Tella workspace, make the other person an **Owner** in **Add & manage members**, then have them change your role or remove you. A workspace can have multiple owners, so there is no separate transfer button. ## Make someone else an Owner If the person is already in your workspace: 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top left of the sidebar. 2. Select **Add & manage members**. 3. Find the member and open their role dropdown. 4. Select **Owner**. If they're not in your workspace yet, invite them first: click **Invite**, enter their email address, and choose the **Owner** role. See [Invite a new member](/docs/help/admin/invite-a-new-member-to-your-tella-workspace) for details, including billing implications of adding a member. ## Remove yourself as owner You can't change your own role or remove yourself from a workspace. Once the new owner has accepted and can access the workspace, they can: * Change your role to **Member** or **Viewer**, or * Remove you from the workspace entirely. If you still own videos, they'll be prompted to transfer them to another member or delete them. See [Remove a member](/docs/help/admin/remove-member-from-tella-workspace). The workspace, its videos, members, settings, and subscription all stay in place, only who controls it changes. As an Owner, the new person can manage billing, members, and workspace settings. ## Does transferring the workspace transfer my videos? No. Transferring workspace ownership doesn't change who owns individual videos. To hand over specific videos, the creator can [transfer ownership of a video](/docs/help/teams/how-can-i-add-a-team-member-as-an-editor-of-your-video#transfer-ownership-of-a-video) to another member, or videos can be transferred in bulk when a member is removed. # Add billing details to your invoice Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/add-billing-details-to-invoice Add a company name, address, tax ID, or other billing details to your Tella invoices from Settings → Plans & Billing, which opens the Stripe billing portal. To add a company name, billing address, or tax ID to your Tella invoices, a workspace owner updates them in the Stripe billing portal, opened from **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**. Stripe Checkout also asks for a billing address and an optional tax ID when you first subscribe. ## How to add billing details 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner. 2. Go to **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**. 3. Click **open the Stripe portal** at the top of the page (or **Manage** on your current plan). 4. In the Stripe portal, click **Update information**. 5. Add or edit your billing details: * **Company name:** appears on the invoice as the billed entity. * **Billing address:** your company or personal address. * **Tax ID:** such as a VAT number, GST number, or other tax identifier. 6. Click **Save** to apply your changes. ## Can I change the details on an invoice I already received? Not yourself. Updated billing details only apply to future invoices; Stripe does not update invoices that were already issued. To get a corrected copy of a past invoice, email [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com). ## Download your updated invoices After updating your billing details, any new invoices will reflect the changes. To download invoices, see [Download past Tella invoices](/docs/help/billing/download-tella-invoices). # How do Credits work? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/ai-credits Credits pay only for the Tella Agent, Auto Layouts, Remove mistakes, Auto Capture and AI image and video generation. Recording, editing, exporting and sharing never use them. Credits pay only for the Tella Agent, Auto Layouts, Remove mistakes, Auto Capture and AI image and video generation. Recording, editing, exporting and sharing never use them. Pro includes 4,500 credits per seat each month and Premium 9,000, reset monthly, and workspace owners can buy one-time top-ups that never expire or add extra monthly credits. The balance is shared by everyone in the workspace. For the full list of what uses credits and what doesn't, see [What uses credits?](/docs/help/billing/what-uses-credits). > [!NOTE] > > Credits are part of the [Tella Agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) **public beta**. We'd love your feedback: email [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com). ## Do credits limit how many videos I can record? No. Recording, uploading, editing by hand, exporting and sharing don't use credits, so 4,500 credits isn't 4,500 videos. Credits only run down when you send the Tella Agent a message, generate Auto Layouts, use Remove mistakes, run an Auto Capture take or generate an AI image or video clip. ## Where do I see my credit balance? Open the [Tella Agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) in the editor and click the credits button next to the message box. The **Credits** window shows your **Workspace balance**. When the balance runs out, that button becomes **Add credits**. In the editor, tools that use credits, such as **Auto Layouts** in the **Layout** panel and **Mistakes** in the **Cut** panel, show a round credits icon next to their title. Hover over it to see the balance, for example **Requires credits: 2,300 available**. Workspace owners on a paid plan also see their credits in the **Credits** card at the top of **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**, above the plans. The card shows your **Workspace balance**, with a bar against the credits your plan includes each month. If top-ups take your balance above the monthly allowance, the bar stays full. The **Credits** card only appears once your workspace has an active paid subscription. It's hidden during a free trial and when a subscription is past due or cancelled. ## How many credits are included with my plan? Paid plans include a monthly allowance of credits for each seat: | Plan | Included each month, per seat | | - | - | | Pro | 4,500 credits | | Premium | 9,000 credits | The allowance is pooled across the workspace, so anyone in the workspace can use it. For example, a Premium workspace with 3 seats gets 27,000 credits each month. Included credits reset each month and don't roll over: credits left at the end of the month expire, and your workspace gets a fresh allowance. This applies to monthly and yearly plans alike: a yearly subscription still gets its allowance one month at a time. The allowance resets on your plan's billing day each month (the day of the month you subscribed). ### What happens to credits when seats or plans change? * **Adding a member** adds their seat's credits for the rest of the month right away, prorated like the seat's charge. The full allowance starts at the next reset. * **Removing a member** keeps their seat paid until your next renewal, so its credits stay too. Inviting someone into that seat before then adds no credits and costs nothing. * **Upgrading to Premium** adds the extra credits for the rest of the month right away, for every paid seat. * **Downgrading to Pro** takes effect at your next renewal, so you keep Premium's credits until then. * **Cancelling** keeps your credits until the end of the period you paid for. No credits are added after it. * **A failed renewal payment** doesn't pause your credits while Stripe retries the card. If the subscription ends without being paid, the rest of that month's credits are removed. Free trials include 4,500 credits, so you can try the agent before you subscribe. Trial credits expire when the 7-day trial ends, and your plan's monthly allowance starts when you subscribe. ## How many credits does a message use? It depends on how much work the agent does and which model it uses. A quick change like "cut the first five seconds" uses few credits; a big edit across a long video, a larger model or a higher thinking level uses more. Your balance updates after each reply. ## Does Auto Capture use credits? Yes. [Auto Capture](/docs/help/integrations/auto-capture) spends the same workspace balance as the Tella Agent: each take uses credits for the AI that explores and scripts the page and for the machines that record it, charged when the take ends. That includes takes that stop to ask a question, fail or are cancelled partway, for the work done until then. If you've [connected your ChatGPT or Claude plan](/docs/help/integrations/use-your-chatgpt-or-claude-plan), takes on that provider's models run the AI on your plan and use credits only for the machines. A take can't start when the balance is too low. ## Does Auto Layouts use credits? Yes. **Generate** and **Regenerate** in [Auto Layouts](/docs/help/editing/use-auto-layouts) send the request to the Tella Agent, which lays out the clip and spends credits from the same workspace balance as any other agent message. ## Does Remove mistakes use credits? Yes. **Remove mistakes** has the [Tella Agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) find and cut the mistakes in your clip, so it spends credits the same way as any other agent message. See [Find and remove mistakes](/docs/help/editing/edit-a-video#find-and-remove-mistakes). ## Can I use my ChatGPT or Claude plan instead of credits? Partly. You can run the agent's OpenAI models on your ChatGPT plan, and its Claude models on your Claude Pro or Max plan. Connect them in **Settings** → **Connections** → **AI subscriptions**. With a plan connected, that provider's models don't use credits for the model itself, so messages cost far fewer credits. Each message still uses a small amount of credits for the agent's helper steps and its editing workspace. That means you still need a paid Tella plan and a workspace balance above zero to send messages, even with a plan connected. If the balance runs out, a workspace owner can add a top-up, or you can wait for your monthly allowance to reset. If a connection shows **Needs reconnecting**, that provider's models use credits as usual until you reconnect it. For step-by-step instructions, see [Use your ChatGPT or Claude plan with the Tella Agent](/docs/help/integrations/use-your-chatgpt-or-claude-plan). ## Buy more credits Workspace owners can top up anytime with a one-time purchase: | Credits | Price | | - | - | | 25,000 | \$25 | | 50,000 | \$50 | | 100,000 | \$100 | | 200,000 | \$200 | | 300,000 | \$294 (2% off) | | 500,000 | \$480 (4% off) | | 750,000 | \$705 (6% off) | | 1,000,000 | \$920 (8% off) | | 1,250,000 | \$1,125 (10% off) | | 2,000,000 | \$1,800 (10% off) | | 2,500,000 | \$2,250 (10% off) | 1. Click the credits button next to the agent's message box, or go to the **Credits** card in **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**. 2. Choose an amount under **One-time top-up**. 3. Click **Go to checkout** and pay in Stripe Checkout. You can also ask the Tella Agent to buy credits: it shows a **Buy agent credits** card in the chat: pick a top-up and click **Buy … credits**. See [Upgrade and credit cards](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent#upgrade-and-credit-cards). The credits are added to your workspace balance as soon as payment completes. Each top-up gets its own paid invoice, with your workspace's billing address and tax ID, in the Stripe billing portal next to your plan invoices. See [Download past Tella invoices](/docs/help/billing/download-tella-invoices). ## Add extra monthly credits If your workspace needs more credits every month, a workspace owner on Pro or Premium can add extra monthly credits for the whole workspace, on top of the credits included per seat. They're billed on your plan's invoice, at the same prices as one-time top-ups. | Extra credits each month | Price per month | | - | - | | 25,000 | \$25 | | 50,000 | \$50 | | 100,000 | \$100 | | 200,000 | \$200 | | 300,000 | \$294 (2% off) | | 500,000 | \$480 (4% off) | | 750,000 | \$705 (6% off) | | 1,000,000 | \$920 (8% off) | | 1,250,000 | \$1,125 (10% off) | | 2,000,000 | \$1,800 (10% off) | | 2,500,000 | \$2,250 (10% off) | 1. Go to the **Credits** card in **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**. 2. Choose an amount under **Extra monthly credits**. You see what you pay today and at renewal before anything changes. 3. Click **Change extra monthly credits**. 4. In the **Change extra monthly credits?** window, check the amount charged today and your next invoice, then click **Pay \$X and change** for a larger amount or **Confirm change** for a smaller one. A larger amount is charged right away for the rest of the billing period, and the extra credits for this month are added straight away. If your bank asks you to confirm the payment, or the card is declined, you finish paying on Stripe's payment page; the amount only changes once it's paid. A smaller amount, or removing it, takes effect at your next renewal; you keep the larger amount until then. Like included credits, extra monthly credits reset each month and don't roll over. ## Do purchased credits expire? No. Purchased credits never expire; only the monthly included credits do. Your monthly allowance is always used first, so purchased credits are only spent once the month's included credits run out. Credits are non-refundable, including purchased top-ups. See the [refund policy](/docs/help/support/refund-policy#can-i-get-a-refund-for-credits). ## Who can buy credits? Only workspace owners. Members who open the **Credits** window see **Ask a workspace owner to add more credits.** ## What happens when we run out of credits? The agent stops accepting messages, including Auto Layouts and Remove mistakes requests, and the message box turns yellow and says **You're out of credits. Add more to keep using the agent.**, and the credits button becomes **Add credits**. Nothing else in Tella is affected: you can keep editing, exporting and sharing as usual. Messages work again as soon as a workspace owner tops up or your monthly allowance resets. If you've [connected a ChatGPT or Claude plan](/docs/help/integrations/use-your-chatgpt-or-claude-plan) and the selected model runs on it, the message box says, for example, **Your Claude plan covers the model, but the agent's tools and workspace need credits.** Your plan pays for the model, but you still need credits to send messages. # Apply for Tella for Education Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/apply-for-tella-for-education Qualifying educators and students get six months of Tella Pro free, then 50% off Pro for as long as they stay eligible. No credit card is needed for the free term. Apply at tella.com/for-education. Tella for Education gives qualifying educators and students six months of Tella Pro free, then 50% off Pro for as long as they stay eligible. No credit card is required for the free term. Apply on the [Tella for Education page](https://www.tella.com/for-education). ## What happens after the six months? Your free Pro term starts when your application is approved and ends automatically after six months, without renewing or charging you. We email you a week before it ends. To keep Pro, go to **Settings → Plans & Billing** during the last 30 days of the term, choose monthly or yearly billing, and click **Keep Pro at 50% off**. After you add a card, your paid subscription starts when the free term ends, with the 50% education discount applied automatically. The discount remains available after the free term ends. Go to **Settings → Plans & Billing** and click **Get Pro at 50% off** to subscribe. If you do not subscribe, your workspace moves to the Free plan. Pro features such as unlimited videos, 4K export, AI editing tools, and full analytics stop, and the Free plan's limits apply. ## Can I get the free term more than once? No. The free six-month term is available once per workspace. Reapplying, or applying with another school email for the same workspace, does not start another free term. ## How long does the 50% education discount last? For as long as you remain eligible, whether you are an educator or a student. The discount requires a card on file, applies to the current individual Pro price, and works with monthly or yearly billing. We verify your education eligibility every 12 months while you receive it. If you do not pass the yearly eligibility check, or do not complete it within 30 days, the discount ends and we email you. Your Pro subscription continues at the full price from the next invoice until you change or cancel it in **Settings → Plans & Billing**. We never start a paid subscription for you: the free term ends without a charge, and the paid subscription only begins when you complete checkout. ## Who qualifies Teachers, professors, and students at accredited educational institutions can apply. You need a Tella account registered with your school's email address. Education access is limited to one user per workspace. ## How to apply 1. [Create a Tella account](https://www.tella.com/api/signup) using your school email address. 2. Open the [Tella for Education page](https://www.tella.com/for-education). 3. Click **Apply now**. 4. Enter your full name, educational institution website, and school email address. 5. Choose whether you're an educator or a student. 6. If you're a student, select both the month and year of your estimated graduation date. 7. Submit the form. You'll receive a confirmation email, and we'll review your application shortly. ## After you apply If you can sign in to Tella and open your workspace, you don't need to do anything else after receiving the confirmation email. If you can't sign in yet, create a Tella account using the school email address from your application, then submit the form again. We'll get back to you within a few days. ## Renewing your eligibility Every 12 months on the discount, we email you to ask for a new eligibility check. Open the personalized link in that email and resubmit the Tella for Education form within 30 days. When your application is approved, your discount continues unchanged and we check in again a year later. If your discount already ended because you missed the check or your application was not approved, use the personalized link from the eligibility email to apply again. A later approval restores the discount. ## Is there an education plan for a whole school or team? Education access is for one user per workspace. If your school or department needs access for multiple users, email [sales+education@tella.com](mailto:sales+education@tella.com) to ask about an Education Team plan. # Apply for Tella for Good Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/apply-for-tella-for-good Verified nonprofits, including U.S. 501(c)(3) organizations, get 50% off Tella Pro or Premium for as long as the subscription stays active. Tella for Good gives verified nonprofits 50% off a Tella Pro or Premium subscription, for as long as the subscription stays active. Apply on the [Tella for Nonprofits page](https://www.tella.com/for-nonprofit). ## Who qualifies Registered charitable organizations can apply, including: * U.S. registered 501(c)(3) nonprofits * Registered charities in Canada, the UK, and other eligible countries * NGOs with verified charitable status You need to own a Tella workspace and have a Tella account registered with your work email address. ## How to apply 1. [Create a Tella account](https://www.tella.com/api/signup) using your work email address. 2. Open the [Tella for Nonprofits page](https://www.tella.com/for-nonprofit). 3. Click **Apply now**. 4. Enter your full name, work email, organization name, organization website, tax ID or registration number, and information about your mission. 5. Submit the form. You'll receive a confirmation email after submitting your application. Tella reviews applications and usually sends a decision within two to three business days. ## If your application is approved Your approval email includes a custom promo code. Select a monthly or annual Pro or Premium plan, then enter the code at checkout to receive 50% off. Each workspace can receive one Tella for Good promo code. If a code has already been used for your workspace, Tella won't issue another one. ## If Tella can't find your account Create a Tella account using the same work email address from your application, then submit the form again. The discount can only be issued to a workspace you own. If you have questions about your application or discount, reply to your Tella for Good email. # Download past Tella invoices Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/download-tella-invoices Past invoices and receipts are in the Stripe portal, opened from Settings → Plans & Billing by a workspace owner, or in the receipt emails Tella sent you. Past Tella invoices and receipts are in the Stripe billing portal, which a workspace owner opens from **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**. Tella's receipt emails also contain them. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmjhezof3000n04la3y7bfgvi/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmjhezof3000n04la3y7bfgvi/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Find invoices in the Tella app 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner. 2. Click **Settings**. 3. Select **Plans & Billing** from the settings menu. 4. Click **open the Stripe portal** at the top of the page (or **Manage** on your current plan). 5. In the Stripe portal, click any invoice to open its details page, then download the invoice or the receipt. One-time credit top-ups appear in the portal as their own invoices, next to your plan invoices. Top-ups bought before November 2, 2026 only have a receipt email. > [!NOTE] > > Only workspace owners can open the Stripe portal, and the link only appears on a paid plan (there are no invoices during the free trial). If you're a member or viewer, ask an owner for the invoice. ## Find invoices in your email Search your inbox for "Tella invoice" or "Tella receipt". # Can I extend my free trial? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/extend-free-trial Yes. Workspace owners can add 7 days once per workspace at tella.tv/extend-trial, or restart an expired trial, if the workspace has never had a paid subscription. For more time, contact support. Yes. A workspace owner can extend the 7-day free trial by another 7 days at [tella.tv/extend-trial](https://www.tella.tv/extend-trial), once per workspace, as long as the workspace has never had a paid subscription. ## Extend your trial yourself Visit [tella.tv/extend-trial](https://www.tella.tv/extend-trial) while logged in as the workspace owner: * If your trial is still active, click **Extend my trial by 7 days**. * If your trial already ended, click **Restart my 7-day trial** to get a fresh 7-day trial. ## Why can't I extend my trial? * **You're not the owner.** The page says **Ask your workspace owner**. Only owners can extend the trial. * **It's already been extended.** The page says **This one's been used**. The extension is available once per workspace. * **The workspace has subscribed before.** Extensions are only for workspaces that have never had a paid subscription. ## Need more time after that? If you've already used your one-time extension, reach out to support and we'll see what we can do: * Ask to speak to the team in the in-app support chat, or * Email [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com) > [!NOTE] > > There's no need to cancel your trial. It ends automatically after 7 days unless you upgrade, and no credit card is required. [Learn more](/docs/help/billing/how-the-free-trial-works). # How do I cancel my subscription? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/how-do-i-cancel-my-subscription Cancel your Tella subscription in-app from your workspace name → Settings → Plans & Billing. Access continues until the end of the period you have paid for. Workspace owners cancel a paid Tella subscription in the app: click your workspace name, go to **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**, click **Manage** on your current plan, and cancel in the Stripe portal. You keep access until the end of the period you've paid for. [https://www.tella.tv/video/cm719q4wa003z0aju24yt7437/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/cm719q4wa003z0aju24yt7437/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Cancel your subscription 1. Click your workspace name in the top left. 2. Click **Settings** in the menu. 3. Click **Plans & Billing** in the sidebar. 4. Click **Manage** on your current plan. Tella opens the Stripe portal. 5. Click **Cancel subscription** and confirm. The confirmation page shows the date your subscription ends. You won't be billed again after that date. Until then, the plan card in **Plans & Billing** shows when it cancels. > [!NOTE] > > These steps are for a paid subscription, and only workspace owners can open the Stripe portal. On a free trial there's nothing to cancel. It ends on its own. See [How does the 7-day free trial work?](/docs/help/billing/how-the-free-trial-works). ## What happens after I cancel? Your videos stay in your workspace and can still be viewed and shared, but you can't record, edit, or export until you resubscribe. See [What happens when my Tella subscription ends?](/docs/help/faq/what-happens-when-my-tella-subscription-ends) # How does the 7-day free trial work? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/how-the-free-trial-works Every new Tella workspace gets a 7-day free trial of Pro with no credit card. It starts when the workspace is created and ends on its own; there is no forever-free plan. Every new Tella workspace starts with a **7-day free trial** of the Pro plan. No credit card is required, and the trial ends automatically. You'll never be charged unless you subscribe. ## When does the trial start? Your trial starts **the moment your workspace is created**, which for most people is when they sign up, not the first time you record. If you sign up and come back a few days later, those days count against the trial. > [!NOTE] > > Trials are per **workspace**. If you created your workspace a while ago, its trial may already be over even if you haven't recorded anything yet. ## What's included in the trial? During the trial you can record, edit, export finished videos, and share. A few things are paid-only: clips are capped at 2 hours (6 hours on a paid plan), exports are HD 30 FPS (4K and speed/timelapse options unlock when you subscribe; 60 FPS is available on Pro for videos up to 5 minutes and on Premium for any length), and uploading existing videos or [exporting raw recordings](/docs/help/export-videos/export-raw-recordings) requires an active paid plan. See [tella.com/pricing](https://www.tella.com/pricing) for everything in Pro. ## Is there a free plan after the trial? No. Tella is a paid product and there's no forever-free plan. When your 7 days are up: * **Your videos are safe.** Nothing is deleted. You can keep viewing and sharing everything you made. * **Recording, editing, and exporting are locked** until you subscribe to a paid plan. You can [subscribe](/docs/help/billing/subscribe-to-a-plan) at any time to pick up right where you left off. More detail in [What happens when my Tella subscription ends?](/docs/help/faq/what-happens-when-my-tella-subscription-ends) ## Can I get more trial time? If 7 days wasn't enough, you can extend the trial yourself. Sign in as the workspace owner and visit [tella.tv/extend-trial](https://www.tella.tv/extend-trial): an active trial gets 7 more days, an expired one restarts as a fresh 7-day trial. This works once per workspace, and only for workspaces that have never had a paid subscription. See [Can I extend my free trial?](/docs/help/billing/extend-free-trial) ## Do I need to cancel the trial? No. The trial ends on its own after 7 days and you won't be charged. There's no card on file, so there's nothing to cancel. # Can I pause my Tella subscription? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/pause-subscription No. Tella subscriptions can't be paused. Cancel instead: access continues until the end of the paid period, your videos are kept, and you can resubscribe any time. No. Tella doesn't offer a way to pause a subscription. The closest option is to cancel and resubscribe later: your videos are kept while you're away. ## Cancel now and resume later 1. Cancel your current Tella subscription. 2. Your access will continue until the end of your current billing period. 3. When you're ready to use Tella again, resubscribe. Your videos and account data are kept safe while your subscription is inactive, so you won't lose any of your work. ## How do I cancel? Workspace owners cancel from **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**, which opens the Stripe portal. For step-by-step instructions, see [How do I cancel my subscription?](/docs/help/billing/how-do-i-cancel-my-subscription) # Subscribe to a Tella plan Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/subscribe-to-a-plan Workspace owners subscribe from Settings → Plans & Billing: choose Monthly or Yearly, click Buy now on Pro or Premium, and pay by card in Stripe Checkout. To subscribe, a workspace owner opens **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**, picks **Monthly** or **Yearly**, and clicks **Buy now** on **Pro** or **Premium**. Payment is by card through Stripe Checkout, and both plans are billed per user. ## Which plan should I choose? Both plans include unlimited videos, 4K export, team collaboration, and analytics. Premium adds a custom domain, domain restriction, removing Tella branding, 60 FPS export at any length, and advanced analytics. **Settings** → **Plans & Billing** shows the same plans and feature comparison as [tella.com/pricing](https://www.tella.com/pricing). For custom pricing, included [SSO](/docs/help/admin/set-up-sso) and [SCIM](/docs/help/admin/scim-provisioning), or a shared Slack channel, click **Contact sales** on the **Enterprise** card. ## Why is Premium marked Recommended? If your workspace is on Free or Pro and you've connected a [custom domain](/docs/help/admin/add-your-custom-domain), **Settings → Plans & Billing** shows **Recommended** above the Premium card. You can set up a domain before upgrading, but it only serves your videos once you're on Premium. The badge doesn't change your plan or start a subscription. You still choose a plan and confirm the purchase or upgrade. ## Subscribe to Pro or Premium 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner. 2. Click **Settings** in the menu. 3. Click **Plans & Billing** in the sidebar. 4. Toggle between **Monthly** and **Yearly** billing. Annual billing saves around 50%. 5. On the plan you want, click **Buy now**. 6. You'll be redirected to Stripe Checkout to enter your card, billing address, and optionally a tax ID, then complete the purchase. > [!NOTE] > > Only workspace owners can subscribe or manage billing. If you're a member or viewer, ask an owner of the workspace to upgrade. Once checkout completes, your subscription is active immediately and you'll have full access to all features on your plan. > [!TIP] > > Annual billing is the best value. You save roughly 50% compared to monthly. You can always switch intervals later. ## After you subscribe * **Invoices** are available in the [Stripe portal](/docs/help/billing/download-tella-invoices). * **Switching plans** (Pro ↔ Premium) or **billing intervals** (monthly ↔ annual) can be done any time. See [Switch between Tella Pro and Premium](/docs/help/billing/switch-between-pro-and-premium) and [Switch between monthly and annual billing](/docs/help/billing/switch-billing-interval). * **Adding team members** is charged for the rest of the billing period, and **removing** one keeps their seat paid until your next renewal. See [Understanding your bill](/docs/help/billing/understanding-your-bill). ## Can I subscribe during the free trial? Yes. You can subscribe at any time during your 7-day free trial. Once you subscribe, your trial ends and billing begins immediately. If your trial has already expired, follow the same steps above to resubscribe. Videos created during your trial are kept when you subscribe. # Switch between Tella Pro and Premium Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/switch-between-pro-and-premium Workspace owners upgrade to Premium or downgrade to Pro in Settings → Plans & Billing by clicking Upgrade on the Premium card or Downgrade on the Pro card. Upgrades are prorated and take effect now; downgrades take effect at your next renewal. Workspace owners can upgrade from **Pro** to **Premium**, or downgrade from Premium to Pro, at any time in **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**: click **Upgrade** on the Premium card or **Downgrade** on the Pro card. An upgrade is prorated, so you only pay the difference; a downgrade takes effect at your next renewal. > [!NOTE] > > If your workspace has [extra monthly credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits#add-extra-monthly-credits), or paid seats nobody is using yet, the change happens in Tella instead of on a Stripe page: after you click **Upgrade** or **Downgrade**, the card shows what you'll be charged, and you click **Confirm change** on it. ## Upgrade from Pro to Premium 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner. 2. Click **Settings** in the menu. 3. Click **Plans & Billing** in the sidebar. 4. On the **Premium** card, click **Upgrade**. Make sure the **Monthly / Yearly** toggle matches the interval you want. 5. Review the prorated amount on the Stripe confirmation page and confirm the change. Your upgrade takes effect immediately. You'll have access to Premium features right away. Stripe prorates the upgrade: you're charged the difference between Pro and Premium for the remaining time in your billing cycle, and your workspace gets the extra [AI credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits) for the rest of the month right away. Paid seats nobody is using yet (for example after [removing a member](/docs/help/admin/remove-member-from-tella-workspace)) move to Premium too: you pay the difference for each, and you can still fill them at no extra cost until your renewal. ## Downgrade from Premium to Pro 1. Go to **Settings → Plans & Billing**. 2. On the **Pro** card, click **Downgrade**. 3. Confirm the change. Downgrades take effect at the end of your current billing period, with no refund for the rest of it. Until then you keep Premium and its AI credits. While a downgrade is waiting, the top of **Plans & Billing** says **Switches to Pro on** your renewal date. To cancel it, click **Keep Premium** next to it. > [!WARNING] > > After downgrading to Pro, you'll lose access to Premium-only features. Make sure your workspace doesn't rely on any Premium features before switching. ## What's the difference between Pro and Premium? Visit [tella.com/pricing](https://www.tella.com/pricing) for the full feature comparison. In short: * **Pro** includes unlimited videos, 4K export, team collaboration, and analytics. 60 FPS export is limited to videos up to 5 minutes. * **Premium** adds a custom domain, domain restriction for embeds, removing Tella branding from video pages, [4K playback on video pages and embeds](/docs/help/sharing/change-playback-quality), 60 FPS export at any length, advanced analytics (all-time history, every individual viewer, and full traffic sources and locations), and priority support. ## Related articles * [Subscribe to a Tella plan](/docs/help/billing/subscribe-to-a-plan) * [Switch between monthly and annual billing](/docs/help/billing/switch-billing-interval) * [Understanding your Tella bill](/docs/help/billing/understanding-your-bill) # Switch between monthly and annual billing Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/switch-billing-interval Workspace owners switch between monthly and yearly billing in Settings → Plans & Billing: set the Monthly / Yearly toggle and click Switch to annual or Switch to monthly. Monthly to annual is charged now, prorated; annual to monthly starts when your annual period ends. Workspace owners can switch between **Monthly** and **Yearly** billing at any time in **Settings** → **Plans & Billing** by clicking **Switch to annual** (or **Switch to monthly**) on the current plan. Annual billing saves around 50%. Switching to annual is charged right away, prorated; switching to monthly takes effect when your annual period ends. ## Switch your billing interval 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner. 2. Click **Settings** in the menu. 3. Click **Plans & Billing** in the sidebar. 4. Use the **Monthly / Yearly** toggle next to **Pricing** to show the interval you want. 5. On your current plan, click **Switch to annual** (or **Switch to monthly** if you're on annual). 6. Review the amount and the date the change takes effect on the Stripe confirmation page, then confirm. If your workspace has [extra monthly credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits#add-extra-monthly-credits), there's no Stripe page: the card shows what you'll be charged, and you click **Confirm change** on it. ## What happens to my bill when I switch? * **Monthly → Annual**: You're charged the prorated annual amount right away, minus any unused credit from your current monthly period. Your renewal date resets to one year from the switch. The annual plan bills the members you have: seats paid for but empty end with the monthly period. * **Annual → Monthly**: The switch takes effect when your annual period ends, with no refund for the rest of the year. Your monthly billing starts on that date. Until then, the top of **Plans & Billing** says when the switch happens; click **Keep annual billing** next to it to cancel it. > [!NOTE] > > Switching billing intervals does not change your plan (Pro stays Pro, Premium stays Premium). To change plans, see [Switch between Tella Pro and Premium](/docs/help/billing/switch-between-pro-and-premium). ## Can I switch from the Stripe portal? You can also manage your billing interval directly in Stripe: 1. Go to **Settings → Plans & Billing**. 2. Click **Manage** on your current plan. 3. In the Stripe portal, update your billing interval from there. Workspaces with extra monthly credits can't change their interval in the Stripe portal; use **Switch to annual** or **Switch to monthly** in Tella instead. The Stripe portal is also where you'll find invoice history, payment methods, and cancellation. See [Understanding your bill](/docs/help/billing/understanding-your-bill) for a full overview. # Understanding your Tella bill Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/understanding-your-bill Tella bills per seat: every Owner and Member is a paid seat and Viewers are free. Pro costs 26 USD/month, or 13 USD/month billed yearly; Premium costs 39 USD/month, or 19 USD/month billed yearly. Added seats are prorated; a removed seat stays paid until renewal. Tella bills per seat: every **Owner** and **Member** in your workspace is a paid seat, and **Viewers** are free. Adding a seat mid-cycle is prorated. Removing one takes effect at your next renewal, and until then the paid seat can be given to someone else at no extra cost. ## How much does Tella cost? Tella offers two paid plans, billed per user: | Plan | Monthly | Annual | | - | - | - | | **Pro** | \$26/month per user | \$13/month per user (billed \$156/year) | | **Premium** | \$39/month per user | \$19/month per user (billed \$228/year) | All prices are in **USD**. Annual billing saves around 50% compared to monthly. You can view current plan details at [tella.com/pricing](https://www.tella.com/pricing). ## Who counts as a paid seat? Tella charges per user on your workspace. Every **Owner** and **Member** counts as a billable seat. **Viewers** are free and don't count toward your seat total. For example, if your workspace has 3 Owners/Members on Pro (annual), your bill would be 3 × \$13/month = \$39/month (billed as \$468/year). ### What happens to my bill when I add a member? Sending an invite doesn't change your seat count. A pending invite costs nothing, and revoking it before it's accepted avoids adding a seat. When someone accepts an **Owner** or **Member** invite, Tella updates an active paid subscription and charges the **prorated** seat price for the time remaining in the current billing period. The next renewal includes the full seat price. Accepting a **Viewer** invite doesn't add a billable seat. If you removed a member earlier in the billing period, their seat is still paid. The next Owner or Member who joins before your renewal takes that seat at no extra cost, and you're only charged once every paid seat is in use. During a free trial without a card on file, accepting an Owner or Member invite doesn't charge you immediately. The seat is included if you start a paid subscription. ### What happens to my bill when I remove a member? Removing a member doesn't refund the rest of the billing period. The seat stays paid until your next renewal, monthly or annual, and you can give it to someone else at no extra cost until then. At renewal you're billed only for the members you have then. ## Can I switch between monthly and annual billing? Yes. Go to **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**, set the **Monthly / Yearly** toggle to the interval you want, and click **Switch to annual** (or **Switch to monthly**) on your current plan. Switching to annual is charged right away, prorated; switching to monthly starts when your annual period ends. See [Switch between monthly and annual billing](/docs/help/billing/switch-billing-interval). ## Am I charged during the free trial? No. New workspaces start with a **7-day free trial**. During the trial you can record, edit, export finished videos, and share. Uploading videos from your computer and [exporting raw recordings](/docs/help/export-videos/export-raw-recordings) require an active paid plan. If you don't subscribe before the trial ends, you keep access to the videos you created during the trial but can't record, edit, or export until you subscribe. [Learn more](/docs/help/faq/what-happens-when-my-tella-subscription-ends). Need more time to test Tella? Workspace owners can add 7 days themselves at [tella.tv/extend-trial](https://www.tella.tv/extend-trial), once per workspace. [Learn more](/docs/help/billing/extend-free-trial). ## Where do I manage payment details? All billing is handled through Stripe. Workspace owners on a paid plan open the Stripe billing portal this way: 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner. 2. Go to **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**. 3. Click **Manage** on your current plan, or the **open the Stripe portal** link at the top of the page. From the Stripe portal you can: * Update your payment method * View invoice history and download receipts * Cancel your subscription ## Why is my bill higher than expected? The most common reason is additional team members. Each Owner or Member on your workspace is a billable seat, and a seat is added when their invite is accepted, not when it's sent. Check your member list under **Settings** → **Members** to see who's on your workspace. ## How many seats am I paying for? **Settings** → **Members** and **Settings** → **Plans & Billing** show your **Paid seats**, your **Seats in use** (Owners and Members), and your **Next billing date**. Paid seats can be higher than seats in use after you remove someone: their seat stays paid until the next billing date, and anyone you invite before then takes it at no extra cost. At renewal you pay only for the seats in use. If you [upgrade to Premium](/docs/help/billing/switch-between-pro-and-premium) before your renewal, the freed seats move to Premium too: you pay the difference for each, and you can still fill them at no extra cost until your renewal. If you [switch to annual billing](/docs/help/billing/switch-billing-interval), the annual plan bills only the seats in use, and the freed seats end with the monthly period. ## Why was I charged a different amount than the listed price? If someone joined as an Owner or Member during a billing cycle, Stripe charges their seat only for the rest of the period, so the charge is less than the full per-user price. Removing a member never adds a credit or a refund. Check your invoice in the Stripe portal for a line-by-line breakdown. ## Can I pay in a currency other than USD? Tella only accepts payments in USD. However, Stripe allows for adaptive billing, so you may be able to pay in your local currency. Stripe may apply a conversion fee. Your bank or credit card provider may also apply their own currency conversion fees. ## How do I see what I'm being charged for? Open the Stripe billing portal from **Settings** → **Plans & Billing** → **Manage**. Your invoices show the plan, number of seats, billing interval, and any prorated adjustments. If you've added [extra monthly credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits#add-extra-monthly-credits), they appear as their own line on the same invoice. You can also [download past invoices](/docs/help/billing/download-tella-invoices). # What uses credits? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/what-uses-credits Credits pay for the Tella Agent, Auto Layouts, Remove mistakes, Auto Capture and AI images and video. Recording, editing, exports and sharing never use them. Only six things in Tella use credits: messages to the Tella Agent, Auto Layouts, Remove mistakes, Auto Capture takes, and generating an AI image or video clip. Everything else, including recording, editing, transcripts, subtitles, AI sound effects, exporting and sharing, never uses credits. All six spend the same workspace balance. For how many credits your plan includes, top-ups and checking your balance, see [How do Credits work?](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits). ## What uses credits | Feature | When credits are used | | - | - | | [Tella Agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) | Every message you send in the editor's agent chat | | [Auto Layouts](/docs/help/editing/use-auto-layouts) | Each **Generate** or **Regenerate** | | [Remove mistakes](/docs/help/editing/edit-a-video#find-and-remove-mistakes) | Each time you click **Review** or **Cut & review**, and any replies in that chat | | [Auto Capture](/docs/help/integrations/auto-capture) | Each take, charged when the take ends | | [AI image generation](/docs/help/editing/use-media#generate-media-with-ai) | Each image generated in the Media Library, or through the API or MCP server | | [AI video generation](/docs/help/editing/use-media#generate-media-with-ai) | Each video clip generated in the Media Library, or through the API or MCP server | ## How many credits does a Tella Agent message use? It depends on how much work the agent does and which model it uses. A quick change like "cut the first five seconds" uses few credits; a big edit across a long video, a larger model or a higher thinking level uses more. If you stop a reply partway, the work the agent did before you stopped it still uses credits. If a reply fails because the agent couldn't reach its AI model, the AI work in that reply doesn't use credits. The agent's editing workspace still uses credits for any work it already did there, such as running commands. If the agent had already paused to ask you a question or for approval, the work it did before that pause still uses credits. If you [connect your ChatGPT or Claude plan](/docs/help/integrations/use-your-chatgpt-or-claude-plan), that provider's models don't use credits for the model itself. Each message still uses a small amount of credits for the agent's helper steps and its editing workspace. ## Does Auto Layouts use credits? Yes. **Generate** and **Regenerate** in Auto Layouts send the request to the Tella Agent, so they use credits the same way an agent message does. Applying or changing a layout yourself doesn't. ## Does Remove mistakes use credits? Yes. **Review** and **Cut & review**, under **Mistakes** in the **Cut** panel or in the script panel's **…** menu, have the Tella Agent find the mistakes in your clip, so they use credits the same way an agent message does. Accepting, declining, keeping or restoring each mistake in the script doesn't. Removing silences, buffers and filler words doesn't use credits. ## Does Auto Capture use credits? Yes. Each take uses credits for the AI that explores and scripts the page and for the machines that record it. Takes that stop to ask a question, fail or are cancelled partway still use credits for the work done until then. If you've [connected your ChatGPT or Claude plan](/docs/help/integrations/use-your-chatgpt-or-claude-plan), takes on that provider's models run the AI on your plan and use credits only for the machines. ## Does generating an AI video use credits? Yes. Each video clip you generate uses credits, and higher-quality models, higher resolutions and longer clips use more. In the model picker, **Seedance 2.0 Fast** uses fewer credits and **Seedance 2.0 Mini** uses the fewest. A generation that fails doesn't use any credits. ## Does generating an AI image use credits? Yes. Each image you generate uses credits, and you can't generate one while your balance is empty. A generation that fails doesn't use any credits. ## Does generating an AI sound effect use credits? No. AI sound effects don't use credits. They count against your weekly AI generation allowance instead, which resets every week. ## What doesn't use credits Everything in Tella that isn't listed above is free to use on your plan, including: * Recording with the Mac, Windows, web or Chrome extension recorder * Editing by hand in the editor: cuts, layouts, zooms, overlays, backgrounds and effects * Transcripts, retranscribing and editing the transcript * Subtitles and [translated subtitles](/docs/help/editing/translate-subtitles) * [Removing silences](/docs/help/editing/remove-silences-automatically), [Studio Voice](/docs/help/editing/studio-voice-audio-enhancement) and [eye contact](/docs/help/editing/eye-contact) * Uploading media and picking from the Media Library * AI sound effects * Exporting, downloading, sharing and embedding videos * The [Public API](/docs/help/integrations/public-api-and-webhooks) and [MCP server](/docs/help/integrations/mcp-server), except for generating AI images and video clips and running Auto Capture takes ## What still works when we're out of credits? Everything except the six features above. When the balance hits zero, the Tella Agent, Auto Layouts and Remove mistakes stop accepting requests, Auto Capture takes can't start, and you can't generate AI images or videos. You can keep recording, editing, exporting and sharing as usual, and those features work again as soon as a workspace owner [buys a top-up](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits#buy-more-credits) or your monthly allowance resets. # Why does my workspace show as unpaid? Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/billing/workspace-shows-as-unpaid If Tella is asking you to upgrade even though you already have a subscription, you're likely in a different workspace than the one you paid for. If Tella is prompting you to upgrade (or showing a paywall), even though you're sure you already paid, the most common cause is that your subscription lives on a **different workspace** than the one you're currently viewing. Every Tella workspace has its own plan, its own members, and its own billing. If your account is part of more than one workspace, it's easy to sign in and land on the wrong one. ## Why does Tella say my workspace is unpaid? A single Tella account can belong to multiple workspaces, for example: * You created a personal workspace at sign-up and later joined (or created) a team workspace. * You paid to upgrade one workspace, but Tella opened a different one on your next visit. * You accepted an invite to a teammate's workspace, which became your active workspace on sign-in. Since billing is **per workspace**, upgrading one workspace doesn't upgrade the others. The workspace you're actively using may not be subscribed even though another workspace on your account is paid. ## Which workspace am I in? 1. Click your **workspace name** in the top-left corner of the sidebar. 2. Look at the workspace list at the top of the menu. It shows every workspace your account belongs to, with a check mark next to the one you're currently in. The switcher doesn't show plan details, so to find which workspace has your subscription you'll need to switch into each one and check its billing page. ## Which workspace has my subscription? For each workspace in the list: 1. Click the workspace to switch into it. 2. Go to **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**. 3. Look at the plan shown at the top of the page. If it says Pro or Premium, that's your paid workspace. Once you've found it, stay in that workspace. It's the one with your subscription and full access to paid features. Your videos, members, and settings in the other workspaces are untouched; switching just changes which workspace you're viewing. > [!TIP] > > The videos you see in each workspace are different. If you're looking for a specific video and can't find it, check whether it was created in another workspace. ## I'm in the right workspace, but it still shows as unpaid If you've confirmed you're in the correct workspace and it still shows as unpaid, check your subscription status: 1. Go to **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**. 2. Look at the plan shown at the top of the page. If the plan shown doesn't match what you paid for: * **You may have paid under a different account email.** Check the email address on your [Tella invoice](/docs/help/billing/download-tella-invoices) and compare it to the email you're logged in with. If they don't match, sign out and sign back in with the correct email. * **The charge may have failed or been refunded.** Check your email for a failed-payment notice from Stripe. * **You're still in your free trial.** New workspaces get a 7-day Pro trial. If the trial has ended and you haven't subscribed, you'll need to subscribe to keep using the workspace. If none of the above explains it, email [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com) with your account email and the Stripe receipt so we can track down the subscription. ## Related articles * [Create a new workspace](/docs/help/admin/create-a-new-workspace) * [Subscribe to a Tella plan](/docs/help/billing/subscribe-to-a-plan) * [Understanding your Tella bill](/docs/help/billing/understanding-your-bill) * [Download your Tella invoices](/docs/help/billing/download-tella-invoices) # Add zooms and screen effects Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom Add zooms in the editor's Effect tool (press E): select a range and click Add zoom, or click Generate to create zooms from recorded cursor movement. Zooms work on footage in a layout's Screen slot. Add zooms in the **Effect** tool in the editor sidebar (press `E`), which was called **Zoom** until September 2026. A zoom draws attention to a detail in the footage shown in a layout's **Screen** slot: a screen recording, an uploaded video, or image or video B-roll used in a media layout. Looking for a control that used to be somewhere else? See [Where did the Zoom tool go?](/docs/help/faq/where-is-the-zoom-tool) [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvjsqg76005202nzemo9dsa8/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvjsqg76005202nzemo9dsa8/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Open the Effect tool 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Effect** in the sidebar, or press `E`. The Effect timeline shows zoom, blur, and highlight cards over the clip's waveform, with transcript words underneath. > [!NOTE] > > On a camera-only clip, you can use **Effect** while a media layout puts image or video B-roll in the **Screen** slot. If the clip has no screen recording and no Screen-slot media, the panel asks you to record your screen or add a media layout. ## Generate zooms automatically [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvweyhzd00a508jkdgcz2pt5/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvweyhzd00a508jkdgcz2pt5/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) Auto Zoom can generate zooms from cursor movement recorded by the Tella Mac and Windows apps, or from a Chrome tab recorded with the Tella Chrome extension. Web recordings and Chrome extension recordings of a window or entire screen do not include cursor data for automatic zooms. > [!NOTE] > > Single window recordings from the Windows app capture cursor data from version 0.15.0. Window recordings made with an earlier version have no cursor data, so Auto Zoom can't generate zooms for them. You can still [add zooms manually](#add-a-zoom-to-a-selected-range). 1. Open **Effect** on an eligible screen recording with no existing zooms. 2. In **Zooms**, click **Generate** (the sparkles button). 3. Choose a **Style**: * **Gentle:** the calmest style. Shallow zooms that ease in softly and start a little before your click. * **Subtle:** shallow zooms on your clicks that move slowly and smoothly. * **Moderate:** zooms follow your clicks as you work. This is the default style. * **Focused:** zooms settle quickly so content is easy to read. * **Intense:** deeper, snappier zooms that let go sooner. 4. Click **Generate** at the top. The menu stays open while you compare styles and closes after you generate the zooms. Every style zooms in on groups of clicks and aims at the spots your cursor lingered on. Clicks in the last second of a clip don't start a zoom, and zooms end at least a second before the clip does. Zooms are placed on the clip as it plays, with your cuts removed. Clicks in footage you've cut don't start a zoom, and clicks that end up close together after a cut share one zoom instead of zooming out and straight back in. The last second is measured from where the clip ends after its cuts. Zooms you've already generated don't move when you add cuts later; delete them and generate again to place them around your edits. **Gentle**, **Subtle**, **Focused**, and **Intense** also set the [zoom animation style](/docs/help/editing/animation-style) to **Gentle**, **Smooth**, **Focused**, and **Snappiest**. The style is saved on the clip if it has its own zoom settings, otherwise on the whole video. **Moderate** clears the zoom animation style saved in that same place. A clip with its own zoom settings then uses the video's zoom animation style, and a video uses your [layout animation style](/docs/help/editing/animation-style#change-the-layout-animation-style). Tella remembers the last style you chose, so your selection replaces Moderate as the default for future videos. You can move, resize, retarget, split, or delete generated zooms just like manual zooms. If the recording is still uploading, **Generate** is unavailable until the upload finishes. If Tella finds no cursor data, **Generate** becomes unavailable and the **Zooms** panel explains why. You can still [add a manual zoom](#add-a-zoom-to-a-selected-range). A temporary error loading cursor data does not mark the recording as lacking it; try generating again if the request fails. ## Apply zooms automatically after recording Turn on **Auto-apply zooms** to add click-based zooms to eligible screen recordings automatically after you finish recording: 1. Click your avatar and open **Settings**. 2. Go to **Preferences** under **Account**. 3. Under **Recording**, turn on **Auto-apply zooms**. Tella uses the last Auto Zoom style you selected in the editor. If you have not selected one, Tella uses **Moderate**. New recordings also start with the zoom animation style that style sets. Tella adds the zooms after the recording's uploads finish, so they may take a moment to appear in the editor. You can then adjust or remove them. > [!NOTE] > > Auto-apply zooms only works when the screen recording includes usable cursor click data. It does not add zooms to camera-only clips. ## Customize screen effects The **Effect** panel keeps zooms, cursor styling, blurs, and highlights together. Under **Zooms**, expand **Advanced zoom settings** to control motion blur, camera shrinking, [zoom animation style](/docs/help/editing/animation-style), and clip-specific settings. > [card] [Customize animated cursors](/docs/help/editing/customize-animated-cursor) > > Restyle the pointer, smooth its movement, and add click ripples. > [card] [Add motion blur](/docs/help/editing/add-motion-blur) > > Soften fast zooms, pans, and cursor movement. > [card] [Shrink the camera during zooms](/docs/help/editing/shrink-camera-during-zooms) > > Keep the screen clear while a camera bubble is visible. If your video has several clips, motion and cursor styling use the video-wide settings unless you turn on **Adjust this clip only** under **Advanced zoom settings**. That checkbox only appears when the video has more than one clip. With video-wide settings, turning on **Cursor** enables it on the selected clip and on eligible clips that already have zooms. Tella skips clips recorded with **System**. Turn on **Adjust this clip only** first when you want to control only the current clip. ## Reuse effect settings in your next recording When you change video-wide settings, Tella uses them as the starting point for your next Mac or Windows app recording made with **Animated**. Tella remembers: * **Cursor** on or off, size, smoothing, movement tilt, click effects, and visibility settings * **Motion blur** on or off and its amount * **Shrink camera during zooms** on or off Tella chooses the cursor style for the operating system you record on. Changes made with **Adjust this clip only** turned on apply only to that clip and do not change the starting settings for your next recording. ## Add a zoom to a selected range 1. Drag across the time you want to zoom. You can also click or drag across words in the transcript row. 2. Click **Add zoom**, press `Z`, or right-click the range and choose **Add zoom**. 3. Select the new zoom card. Under **Mode**, choose: * **Manual:** use **Target** to choose a fixed focus point, then set **Scale**. * **Auto:** follow the recorded cursor movement throughout the zoom. **Auto** is available only when the footage at the start of the zoom includes cursor data. Zooms on image or video B-roll are always manual. Each selected range must be at least one second long. Its start must contain footage in the **Screen** slot. If a new zoom overlaps an existing one, Tella trims, splits, or replaces the existing zoom so the cards do not overlap. > [!TIP] > > Hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows while dragging a manual zoom's target to keep it on a horizontal or vertical line. > [!TIP] > > Hold **Shift** while dragging to select several ranges, then click **Add zoom** to create one zoom for every range at once. ## Make a zoom smooth or a hard cut 1. Open **Effect** and select a single zoom card. 2. Expand **Advanced** in the selected zoom's controls. 3. Choose **Smooth** or **Hard cut** separately for **Intro** and **Outro**. **Intro** controls how you enter the zoom; **Outro** controls how you leave it. **Smooth** animates the change, while **Hard cut** changes the framing immediately. Choose Hard cut for both to zoom in and back out without animation, or mix them for a smooth entrance and an immediate exit. Both default to **Smooth**, so existing zooms keep their animation. These choices apply to the selected zoom, in both **Manual** and **Auto** mode, rather than every zoom in your video. ## Add a zoom from the playhead With no range selected, move the playhead and click **Add zoom**. Tella creates a zoom up to five seconds long, stopping sooner if it reaches another zoom or the end of the clip. Hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows while clicking to change the action to **Add until end**. The zoom fills the available gap. ## Work with zooms on the Effect timeline **Move and select zooms** * Drag a zoom card to move it, or drag either edge to change its duration. While you resize it, the video previews the moving edge while the red playhead stays parked. * Drag across an empty part of the timeline to select a time range. The preview follows the moving edge while the playhead stays parked, then the playhead moves to the selection's start when you release. * Hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows and click zoom, blur, or highlight cards to select several. You can move or delete the selected effects together. When you select only zooms, you can also copy, cut, or change their scale together. * Hold **Cmd/Ctrl** and drag across several effect cards to select them as a group. * Press **Escape** to clear range and card selections. **Navigate precisely** * Scroll to pan. Hold **Cmd/Ctrl** and scroll to zoom around your pointer. **Shift + scroll** over the timeline zooms too. * Zoom cards and selections snap to transcript word boundaries, other zoom edges, and the parked playhead. Hold **Option** on Mac or **Alt** on Windows while dragging to turn snapping off. * Click a card edge or a seam, then press the left or right arrow key to move it by one pixel at the current timeline zoom. Hold **Shift** to move it by 10 pixels. **Use connected zooms** Place two zooms directly beside each other to move between different targets without zooming out. The move is smooth unless the first zoom's **Outro** or the next zoom's **Intro** is set to **Hard cut**. Drag their shared seam to move the boundary while both cards stay connected. Hold **Option/Alt** while dragging the seam to pull them apart. **Right-click for more** * Right-click a zoom card to **Split at playhead**, switch between manual and auto zoom, **Add layout to zoom** (a layout section over the zoom's range), or **Delete zoom**. * Right-click an empty gap to **Add zoom here**. * Right-click a layout card in the Layout timeline and choose **Add zoom to layout** to add a zoom over the layout's full range. * Right-click a selected range in any timeline to **Add layout**, **Add zoom**, **Add blur**, **Add highlight**, **Add overlay**, **Cut selection**, **Copy to new clip**, or **Copy to new video**. See [Right-click a selected range](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline#right-click-a-selected-range) for what each does. ## Copy, cut, and paste zooms 1. Select one or more zoom cards. 2. Press **Cmd/Ctrl + C** to copy, or **Cmd/Ctrl + X** to cut. 3. Move the playhead and press **Cmd/Ctrl + V** to paste. Tella preserves each zoom's target, scale, duration, and spacing. You can paste into another video, and Tella fits the pasted zooms around existing zooms. If you paste an Auto zoom onto media or other footage without cursor data, Tella changes it to a manual zoom. ## Split, delete, or reset zooms * **Split:** Select a zoom, move the playhead inside it, then click **Split** or press `X`. Both halves keep the original mode, target, and scale. * **Delete:** Select one or more zooms, then click **Delete zoom** or press **Delete** or **Backspace**. * **Reset:** Open **More actions** and choose **Reset all zooms** to remove every zoom from the current clip. Click **Undo** in the confirmation message if you want to restore them. ## Combine zooms with layouts Zooms follow the footage in the layout's **Screen** slot at the start of the zoom. If a media layout puts image or video B-roll there, the zoom applies to that media. Media in the **Camera** slot is unaffected. When the Screen-slot media changes, create a separate zoom for the new media. Use [Layouts](/docs/help/editing/use-layouts) to control which source appears in each slot. > [!TIP] > > Higher scales can look soft if the original screen recording is low resolution. Use the lowest scale that makes the detail clear. # Add audio effects Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/add-audio-effects Use Effects in the editor's Audio panel to add EQ, a compressor, reverb, echo and more to your video's sound, or start from a voice preset. Shape how your video sounds with **Effects** in the editor's **Audio** panel. Pick a voice preset, or build your own chain of effects such as an equalizer, a compressor, reverb or echo. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmw0x4dwz000602o17qiv777b/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmw0x4dwz000602o17qiv777b/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) Effects apply to the sound of every clip in your video. Background music stays as it is. ## Open the Effects section 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Audio** in the left toolbar. 3. Scroll to **Effects**, below **Studio Voice**. ## Start from a preset Click a preset to apply it. Each one shows a small picture of how it changes the sound: * **Clear voice** * **Warm** * **Broadcast** * **Phone** * **Room** * **Hall** A preset replaces all the effects you've added. The preset stays highlighted until you change one of its effects. ## Add an effect Click **Add** next to **Effects** and choose an effect. Each one has a short hint in the menu: | Group | Effect | What it does | | - | - | - | | Tone | **Equalizer** | Shape any frequency, band by band | | Tone | **Bass & treble** | Warm up or brighten the tone | | Tone | **Filter** | Cut rumble, hiss or one narrow tone | | Dynamics | **Compressor** | Even out loud and quiet moments | | Dynamics | **Limiter** | Keep peaks from clipping | | Space | **Reverb** | The sound of a room or hall | | Space | **Echo** | Repeats that fade away | | Character | **Chorus** | A wider, shimmering sound | | Character | **Vibrato & tremolo** | Wobble the pitch or the volume | You can add up to 16 effects. They run in order from top to bottom, so an echo added after a reverb sounds different from one added before it. ## Adjust an effect Each effect appears as a card with a live graph of what it does. Click the card's name to expand it and show its sliders. * Drag a slider to change a setting. You hear the change as you drag. * Double-click a slider to reset it to its default. * Use the switch on the left of the card to turn the effect off without removing it. #### Equalizer bands The **Equalizer** shows each band as a coloured handle on its graph: 1. Drag a handle to change that band's frequency and gain. 2. Double-click the graph, or click **+** in the band strip, to add a band. You can have up to 8. 3. Select a band in the strip and pick its shape: **Low shelf**, **Bell** or **High shelf**. ## Reorder, reset or remove effects Click **⋯** on an effect's card to: * **Move up** or **Move down** in the chain * **Reset** the effect to its default settings * **Remove** the effect To remove every effect at once, click **Clear** next to **Effects**. > [!TIP] > > Echoes and reverb tails carry across cuts within a scene, so the sound doesn't stop abruptly at each cut. ## Related articles > [card] [Studio Voice](/docs/help/editing/studio-voice-audio-enhancement) > > Remove background noise and give your voice a studio-quality finish. > [card] [Adjust audio levels](/docs/help/editing/adjust-audio-levels) > > Balance your microphone and system audio. # Add background music to your video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/add-background-music-to-your-video Add background music in the editor's Audio panel from Tella's music library or upload your own track. One track plays under the whole video, loops if shorter, fades in and out, and never replaces your voiceover. Add background music under **Background music** in the editor's **Audio** panel: pick a track from Tella's music library or click **Upload** to use your own. One track plays under the whole video, looping if it is shorter and fading in and out, and it never replaces your voiceover. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvpuh23f00es08l145o7dwpx/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvpuh23f00es08l145o7dwpx/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) > [!NOTE] > > Audio you add here is **background music**: it's mixed in *underneath* the audio that's already in your video (your voiceover, screen audio, and so on) and plays quietly behind it. It is **not** a voiceover or main audio track, and it does not replace your existing audio. > > Tella doesn't record a voiceover over an existing clip. To narrate a recording, record your mic at the same time as your screen, or re-record the clip. To place an audio file you already have at a specific point in the video, add it as a [sound effect](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects) instead. See [Can I combine two separate recordings into one video?](/docs/help/faq/combine-separate-recordings). Background music applies to the **whole video**, not to a single clip. There's one background track for the video, and it plays across every clip. ## Open the Audio panel 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Audio** in the sidebar. ## Add a track from the music library The **Background music** section shows suggested tracks as waveform strips. Click the play button to preview one, click its waveform to seek, and use the separate add button to apply it. To see the full library: 1. In the **Audio** panel, click **Browse all**. This opens the **Music library** panel. 2. Browse **Tella music** presets organized by category (**Calm**, **Energetic**, **Focused**, and **Playful**), or switch between **Personal** and **Team** to find an uploaded track. **Personal** is selected by default and lists tracks added to the current video under **In this video**. You can also click the search icon in the header to find a track. 3. Click the play button to preview a track. Click its waveform to seek to another point. 4. Use the track's separate add button to apply it to your video. The track is added across the full duration of your video. ## Upload your own background music To add a local audio file directly to the current video: 1. Open **Audio** in the sidebar. 2. Click **Upload** beside **Background music**. 3. Choose an audio file from your computer. Tella uploads the file and applies it as the video's background music. To save a track for reuse, click **Browse all**, choose **Personal** or **Team**, then click the upload icon in the Music library header. You can also drag an audio file anywhere over the library; uploads go to the active tab. ## Adjust the music volume Drag the **Volume** slider under the current track in the **Audio** panel to make the music louder or quieter. ## Remove or replace the track * To remove the current track, click **Remove song** on the track in the **Audio** panel. * To swap it for a different track, click **Change music**. This opens the **Music library** panel where you can pick another track or upload your own. ## Why does my uploaded audio fade in and out? Background music is meant to sit gently behind your voice, so Tella shapes it automatically: * **It fades in at the start and fades out at the end** of your video, so the music eases in and out instead of cutting abruptly. This is expected behavior for background music. It's not a glitch with your file. * **It's mixed under your existing audio** at the music volume you set, so your voiceover and screen audio stay in front. If you uploaded a track expecting it to play at full volume as the main audio, that's why it sounds quiet and fades. The **Background music** section is for background music, not for a primary voiceover track. ## What happens if the music is longer or shorter than my video? * If your background track is longer than your video, Tella fades it out at the end of the video. * If your background track is shorter than your video, Tella loops it so you have music for the full duration. ## Set background music via the API or MCP Background music can also be set and removed programmatically. Use `PUT /v1/videos/{id}/background-music` and `DELETE /v1/videos/{id}/background-music` in the [Public API](/docs/introduction), or the `set_background_music` and `remove_background_music` tools in the [MCP server](/docs/mcp-tools/background-music). To time cuts, overlays or animations to the music, `GET /v1/videos/{id}/background-music/beats` and the `get_music_beats` MCP tool return the track's tempo, beats and the first beat of each bar, in milliseconds on your video's timeline. The beats repeat each time the track loops. ## Related * [Adjust audio levels](/docs/help/editing/adjust-audio-levels): balance music against your microphone and system audio * [Studio Voice (audio enhancement)](/docs/help/editing/studio-voice-audio-enhancement) * [Add sound effects](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects): for one-off sounds rather than a track under the whole video # Add motion blur to screen recordings Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/add-motion-blur Motion blur softens fast zooms, pans, and animated cursor movement. Turn it on in Effect → Zooms → Advanced zoom settings and drag from Subtle to Strong. Motion blur softens fast zooms, pans, and animated cursor movement; turn it on in **Effect** → **Zooms** → **Advanced zoom settings**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvjwknty000m08kzfz15em04/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvjwknty000m08kzfz15em04/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Turn on motion blur 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Effect** in the sidebar, or press `E`. 3. Under **Zooms**, expand **Advanced zoom settings**. 4. Turn on **Motion blur**. 5. Drag the slider from **Subtle** to **Strong** to set the amount. New Mac and Windows app recordings made with the **Animated** cursor start with motion blur on, unless you turned it off in an earlier video. Motion blur works with manual zooms and Auto Zoom. Cursor movement is blurred when an [animated cursor](/docs/help/editing/customize-animated-cursor) is enabled on the clip. ## Change motion blur on one clip Motion blur uses the video-wide setting by default. **Adjust this clip only** appears when your video has more than one clip. To change it for only the current clip: 1. Open **Effect** on that clip. 2. Under **Zooms**, expand **Advanced zoom settings**. 3. Turn on **Adjust this clip only**. 4. Turn motion blur on or off, or change its amount. Turn off **Adjust this clip only** to make the clip use the video-wide motion blur setting and amount again. ## Turn motion blur off Open **Advanced zoom settings** in **Effect** and turn off **Motion blur**. Tella keeps your zooms, pans, and cursor animation but renders their movement without blur. # Add your logo to videos Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/add-your-logo-to-videos Upload a PNG, JPG, or WEBP logo under Logo on video in the editor's Style panel. It appears in a corner of every clip; you can move, resize, hide it on one clip, or remove it. Add a logo to your video from **Logo on video** at the bottom of the editor's **Style** panel (press `B`). It sits in a corner of every clip, above your video but below subtitles. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmkn4hffm01qs04gydee839y0/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmkn4hffm01qs04gydee839y0/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Where does the logo appear? * It appears in front of all video content, except subtitles. * It persists across every clip in your video. ## Where to find the logo settings The logo lives in the **Style** panel of the editor: 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Click **Style** in the editor toolbar (or press **B**). 3. Scroll to the **Logo on video** section at the bottom of the panel. ## Add a logo 1. In the **Style** panel, go to **Logo on video**. 2. Click **Upload your logo**. 3. Choose a PNG, JPG, or WEBP file. After a few seconds, your logo appears in one of the corners of your video. ## Use your workspace logo If your workspace has a logo set under **Logo on video** in **Settings** → **Branding**, Tella adds it to new videos automatically. On a video without a logo, the editor shows **Use workspace logo**; click **Apply** to add it. Changing the workspace logo applies to new videos only; existing videos are not affected. ## Change the logo position Once your logo is uploaded, use the corner grid next to the logo preview to anchor it to the top-left, top-right, bottom-left, or bottom-right. Pick the corner that keeps the logo clear of important content. ### Adjust size and padding For more control, expand **Advanced logo settings** and adjust: * **Scale:** make the logo larger or smaller. * **Padding:** the space between the logo and the edge of the video. ## Remove the logo If you don't want the logo anymore, you can remove it from the entire video at any time: 1. In the **Style** panel, go to **Logo on video**. 2. Hover over the logo preview. 3. Click the **trash icon** (Remove logo). The logo is removed from every clip. You can upload a new one later, or use **Change logo** on the preview to swap it for a different file. ## Hide the logo on a single clip If the logo only looks bad on one clip, you can hide it there without removing it from the rest of the video: 1. Select the clip you want to adjust. 2. In the **Style** panel, open **Logo on video → Advanced logo settings**. 3. Check **Don't show logo in this clip**. This option only appears when your video has more than one clip. The logo stays visible on all other clips. # Adjust audio levels Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/adjust-audio-levels Use Audio levels in the editor's Audio panel: Master volume for mic and system audio together, Advanced audio settings for each source, and Adjust this clip only for a single clip. Balance your audio under **Audio levels** in the editor's **Audio** panel: **Master volume** sets your microphone and system audio together, and **Advanced audio settings** controls each source separately for the whole video or a single clip. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvpvepjq019108jp3ohr9ov4/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvpvepjq019108jp3ohr9ov4/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Adjust the master volume (applies to the whole video) By default, you can adjust the **Master volume**. This controls the overall audio level for: * your microphone audio * your system audio (sound recorded from your screen) Use this when you want a quick, overall volume change without tweaking each source separately. ## Use advanced audio settings (control each source) If you want more control, open **Advanced audio settings** to adjust audio sources individually. * **System audio volume:** if you recorded system audio by accident (for example, audio from something playing on your screen), you can lower it or switch it off. * **Microphone volume:** if your mic is too quiet (for example, you were sitting too far away), you can boost the microphone volume. If it is too loud, you can turn it down. * **Media volume (this layout):** if the current layout uses a video as [B-roll media](/docs/help/editing/use-media), you can set the volume of that video for the current layout. When both the Screen and Camera slots contain media, the label names the slot, such as **Screen media volume (this layout)**. Lower it to mute background sound or raise it when the media's own audio should come through. ### Open a B-roll video's volume controls You can jump directly to the right volume control from the layout timeline: 1. Right-click a layout section that contains video media. 2. Select **Adjust volume**. If both the Screen and Camera slots contain media, select **Adjust screen volume** or **Adjust camera volume**. 3. Tella opens the **Audio** panel and focuses the volume slider for that media. To turn the media's sound off without opening the Audio panel, select **Mute audio** from the same menu. Select **Unmute audio** to restore it. > [!NOTE] > > When a B-roll section uses a camera-only layout, Tella hides the source video but keeps your camera audio playing. Your voiceover continues uninterrupted while the B-roll fills the screen. ## Mute an entire clip You can mute every audio source in a clip without opening the Audio panel: 1. Right-click the clip, or click its **⋯** menu. 2. Select **Mute audio**. To turn the clip's sound back on, open the same menu and select **Unmute audio**. Tella restores the clip's audio sources to their main volume levels. The mute option only appears when the clip contains audio. ## Adjust audio for a single clip If your video has multiple clips, you can apply different microphone and system audio levels to individual clips. B-roll media volume is always set per layout. By default, audio adjustments apply to **all clips** in your video. To change only one clip: 1. Select the clip you want to edit. 2. Tick **Adjust this clip only** under **Master volume** in the Audio panel. 3. Under **Advanced audio settings**, set **Mic volume (this clip)** and **System audio (this clip)**. These changes will only affect the selected clip, and will not change the volume of your other clips. ## Reset a clip back to the main volume To drop a clip's custom levels, select the clip and untick **Adjust this clip only**. The clip goes back to the video-wide levels. ## Background music volume You can also adjust the volume of your **background music** separately, so you can balance it with your voice and any system audio. See [Add background music](/docs/help/editing/add-background-music-to-your-video) for how to choose or upload a track. Tip: if your voice is hard to hear, try turning the music down and boosting the microphone slightly. ## Related * [Add background music](/docs/help/editing/add-background-music-to-your-video) * [Studio Voice (audio enhancement)](/docs/help/editing/studio-voice-audio-enhancement) * [Add sound effects](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects): each sound effect has its own volume control # Adjust your camera frame Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/adjust-your-camera-frame Use Crop → Adjust camera to crop your camera and set its focus point, or open the Camera crop thumbnail in Layout → Adjust (press A). Reframe your camera from **Crop** → **Adjust camera** in the toolbar below the video, or open **Layout** → **Adjust** (press `A`) and click the **Camera crop** thumbnail. In the crop window, drag the focus point to choose which part of your camera recording stays centered in layouts, or resize the crop frame to trim the shot. Use it when you were off-center while recording or when a layout crops the camera more tightly than you want. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvlum7qh00c808ifamtrb1xv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvlum7qh00c808ifamtrb1xv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Change which part of the camera stays centered 1. Open your video and select the clip you want to reframe. 2. Open **Crop** → **Adjust camera**, or click the **Camera crop** thumbnail under **Layout** → **Adjust**. 3. Drag the focus point inside the crop selection to choose which part of the camera recording stays centered. 4. Choose a scope and save, then preview the clip in different layouts and fine-tune the point as needed. In **Layout** → **Adjust**, click **Apply camera to all clips** to copy your camera framing, crop, and mirror setting to other clips. The crop is copied to matching camera recordings. ## Crop your camera Beyond repositioning, you can **crop** your camera feed to trim away the parts you don't want, the same way you crop screen recordings. This is useful for tightening the shot around your face or removing distracting background at the edges. 1. **Open the camera crop tool** * Select your clip, then choose **Crop** → **Adjust camera**. If the Camera slot is empty or hidden, **Crop** skips the menu and opens the screen crop instead. You can also click the **Camera crop** thumbnail in **Layout** → **Adjust**. 2. **Set your crop** * Drag and resize the crop frame over the part of the camera you want to keep. * Choose a preset aspect ratio (like 16:9 or 1:1), or select **Freeform** to crop freely. * Type in exact pixel values for position and size when you need precision. Click the lock button between **W** and **H** to keep the current proportions while you type. 3. **Check the crop across the clip** * Use the timeline below the preview to check your framing at other moments. Click the play button to preview the clip, and click it again to pause. Playback stops at the end; click play again to restart. * Click the timeline or drag the red playhead to move through the clip. The preview updates to the selected moment so you can confirm that you stay inside the crop frame. 4. **Set the focus point, mirror, and eye contact** * Drag the focus point inside the crop selection to control which part of the cropped frame stays centered in your layouts. * Click the mirror button (**Mirror camera**) in the top-right of the crop window to flip the camera horizontally. Your crop follows the mirrored preview. * Click **Eye contact** next to it to redirect your gaze toward the camera. See [Turn on eye contact](/docs/help/editing/eye-contact). If the clip also has a screen recording, use the dropdown in the crop window title to switch between **Camera** and **Screen** without closing the tool. > [!TIP] > > What's inside the crop frame is what shows inside each layout. Cropping only changes what appears within the camera shape, so bubble and rounded camera styles keep their shape. ## Apply your crop to other layouts and clips If your clip uses multiple layouts, or your video has several clips, you don't need to crop each one by hand: In the crop window, choose a scope from the dropdown next to the **Save** button: * **This layout only** crops the camera in the layout you opened the crop tool on without changing the other layouts in the clip. The preview timeline and playback cover only that layout. A focus point you set in the crop window also stays on that layout. * **All layouts in this clip** (the default) applies the crop to every layout in the current clip. * **All layouts in all clips** copies the crop (and its focus point) to every clip's camera across your whole video. You can also use **Apply camera to all clips** in **Layout** → **Adjust** to copy the current camera crop, focus point, and mirror setting to the other clips. To reuse a crop on just one other clip, click **⋯** (**More crop controls**) next to the size fields in the crop window and choose **Copy crop dimensions** (**⌘ + C**), then open the other clip's crop window and choose **Paste crop dimensions** (**⌘ + V**). See [Copy a crop to another clip](/docs/help/editing/crop-screen-recordings#copy-a-crop-to-another-clip). > [!NOTE] > > The camera's [mirror setting](/docs/help/editing/mirror-or-flip-your-camera) is different: it always applies to the whole clip, so every layout in that clip shares it. > [!NOTE] > > Cropping the camera doesn't touch your recording. Click **Reset** in the crop window at any time to return to the full camera frame. ## Reframe the camera via the API or MCP You can also set a clip's camera crop and focus point programmatically. Pass `cameraCrop` and `cameraFocusPoint` to `PATCH /v1/videos/{id}/clips/{clipId}` in the [Public API](/docs/introduction), or to the `update_clip` tool in the [MCP server](/docs/mcp-tools/clips#update_clip). Like **All layouts in this clip**, they apply to every layout in that clip, so set them on each clip to reframe the whole video. ## Tips for camera framing * **Aim for centering**: In most cases, position yourself close to the center of the frame so viewers focus on you. * **Consider the layout**: If your camera is small or off to the side in a layout, slight framing adjustments still make a big difference. # Add stickers and animated stickers Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/animated-stickers Add stickers, GIFs, memes, company logos, and animated stickers from Overlay → Stickers, create an animated sticker with AI, or upload a Lottie file up to 2 MB. Add stickers from the **Stickers** section of **Overlay** in the editor sidebar: choose from Tella's sticker library, GIFs, memes, company logos, and animated templates, or create your own animated sticker with AI. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvjx9n7y000b08i7aq1nb5yg/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvjx9n7y000b08i7aq1nb5yg/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Add a sticker 1. Open your video in the editor and move the playhead to where you want the sticker to appear. 2. Open **Overlay** in the sidebar. 3. Under **Stickers**, choose a suggested sticker or click **Browse all**. 4. Choose an item from **Animated**, **Doodle icons**, **Badges**, **People**, **Everyday items**, **Retro**, **Company logos**, **GIFs**, or **Memes**. The sticker appears on the canvas and the Overlay timeline. Stickers start at a compact size so they do not cover your recording. Drag the sticker or its corners to reposition or resize it, then drag its timeline card to change when it appears. You can also use **Search all stickers** beside the **Stickers** heading to find an item quickly. Stickers and GIFs are also in the Media Library you open from **Overlay** → **Media** → **Browse all**: click **Browse**, then open its menu and choose **Stickers** or **GIFs**. The search box at the top of the library filters them. ## Add a company logo 1. Open **Stickers** → **Browse all**. 2. Select **Company logos**. 3. Choose a suggested company, or use **Search all stickers** to find one. 4. Click the logo to add it as a transparent cutout. If Tella cannot find a compatible transparent logo for a company, its tile shows **Unavailable** and cannot be selected. > [!NOTE] > > If a company logo you added previously appears on the timeline but not on the canvas, remove it and add it again. ## Create an animated sticker with AI 1. Under **Stickers**, click **Browse all**. 2. In **Animated**, click **Create your own**. 3. Describe the animation you want, then click **Generate**. 4. Review the preview. Enter another prompt and click **Update with AI** if you want to refine it. 5. Click **Add to video**. > [!TIP] > > Be specific about the subject, movement, and colors. For example: “Three confetti bursts in warm colors.” ## Use an animated template Open **Stickers** → **Browse all**, then choose a template under **Animated**. Tella adds it to your video immediately. The animated templates are provided by LottieFiles. Click **License** in the **Animated sticker** panel to review their license. ## Upload an animated sticker 1. Open **Stickers** → **Browse all**. 2. Under **Animated**, click **Create your own**. 3. Click **Upload Lottie** in the top-right corner. 4. Click **Choose file** and select a Lottie JSON or `.lottie` file up to 2 MB. Animations that use external image assets, themes, or state machines are not supported. ## Edit an animated sticker with AI 1. Select the animated sticker on the canvas or Overlay timeline. 2. Open its three-dots menu and select **Edit with AI**. 3. Describe what you want to change, then click **Update with AI**. 4. Review the result and click **Apply changes**. You can click **Undo** in the **Animated sticker** panel to return to the previous generated version before applying your changes. ## Move, resize, or delete a sticker Stickers use the same controls as other visual overlays. You can move, resize, rotate, trim, split, duplicate, reorder, or delete them, and [animate them in and out](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays#animate-the-overlay-in-and-out) from the **Animation** section. See [Add media overlays](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays) and [Work with the multi-track timeline](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline) for the shared controls. # Change layout and zoom animation styles Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/animation-style Choose separate animation styles for layout transitions and zooms in the editor, from Gentlest to Snappiest. Zoom styles can apply to a whole video or one clip. You can set different animation styles for layout transitions and zooms in the editor. Both controls have ten steps, from **Gentlest** to **Snappiest**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvlrdarj000e07jg7235goxl/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvlrdarj000e07jg7235goxl/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Change the layout animation style 1. Open your video in the Tella editor and click **Layout** in the sidebar. 2. Click **Adjust** in the panel header. 3. Under **Transitions** → **Layout animation**, drag the slider to choose a style. Release it to save. The layout style applies throughout your video. Changing it does not change how your zooms animate, even if they previously used the same style. New recordings start with the layout style you last chose. ## Change the zoom animation style 1. Open **Effect** in the editor sidebar. 2. Under **Zooms**, expand **Advanced zoom settings**. 3. Under **Animation style**, drag the slider to preview a style; release it to save. The zoom style controls how smooth zoom transitions ease in, out, and between each other. It applies throughout the video unless you turn on **Adjust this clip only** in **Advanced zoom settings**. That option appears when your video has more than one clip. To skip animation for an individual zoom, select its card, expand **Advanced**, and set **Intro**, **Outro**, or both to **Hard cut**. Leave a side on **Smooth** to use the zoom animation style. See [Make a zoom smooth or a hard cut](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom#make-a-zoom-smooth-or-a-hard-cut). ## Which styles can I choose? Both sliders offer **Gentlest**, **Gentle**, **Relaxed**, **Smooth**, **Moderate**, **Brisk**, **Focused**, **Snappy**, **Punchy**, and **Snappiest**. Use the gentler end for slower movement or the snappier end for quicker movement. Preview your video to find the right pace for each type of transition. **Focused** and **Punchy** move off quickly and ease onto their target without overshooting it. **Gentle** starts slowly instead, so a move never jumps into motion. Videos that were already set to Gentle keep their earlier, quicker start until you pick Gentle again. Generating zooms with the **Gentle**, **Subtle**, **Focused**, or **Intense** style also sets the zoom animation style. See [Generate zooms automatically](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom#generate-zooms-automatically). # Blur or highlight part of your video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting Blur hides sensitive details and highlight dims everything except one area. Add both from Effect → Blur & highlight; they work on footage in a layout's Screen slot, not on your camera. Add a blur or highlight from **Effect** → **Blur & highlight** (press `E`) to hide sensitive details or draw attention to a region of screen footage, including uploaded video. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvpw2x5e00gq08id3f7837co/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvpw2x5e00gq08id3f7837co/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) Blur and highlight work on footage in a layout's **Screen** slot. Blur hides sensitive information; highlight masks everything except the area you want viewers to notice. The controls moved from **Overlay** to **Effect**. See [Where did the Zoom tool go?](/docs/help/faq/where-is-the-zoom-tool) for other moved controls. > [!NOTE] > > Blur and highlight work on screen recordings, uploaded videos, and image or video B-roll in the **Screen** slot. On a camera-only clip, add a media layout with Screen-slot media first. If the clip has no screen recording and no Screen-slot media, the Effect panel asks you to record your screen or add a media layout. ## Where did the blur tool go? 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Click **Effect** in the sidebar, or press `E`. 3. Find **Blur & highlight**. The Effect timeline shows zooms, blurs, and highlights together, so you can compare and adjust their timing in one place. ## Blur sensitive information 1. Move the playhead to where the blur should start. You can also select a range on the timeline or in the transcript. 2. Click the plus button beside **Blur & highlight**. Tella adds a blur to the footage in the **Screen** slot and opens its settings. 3. On the canvas, drag and resize the blur to cover what you want to hide. 4. On the Effect timeline, drag the card or either edge to change its timing. * Drag the start or end of the blur to change its duration. * Drag the card left or right to move it earlier or later. * Hold **Option** on Mac or **Alt** on Windows while dragging to turn snapping off. > [!TIP] > > Hover over a blur or highlight card or either duration handle to preview the exact frame under your pointer. While you drag a duration handle, the preview follows the moving edge while the red playhead stays parked. > [!NOTE] > > A selected time range wins over the playhead. If you select several ranges, Tella adds one effect to each. Clear the selection first when you want the playhead to decide where the effect starts. > [!NOTE] > > Blur and highlight timing follows your edited playback timeline, so removed sections are skipped. If the playhead is inside a cut, Tella starts the effect at the first visible frame after that cut. ## Add a highlight 1. Click the plus button beside **Blur & highlight**. 2. In the selected effect's settings, change **Type** from **Blur** to **Highlight**. 3. Position and resize the clear area around what you want viewers to notice. 4. Adjust its timing on the Effect timeline. You can also open **Add** in the timeline toolbar and choose **Add highlight** directly. ## Add overlapping effects Click the plus button again to add another blur, or use **Add** in the timeline toolbar to choose a blur or highlight. Position each effect on the canvas and adjust its timing on the Effect timeline. You can run multiple blurs and highlights at the same time. Overlapping cards move onto separate tracks automatically so each one stays visible. See [work with the multi-track timeline](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline). ## Edit or remove an effect Select a visible blur or highlight directly on the canvas, even when another editor tool is open. Tella switches to **Effect** and opens its settings. You can also select its card in the Effect timeline. * Drag the selected area to reposition it, or use the arrow keys to move it by one canvas pixel. Hold **Shift** while pressing an arrow key to move it by 10 pixels. * Use **Type** to switch between Blur and Highlight without recreating the effect. * Use **Intensity** to set how strong the effect is. For a highlight, it controls how dark the area outside the clear region gets. For a blur, it makes the blur heavier. * Use **Transition** to choose **Smooth** or **Hard cut**. * Click **Delete** in the timeline toolbar, or right-click the card and choose **Delete blur** or **Delete highlight**. * To remove every blur and highlight from the current clip, open **More actions** and choose **Reset all blurs and highlights**. This also removes effects hidden inside cuts. Click **Undo** in the confirmation message to restore them together. > [!NOTE] > > A blur never gets lighter than its default. Lowering **Intensity** on a blur returns it to the standard strength, so whatever it covers stays hidden. ## Animate a blur or highlight By default, a blur or highlight uses a **Hard cut**, appearing and disappearing instantly. Select **Smooth** under **Transition** to fade it in and out instead. > [!NOTE] > > You cannot split a blur or highlight while its transition is set to **Smooth**. Change it to **Hard cut** first if you need to split it. ## Split at the playhead 1. Select the blur or highlight. 2. Move the playhead inside the effect. 3. Click **Split** in the timeline toolbar, press `X`, or right-click the card and choose **Split at playhead**. The new right half keeps the same type, position, size, intensity, and transition. You can then resize, reposition, or retime either half independently. ## Use blur and highlight with crops, layouts, and zooms Blur and highlight apply to the footage in the layout's **Screen** slot when the effect starts. If image or video B-roll is in that slot, the effect stays attached to the media and ends when the media leaves the Screen slot. It continues across adjacent layout sections that keep the same media there. Media in the **Camera** slot is unaffected. You can keep one area highlighted while another stays blurred as a zoom plays. > [!NOTE] > > Blur and highlight areas follow the **Shape** selected in **Style** for that layout section. In a full layout, the camera or screen frame stays square at the canvas edge, while the effect keeps your **Rounded** or **Circle** shape in the editor and exported video. > [!TIP] > > When you add a blur or highlight during a zoom, Tella places it in the center of the visible zoomed area. You can then drag and resize it across the active Screen-slot footage, including areas outside the canvas. If a crop still includes the full covered area, the effect stays anchored to the same content. If the crop cuts through part of it, Tella adjusts the effect to fit. Resetting the crop keeps that adjusted position and size. If the crop removes the covered area completely, Tella removes the blur or highlight. # Capture websites and social posts Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/capture-websites-and-social-posts Paste a public web page or X, Instagram, LinkedIn, or TikTok post link into Add from a link in the Media Library, and Tella captures it as an image or scrolling-page video for a layout or overlay. Capture a website or public social post by clicking **Add from a link** (the link icon) in the editor's Media Library and pasting the link. Tella captures it as an image, or a **Scrolling page** video for websites, and adds it to the current video's Media Library for use in a layout or as an overlay. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvm2tiv8000102q65yrse58r/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvm2tiv8000102q65yrse58r/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## What can I capture? * A public web page, either **Above the fold** as an image or as a **Scrolling page** video * An individual public post from X, Instagram, LinkedIn, or TikTok For social media, paste the link to the post itself. Profile, search, and feed links are not supported. A YouTube video link pasted into the same box imports the video itself rather than a capture. For an X, Instagram, or TikTok post that holds a video, Tella offers **Import video** to import the video itself, or **Import screenshot** to capture the post as a card. See [Import a video from YouTube, X, Instagram, or TikTok](/docs/help/editing/import-a-youtube-video). ## Add a capture to a layout Use a media layout when the capture should replace your screen recording for part of the video. 1. Open your video and click **Layout**. 2. Select a time range or layout section, then choose a **Media** layout. You can also open **Customize layout** and change **Screen** or **Camera** to **Media**. 3. In the Media Library header, click **Add from a link** (the link icon). 4. Under **Add from socials or a website**, paste the link into **Paste a link**. 5. For a web page, turn on **Scrolling page** if you want an animated scroll instead of an image of the page above the fold. Social posts are captured as still cards. 6. Click **Add**. If the post holds a video, click **Import screenshot** instead. Tella adds the capture under **In this video** in the Media Library and places it in the selected layout section. ## Add a capture as an overlay Use an overlay when the capture should sit on top of your recording. 1. Move the playhead to where the overlay should start, or select a time range. 2. Click **Overlay**, find **Media**, then click **Browse all**. 3. In the Media Library header, click **Add from a link** (the link icon). 4. Under **Add from socials or a website**, paste the link into **Paste a link**. 5. Click **Add**. If the post holds a video, click **Import screenshot** instead. Tella captures the post or the part of the web page above the fold, adds it under **In this video** in the Media Library, and places it on the canvas. ## Switch a website overlay to a scrolling page After you add a website as an overlay, you can change how Tella captures it: 1. Select the website overlay on the canvas or timeline. 2. Under **Screenshot**, choose **Above the fold** or **Scrolling page**. 3. Wait for Tella to recapture the page and replace the overlay. This control is available for website captures, not social-post cards. ## Reuse a capture Captures stay in the current video's library, under **In this video**. Open the item's menu and choose **Save to personal** or **Save to team** if you want to use it in other videos. For more ways to position and edit the result, see [Add media (B-roll)](/docs/help/editing/use-media) or [Add media overlays](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays). # Blur or replace your camera background after recording Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/change-camera-background-after-recording In the editor, open Style (press B) and set Camera background to Blur or Color to blur or fill the room behind you in a recorded clip. Your camera keeps its frame, border and shadow. It applies per clip. Blur or replace the room behind you after recording: open **Style** in the editor (press `B`) and set **Camera background** to **Blur** or **Color**. Tella cuts you out of the camera recording and changes only what is behind you, so your camera keeps its shape, border and shadow. It applies to the whole clip. [https://www.tella.tv/video/new-camera-background-feature-9xa3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/new-camera-background-feature-9xa3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Blur your background in the editor 1. Open your video in the editor and select the clip. 2. Click **Style** in the sidebar, or press `B`. 3. Under **Camera background**, choose **Blur**. 4. Drag **Strength** to set how blurred the room is. Tella may show **Preparing background** while it processes your camera recording. You can keep editing, but **Download** stays unavailable until it finishes. ## Replace your background with a solid color 1. Under **Camera background** in **Style**, choose **Color**. 2. Click **Color** to pick the fill. To go back to the room you recorded in, choose **Original**. ## Use the same background in every clip The background applies per clip. Click **Apply to all clips** under **Camera background** to copy the current choice to the camera in every clip. Duplicating or copying a clip keeps its background. ## Which camera styles show the background? The background shows in the round, square, portrait and **Blob** camera styles and in full-frame camera layouts. With **Pop-out**, it shows inside the frame. It is not shown with **Cut out**, which removes the room completely. See [Remove your camera background with Cut out](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background) and [Create a pop-out camera effect](/docs/help/editing/create-a-pop-out-camera-effect). ## Can I use an image as my camera background? Not in the editor yet. You can choose an image background in the recorder before you record; see [Change your camera background](/docs/help/recording/blur-your-camera-background). To change what appears around your camera rather than behind you, use **Background** in **Style**; see [Backgrounds](/docs/help/editing/pick-a-background). ## Blur your background before you record To record with blur already on, use **Camera background** in the web app or the background button in the Chrome extension, or **Portrait** under **Apple Effects** in the Mac app. The Windows app and Safari have no background effects. See [Change your camera background](/docs/help/recording/blur-your-camera-background). ## Is the blur in Effect the same thing? No. **Effect** → **Blur & highlight** hides a region of the footage in a layout's **Screen** slot, such as an email address in a screen recording. It does not apply to your camera, and a camera-only clip cannot use it. See [Blur or highlight part of your video](/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting). > [!NOTE] > > Like Cut out, this works best when you are clearly separated from your background. Hair and fast movement can leave soft edges. # Change canvas size Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/change-canvas-size Change your video's aspect ratio from the canvas size menu below the video, under Layout, or in Setup → Size. Choose Auto, 16:9, 16:10, 4:3, 1:1, 4:5, 9:16, or a Social media preset such as TikTok or LinkedIn post. Change your video's canvas size (its dimensions and aspect ratio) from the canvas size menu in the toolbar below the video, in the **Layout** panel header, or under **Setup** → **Size**. Choose **Auto** to match your recording, a standard ratio such as **16:9** or **9:16**, or a **Social media** preset. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvls177v002y07jggsjx0xjy/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvls177v002y07jggsjx0xjy/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## What does Auto canvas size do? Choose **Auto** to size the canvas around your screen recording or uploaded video. Tella adjusts the canvas so the content has balanced padding as you change layouts. In **Setup** → **Size**, this option reads **Auto** · **Match recording**. It only appears when the clip has a recording to size the canvas around. In a video with multiple clips, Auto adjustments that stay in the same orientation preserve each clip's chosen layout, custom layer positions, and styling. If an adjustment changes between landscape, portrait, or square, Tella adapts the layouts to the new orientation. ## Which aspect ratios are available? Tella supports six standard canvas presets, grouped by orientation: **Landscape** * **16:9** (1920 × 1080): standard widescreen, ideal for YouTube, presentations, and most web content * **16:10** (1920 × 1200): slightly taller widescreen, common for laptop displays * **4:3** (1440 × 1080): classic format, useful for slides and traditional presentations **Square** * **1:1** (1080 × 1080): works well for Instagram feed posts and LinkedIn **Portrait** * **4:5** (1080 × 1350): optimized for Instagram and Facebook feed posts * **9:16** (1080 × 1920): full vertical, ideal for TikTok, Reels, and Stories ## Social media presets Open **Social media** near the top of the canvas size menu, in the toolbar below the video or the **Layout** panel header, to choose a platform-specific preset. The **Size** dropdown in **Setup** lists only **Auto** and the standard ratios, not these presets. Presets are listed alphabetically: * **Facebook story:** 9:16 (1080 × 1920) * **Instagram post:** 4:5 (1080 × 1350) * **Instagram story:** 9:16 (1080 × 1920) * **LinkedIn post:** 1.91:1 (1200 × 628) * **Meta ad:** 4:5 (1080 × 1350) * **Pinterest pin:** 2:3 (1000 × 1500) * **TikTok:** 9:16 (1080 × 1920) * **X post:** 16:9 (1920 × 1080) * **YouTube:** 16:9 (1920 × 1080) * **YouTube Shorts:** 9:16 (1080 × 1920) Choosing a social media preset sets the canvas to that platform's dimensions. You can still adjust your layouts and layer positions afterward. ## Change the canvas size 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Click the canvas size control. It shows the current ratio, such as **16:9**, and appears in the toolbar below the video and in the **Layout** panel header. You can also use the **Size** dropdown in **Setup**. 3. Select **Auto** to match your recording, choose a standard aspect ratio, or open **Social media** and select a platform preset (not available in **Setup** → **Size**). Your video will immediately update to reflect the new canvas dimensions. When you choose a preset, layouts and layer positions adjust automatically to fit the new aspect ratio. ## Tips * Choose a preset canvas size **before** you start editing. Switching presets later will reposition your layouts, even when both presets have the same orientation, which may require adjustments. * **Your canvas size is remembered.** When you pick a ratio in the editor, Tella saves it as your default. The next new video you create will start with that same ratio automatically. When you upload a video, Tella keeps your saved ratio only if it has the same orientation (landscape, square, or portrait) as the file. Otherwise the canvas fits the uploaded video, so a portrait phone video stays portrait even if you last picked 16:9. * [Custom layouts](/docs/help/editing/custom-layouts) preserve their design intent across different canvas sizes. You don't need to recreate them for each ratio. * If you're creating content for multiple platforms, you can duplicate your video and apply a different canvas size to each copy. # Add chapters Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/chapters Chapters are timecoded sections with titles and descriptions that viewers can jump between. Tella generates them from your transcript with AI; open Chapters from Setup or the video title menu to generate, edit, or copy them. Chapters are timecoded sections of your video, each with a title and description, that help viewers jump to the part they want. Tella generates them from your transcript with AI, and you open them from **Chapters** in the editor's **Setup** panel or the video title menu. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvm0mimz00hf08jv7wxg7x5p/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvm0mimz00hf08jv7wxg7x5p/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Generate chapters with AI 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Chapters** in the **Setup** panel. You can also open the video title menu in the top-left corner and select **Chapters**, or choose **Chapters** from the **More** (**⋯**) menu in the top-right corner of the editor. 3. Click **Generate** (with the sparkle icon). 4. Tella analyzes your transcript and streams chapters in as they're generated. 5. Review the chapters. 6. Click **Done** to save, or **Cancel** to discard. ## Update chapters after trimming When you trim your video after generating chapters, Tella detects that your chapters may be out of sync. An amber dot appears beside **Chapters** in the video title menu, and an **Update** button appears next to **Chapters** in **Setup**. Open the Chapters panel to see the banner **Your edits may have changed your chapters.** with a **Regenerate** button. Click **Regenerate** in that banner to regenerate chapters based on your current video content. The new chapters will reflect your trimmed timeline. ## Regenerate chapters If you're not happy with the generated chapters, you can regenerate them at any time: 1. Open the video title menu and select **Chapters**. 2. Click the sparkles button (**Regenerate chapters**), or open the **More** (**⋯**) menu and select **Regenerate**. 3. New chapters replace the existing ones. 4. Review them and click **Done** to save. ## Edit chapters manually After generating chapters, you can fine-tune them: * **Edit a title or description**: Click the **Edit** button (pencil icon) to enter edit mode, then click on any chapter to edit its text. Press **Enter** or click **Done** to save your changes. * **Delete a chapter**: Remove individual chapters you don't need. * **Delete all chapters**: Open the **More** (**⋯**) menu and select **Delete all chapters** to remove all chapters at once. If your first chapter starts after 0:00, Tella adds an **Intro** chapter at 0:00 when you save. ## Copy chapters or turn one into a video Chapters unlock several useful actions: * **Turn a chapter into its own video**: Hover a chapter, open its **⋯** menu, and select **Copy to new video**. * **Copy as text**: Open the **More** (**⋯**) menu and select **Copy as text** to copy chapters with timestamps and dashes (e.g., `00:00 - Intro`). * **Copy with descriptions**: Open the **More** (**⋯**) menu and select **Copy with descriptions** to copy chapters with timestamps, titles, and descriptions. Each chapter's description appears on a new line below the title, with a blank line between chapters. * **Copy for YouTube**: Open the **More** (**⋯**) menu and select **Copy for YouTube** to copy chapters without dashes (e.g., `00:00 Intro`), ready to paste into a YouTube description. See [YouTube chapters](/docs/help/export-videos/youtube-chapters). ## Turn automatic chapters on or off You can set Tella to automatically generate chapters for every new recording: 1. Go to **Settings** > **Preferences**. 2. Enable **Auto-generate chapters** (this is enabled by default). 3. Chapters will be generated automatically after each recording is transcribed. The Preferences page also includes **Auto-generate titles** and **Auto-generate descriptions** toggles. These control whether Tella automatically generates a title and description for each new recording using AI. Both are enabled by default. ## How do viewers see chapters? When you add chapters to your video: * Viewers see chapter markers on the video progress bar * A chapter list may appear that viewers can click to jump to sections * On devices that support hovering, hovering over a chapter in the list shows a thumbnail preview. On touch devices, tap a chapter to jump straight to that section. On mobile, landscape videos stay pinned at the top of the view page while you scroll through chapters, the transcript, or comments. Portrait videos scroll with the page. # Choose how clips transition Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/clip-transitions Choose Smooth or Hard cut under Layout → Adjust → Transitions → Between clips, or override one clip with From previous clip. Clip transitions control how each clip in your video starts after the one before it: **Hard cut** switches instantly, and **Smooth** glides your camera and screen from where they were in the previous clip into the new clip's layout. Set it for the whole video in the editor under **Layout** → **Adjust** → **Transitions** → **Between clips**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvkjkdfd000e02mj7c441ycn/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvkjkdfd000e02mj7c441ycn/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Change the clip transition 1. Open your video in the Tella editor and click **Layout** in the sidebar. 2. Click **Adjust** in the panel header. 3. Under **Transitions** → **Between clips**, choose **Smooth** or **Hard cut**. The change applies to every clip boundary that follows the video setting, shows in the editor preview straight away, and is used when you export. You can undo it like any other edit. The same setting also appears in **Setup** → **Clip transitions**. Both controls change the same setting. ## What is the difference between Smooth and Hard cut? * **Hard cut** jumps straight to the next clip. This is the default, so existing videos look the same until you change it. * **Smooth** starts the next clip's camera and screen in the same position and size they had at the end of the previous clip, then animates them into the new clip's layout. For example, if one clip ends with your camera full screen and the next starts with a screen-and-camera layout, the camera shrinks into its new spot instead of jumping. Smooth only moves layers that appear in both clips. A layer that is new in the next clip, such as a screen recording after a camera-only clip, appears with a hard cut. The first clip in a video has nothing to transition from. ## How is this different from layout transitions? Clip transitions apply where one clip ends and the next begins. Layout changes inside a single clip animate on their own, and their pace is set separately under **Layout** → **Adjust** → **Transitions** → **Layout animation**. See [Change layout and zoom animation styles](/docs/help/editing/animation-style). ## Set a transition for one clip You can override the video setting for an individual clip in the editor. 1. Select the clip in the timeline, or move the playhead into it. 2. Click **Layout** in the sidebar, then **Adjust** in the panel header. 3. Under **Transitions** → **From previous clip**, choose **Smooth** or **Hard cut**, or choose **Default** to follow the video setting. The setting controls how the selected clip starts after the one before it, so to change the transition between clip 2 and clip 3, select clip 3. **From previous clip** is not shown for the first clip, which has no previous clip to transition from. You can also use the [Tella MCP server](/docs/help/integrations/mcp-server): `update_clip` accepts `transition` (`smooth`, `hard_cut`, or `default` to follow the video setting). # Adjust your video's colors with filters Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/color-filters Change the colors of your camera, screen recording, or media under Filters in the editor's Style panel: apply a preset, adjust exposure, contrast, saturation, temperature, and tint, or upload a .cube LUT. Change the colors of your camera, screen recording, or media under **Filters** in the editor's **Style** panel (press `B`). [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmugw9lfn00wq0agm3ekweegq/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmugw9lfn00wq0agm3ekweegq/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Apply a filter preset 1. Open your video in the editor and select a clip. 2. Click **Style** in the toolbar. 3. Under **Filters**, choose **Camera**, **Screen**, or **Media** if more than one source is available. 4. Click a preset to preview and apply it. Click **Customize** to open the full **Filters** panel. ## Fine-tune the colors In **Filters**, expand **Advanced** to adjust **Exposure**, **Contrast**, **Saturation**, **Temperature**, and **Tint**. You can also choose a preset under **Presets** before making adjustments. ## Use a LUT In the **LUTs** section of **Filters**, select a built-in LUT or click **Upload LUT as a .cube file** to add your own. Use **LUT intensity** to control how strongly the LUT affects the image. Select **None** in the LUT grid to remove it. ## Apply a filter to one clip By default, your filter applies to the same kind of recording across clips. If your video has more than one matching clip, check **Apply to this clip only** in the **Filters** panel to change only the selected clip. Turn it off to apply that clip's current filter to the matching clips again. Filters on media added to a clip affect that media only. # Create a pop-out camera effect Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/create-a-pop-out-camera-effect Pop-out cuts you out of your camera and places you in front of a shaped camera frame for depth. Turn on Pop-out in a framed camera layout such as Camera Bubble, then set its amount and outline in Customize layout. Pop-out cuts you out of your camera recording and places you in front of a smaller, shaped camera frame, adding depth. Turn on **Pop-out** in a layout that frames your camera, such as **Camera Bubble**, then adjust it in **Customize layout**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvpyz3a3009c07js54yicdue/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvpyz3a3009c07js54yicdue/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Turn on Pop-out 1. Open your video and click **Layout**. 2. Choose a layout that shows your camera inside a frame, such as **Camera Bubble** or a centered camera-only layout. 3. Turn on **Pop-out** in the layout controls. You can also open **Customize layout** and turn on **Pop-out** under **Camera style**. The effect applies to the current base layout or layout section. > [!NOTE] > > Pop-out needs a clip with a camera recording and a layout that frames it. It is unavailable for screen-only and full-frame camera layouts. ## Change the Pop-out amount and outline Click **Customization** under the layout to open **Customize layout**, then use the Pop-out settings: * **Pop-out amount:** control how far the frame drops behind you. * **Outline:** adjust the frame outline width. Increase it above 0% to reveal **Outline color**. * **Outline color:** choose the color of the frame outline. To blur the room inside the frame or fill it with a solid color, use **Camera background** in the **Style** tool. See [Blur or replace your camera background after recording](/docs/help/editing/change-camera-background-after-recording). Use **Camera style** to switch the frame between **Circle**, **Square**, **Landscape**, and **Portrait**. With **Circle**, the Pop-out frame stays circular even in a tall split layout: it is centered in the frame and sized to its shorter side, rather than stretched into an oval. Pop-out keeps the selected shape as you adjust the other settings. The frame's corners follow the **Shape** you chose in the **Style** tool (**Square**, **Round**, or **Squircle**), so a Square camera style can give you a sharp, rounded, or squircle frame to match your other layers. See [Borders](/docs/help/editing/use-borders). > [!TIP] > > Add a shadow from the **Style** tool to make the frame stand out from the canvas. The shadow follows the Pop-out frame's shape. ## Can I use Pop-out with Cut out or other layouts? Pop-out stays enabled when you switch between compatible framed-camera layouts. A [**Cut-out** layout](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background) removes the frame completely, so choosing it turns Pop-out off. If you turn on Pop-out while using Cut-out, Tella changes the camera to a square frame first. To reuse the result in other videos, save the layout to **Favorites** from **Customize layout**. See [Custom layouts](/docs/help/editing/custom-layouts) for the complete workflow. ## Related * [Remove your camera background with Cut out](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background): drop the frame entirely so only you remain on the canvas. * [Put overlays behind the presenter](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter): place text, media, or stickers behind you. With Pop-out, you rise out of the frame in front of them. # Create your custom transcript dictionary Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/create-your-custom-transcript-dictionary Add names, brands, and product terms to your Dictionary (Script panel → More actions, or Settings → Language) so Tella transcribes them correctly. Works for English, Spanish, Portuguese, French, German, and Italian. Add names, brands, and technical terms to your **Dictionary** so Tella transcribes them correctly. Open it from the **Script** panel's **More actions** menu, or from **Settings** → **Language** → **Transcription dictionary**. It works for English, Spanish, Portuguese, French, German, and Italian transcripts. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq0r3i800b808jwcyu2e3xv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq0r3i800b808jwcyu2e3xv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Add words to your dictionary 1. Open your video in the editor, open the **Script** panel, then choose **More actions** > **Dictionary**. It's also in the **Subtitles** panel's **More actions** menu. You can also manage your dictionary anytime from **Settings** > **Language**, under **Transcription dictionary**. 2. Type the word or term in the **Add new word** field. Use the exact spelling and capitalization. 3. Press Enter or click **Add** to save it to your dictionary. 4. Repeat for any additional terms you want to include 5. Click **Update transcript** to retranscribe the current video with your dictionary. Once you've added terms to your dictionary, all future videos will automatically reference these entries during transcription. You don't need to add them again. ## Which languages does the dictionary support? The dictionary works with transcriptions in English, Spanish, Portuguese, French, German, and Italian. If your transcript is in another language, Tella shows a **Switch language…** menu inside the dictionary. Picking a supported language updates your default transcript language and retranscribes the video automatically. Once the retranscription finishes, the word list appears and you can manage your dictionary as usual. ## Does the dictionary update existing videos? No, not automatically. New words apply to videos you record afterward. To apply your dictionary to an existing video, open that video's dictionary and click **Update transcript**. # Crop screen recordings Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/crop-screen-recordings Use Crop → Adjust screen or Layout → Adjust to crop a screen recording for one layout, a clip, or every clip without changing the original. Crop a screen recording from **Crop** → **Adjust screen** in the toolbar below the video, or open **Layout** → **Adjust** (press `A`) and click the **Screen crop** thumbnail. Drag the purple frame around what you want to keep, then choose whether it applies to one layout, every layout in the clip, or every clip. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvpwrs7z011z08l131rz4877/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvpwrs7z011z08l131rz4877/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) Cropping hides distractions such as browser tabs, the menu bar, or your dock without changing the original recording. Everything outside the crop frame is hidden from view. ## How to crop a screen recording 1. **Select the clip you want to crop** * Click on your screen recording in the timeline. 2. **Open the crop tool** * Click **Crop** in the toolbar below the video, then choose **Adjust screen**. If the clip has no camera, clicking **Crop** opens the screen crop straight away. The option is disabled if the Screen slot is empty or hidden. * Alternatively, open **Layout** → **Adjust** (or press `A`) and click the thumbnail beside **Screen crop**. The row is called **Media crop** when the current layout shows B-roll media. * You'll see: 1. A **purple crop frame** that you can drag and resize. 2. Crop settings for **position**, **size**, and **aspect ratio** (like 16:9 or 1:1). 3. A live preview of what your viewers will see. 3. **Check the crop across the clip** * Use the timeline below the preview to check other moments without closing the crop tool. Click the play button to preview the clip, and click it again to pause. Playback stops at the end; click play again to restart. * Click the timeline or drag the red playhead to move through the clip. The preview updates to the selected moment so you can make sure important content stays inside the crop frame. 4. **Adjust the crop** * **Freeform crop**: Choose **Freeform** from the aspect ratio dropdown at the start of the crop toolbar to move and resize freely. * **Constrained crop**: Choose a preset aspect ratio to maintain specific dimensions. Available presets: * **16:9:** standard widescreen * **16:10:** slightly taller widescreen, common for laptop displays * **4:3:** classic standard ratio * **1:1:** square * **4:5:** portrait, optimized for Instagram and Facebook feed posts * **9:16:** full vertical, ideal for TikTok, Reels, and Stories * **Manual input**: Type in exact pixel values for precision. * **Lock the aspect ratio**: Click the lock button between **W** and **H** to keep the crop's current proportions. While a ratio is locked, typing a width updates the height and the other way round. Click it again to unlock and go back to **Freeform**. * **Automatic zoom**: When your selection gets small, the preview zooms in and centers on it so the crop handles stay easy to grab. This only changes your view of the preview. Your crop values stay exactly where you set them. > [!TIP] > > What's inside the purple frame is what will be shown in your final video. ## Let Tella suggest a crop In the screen crop window, click **Auto Crop**. Tella detects content regions in the recording and suggests crops around them. Use the arrows beside **Auto Crop** to step through the suggestions, then save the one you want. Auto Crop isn't available when cropping your camera or an image. If the clip has both screen and camera footage, use the dropdown in the crop window title to switch between **Screen** and **Camera** without closing the tool. If you have unsaved changes, Tella asks **Save crop changes?** first. Click **Save and switch** to keep them and move to the other frame, or **Cancel** to stay on the current frame and keep editing. ## Choose how far the crop reaches In the crop window, choose a scope from the dropdown next to the save button before saving. The button names the scope, for example **Crop 1 layout** or **Crop 3 layouts in all clips** (**Save 1 layout** and so on when cropping the camera): * **This layout only** frames the layout you opened the crop tool on without changing the other layouts in the clip. The preview timeline and playback cover only that layout. Use it when you want to show a different part of the same recording at a different point in the clip. * **All layouts in this clip** (the default) applies the crop to every layout in the current clip, replacing any individual layout crops there. * **All layouts in all clips** applies the crop across the video, replacing individual layout crops in those clips. The same scopes apply when cropping your camera. If you reposition the camera's focus point in the crop window, **This layout only** keeps that focus point on the active layout; the clip-wide choices replace layout-specific focus points in their scope. ## Copy a crop to another clip To reuse the same crop on a different clip, copy it from one clip and paste it onto the next instead of retyping the position and size. 1. Open the crop window on the clip whose crop you want to reuse. 2. Click **⋯** (**More crop controls**) next to the size fields and choose **Copy crop dimensions**, or press **⌘ + C** (**Ctrl + C** on Windows). 3. Close the crop window, select the other clip, and open its crop window. 4. Click **⋯** and choose **Paste crop dimensions**, or press **⌘ + V** (**Ctrl + V** on Windows). 5. Check the scope and save as usual. * If the clip you paste onto has a different resolution, Tella scales the crop to cover the same part of the frame. * **Paste crop dimensions** is disabled until you've copied a crop. The copied crop stays available until you leave the editor. * Copy and paste stay inside Tella and don't use your system clipboard. Copying or pasting text in the position and size fields works as normal. Copy and paste work the same way when cropping your camera. ## Remove a crop In the crop window, click **Reset** to return to the full screen recording, then save. ## Do I need to adjust layouts after cropping? No. Once cropped, your screen recording automatically resizes and aligns itself inside each layout. # Save custom layouts Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/custom-layouts A custom layout is a preset you've rearranged and saved with Save as new in Customize layout. It appears in the Favorites tab of the Layout picker, so the same arrangement is one click away in every video. A custom layout is a Tella preset you've rearranged (moving or resizing the camera and screen) and saved with **Save as new** in **Customize layout**. Saved layouts appear in the **Favorites** tab of the Layout picker so you can reuse them in every video. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvpxuuq6002l08lbbcjv1uwz/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvpxuuq6002l08lbbcjv1uwz/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Create a custom layout 1. Start with any Tella layout (such as **Side-by-Side**) from the **Presets** tab of the layout picker. 2. Click **Customization** under the selected preset to open **Customize layout**, where you can tweak the layout's style, camera position, and screen fit. 3. Click on one or both layers (camera and/or screen) on the canvas and move or resize them to your desired arrangement. 4. When you're satisfied, type a name in the field at the top of the **Customize layout** panel and click **Save as new**. 5. Your saved layout now appears in the **Favorites** tab of the layout picker. You can experiment with different arrangements before saving. Take your time to get the positioning and sizing exactly how you want it. > [!NOTE] > > When you customize a preset, each layer keeps the corner shape it had in that preset. For example, a preset that gives the camera square corners while the screen follows your [**Shape**](/docs/help/editing/use-borders) setting stays that way after you resize it. Changing **Shape** later applies the new shape to every layer of the custom layout. ## Change the camera shape You can change your camera's shape without resetting the position or size of your custom layout: 1. Right-click the camera layer on the canvas. 2. Open **Shape**. 3. Choose **Circle**, **Square**, **Landscape**, **Portrait**, or **Cut-out**. Tella reshapes the camera around its current position and keeps it inside the canvas. **Cut-out** removes the frame and your camera background entirely, so only you remain. See [Remove your camera background with Cut out](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background). The change applies to the current layout section, which you can then save to your **Favorites**. ## Change how your screen fits You can change the framing of a screen layer without returning to a preset layout: 1. Right-click the screen layer on the canvas. 2. Open **Screen fit** and choose: * **Fill** to fill the layer's frame. Tella crops the edges when the screen and frame have different aspect ratios. * **Fit** to show the entire screen. Tella adds space around it when the aspect ratios differ. 3. Select **Full screen** from the same menu to expand the layer across the canvas. Select it again to return the layer to a centered, inset frame. Changing either option keeps the current section as a custom layout. You can continue moving or resizing its layers, then save the result to your **Favorites**. ## What happens to media when I apply a saved layout? Saved custom layouts keep media already in the slots they use when you apply them to a section. If the saved layout has no Camera slot, media in that slot is removed. A saved ordinary preset clears the section's media. On camera-only, screen-only, and uploaded clips, a [Media favorite](/docs/help/editing/use-media#save-and-reuse-a-media-layout) keeps media and changes its arrangement; on screen-and-camera clips, favorited Media presets behave like ordinary preset favorites and clear the media. You can also: * Apply saved layouts as the base layout for the current clip, then use **Apply to all clips** when you want the same layout on other compatible clips. * Add them to specific sections by clicking and dragging on the timeline. * The video transitions smoothly between different layouts. ## Use a favorite as the starting layout for new recordings When you apply a saved favorite to the **base layout** of a screen-and-camera clip, Tella remembers it as your starting layout for future screen-and-camera recordings. This also works if the favorite hides your screen or camera. Applying it to a layout section for just part of a clip does not change the starting layout. 1. Open a screen-and-camera clip in the editor and click **Layout**. 2. Click an empty part of the Layout timeline so you're editing the clip's main layout, not a layout section you've added. 3. Open **Favorites** and choose your saved layout. Hiding a source by hand without applying a favorite does not make that hidden-source layout your starting layout for new recordings. To reuse it, save the arrangement to **Favorites** and apply the favorite to the base layout. ## Rename, reorder, or remove saved layouts Open the **Favorites** tab in the layout picker to see every layout you've saved. You can **drag tiles in the grid to reorder them**, helpful for grouping related layouts or keeping your most-used arrangements at the top. Hover a tile and open its **More actions** (**⋯**) menu: * **Customize:** Apply the saved layout to the current section and reopen **Customize layout** so you can keep tweaking it. * **Rename:** Change its name inline. * **Remove from favorites:** Remove the saved layout from your Favorites. To update a saved layout rather than saving a copy: * **Updating an existing layout:** When you customize a section that originated from one of your saved layouts, the Customize panel shows an **"Or update \?"** shortcut next to the save form. Click it to overwrite the existing saved layout with your new arrangement instead of creating a duplicate. ## Custom layouts and cropping Custom layouts preserve their design intent across different aspect ratios. When you create a layout with one aspect ratio and then crop your screen recording to a different ratio (such as 4:3 or 16:9), the relationship between your camera and screen layers remains consistent. This means you don't need to create separate layouts for each aspect ratio. One custom layout works across all your screen recordings, regardless of their dimensions. ## Apply to all clips **Apply to all clips** works with any layout, including your saved custom layouts. It copies the current clip's layout to every other clip of the same type (camera-only, screen and camera, etc.) in one click. A significant time-saver for longer videos with multiple clips. To use it with a saved layout: 1. Apply your saved layout to the current clip from the **Favorites** tab, making sure you're editing the clip's main layout (not a layout section you've added). 2. Open **Customize layout** and, under **Base layout**, click **Apply to all clips**. You can also right-click an empty part of the Layout timeline and choose **Apply to all clips** from there. If you need certain clips to use different layouts, you can override them individually after applying to all. *** ## Creative layout ideas ### Camera backdrop layout Create a layout where your camera fills the entire background with your screen overlay in the foreground: 1. Start with a standard layout 2. Right-click the camera layer and select **Send to back** 3. Enlarge the camera layer significantly and position it to frame yourself on one side 4. Resize and position the screen layer in the remaining space This creates a dynamic look with your full camera view as a backdrop. ### 50/50 split screen Create a full-screen split with camera on one side and screen on the other: 1. Start with a **TV Presenter** layout 2. Move the camera layer to occupy roughly half the canvas 3. Use the screen cropping tool to crop your recording to fit the remaining space 4. Adjust positioning as needed **Note:** This layout works best when you plan ahead and record your screen content in a narrower window or area, ensuring important content stays visible in the cropped space. ## Which clips and canvas sizes support custom layouts? Custom layouts work with: * Camera-only clips * Screen-only clips * All canvas aspect ratios (16:9, 16:10, 4:3, 1:1, 4:5, 9:16) Experiment with different arrangements to find styles that match your brand and make your videos stand out. # Customize the animated cursor Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/customize-animated-cursor Restyle, resize, smooth, and add click effects to the pointer in Effect → Cursor. Available for Mac and Windows app recordings made with the Animated or Hidden cursor, not System, web, or Chrome extension recordings. Open **Effect** in the Tella editor (press `E`) to find **Cursor** settings, where you can restyle, resize, smooth, and add click effects to the pointer in Mac and Windows app recordings. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvmds0gv000x02o3grtr4qsf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvmds0gv000x02o3grtr4qsf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Why can't I see Cursor settings? The **Cursor** settings are available for eligible recordings from the Tella Mac and Windows apps. Record with **Animated** or **Hidden** so Tella can redraw the pointer without duplicating one already visible in the recording. > [!NOTE] > > If you record with **System**, the pointer becomes part of the video and the **Cursor** settings are hidden. The web recorder and Chrome extension don't report a cursor setting, so these controls aren't available for those recordings. ## How do I turn on the animated cursor? Mac and Windows app recordings use the **Animated** cursor mode by default, so the animated cursor is already on when you open the video, unless you turned it off in a previous video. To turn it on yourself: 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Effect** in the sidebar, or press `E`. 3. In **Cursor**, turn on **Cursor**. To control only the current clip, expand **Advanced zoom settings** under **Zooms** and turn on **Adjust this clip only** before enabling the cursor. ## How do I customize the cursor? Use the controls in **Cursor** to adjust its appearance: * **Style:** click a cursor tile: macOS Sequoia, macOS Tahoe, macOS Golden Gate, Windows, or Touch. * **Size:** drag the slider to make the cursor smaller or larger. Expand **Advanced cursor settings** to control its movement and click effects: * **Smooth movement:** soften the recorded cursor path. * **Movement tilt:** tilt the cursor as it moves horizontally. * **Click spring:** make the cursor shrink and spring back when you click. * **Click ripple:** show a ripple around each click. * **Hide when inactive:** fade the cursor out when it stops moving and bring it back when activity resumes. > [!NOTE] > > For a new video, Tella starts the animated cursor at 2× size with **Movement tilt** and **Click spring** turned off unless it can reuse video-wide cursor settings you previously chose. Existing videos keep their current cursor settings. ## Can I change the cursor on just one clip? Cursor appearance settings apply across the video by default. With **Adjust this clip only** off, turning on **Cursor** enables it on the selected clip and on eligible clips that already have zooms. Tella skips clips recorded with **System** because their pointer is already part of the video. Select another eligible clip and turn on **Cursor** there if it has no zooms yet. To customize only the current clip, expand **Advanced zoom settings** under **Zooms** and turn on **Adjust this clip only** before changing its cursor settings. Turn it off to make the clip use the video-wide styling again. ## Can I use the animated cursor with Auto Zoom? On eligible Mac and Windows app recordings, **Auto Zoom** and **Cursor** use the same captured mouse data but control different things: * Auto Zoom follows the pointer to frame the action. * Cursor controls how the pointer itself looks and moves. You can use either feature on its own or combine them. Chrome tab recordings can support Auto Zoom even though their cursor cannot be restyled. See [add zooms and screen effects](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom) to generate or edit zooms. # Remove your camera background with Cut out Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background Cut out removes the background from camera recordings or uploaded footage of a person. Use Layout or the Cut-out controls in Customize layout. Cut out removes the background from your camera recording or uploaded footage of a person so only you appear on the canvas, over your background or screen recording, with no frame. Pick the **Cut out** layout under **Layout**, or choose **Cut-out** as the camera style in **Customize layout**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq01c5d009508lb3r6uf0tv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq01c5d009508lb3r6uf0tv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Apply a Cut out layout 1. Open a video that contains a camera recording or uploaded footage of a person. 2. Click **Layout** in the editor sidebar. 3. Find **Cut out** and select the layout tile. 4. If your clip contains both a screen and camera, choose which side of the screen to place yourself on. In a portrait or square video, choose whether to appear above or below the screen. 5. Optional: in a landscape video, turn on **Perspective** to angle the screen in 3D so it recedes toward you, with you standing in front of it in the bottom corner. Tella may show **Preparing cut-out** while it processes your footage. You can keep editing while it prepares the result, but **Download** stays unavailable until processing finishes. ## Turn Cut-out on or off while customizing a layout You can add or remove the Cut-out camera style without changing the rest of a layout: 1. Open **Layout** and select **Customize layout**. 2. Find the **Cut-out** control for the camera. On a fullscreen camera layout it is a toggle; on other camera layouts, choose **Cut-out** under **Camera style** (pick another shape, such as **Circle**, to turn it off). 3. Turn **Cut-out** on to remove the camera background, or off to restore the camera frame. You can continue to move and resize yourself on the canvas after applying Cut-out. > [!TIP] > > Cut-out works best when you are clearly visible and separated from your background. ## Cut out a person in an uploaded video For uploaded footage, the **Cut out** preset fills the canvas. To remove the background while keeping a centered or resized layout instead: 1. Select the uploaded clip and open **Layout**. 2. Open **Customize layout**. 3. In the **Screen** section, turn on **Cut-out**. The toggle appears when the clip's own uploaded footage is the source in the Screen slot. It keeps your current layout and applies to the current layout section. For a centered portrait upload, the frame widens while keeping its height, so the person stays the same size. Cut out is not available for screen-only recordings. Cut-out presets saved from uploaded clips also stay hidden in **Favorites** when you select a screen-only recording. ## Related * [Create a pop-out camera effect](/docs/help/editing/create-a-pop-out-camera-effect): keep a camera frame and rise out of it. Choosing Cut out turns Pop-out off, because there is no frame to pop out of. * [Put overlays behind the presenter](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter): place text, media, or stickers behind you. # Draw on your iPad in a screen recording Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/draw-on-your-ipad-in-a-screen-recording Record your iPad with the Tella Mac app while you write on a dark page, then turn on Remove background color in the editor's Style tab so only your handwriting shows, floating next to or on top of your camera. To show what you draw on your iPad in a Tella video, record your iPad's screen and your camera together with the Tella Mac app, then turn on **Remove background color** in the editor's **Style** tab. Tella removes the page's color from the screen recording, so only your handwriting shows, floating over the video's background or your camera. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq95mxo004o08l61lu68r1q/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq95mxo004o08l61lu68r1q/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## What you need * The [Tella Mac app](/docs/help/recording/record-a-video-using-the-mac-app) and a cable to connect your iPad to your Mac. Tella can't record an iPad over Wi-Fi or AirPlay * A drawing or notes app on your iPad with a plain, single-color page. A black page with white or colored ink works best, such as Apple Notes in dark mode ## Record your iPad and camera 1. Connect your iPad to your Mac with the cable and unlock it 2. On your iPad, open your notes app on a blank dark page 3. In the Tella Mac app, click the screen button and choose your iPad under **Displays**. If it isn't listed, click **Add iPhone** and follow the steps. See [Record an iPhone or iPad demo](/docs/help/tips/i-phone-demos-using-screen-mirroring) for details 4. Turn on your camera and microphone, and record as usual. Write and draw on your iPad while you talk ## Remove the page color in the editor 1. Open the video in the editor and click **Style** 2. Turn on **Remove background color**. Tella removes black by default 3. If your page isn't black, click the **Color** swatch below the toggle and pick your page's color Everywhere the recording is that color, whatever is behind it shows through. Your ink stays solid, including dark and colored ink, and its edges blend smoothly into what's behind. ## Show your drawing next to or on top of your camera Click **Layout** and choose **TV Presenter**: * The regular TV Presenter layouts put your drawing beside your camera, floating over the video's background. Pick a dark [background](/docs/help/editing/pick-a-background) under **Style** → **Background** so light ink stands out * The full TV Presenter layouts fill the canvas with your camera and float your drawing on top of it See [Use layouts](/docs/help/editing/use-layouts) for every layout. ## Which videos can use Remove background color? **Remove background color** works on screen recordings and uploaded videos. It doesn't apply to your camera. To remove your camera's background instead, use [Cut out](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background). The setting applies to the clip you have open, so turn it on in each clip that shows your iPad. Your exported and shared video looks the same as the editor. ## Use a whiteboard or a light page You can remove any single color, not only black. For dark ink on a white page, turn on **Remove background color** and pick white as the **Color**. A dark page usually gives the cleanest result, because light pages often have shading or texture that doesn't match one color exactly. # Edit a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/edit-a-video Open Edit video on desktop: use Cut to trim, Effect for zooms, Layout to arrange camera and screen, Style for backgrounds, and Crop to reframe. Edit a video in Tella by opening it with **Edit video** and using the tools in the editor's left toolbar: **Cut** to trim, **Effect** for zooms, **Layout** to arrange your camera and screen, **Style** for backgrounds, and **Crop** in the toolbar below the video to reframe. Editing is desktop-only. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq2k90h000107jp0oc20rh3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq2k90h000107jp0oc20rh3/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) This walkthrough covers a simple first edit. You can do everything manually, or use Tella's AI tools to speed things up. ## Open the editor 1. Go to [**My videos**](https://www.tella.tv/videos "https://www.tella.tv/videos"). 2. Hover the video you want to edit and click **Edit video**, or open the video's **⋯** menu and click **Edit**. You can also open the video's own page and choose **Edit video** from there. You need to be the video's creator or [an editor on it](/docs/help/teams/how-can-i-add-a-team-member-as-an-editor-of-your-video). ## What's in the editor? The left toolbar holds **Setup**, **Layout**, **Cut**, **Effect**, **Overlay**, **Style**, **Subs**, **Audio**, and **Redo**. When you click a tool, you will see its options in the panel next to it. On a desktop browser that isn't Chromium-based, such as Safari or Firefox, you may see **For the best editing experience, use Google Chrome** above the video preview. Click **Google Chrome** to open the download page in a new tab, or click the **X** next to it to hide the suggestion on future visits in that browser. You can keep editing in your current browser. The first panel you will see is **Setup**, where you can change general settings for your video like its dimensions, title, and description. If your video is playing, switching tools such as **Cut**, **Layout**, **Style**, **Subs**, or **Audio** keeps playback running from the same moment. Selecting a layer still pauses playback. When playback is paused, hover over the playbar below the video to preview that moment on the canvas without moving the playhead. Click or drag on the playbar when you want to seek to a new point. To watch your edit without the editor around it, click **Fullscreen preview** at the right end of the playbar, next to the sidebar button, or press **F**. Your video fills the screen on black, with the sidebars, Script panel, and canvas handles hidden, so nothing can be edited until you exit. A control bar at the bottom lets you play, pause, skip, and scrub, and fades out while the video plays and the mouse is still. Press **Space** to play or pause, and **Escape** or the exit button to leave fullscreen. > [!TIP] > > On short or narrow browser windows, Tella automatically docks the editor panels and timeline against the window edges and tightens their spacing. The editing tools work the same, while your video gets more room on screen. If the editor ever feels sluggish, check the editing quality button in the toolbar below the video. **Low-res (fastest)** plays lower-resolution copies while you edit to keep things snappy, **Hi-res (1080p)** gives a sharper picture, and **Source (slowest)** plays your original files. Low-res is on by default for new videos, and none of these options affect your final export quality. See [Edit faster with low-res mode](/docs/help/editing/low-res-mode). > [!NOTE] > > The Cut, Effect, Overlay, and Layout timelines hide the transcript row when none of your clips has transcript words. If any clip has a transcript, the row remains available throughout the video. ## Step 1: Cut and trim your video The first edit most people make is removing the parts they do not want. #### Select and delete sections 1. Click **Cut** in the sidebar. 2. Drag across the part you want to remove. You can also select words in the transcript row. 3. Click **Delete**, or press **Delete** or **Backspace**. Hold **Shift** and drag to select several ranges, then delete them together. Use **Split** or press `X` when you want to add a boundary at the playhead before selecting a whole segment. #### Trim the start and end To remove silence or dead time at the beginning or end, drag the first or last edge inward. Use **More actions → Show cuts** when you want removed content to remain visible while you refine the trim. ## Step 2: Use AI cutting tools (optional, faster) If you want to speed up cutting, you can use Tella’s AI-powered tools: * **Mistakes**: click **Review** or **Cut & review** to have the Tella Agent find places where you repeat yourself or start over, then check each one in the script. It uses [credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits): hover over the credits icon next to **Mistakes** to see your balance. * **Buffers**: click **Remove buffers** to remove the silent part at the start and end. * **Silences**: choose **Natural**, **Fast**, or **Faster** to control how much silence Tella removes, then click **Remove N silences**. * **Filler words**: click **Remove N filler words** (for example, **Remove 8 filler words**) to cut every detected filler word in one action. If the result feels too choppy, reduce the intensity (for example, choose a more natural setting) and try again. #### Find and remove mistakes Open **Cut** and, under **Mistakes**, choose how you want to handle them. You can also choose **Review mistakes** or **Cut mistakes & review** from the **…** menu in the script panel. * **Review**: the agent marks each mistake in the script and cuts nothing. You decide which ones to cut. * **Cut & review**: the agent cuts every mistake right away, then marks the cuts in the script so you can bring back any you want to keep. 1. The [Tella Agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) opens and looks for repeated phrases, false starts, and retakes in the current clip. 2. When it's done, click **Review in script** on the agent's reply. The script panel opens on the first mistake, highlighted in red with the reason it was flagged. 3. Decide on each mistake. Select it and press `A` or `D`, or use the buttons next to it: * With **Review**, **Accept** (`A`) cuts the words and **Decline** (`D`) keeps them. * With **Cut & review**, **Keep cut** (`A`) leaves the words cut and **Restore** (`D`) brings them back. 4. To decide on every remaining mistake at once, click **Accept all** or **Reject all** below the script (**Keep all** or **Restore all** after **Cut & review**). Each decision is applied immediately, so you can play the cut back right away and undo it with **⌘ + Z**. > [!NOTE] > > Finding mistakes uses the Tella Agent, so it uses agent credits. Accepting, declining, keeping, or restoring them in the script doesn't. See [How much does the Tella Agent cost?](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent#how-much-does-the-tella-agent-cost). ## Step 3: Add zoom effects ### Add zooms manually 1. Click **Effect** in the sidebar, or press `E`. 2. Drag across the time you want to zoom, or select the matching transcript words. 3. Click **Add zoom** or press `Z`. 4. Drag the zoom card to move it, or drag its edges to change the duration. 5. Use **Scale** to control how far Tella zooms in. New zooms use your last selected **Mode**. Choose **Manual** for a fixed target or **Auto** to follow cursor movement from an eligible desktop-app recording. ### Use manual zoom targets (and create a pan) If you switch zoom targeting to **manual**, you can place the zoom target exactly where you want it instead of tracking your cursor. If you place manual zooms back to back, you can create a panning effect that moves from one point to another without zooming out in between. ### Generate zooms automatically (recordings with cursor data) If you recorded with the Tella Mac or Windows app (or recorded a browser tab with the Tella Chrome extension), you can use Auto Zoom to generate zooms from the recorded cursor movement. 1. Open **Effect**. 2. Under **Zooms**, click **Generate** (the sparkles button) and choose a style, such as **Subtle**. 3. Click **Generate** at the top. The menu stays open while you compare styles and closes after you generate the zooms. After the zooms are generated, you can still edit them like manual zooms, including scale, position, and duration. ## Step 4: Add layouts ### Choose a base layout 1. Click **Layout**. 2. Click a bare gap between layout cards to select the base layout. 3. Choose the preset you want. It receives the **Base** badge. ### Add layout changes on the timeline Layout changes let you switch away from your base layout for a section of the video. 1. Drag across the time you want to change, or select the matching transcript words. 2. Choose a preset. Tella creates a layout card for that range. 3. Drag the card to move it, or drag its edges to change its duration. 4. Select the card and choose another preset whenever you want to replace it. When layout cards touch, drag their shared seam to adjust the boundary without opening a base-layout gap. ### Change the base layout later To change the base layout without changing the layout cards you already added, click a bare gap between cards and choose the preset you want. It receives the **Base** badge. Use **Apply to all clips** when you want the same base layout on other compatible clips. ### Generate layouts automatically To have Tella generate layouts for you: 1. Click **Layout** and find **Auto Layouts** in the Layout panel. 2. Click **Generate**. Tella picks the editing style for your clip, and the Tella Agent adds the layouts to the timeline. After they are generated, you can review them (you can increase playback speed if you want to), then adjust, move, shorten, delete, or replace any layout change. > [!NOTE] > > Auto Layouts uses the Tella Agent, so each generation uses [Credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits). ## Step 5: Change your background 1. Click **Style**. Background options appear at the top of the panel. 2. Select a background you like (you can choose patterns, animated backgrounds, or create your own colors and gradients). 3. Your choice applies to every clip by default. Turn on **Apply to this clip only** if you want the active clip to use a different background. > [!NOTE] > > Switching from **Layout** to **Style** keeps playback running. Pause first if you want to preview style changes on a specific frame. ## Step 6: Crop your screen recording for a cleaner look If your screen recording includes extra UI (like a browser border or your Mac menu bar), you can crop it out: 1. Click **Crop** in the toolbar below the video, then choose **Adjust screen**. If the clip has no camera, clicking **Crop** opens the screen crop straight away. You can also open **Layout** → **Adjust** and click the **Screen crop** thumbnail. 2. Set the crop manually by dragging the crop handles, or click **Auto Crop** to let Tella suggest a clean crop. ## What to do after editing Your edits save automatically. Keep going with tools like **Subs** and **Overlay**, or share your video as a link or export it when you're ready. # Edit with the transcript Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/edit-the-transcript-of-a-tella-video Select words in the Script panel (Shift + S) to cut them from the video, keep only a section, or copy it to a new clip or video. The transcript can't be reworded; edit subtitles to change on-screen text. Edit your video by editing its transcript in the **Script** panel on the right side of the editor (show or hide it with the sidebar icon beside the playback controls, labeled **Toggle sidebar**, or press **Shift + S**): select words to cut them, keep only a section, or copy it to a new clip or video. You can remove words but not rewrite them; to change the wording viewers see, edit the subtitles. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq38tfy002808jq4ny93msq/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq38tfy002808jq4ny93msq/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Accessing the transcript The transcript lives in the **Script** panel on the right side of the editor. You can click any word to jump to that point in the video, or select text to cut, keep, or copy sections. If the sidebar shows the [Tella agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) chat, click **Show transcript** next to the message box to switch to the transcript. The editor remembers your choice and opens on the same view next time. The same right-side panel also contains the subtitle text editor. Open the panel menu and click **Subtitles** to switch from the editing transcript to the words viewers see on screen. Click **Back to script** to return. You can also open the transcript from the Cut tool: click **Cut** in the toolbar, then click **Show transcript** at the top of the Cut panel. The **Script** panel shows the transcripts for **all clips** in your video at once, each in its own labeled section. Click any clip's header to jump to it, or click any word to seek directly to that moment. The active clip's header is highlighted. > [!NOTE] > > Each clip's transcript becomes editable as soon as that clip is ready. If another clip is still transcribing, you can continue using the transcripts for your ready clips. > [!NOTE] > > Tella transcribes each clip's audio individually. Uploaded video files use the file's audio track. For clips recorded in Tella, audio playing inside a screen recording is not transcribed separately. Transcription uses the microphone audio captured with the clip. For more on when transcripts are generated and what to do if yours is missing, see [retranscribe a video](/docs/help/editing/retranscribe-a-video#when-is-my-transcript-ready). ## If a clip's transcription fails If Tella cannot transcribe a clip, its section in the **Script** panel shows **Error: Transcription failed**. This can happen when a clip is too short for speech recognition. You can continue using the transcripts for your other clips. To try again, [retranscribe the video](/docs/help/editing/retranscribe-a-video). If the clip has no usable speech or is only a fraction of a second long, re-record or replace that clip instead. ## Jump to a word in the video Click on any word in the transcript sidebar to jump to that point in the video. This lets you quickly preview and locate specific parts without scrubbing through the timeline. ## Select words in the transcript Click and drag across words to select a range of text. The selection highlights in the transcript. Double-click a word to select only that word. Triple-click a word to select the whole sentence it belongs to. > [!NOTE] > > If any clip in your video has a Thai transcript, triple-click selects only one word because sentence boundaries aren't detected for Thai yet. ## Search the transcript [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwffgh201eh08js03ftd3ct/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwffgh201eh08js03ftd3ct/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) Use transcript search to find specific words or phrases across your entire video without scrolling. 1. Open the search bar with **Cmd + F** (Mac) or **Ctrl + F** (Windows), or click the magnifying glass icon in the **Script** panel header. 2. Start typing. Matches are highlighted in the transcript as you type. Search only includes words that remain in your video, so text you have cut is not returned. 3. Use the **up** and **down** chevrons next to the search field to step to the previous or next match. The video seeks to each match as you navigate, and the match count (for example, **3 / 12**) shows where you are in the results. 4. If there are no matches, the search field turns red. When you navigate to a match in a different clip, Tella automatically activates that clip and seeks to it. ### AI search For more flexible searching, click the **sparkles (✨) button** on the right side of the search bar to enable AI search. Instead of matching exact words, AI search understands natural-language queries, so you can describe what you're looking for rather than remembering the exact phrasing. For example, you can type things like: * *Where do I talk about pricing?* * *Find where I mention the onboarding flow* * *What part explains how to get started?* When AI search is active, the placeholder text in the search bar changes to prompt natural-language queries. While your query is being processed, the sparkles button shows a spinner. Exact keyword matches are highlighted right away, and AI results are added when the search completes. Click the sparkles button again to switch back to regular keyword search. Tella remembers which mode you last used. ## Cut words from the video 1. **Select** the word, phrase, or sentence you wish to remove. 2. Press the **Backspace** or **Delete** key on your keyboard, or click the **Delete** button in the editor. 3. The selected text will be removed from the transcript and the corresponding section will be cut from the video timeline. ### Keep only a section If you want to keep a specific section and remove everything else: 1. Select the desired text. 2. Click on **Keep only this**. 3. All other parts of the transcript (and video) will be removed, leaving only the selected section. ### Copy a selection to a new clip You can create a new clip from a selected portion of the transcript: 1. Select the words you want to extract. 2. Click **Copy to new clip** in the toolbar that appears. 3. A new clip containing only the selected section is added to your timeline. This is useful when you want to isolate a specific part of a clip for reordering or applying different edits. You can undo this action with **Cmd + Z** (Mac) or **Ctrl + Z** (Windows). ### Copy a selection to a new video To create an entirely new video from a selected portion of the transcript: 1. Select the words you want to extract. 2. Click **Copy to new video** in the toolbar that appears. 3. A new video is created with the selected section, and it opens in a new tab. ## Copy the whole transcript Open **More actions** in the **Script** panel and click **Copy transcript** to copy the full transcript as plain text. Anything you've cut from the video is left out. ## Undo and redo transcript edits You can undo and redo most transcript editing actions, including cuts, deletions, and copying to a new clip: * **Undo**: Press **Cmd + Z** (Mac) or **Ctrl + Z** (Windows), or click the undo button in the editor toolbar. * **Redo**: Press **Cmd + Shift + Z** (Mac) or **Ctrl + Y** (Windows), or click the redo button in the editor toolbar. ## Hide deleted text * Open **More actions** in the **Script** panel and click **Hide deleted** to remove deleted text from the transcript view. * Click **Show deleted** in the same menu to reveal it again. ## Fine-tune cuts on the timeline * After making initial edits in the transcript, you can switch to the **Timeline** for more precise adjustments. * **Zoom in**: Use the zoom controls to get a closer view of your edits. * **Adjust segments**: Click and drag the edges of segments on the timeline to fine-tune the start and end points down to the split second. ## Can I change the words in the transcript? No. You cannot change the actual words in the **Script** panel; you can only remove them. To fix the words viewers see on screen, edit the subtitles instead. ### Edit the subtitle text 1. Click **Subs** in the toolbar. 2. Click **Edit subtitles** at the top of the **Subtitles** panel. 3. Edit the subtitle text in the right-side **Subtitles** panel. Each block's timestamp shows where it starts; click it to jump there in the video. Timestamps come from the spoken words and can't be typed in, but you can [split or join blocks](#split-a-subtitle-block) to change where a block starts. You can also open the **Script** panel, open its menu, and click **Subtitles**. ### Delete or restore a single subtitle word Right-click any word in the subtitle editor to open a context menu: * **Delete:** hides the word from the subtitles without cutting it from the video. * **Restore:** brings back a word you previously deleted. The menu is also available on deleted words, so you can restore them without leaving the subtitle editor. ## Split a subtitle block [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwffn4f00h308jk4y2y14ra/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwffn4f00h308jk4y2y14ra/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) In the right-side **Subtitles** panel, you can choose where a new subtitle block starts without changing the words' timing or cutting the video. 1. Click a word to edit it, then place the caret just before the word where you want the next block to start. 2. Press **Enter**. The remaining words move into a new subtitle block, and the video jumps to preview it. With the caret at the end of a word, **Enter** splits after that word instead. At the start of an existing block, it leaves the boundary unchanged. With text selected or the caret inside a word, **Enter** saves your edit without splitting. You can also right-click a word and choose **Break subtitle after**, or press **Shift + Enter** while editing a word to add or remove a break after it. A return-arrow marker appears after words with a manual break. > [!NOTE] > > Splitting and joining work on the original spoken-language subtitles, not translated tracks. Select the original language in **Subtitle language** before changing subtitle breaks. ## Remove a subtitle break or join blocks To remove a manual break, click its return-arrow marker and press **Backspace** or **Delete**, or right-click the word before it and choose **Remove subtitle break**. To join a subtitle block to the one above it: 1. Click the first word of the block you want to join. 2. Place the caret at the very start of that word, with no text selected. 3. Press **Backspace**. This can join blocks separated by a manual break, punctuation, or a pause. The subtitle block-length limit still applies: blocks that only split because they exceed the lines-per-block limit stay separate, and Tella shows a message explaining why. Removing a manual break may also leave blocks separate if an automatic boundary still applies. ## Undo every cut in a clip If you've made changes you're not satisfied with and wish to revert to the original video: 1. Open **More actions** in the **Script** panel. 2. Click **Reset all cuts**. 3. This will restore your clip to its original form. ## Why the Script panel and subtitles can show different words The **Script** panel and your **subtitles** don't always show the exact same words, and that's intentional. They serve two different goals. * **The Script panel is an editing tool.** It reflects what was actually spoken, including filler words like "um", "ah", and "mm", along with false starts. While **Trimming**, these are kept visible so you can find them and cut them from your video. * **Subtitles are what your viewers see.** To keep on-screen captions clean and readable, Tella automatically filters out filler words and disfluencies. They won't appear in your burned-in or downloaded subtitles even if they're still spoken in the video. So if you notice a stray "um" in the **Script** panel that isn't in your exported subtitles, that's expected: the Script panel is editorial (built for you, the editor), while subtitles are presentational (built for your audience). The two may diverge further over time as Tella surfaces more editing detail in the Script panel while keeping subtitles clean. If you want to remove a filler word from the video itself (not just hide it from the subtitles), cut it from the **Script** panel, choose **Remove fillers** from the Script panel's **More actions** menu, or use **Filler words** in the **Cut** panel. # Edit with the Tella Agent Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent The Tella Agent is the chat in the sidebar on the right of the editor. Everyone has it, with no beta access to request; sending messages needs a paid plan. The Tella Agent is the chat in the sidebar on the right of the editor. Everyone has it, with no beta access to request; sending messages needs a paid plan. Describe the change you want in plain language and the agent edits your video for you, step by step, while you watch: cuts, layouts, zooms, subtitles and more. > [!NOTE] > > The Tella Agent is in **public beta**. We'd love your feedback: tell us what works, what doesn't and what you'd like it to do next by emailing [support@tella.com](mailto:support@tella.com). [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmuwj9fdh002q06rpb5606y5l/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmuwj9fdh002q06rpb5606y5l/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## What can the Tella Agent do? The agent works with the same tools you use in the editor, so you can ask it for things like: * "Cut the filler words and the long pauses." * "Remove the section where I talk about pricing." * "Zoom in when I click the Settings button." * "Use a split layout for the demo part and full camera for the intro." * "Add subtitles and translate them to Spanish." * "Write a title and chapters for this video." * "Make a Short from this video." It reads your transcript and timeline, makes the edits, and shows you each change in the editor as it goes. You can keep working in the editor while it runs, and ask it to undo a change or try something different. ## Open the Tella Agent 1. Open a video in the editor. 2. If the sidebar on the right is hidden, click **Toggle sidebar** under the video preview, or press **Shift + S**. 3. Type what you'd like to change in the message box at the bottom of the sidebar and press **Enter**. While the agent is working with the sidebar closed, the **Toggle sidebar** button pulses so you know it's still busy. ## Start a new video from My videos You can also start a video with the agent before it exists. At the top of **My videos**, the **What do you want to make?** box is the agent's composer. 1. Go to **My videos**, or click your workspace name and choose **New video**. 2. Type what you want to make, for example "Make an animated title for my intro", and press **Enter**. Tella creates a new video and opens it in the editor, where the agent starts working. Under the box you can also click **Record** to record the first clip, **Skills** to pick a [skill](#skills-reusable-editing-workflows), or **or start from a blank canvas** to open an empty video in the editor. Click **+** in the box to upload a file. Click **Minimise** to collapse the box to a single **Ask Tella to create a video** bar; click the bar to open it again. ## Can I turn off the agent or go back to the old editor? No. There's no setting to turn the Tella Agent off and no older editor to switch back to, but you don't have to use the chat: click **Show transcript** next to the message box and the sidebar shows your transcript, where you can cut words to edit your video without the agent. See [Edit with the transcript](/docs/help/editing/edit-the-transcript-of-a-tella-video). The sidebar remembers your choice in that browser: once you switch to the transcript, it opens on the transcript for your next video too, until you click **Show chat** to go back to the agent. ## Do I need beta access or a setting to turn the agent on? No. The agent is in the editor for everyone, so there's nothing to request or switch on: open a video in the editor and the chat is in the sidebar on the right. If the message box shows **The Tella Agent is included with paid plans, with monthly credits.** and an **Upgrade** button, your workspace has no paid plan or free trial, and you can't send the agent messages until you subscribe. See [How much does the Tella Agent cost?](#how-much-does-the-tella-agent-cost). ## Answer questions and fine-tune with cards Sometimes the agent puts an interactive card in the chat instead of asking in plain text. #### Question cards When the agent asks you to pick one answer, it shows a card of lettered options (A, B, C…). Click an option, or press its letter on your keyboard, to answer right away. To answer in your own words, click **Something else…** in the last row and type your reply. When the agent needs a few details before it edits, like how long a pause must be before it's cut, it shows a card with sliders, choices, switches or a text box. It fills in its own suggestion first, so you can change only what you want. * Some choices show a picture or play a sound so you can compare them before you pick. * With three or more questions, the card shows one question at a time. Click **Next** and **Back** to move between them; picking a single choice moves on by itself. * Click **Continue** (or the button the agent named) to send your answers, or **Skip** to skip the questions. * You can also type a reply in the message box instead. Once you answer, the card shrinks to one line per question with your answer. #### File upload cards When the agent needs a file that only you have, like your logo, a screenshot, a voiceover or a brand font, it shows a card that says which file it needs. It waits for your answer before it goes on. * Click **Choose a file** and pick it, or drop the file on the card or anywhere in the chat. * Click **Skip** if you don't have it. The agent goes on without it or asks you what to do. * If the agent asked for certain file types, a file of another type isn't accepted, and the card lists the types it takes. If you send a new message instead, the agent stops waiting for the file. #### Live controls For small adjustments, like a sound effect's volume, caption size, layout padding or zoom strength, the agent can show a card of controls marked **Applies live**. Moving a control changes your video right away, without sending a message to the agent. * Sound effect and caption controls work like the editor's own: you can undo them as usual. They only work while the video is open in the editor. * Other controls save when you let go and show **Saved**. These changes aren't in the editor's undo history, so click **Reset** to go back to the value the card started with. #### Upgrade and credit cards If you ask the agent to upgrade or buy credits, or something you asked for needs a paid plan or more credits, the agent can show a checkout card in the chat. It doesn't suggest upgrades unless you ask or you've hit a limit. * **Upgrade to …** cards show the plan's price. Click **Upgrade** to pay in Stripe Checkout, or **Compare plans** to open **Plans & Billing**. If your workspace already pays, you change plans on **Plans & Billing** instead. * **Buy agent credits** cards show how many credits are left and a tile for each one-time top-up. Pick a tile, then click **Buy … credits** to pay in Stripe Checkout. Stripe opens in a new tab, and the agent never sees your payment details. Only workspace owners can pay. Other members see **Only a workspace owner can buy credits. Ask one to add more.** ## Point the agent at part of your transcript To be specific about which part of the video you mean, select words in the transcript and click **Add to chat**. The selection appears above the message box as **Transcript** with its word count, and the agent edits that part. ## Attach files, videos and playlists Click the **Add** (**+**) button in the message box to give the agent more to work with: * **Attach…**: add documents (like a script or brief), images, videos or audio for the agent to read and use. * **Video or playlist…**: reference another video or playlist in your workspace, for example to reuse a clip or match its style. Videos, images and audio you attach are also added to this video's media library, so you can place them yourself as well as through the agent. Open **Library** in the editor toolbar and look under **Personal** → **In this video**. Audio 30 seconds or longer appears in the music library and shorter clips in the sound effect library, both under **In this video**. Documents aren't added to the library. After you send a message, click an image you attached to open it full screen. Use the arrows to page through it along with the media the agent has shown in the chat. Images in older messages can't be opened. ## Get documents from the agent Ask the agent for a file, like "make me a PDF of the script", "export the chapters as a CSV", "give me the captions as an SRT file" or "turn this into a slide deck", and it shares it in the chat as a card with the file's type, name and size. * Click the file name to open a PDF, CSV, TXT, SRT, VTT or Markdown file in a new tab. Other types download. SRT and VTT caption files show as **TXT** on the card. * Click the download icon to download any file. The agent can share PDF, CSV, TXT, SRT and VTT captions, Markdown, ZIP, DOCX, PPTX and XLSX files, up to 50 MB each. The files stay in the chat, so you can come back and download them later. ## Record a clip from the chat Ask the agent to write you a script, or to help you record something new, and it can show a recorder card in the chat: **Record a clip**, or **Record with this script** when it wrote one. * Click **Show full script** to read the whole script, or **Copy** to copy it. * Click **Go to recorder** to open the recorder for this video, the same as the editor's own record button. If the card has a script, it's put in your [speaker notes](/docs/help/recording/use-speaker-notes-while-recording) and the notes open, ready to read while you record. The script replaces whatever was in your speaker notes before. The Mac and Windows apps get the script too once they're up to date; older versions open the recorder without it, so use **Copy** and paste it into your notes. **Go to recorder** only appears in a video's own chat. Elsewhere the card shows the script without the button. ## Choose a model Pick the AI model the agent uses from the model menu in the message box, and how much it thinks before answering. Larger models and higher thinking levels handle harder edits but use more [credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits) per message. **Claude Fable 5.1** is no longer in the model menu. If it was your last pick, the agent switches back to the default, **Claude Sonnet 5.5**. ## Memory: what the agent remembers The agent remembers preferences you tell it, like "always use my brand color for text" or "I prefer jump cuts over transitions", so you don't have to repeat them. Click **Add** (**+**) → **Memory** to see what it has saved: * **About you**: preferences that only apply to you. * **This workspace**: preferences shared with everyone in the workspace. Remove anything you no longer want it to remember from the same window. ## Skills: reusable editing workflows A skill is a saved set of instructions for an editing job you do often, like cleaning up a demo or preparing a social clip. Run one and the agent follows the same steps every time, so you don't have to write a long prompt. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmv4yr2ab000006p407iy1jxi/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmv4yr2ab000006p407iy1jxi/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) To run a skill, type **/** in the message box and pick it from the list, or open the skill library and click **Use in chat**. Open the skill library with the **Skills** button at the top of the sidebar, or from **Add** (**+**) → **Skills**. Skills are grouped by who can use them: * **Personal**: skills only you can use. * **Workspace**: skills shared with everyone in the workspace, alongside Tella's built-in skills. Drag a skill between the two groups to share it or keep it to yourself. A personal skill takes priority over a workspace skill with the same name. To share a skill outside your workspace, publish it at a public link or send it to the community skills page: see [Share a skill or publish it to the community](/docs/help/editing/share-a-skill). In a new chat, the pills under the agent's welcome message run a built-in skill in one click: **Plan a Video**, **Auto Cut**, **Auto Layouts** and **Remove Mistakes**. Clicking one sends the request right away. #### Plan a video before you record Click **Plan a Video**, or run the built-in **tella-plan-video** skill, when you want help with what to say and show before you record. 1. The agent asks what the video is for. 2. It writes the one-line point, an outline, a word-for-word script sized to the length you want, and a shot-by-shot storyboard. 3. It waits for your go before it changes anything, so you can ask for changes first. It also works on a long, rambling take: ask for a tighter version to record again. To read the script while you record, ask the agent for a recorder card (see [Record a clip from the chat](#record-a-clip-from-the-chat)). For a launch, promo or feature announcement, run **tella-launch-video**. For a "what's new" video from your release notes, run **tella-changelog-video**. #### Make a Short, Reel or TikTok Ask the agent to "make a Short from this video", or run the built-in **tella-short** skill, to turn a video into a vertical clip for Shorts, Reels or TikTok. 1. The agent picks the strongest 15 to 60 seconds and shows you a scene-by-scene plan: the segment, the opening hook and each shot. 2. Reply to approve the plan or ask for changes. Nothing is edited until you do. 3. The agent makes a trimmed copy of your video, tightens it, switches it to 1080×1920, turns captions on and lays it out at Shorts pace, then checks every cut. Your original video is never changed. To steer the result, tell the agent the time range, chapter, length or platform you want. #### Save an edit as a skill After the agent finishes a multi-step edit, it may offer to turn it into a skill: click **Save as skill**, or **Don't suggest** to stop suggestions in that chat. You can also ask it directly, for example "Save what you just did as a skill." The agent asks for your approval before it saves or changes a skill. A skill can include reference files, like a video or image that shows the style you want. Attach the file or point the agent to a clip and ask it to add it to the skill. Each file can be up to 10 MB, so the agent trims or re-encodes longer videos first. #### Add a skill from GitHub 1. In the skill library, click **Add a skill from GitHub**. 2. Paste the repository link (for example `https://github.com/owner/repo`). 3. Review what the skill contains, choose **Personal** or **Workspace**, and click **Trust & install**. Only install skills from sources you trust: a skill can run code in the agent's sandbox. You need to be a workspace owner or member to add skills or change workspace skills. #### Use a community skill in one chat Community skills are skills shared by the Tella community, like animated transitions and title styles. Browse them at [tella.com/skills](https://www.tella.com/skills). You can try one in a chat without adding it to your library. 1. Open a skill on [tella.com/skills](https://www.tella.com/skills) and click **Copy** under **Use it in Tella** to copy its ID, for example `tellahq/community-skills/kaleidoscope`. 2. Paste it into the agent's message box. The skill appears as a pill in the message box. 3. Write what you want, for example "Use this for the transitions between my chapters", and send. The skill only applies to that chat, and the message shows a card with its name, author and description. To keep it, click **Save to my skills** on the card: it's added to your **Personal** skills and the card says **In your skills**. If the pasted text doesn't match a community skill, it stays in the message box as plain text. When you ask for a motion graphic, transition, title card or animated diagram that none of your skills covers, the agent may suggest a community skill that fits, with a link to it. Paste its ID into the chat to try it, or ask the agent to build the effect itself. ## Rate a reply Hover over a finished reply from the agent to see the thumbs-up (**Good response**) and thumbs-down (**Bad response**) buttons next to **Copy response**. Click one to tell us whether the reply helped; your rating helps us improve the agent. The thumb you chose stays filled in, even after you reload the page or come back to the chat later. To change your rating, click the other thumb. Only you see your ratings. ## Chats Each video keeps its own chat history. Start a **New chat** for a fresh conversation, or open the chat list to go back to, rename or delete an earlier one. ## How much does the Tella Agent cost? The Tella Agent is included with paid plans (Pro, Premium and Enterprise) and free trials, and runs on [Credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits). Each seat on Pro includes 4,500 credits a month and each seat on Premium includes 9,000 credits, pooled across the workspace. Included credits reset every month and don't roll over, and workspace owners can top up anytime. Each message uses credits based on how much work the agent does and the model it uses. A free trial includes 4,500 credits, so you can try the agent before you subscribe. They expire when the 7-day trial ends. ## The agent says I'm out of credits When your workspace runs out of credits, the message box turns yellow and says **You're out of credits. Add more to keep using the agent.** A workspace owner can buy more from the **Add credits** button next to the message box or in **Settings** → **Plans & Billing**. See [Credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits). # Adjust playback speed in the editor Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/editor-playback-speed The editor's speed button (1.0x by default, 0.8x to 8.0x) only changes how fast the video plays for you while editing. It does not change the video's length, the downloaded file, or what viewers see. The speed button in the editor's player controls (**1.0x** by default, from 0.8x to 8.0x) only changes how fast the video plays for you while you edit. It does not change the video's length, the file you download, or the speed viewers see; those always play at 1x unless you change them separately: * To download a faster or slower MP4, set the speed at export. See [Change export speed](/docs/help/export-videos/change-export-speed). * To make the shared video start at 1.5x or 2x for viewers, set the [default viewer playback speed](/docs/help/sharing/adjust-viewer-playback-speed). Viewers can still pick their own speed in the player. * To speed up any local video file without an account, use the [free video speed changer](/docs/help/export-videos/change-video-speed-for-free). Use the editor speed to review footage quickly or slow it down to find precise cut points. ## Change the editor playback speed 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Look for the playback speed indicator (displayed as **1.0x** by default) in the player controls below the video. 3. Click it and choose a speed. Tella remembers the last speed you chose and uses it the next time you open the editor. ## Change the speed with the keyboard Press **Arrow Up** to step up to the next faster speed and **Arrow Down** to step down to the next slower one. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq3zkun00dq08jq8yn4594e/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq3zkun00dq08jq8yn4594e/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Which playback speeds are available? You can choose from the following playback speeds to suit your editing needs: * 0.8x * 0.9x * 1.0x (Default) * 1.1x * 1.2x * 1.5x * 1.8x * 2.0x * 3.0x * 5.0x * 8.0x ## Does the audio change speed too? Yes. The audio plays at the selected speed, which makes it easier to hear pauses, filler words, and other audio cues. ## Tips for using playback speed **Combine with the timeline**: Use playback speed alongside the timeline zoom controls for maximum precision. Slow down playback and zoom in on the timeline to make frame-perfect edits. **Switch speeds as needed**: You can change the playback speed at any time during editing. There's no need to stick with one speed - adjust it based on what you're working on. # Turn on eye contact Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/eye-contact Turn on Eye contact in Layout → Adjust or the camera crop window to redirect your gaze toward the camera in playback and exports. Turn on **Eye contact** in **Layout → Adjust** to make your camera recordings look toward the lens, even while you read your notes. Once processing finishes, the corrected recordings are used in playback and exports. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmuz7d8h5000906mgccwr6oys/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmuz7d8h5000906mgccwr6oys/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Turn on Eye contact 1. Open your video in the editor and select a clip with a camera recording. 2. Click **Layout** in the left-hand toolbar, then open **Adjust**. 3. Turn on **Eye contact** under the camera controls. 4. Wait for **Preparing your camera…** to finish, then play your video to check the result. You can also turn it on from the camera crop window: choose **Crop** → **Adjust camera** and click **Eye contact** in the top-right. While it's preparing, hover the button and click it to cancel. Eye contact applies to the whole video, not just the selected clip. If your video has multiple camera recordings, you’ll see how many are ready while the others are processing. ## Which recordings does Eye contact change? Eye contact changes your webcam recordings. It does not change screen recordings or uploaded video files. The switch is unavailable when your video has no eligible camera recordings. As each corrected camera recording becomes ready, Tella starts using it. Recordings that are still processing keep their original appearance until they finish. ## What if a camera can't be processed? If processing fails for a camera, that recording keeps its original look. Other cameras that finish successfully still use their corrected recordings. You may see **Couldn't prepare every camera. Those keep their original look.** Play your video to check which recordings changed. ## Turn off Eye contact Open **Layout → Adjust** and turn off **Eye contact** to use your original camera recordings again across the video. This also restores their original appearance in playback and exports. ## Turn Eye contact on or off with the API or MCP server You can also switch Eye contact from the Public API or MCP server, or ask the [Tella Agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) in the editor. Through the API or MCP, pass `eyeContact` (`true` or `false`) when you update a video. `get_video` reports whether it's on and how many cameras are ready. See [update\_video](/docs/mcp-tools/videos#update_video). # Find & replace subtitles Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/find-replace-subtitles In Subs, click Edit subtitles, then choose Find and replace from the Subtitles panel's More actions menu to replace a word everywhere at once. Open **Subs** → **Edit subtitles**, then choose **Find and replace** from the **Subtitles** panel's **More actions** menu to replace every occurrence of a word in your subtitles at once. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq4ps3o00d008jhgup27xbt/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq4ps3o00d008jhgup27xbt/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Open find and replace 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Subs** in the toolbar. 3. Click **Edit subtitles**. If the **Subtitles** panel is already open on the right, the button reads **Hide subtitles** and you can skip this step. 4. In the right-side **Subtitles** panel, click **More actions** (the three-dot button next to the close button) and choose **Find and replace**. The find and replace box opens just below the title row. You can also open the **Script** panel, open its menu, click **Subtitles**, and then choose **More actions** > **Find and replace**. ## Replace a word 1. Enter the word you want to find in the **Word to find...** field. 2. Use the arrow buttons to preview each match. 3. Enter the corrected word or phrase in the **Replace with...** field. 4. Click **Replace** to update every match. > [!TIP] > > Click a subtitle word before opening **Find and replace** to fill the **Word to find...** field automatically. # Import a video from YouTube, X, Instagram, or TikTok Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/import-a-youtube-video Paste a YouTube, X, Instagram, or TikTok video link into the editor's Add from a link box and Tella imports the video, up to 2 hours long. Paste a YouTube video link, or the link to an X, Instagram, or TikTok post with a video, into **Add from a link** (the link icon) in the editor's media library, and Tella imports the video itself, with its sound, into your video. Use it as B-roll in a layout or as an overlay on top of your recording. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqs44on001p07jj1vr183ix/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqs44on001p07jj1vr183ix/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Which YouTube links can I import? Any link to a single public YouTube video works, including: * Watch links (`youtube.com/watch?v=…`) * Share links (`youtu.be/…`) * Shorts, live replays, embed links, and links from the YouTube mobile site or YouTube Music Playlist, channel, and search links aren't videos, so they can't be imported. Paste the link to one video instead. ## Which X, Instagram, and TikTok links can I import? Paste the link to a single public post that holds a video: * X posts (`x.com/…/status/…`) * Instagram posts and reels * TikTok videos Reels and TikTok links show **Import video** and **Import screenshot** right away. For X posts and Instagram posts, Tella first checks whether the post holds a video and shows **Checking the post for a video…** under the box. Posts with only text or photos keep the single **Add** button, which adds the post as a screenshot. See [Capture websites and social posts](/docs/help/editing/capture-websites-and-social-posts). If a post has several videos, open the one you want and copy its link. ## Import a YouTube video into a layout Use a media layout when the YouTube video should replace your screen recording for part of your video. 1. Open your video and click **Layout**. 2. Select a time range or layout section, then choose a **Media** layout. You can also open **Customize layout** and change **Screen** or **Camera** to **Media**. 3. In the media library header, click **Add from a link** (the link icon). 4. Under **Add from socials or a website**, paste the video link into **Paste a link**. 5. Click **Add** for a YouTube link, or **Import video** for an X, Instagram, or TikTok post. Tella adds a placeholder under **In this video** in the media library while it imports. When the import finishes, the video goes into the layout section you had selected. ## Import a YouTube video as an overlay Use an overlay when the YouTube video should sit on top of your recording. 1. Move the playhead to where the overlay should start, or select a time range. 2. Click **Overlay**, find **Media**, then click **Browse all**. 3. In the media library header, click **Add from a link** (the link icon). 4. Under **Add from socials or a website**, paste the video link into **Paste a link**. 5. Click **Add** for a YouTube link, or **Import video** for an X, Instagram, or TikTok post. When the import finishes, Tella places the video on the canvas at the spot you picked when you started. ## How long does an import take? An import can take a few minutes, longer for long videos. The placeholder stays under **In this video** until the video is ready, and you can keep editing while it imports. Imported videos come in at up to 1080p. ## Why can't I import a video? If an import fails, Tella shows **Couldn't import the video** with the reason. You can't import: * Private videos * Age-restricted videos * Members-only videos * Live streams that haven't ended yet. Import the replay once the stream is over * Videos that were removed or are otherwise unavailable * Videos longer than 2 hours, or too large to import * Posts without a video. Add them as a screenshot instead If the reason is **Couldn't import this video. Try again later.**, the download didn't go through that time. Wait a few minutes and add the link again. > [!NOTE] > > Only import videos you have the right to use in your own content. ## Reuse an imported video Imported videos stay in the current video's library (**Personal** → **In this video**), like other media you add. To trim, position, or style the clip after it's placed, see [Add media (B-roll)](/docs/help/editing/use-media) or [Add media overlays](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays). To capture a web page or a social post instead of a video, see [Capture websites and social posts](/docs/help/editing/capture-websites-and-social-posts). # Edit faster with low-res mode Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/low-res-mode Pick what the editor plays from the quality button below the video: Low-res (fastest), Hi-res (1080p) or Source (slowest). Sharing and export always use full quality. The editing quality button in the toolbar below the video picks what the editor plays while you edit: **Low-res (fastest)**, **Hi-res (1080p)** or **Source (slowest)**. Low-res is on by default, and none of these options affect the quality viewers see when you share or export. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvlq5iw6000f08jsbefx5wft/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvlq5iw6000f08jsbefx5wft/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) Your original files are untouched. Tella only uses the Low-res and Hi-res copies inside the editor. ## What do Low-res, Hi-res and Source play? * **Low-res (fastest)** plays small, lower-resolution copies of your clips. It keeps the editor the most responsive. * **Hi-res (1080p)** plays copies scaled down to at most 1080p at 30fps. Use it when you want a sharper picture than Low-res without the weight of your original files. * **Source (slowest)** plays your original files at full resolution and frame rate. The button shows the mode you're in, so you can always see what the editor is playing. ## Why is Low-res on by default? Low-res helps the editor stay responsive, especially with: * Long videos * Videos with many clips * Large screen recordings (4K or 5K) * Older or lower-powered computers Because the low-res files are only used while editing, there's no downside to leaving it on. ## How do I change the editing quality? 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. In the toolbar below the video, click the editing quality button. It shows **Low-res**, **Hi-res** or **Source**. 3. Choose **Low-res (fastest)**, **Hi-res (1080p)** or **Source (slowest)**. Once a quality's files have been generated, you can switch to it instantly, with no waiting. Low-res is saved with the video, so everyone editing it sees the same setting. The choice between Hi-res and Source is saved in your browser, because how heavy a file your computer can play smoothly depends on the machine. ## How long does it take to generate low-res and hi-res files? The first time a video plays in Low-res or Hi-res, Tella generates those files in the background. For longer videos this can take a few minutes. You can keep recording or editing other videos while it runs. While the files generate, Tella plays your original media in the editor, and the button shows a spinner. If you add a new clip or video B-roll, playback switches to the generated copy automatically when it's ready, so you can keep editing without reloading the editor. If a file can't be generated, Tella stops retrying and plays the original instead of leaving generation stuck. ## Does editing quality affect what viewers see? No. The editing quality only affects what **you** see in the editor. When you share or export your video, Tella always uses the original full-quality files. ## Troubleshooting > [accordion] The editing quality button is disabled > > The editing quality can only change once your uploads and conversions finish. Wait for them to complete, then try again. > [accordion] Generating is taking a long time > > Generating low-res or hi-res files can take a few minutes for longer videos. You don't need to wait on this screen. Your original media plays in the meantime, or you can record or edit other videos while it runs in the background. > [accordion] I see an error generating low-res or hi-res > > If generation fails, Tella plays your original media instead. Please [contact support](/docs/help/support/support-availability) so we can investigate the error. # Add media overlays Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/media-overlays Add an image or video on top of your recording from the Media section of Overlay, or drop a file onto the timeline. Position, resize, crop, time, trim, and fade it. Add an image or video **on top of** your recording (a logo, a screenshot, a reaction GIF, or a picture-in-picture clip) from the **Media** section of **Overlay** in the editor sidebar, without replacing what's already on screen. This is different from [media (B-roll)](/docs/help/editing/use-media), which swaps out a whole slot of your layout. An overlay floats above everything for the stretch of time you choose. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvlv9knz00n208idavdrgddo/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvlv9knz00n208idavdrgddo/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) For the other kinds of overlay, and how they fit together, see [Overlays overview](/docs/help/editing/overlays). ## Where to find media overlays 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Open **Overlay** in the sidebar, or press `V`. 3. Find the **Media** section. ## Add an overlay 1. Move the playhead to where you want the overlay to appear. 2. Click a media tile to add it directly, click the upload button to add a file from your computer, or click **Browse all** to open the Media Library. 3. Choose **Personal** or **Team**, or click **Browse** to see stickers, GIFs, clips from other videos and your other sources together. **Personal** is selected by default and shows media added to the current video under **In this video**, above your own library. You can also upload a file or expand the Generate composer to create an image with AI. (It's the same library you use for [media/B-roll](/docs/help/editing/use-media#the-media-library).) To use a clip from another video as an overlay, click **Browse**, open its menu and choose **Clips from other videos**, find the video under **My videos** or **Team videos**, then select its clip. You need edit access to the source video to add its clip. Tella renders it into the current video's library (**Personal** → **In this video**), then adds the overlay at the position you picked when the render finishes. To use a free public-domain film shot, choose **Browse** → **Vintage videos**. See [Add vintage videos](/docs/help/editing/vintage-videos). To use images you saved on Pinterest, Are.na or mymind, connect the service and pick them from the **External media** section of **Overlay** or from **Browse** in the Media Library. Typing three or more characters in the Overlay search also searches the services you've connected. See [Add saved images from Pinterest, Are.na and mymind](/docs/help/integrations/pinterest-arena-and-mymind). Picking an item in the Media Library adds the overlay at the playhead and keeps the library open so you can add more items. To adjust an overlay, click its card on the timeline to open its settings. SVG images, such as logos, appear in the editor preview and in the exported video. > [!NOTE] > > A selected time range wins over the playhead. If you have a range selected (on the timeline or in the transcript), the overlay starts at the beginning of that range instead, and selecting several ranges adds one overlay to each. Clear the selection first if you want the playhead to decide. > > An image fills the whole range. A **video** shorter than the range does not stretch to fill it. The card ends when the clip runs out. > [!TIP] > > With the library open, you can **paste** a copied image (⌘V / Ctrl+V) to upload it to the current video's library and drop it in as an overlay in one step, with no need to save the file first. ## Use a transparent video overlay Video overlays with an alpha channel keep their transparent areas in the editor preview and exported video. You can use WebM files encoded with VP8 or VP9, including 10-bit VP9, or ProRes 4444 files with alpha. The recording underneath shows through transparent areas, and soft glows and partially transparent edges remain translucent. If your overlay has a black background, check that the source file was exported with an alpha channel. Choosing WebM or ProRes alone does not guarantee transparency: Tella cannot remove a black background baked into the file. ## Video overlay duration A video added from the Media Library uses its full duration unless a selected time range is shorter. A video dropped onto the timeline uses its full duration regardless of any selected range. In both cases, the overlay ends sooner if the current clip ends first. New image overlays start at five seconds, and you can trim either type afterward. ## Drop files onto the timeline You can add local media without opening the Media Library: 1. Drag one or more image, video, or audio files from your computer. 2. Drop them where you want them to start on the playbar, or on the timeline shown in **Cut**, **Effect**, **Overlay**, or **Layout**. Tella adds images and videos as overlays and adds audio files as [sound effects](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects). The files are also added to the current video's library, under **Personal** → **In this video**. To reuse one in other videos, open its menu in the Media Library and choose **Save to personal** or **Save to team**. When you drop several files together, Tella uploads and adds every supported file at the same point. The editor opens the Overlay sidebar and selects the first new item when the uploads finish. > [!TIP] > > Drop a file on another clip's section of the playbar to add it to that clip. ## Position, rotate, and size it * On the canvas, **drag** the overlay to move it and drag its corners to **resize** it. * To nudge it, select the overlay and press the arrow keys to move it one pixel at a time, or 10 pixels with **Shift**. Presses in quick succession undo in one step. * To **rotate** it, select the overlay and drag the rotation handle above it. * The overlay keeps its position and size relative to your video frame, so it stays put across aspect ratios. Select the overlay to open its controls in the sidebar. Use **Size** to set the width of an image, video, GIF, or sticker as a percentage of the canvas. Images also include **Ratio**, which crops them to their original shape or a preset aspect ratio. ## Crop an image or video overlay [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmw0wudwg00bj02im0eboh3qe/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmw0wudwg00bj02im0eboh3qe/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) 1. Right-click the overlay on the canvas or on its timeline card and choose **Crop**. You can also select the overlay and click **Crop** in its settings, next to **Ratio** for images. 2. In the **Crop overlay** window, drag the crop frame around the part you want to keep. 3. Click **Crop**. The overlay's box takes the shape of the crop at the same scale and stays centered where it was. One undo reverts the crop. ## Set when it appears In the Overlay timeline, adjust how long the overlay is on screen: * Drag the **start** or **end** of the overlay card to change its duration. * Drag the card left or right to move it earlier or later in the clip. * Hold **Option** on Mac or **Alt** on Windows while dragging to turn snapping off. Card edges snap to nearby overlay edges, the playhead, and word boundaries. An alignment guide shows the edge Tella used. > [!TIP] > > The video preview follows the moving edge while you drag a duration handle, helping you choose the exact frame where the overlay appears or disappears. Overlapping overlays appear on separate timeline tracks. See [Work with the multi-track timeline](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline) for how tracks are laid out, and for selecting, splitting, copying, and reordering cards. > [!NOTE] > > A **video** overlay shows its audio **waveform** on the timeline card. Its trimmed range is capped to the length of the source clip, so a short video won't loop to fill a longer overlay. ## Trim a video overlay or adjust its volume Select a video overlay to open its detail view: * Open the menu in the detail header and choose **Trim** to adjust the source range and duration. * Drag the **Volume** slider in the settings to change how loud the video's audio plays. Set it to 0 to silence it. **Trim** only appears for video overlays, and **Volume** only appears when the video has audio. ## Speed up a video overlay [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwifzta00pm07l69awj9h7w/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwifzta00pm07l69awj9h7w/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) 1. Select a video overlay, open the menu in the detail header, and choose **Trim**. 2. In **Adjust media**, click the speed button (it shows **1×** by default) and choose **1.25×**, **1.5×**, **2×**, **3×**, or **4×**. The preview plays at that speed. 3. Click **Apply**. The overlay's card shortens to match: the range you picked divided by the speed. For example, 6 seconds of video at **2×** takes 3 seconds on the timeline. The editor preview and your export play the video and its audio at that speed, without changing the pitch. To go back to normal speed, open **Trim** again and choose **1×**. Duplicating a sped-up overlay keeps its speed. ## Animate the overlay in and out [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwig7qr00rb08jugqoseu9x/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwig7qr00rb08jugqoseu9x/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) By default, an overlay pops in and out instantly. To animate it: 1. Select the overlay on the canvas or timeline. 2. Under **Animation**, click the **In** or **Out** row. 3. Choose a preset: **Appear**, **Fade**, **Slide** (up, down, left, or right), **Mask** (up or down), **Grow**, **Shrink**, **Blur**, or **Blur ↑**. After you pick a preset, fine-tune it under **Timing** (duration, acceleration, delay) and **Motion** (move, rotate, scale, opacity, blur, **Clip to box**, and **Motion blur**). Changing a motion value turns the preset into **Custom**. > [!TIP] > > Animations only apply to visual overlays. Audio clips are added as [sound effects](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects), which mix in without an animation. ## Replace, duplicate, or remove an overlay Select an overlay on the canvas or timeline to open its detail view. * Open the menu in the detail header and choose **Replace**. Pick any media item or sticker to swap the source while keeping the overlay's timing, position, animation, and layer order. * Open the same menu and choose **Duplicate** to make a copy with the same media, position, size, timing, animation, and source trim. * Click **Delete** below the settings to remove it. * Click **Back** in the sidebar or click an empty area of the canvas to deselect it. ## Copy properties to another overlay 1. Right-click an overlay on the canvas or timeline and choose **Copy properties**. 2. Right-click the overlay you want to change and open **Paste properties**. 3. Choose **All properties**, **Style**, **Size and position**, or **Animation**. **Style** copies the border, shadow, and frame style, and only works between image and video overlays. **Size and position** and **Animation** work across any visual overlays, including text. A pasted image or video keeps its own aspect ratio: it takes the copied width and is centered on the copied box. One undo reverts a paste. ## Reorder layers Right-click an overlay on the canvas and choose **Send to front** or **Send to back** to move it directly to either end of the stack. You can also drag a card between tracks, or nudge it one track at a time with the arrow keys. See [Reorder overlays with tracks](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline#reorder-overlays-with-tracks). ## Place it behind you On a clip with a camera recording, the overlay's detail view includes a **Depth** control. Choose **Behind presenter** to send the overlay behind you, so you appear in front of it. Choose **In front** to bring it back. See [Put overlays behind the presenter](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter). ## Related * [Overlays overview](/docs/help/editing/overlays) * [Add text](/docs/help/editing/text-overlays) * [Add sound effects](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects) * [Work with the multi-track timeline](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline) * [Put overlays behind the presenter](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter) # Mirror (or flip) your camera Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/mirror-or-flip-your-camera Flip your camera with Mirror camera in Layout → Adjust, or right-click it and choose Flip horizontally. Mirroring applies per clip. Flip your camera horizontally after recording by turning on **Mirror camera** under **Layout** → **Adjust**, or right-click your camera on the canvas and choose **Flip horizontally**. Mirroring applies to the whole clip, and **Apply camera to all clips** copies the mirror setting along with your camera framing. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvlvwliz000a08jjhr3h359g/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvlvwliz000a08jjhr3h359g/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Flip the camera from the canvas Right-click the webcam layer directly on the canvas and choose **Flip horizontally**. The flip applies immediately without opening any panel. ## Flip your camera from a sidebar 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Select the clip where you want to flip the camera layer. 3. Open **Layout** in the sidebar, then click **Adjust** in the panel header, or press `A`. 4. Toggle **Mirror camera** on. You can also change the same setting in the camera crop tool: choose **Crop** → **Adjust camera** and click the mirror button (**Mirror camera**) in the top-right of the crop window. The camera flips immediately, and every place shows the current setting. ## Mirror the camera in every clip Mirroring applies per clip. To flip the camera in every clip at once, click **Apply camera to all clips** in **Layout** → **Adjust**. This also copies your camera crop and focus point, so check your framing before applying it. You can also select each clip and turn on **Mirror camera** individually. > [!NOTE] > > Mirroring applies to the clip's camera layer, so if the clip uses several layouts they all mirror together. There's no way to mirror the camera for just one layout within a clip. ## Will mirroring flip text in my camera shot? Yes. Flipping the image also mirrors any text or logos visible in your camera, which may make them unreadable. Toggle **Mirror camera** off to return to the original orientation. # Work with the multi-track timeline Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline Overlapping zooms, effects, and overlays stack onto separate timeline tracks, where you can select, move, split, copy, and reorder each card. The **Effect** and **Overlay** timelines stack cards that overlap in time onto separate tracks automatically, so nothing is hidden and you can select, move, split, copy, and reorder each card. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvm1cfy4003f08kzfnho74ka/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvm1cfy4003f08kzfnho74ka/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) * Open **Effect** to see zoom, blur, and highlight cards. * Open **Overlay** to see media, text, sticker, and sound effect cards. You never assign anything to a track yourself: overlapping cards are pushed onto separate tracks so nothing is hidden, while cards that do not overlap share a track to keep the timeline compact. Drag across an empty part of either timeline to select a time range. The preview follows the moving edge while the red playhead stays parked, then the playhead moves to the selection's start when you release. ## Right-click a selected range Right-click a selected range in the Cut, Layout, Effect, or Overlay timeline to get the same menu, in the same order: * **Add layout:** create a layout section for each selected range, replacing any layouts it covers. * **Add zoom:** add a zoom to the range. Appears only when the clip has a screen recording or media to zoom into. * **Add blur** or **Add highlight:** add that effect to the range. Appears only when the clip supports them. * **Add overlay:** choose **Text**, **Media**, or **Sound effect**. Media and sound effects open the library, and the item you pick fills the selected range. * **Cut selection:** remove the selected range from the clip. * **Copy to new clip:** add the selected content to this video as a separate clip. * **Copy to new video:** create a separate video from the selected content. Adding something switches you to the timeline that edits it: a layout to **Layout**, a zoom, blur, or highlight to **Effect**, an overlay to **Overlay**, and a cut to **Cut**. > [!NOTE] > > **Copy to new clip** and **Copy to new video** use the primary selected range, the same as in the **Cut** timeline. See [Trim and split clips](/docs/help/editing/trim-and-split-clips#right-click-menu-and-cut-toolbar-actions) for details. ## Move and trim a card * Drag the **start** or **end** of a card to change how long it lasts. * Drag the card left or right to move it earlier or later in the clip. * Hold **Option** on Mac or **Alt** on Windows while dragging to turn snapping off. Card edges snap to nearby card edges, the playhead, and word boundaries. An alignment guide shows the edge Tella used. > [!TIP] > > The video preview follows the moving edge while you drag a duration handle, while the red playhead stays parked. This lets you choose the exact frame where an effect or overlay should start or stop without losing your place. ## Select and move several cards You can move several cards together while keeping their timing and spacing: 1. Hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows. 2. Click cards to add or remove them from the selection, or drag across the timeline to select several cards. 3. Drag any selected card left or right to move the group. You can select zooms, blurs, and highlights together in the Effect timeline. The Overlay timeline likewise supports mixed selections of media, text, stickers, and sound effects. Press **Escape** to clear the selection. ## Split cards at the playhead 1. Select a card. To split several at once, select only blur and highlight cards in the Effect timeline, or select any group of cards in the Overlay timeline. 2. Move the playhead to where you want to cut. 3. Click **Split**, press `X`, or right-click a card and select **Split at playhead**. Each selected card the playhead sits inside becomes two independently editable cards. Selected cards the playhead is outside are left untouched. If the playhead is not inside any selected card, Tella asks you to move it first. In the Overlay timeline, the whole group stays selected after a split, so you can move the playhead and press `X` again to split every overlay in the group. Zooms can be split one at a time. Media overlays, text, sound effects, blurs, and highlights can also be split, including several selected cards at once. Video and audio on the right continue from the correct point in the source instead of restarting. ## Edit a group of overlays When you select several overlays, changes apply to all of them at once, and each change is a single undo step. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmw0y8axd000108lb78b80b8o/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmw0y8axd000108lb78b80b8o/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) * **Right-click** any overlay in the group on the timeline to choose **Split at playhead**, **Send to front**, **Send to back**, **Depth**, or delete them all. * **Right-click** any overlay in the group on the canvas to choose **Send to front**, **Send to back**, or **Depth** for the whole group. * In the sidebar, set **Depth** and the **Animate** in and out animations for the whole group. Changing one side of the animation updates only that side, so each overlay keeps its other side. * On the canvas, the group shows one bounding box with corner handles. Drag a corner to scale every overlay in the group, text included, about the opposite corner. > [!NOTE] > > **Depth** only appears when the group includes an overlay on a clip with a camera recording. See [Put overlays behind the presenter](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter). ## Copy and paste groups In the Effect timeline, select either zoom cards or blur and highlight cards. Zooms cannot be copied together with blurs or highlights in the same operation. 1. Select the cards you want to copy. 2. Press **Cmd + C** on Mac or **Ctrl + C** on Windows. 3. Move the playhead to the destination and press **Cmd + V** or **Ctrl + V**. Pasted cards keep their durations, relative spacing, layer order, and appearance. If the complete group would run past the end of the clip, Tella moves it earlier so every card fits. ## Reorder overlays with tracks In the Overlay timeline, the vertical track order matches how visual overlays stack on the canvas: higher tracks appear in front of lower tracks. * Drag a visual overlay card up or down to move it between tracks. * Select one visual overlay card and press **Arrow Up** or **Arrow Down** to move it by one track. * Right-click an overlay on the canvas and choose **Send to front** or **Send to back**. When a visual overlay card is selected in the timeline, plain vertical arrow keys reorder its track instead of moving it by one pixel on the canvas. On a clip with a camera recording, visual overlays can also sit behind you. When one does, the Overlay timeline shows a dashed **Presenter** row: cards above it appear in front of you and cards below it appear behind you. Drag a card across the row, or move it with the arrow keys past the row, to change its depth. See [Put overlays behind the presenter](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter). > [!NOTE] > > Track order only affects what appears in front on the canvas, so it applies to visual overlays: images, video, text, and stickers. Zooms, blurs, highlights, and sound effects are not reordered this way. Screen effects apply to the footage in the layout's **Screen** slot, and sound effects are mixed together regardless of their track. To balance those, use each sound effect's own [volume control](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects#adjust-the-volume). ## Related * [Overlays overview](/docs/help/editing/overlays) * [Zoom in on screen recordings](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom) * [Blur and highlight](/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting) * [Add media overlays](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays) * [Add text](/docs/help/editing/text-overlays) * [Add sound effects](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects) * [Put overlays behind the presenter](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter) # Overlays overview Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/overlays Open Overlay in the editor sidebar (press V) to layer media, text, shapes, stickers, and sound effects on top of your recording without replacing it, then time them on one shared timeline. Open **Overlay** in the editor sidebar (press `V`) to layer media, text, shapes, stickers, and sound effects on top of your recording without replacing what's already on screen. Each type has its own section in the panel. This is different from [media (B-roll)](/docs/help/editing/use-media), which swaps out a whole slot of your layout. An overlay floats above everything for the stretch of time you choose. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvrrzoi0001y08jm1ljw64uv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvrrzoi0001y08jm1ljw64uv/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## What can I add as an overlay? | Overlay | Use it for | Guide | | - | - | - | | **Media** | A logo, screenshot, reaction GIF, or picture-in-picture clip | [Add media overlays](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays) | | **External media** | Images you saved in Pinterest, Are.na, or mymind | [Pinterest, Are.na, and mymind](/docs/help/integrations/pinterest-arena-and-mymind) | | **Text** | Titles, labels, captions, and callouts typed on the canvas | [Add text](/docs/help/editing/text-overlays) | | **Shapes** | A square, circle, star, arrow, or other shape filled with a color, gradient, image, or video | [Add shapes](/docs/help/editing/shape-overlays) | | **Stickers** | An animated sticker, GIF, meme, company logo, or illustrated object | [Add stickers and animated stickers](/docs/help/editing/animated-stickers) | | **Sounds** | A whoosh, click, sting, or applause mixed under your voiceover | [Add sound effects](/docs/help/editing/sound-effects) | | **Vintage videos** | Free public-domain film shots, such as space, cities, or trains | [Add vintage videos](/docs/help/editing/vintage-videos) | ## Add an overlay The flow is the same whichever you pick: 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Move the playhead to where you want the overlay to appear. 3. Open **Overlay** in the sidebar, or press `V`. 4. Click a preset or library item to add it. Use **Browse all** to see more. 5. Adjust it on the canvas, then set its timing on the timeline. Use the search control in the Overlay header to find text styles, stickers, media, and sound effects without opening each library. If you've [connected Pinterest, Are.na or mymind](/docs/help/integrations/pinterest-arena-and-mymind), searches of three or more characters also show matches from each service. > [!NOTE] > > A selected time range wins over the playhead. If you have a range selected (on the timeline or in the transcript), the new overlay starts at the beginning of that range instead of at the playhead, and selecting several ranges adds one overlay to each. Clear the selection first if you want the playhead to decide. > > Text and images fill the whole range. A **video or sound** shorter than the range does not stretch to fill it. The card ends when the clip runs out. > [!TIP] > > You can also drag image, video, or audio files straight from your computer onto the timeline. Tella adds images and videos as media overlays and audio as sound effects, and adds them to the current video's library. See [Drop files onto the timeline](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays#drop-files-onto-the-timeline). ## Edit overlays on the shared timeline Every overlay is a card on the same timeline, and overlapping cards are stacked onto separate tracks automatically, so you can run a caption, sticker, and logo at the same moment without any of them hiding the others. Select a card on the timeline or an overlay on the canvas to open its detail view, which shows its time range, preview, and settings. **Duplicate** is in the menu in the detail header, and **Delete** sits below the settings. Selecting, moving, trimming, splitting, and copying work the same way for every type. Changing a card's **track order** applies to visual overlays (media, text, shapes, and stickers) because that order controls how they stack on the canvas. See [work with the multi-track timeline](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline). Visual overlays can also sit behind you instead of in front. Set an overlay's **Depth** to **Behind presenter** and Tella cuts you out of your camera recording so you appear in front of it. See [Put overlays behind the presenter](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter). To remove every overlay from the current clip, open **More actions** on the Overlay timeline, choose **Reset all overlays**, then confirm **Delete all**. This removes text, media, sound effects, and motion graphics together. You can undo the change. ## What happens when you cut the clip Video overlays, sound effects, and Lottie animated stickers keep their chosen playback duration when you cut the clip underneath them. They continue across the cut without skipping part of the overlay, unless the overlay reaches the end of its source media or the clip. Images, text, and shapes stay attached to the underlying footage instead. This includes GIF, meme, and logo stickers, which behave like images even when animated. Cutting out footage covered by an image, text, or shape overlay shortens the time that overlay appears. > [!NOTE] > > Blurs and highlights are screen effects rather than overlays. Open **Effect** to add them alongside zooms, or see [blur or highlight part of the screen](/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting). ## Should I use an overlay or a media layout? Reach for an overlay when the recording should stay visible underneath. Reach for a [layout with media](/docs/help/editing/use-media) when the visual should *become* the content, such as a full-frame screenshot or title card with your camera in a bubble beside it. ## Other ways to put words on screen Text overlays are written by you and placed wherever you like. If you want words driven by what you said instead, use: * **Subtitles:** captions generated from your transcript. See [Style subtitles](/docs/help/editing/style-subtitles). * **Chapters:** section labels viewers can navigate by. See [Chapters](/docs/help/editing/chapters). * **Your logo:** a persistent mark on every video, set once with [custom branding](/docs/help/editing/add-your-logo-to-videos). # Put overlays behind the presenter Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter Set an overlay's Depth to Behind presenter and Tella cuts you out of your camera so text, media, or stickers sit behind you. Only on clips with a camera recording; sound effects have no depth. Set an overlay's **Depth** to **Behind presenter** to put text, media, or a sticker behind you: Tella cuts you out of your camera recording and draws the overlay between your camera background and you. Send a title behind your head, tuck a logo behind your shoulder, or let a sticker peek out from behind you. **In front** is the default. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmu5lymiv00rn0agmgnex80oi/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmu5lymiv00rn0agmgnex80oi/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Send an overlay behind you 1. Open your video and click **Overlay**. 2. Add or select a text, media, or sticker overlay. 3. In its detail view, set **Depth** to **Behind presenter**. You can also right-click the overlay on the canvas, open **Depth**, and choose **Behind presenter**. Choose **In front** to bring it back. New overlays start in front. The **Depth** control only appears on clips that have a camera recording, and sound effects have no depth. > [!NOTE] > > The first time a recording is used this way, Tella prepares the cut-out on its servers and the canvas shows **Preparing cut-out** with a percentage. The overlay stays in front until that finishes, and exporting waits for it. Each recording only needs to be prepared once. ## How it looks in each layout Depth works with any layout that shows your camera: * In a **Cut-out layout**, the overlay sits between the background or screen and you. See [Remove your camera background with Cut out](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background). * In a layout with a **camera frame**, such as Camera Bubble, the overlay covers your camera's original background inside the frame, and you stay in front of it. * With **Pop-out**, you rise out of the frame in front of the overlay. See [Create a pop-out camera effect](/docs/help/editing/create-a-pop-out-camera-effect). Fades, timing, position, and size work the same at either depth. ## Change depth from the timeline When something sits behind you, the Overlay timeline shows a dashed **Presenter** row. Overlays in front of you sit above it and overlays behind you sit below it, so the tracks read top to bottom in the same order they stack on the canvas. * Drag a visual overlay card across the **Presenter** row to change its depth. * Select a card and press **Arrow Up** or **Arrow Down** to move it one track at a time. Crossing the row changes its depth. Track order still applies within each depth. Two overlays that are both behind you stack by track, the same way overlays in front of you do. See [Work with the multi-track timeline](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline#reorder-overlays-with-tracks). **Send to front** and **Send to back** reorder an overlay among the others at its depth and never move it to the other side of you. Duplicating, copying, and pasting an overlay keeps its depth. ## Related * [Overlays overview](/docs/help/editing/overlays) * [Add text to your video](/docs/help/editing/text-overlays) * [Add media overlays](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays) * [Remove your camera background with Cut out](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background) Depth is also available through the [public API](/docs/introduction) and the [MCP server](/docs/mcp-tools/overlays) as the `depth` field on image, video, and text overlays. # Change the background Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/pick-a-background Pick a color, gradient, image, or animated background under Background in the editor's Style panel (press B). It applies to every clip unless you choose Apply to this clip only. Pick a color, gradient, image, or animated background under **Background** in the editor's **Style** panel (press `B`). It applies to every clip unless you choose **Apply to this clip only**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq5e1km00c907l33sqjgowd/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq5e1km00c907l33sqjgowd/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Where do I change the background? 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Style** in the toolbar, or press `B`. **Background** is at the top of the Style panel, with **Colors**, **Images**, and **Animated** tabs. 3. Click **Browse all** next to the **Background** heading to open the full background picker. ## What kinds of background can I use? At the top of the full background picker, there are four tabs: 1. **Recents** 2. **Image** 3. **Animated** 4. **Color** Hover over a built-in background to see its name. Tella names its preset colors, gradients, images, and animated backgrounds so you can find the same one again. ### Recent backgrounds The **Recents** tab shows the backgrounds you've recently applied, whatever their type, so you can quickly reuse them across clips and videos. ### Image backgrounds Image backgrounds are static images that you can use as backgrounds. * **Built-in collections**: Browse Tella's image presets and the **macOS** wallpaper collection. The macOS collection includes **Mac Golden Gate Sunset**, alongside wallpapers from every macOS release, from Cheetah through Tahoe. * **Uploads**: Upload your own personal images. * Click **Add image** to select an image file from your computer (JPEG, PNG, or WebP). * You can build a personal library of backgrounds for your brand or style. * To remove an uploaded background from the **Style** sidebar, open the **Images** tab, right-click the background, and select **Delete**. * In the full Background Picker, hover over an uploaded background and click the **trash icon**. * The right-click **Delete** action is only available for images in your personal Uploads library. * **Workspace backgrounds**: Displays backgrounds shared across your workspace. * All workspace members can see and use these backgrounds in the editor. * Members and Owners can upload new workspace backgrounds by clicking the **Add workspace image** button. * Members and Owners can remove a workspace background by hovering over it and clicking the **trash icon**. * Viewers can browse and apply workspace backgrounds but cannot add or remove them. * **Unsplash integration**: * Browse and select free images from Unsplash. * Click **See all** next to **Unsplash** to open the Unsplash panel. Pick a topic at the top to browse by category, or type in the **Search** field in the top right corner. Clear the search to return to the topic you were on. * Scroll to the end of the photos to load more. * Click the back arrow at the top of the panel to return to **Background**. ### Color and gradient backgrounds You can choose solid colors or gradients as your background. **Solid colors** * **Selection**: Click on a color to apply it as your background. * **Custom Colors**: * Click the **Plus (+)** icon to pick a custom color. * Your recently used colors appear in the picker's history row, alongside the preset colors. * You can enter a hex code for precise color selection. **Gradient backgrounds** * **Selection**: Choose from preset gradient options. * **Custom Gradients**: * Click on the gradient editor. * Select your **first color** and **second color**. * Choose the **angle** of the gradient. ## How do I upload an animated background? The **Animated** tab in **Browse all** has three sections: **Uploads** for your videos, your workspace's name for shared videos, and **Tella** for built-in videos and animated gradients. Your uploads and workspace videos also appear first in the compact Animated row in **Style**. You can add an MP4 or MOV video of up to 20 MB as a background in **Style**. The file must contain a video track your browser can read. 1. Open **Style** in the editor and click **Browse all** next to **Background**. 2. Select **Animated**, then click **Add video** in **Uploads** to keep it in your personal library. To share it with your workspace, click **Add workspace video** under your workspace's name instead. Only workspace Members and Owners can add shared videos. 3. Choose a file. Once it finishes uploading and processing, Tella applies it as your background. You can also click the upload tile in the compact Animated row in **Style** to add a video to your personal library. Hover over an uploaded video in **Browse all** and click the trash icon to remove it from its library. Workspace Viewers can use shared videos but cannot add or remove them. ## How do I use a built-in animated background? In **Style**, click **Browse all**, open **Animated**, and look under **Tella**. Hover over a thumbnail to preview it, then click to apply it. Built-in options include short looping videos and animated gradients. The first option under **Tella** is **Ambient**, which uses a blurred copy of your own recording as the background. See [Use an ambient background](/docs/help/editing/use-an-ambient-background). ## How do I apply the same background to every clip? Pick a background in **Style** with **Apply to this clip only** turned off; the choice applies to every clip. If one clip has its own background, turn off **Apply to this clip only** on that clip to make it follow the shared background again. ## How do I give one clip a different background? In **Style**, open the **⋯** menu beside the background controls and select **Apply to this clip only** before choosing a background. This option appears only when your video has more than one clip. * **Unchecked (default):** the background you pick is shared across every clip in the video. Changing it on any clip updates them all. * **Checked:** the background is scoped to just the clip you're currently on. The other clips keep whatever they had before, and you can give this clip a different background without affecting them. While it is on, an **Apply to this clip only** checkbox also appears under the background controls. Uncheck it to re-sync this clip with the rest of the video. ## Share brand backgrounds with your team Upload your team's branded backgrounds under your workspace's name in the background picker so every member can use them without re-uploading. Backgrounds only you need belong in your personal **Uploads**. # Remix & reuse videos and clips Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/remix-and-reuse-videos-and-clips Reuse any Tella clip: Add clip → Select from existing adds it to another video's timeline, the clip's ⋯ menu offers Duplicate, Copy to existing video, and Copy to new video, and Add clip to media library saves it as B-roll. Reuse any clip you've made in Tella: **Add clip** → **Select from existing** adds it to your current video's timeline, the clip's **⋯** menu offers **Duplicate**, **Copy to existing video**, and **Copy to new video**, and **Add clip to media library** saves it as reusable B-roll. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq61w3e017708jq7jz0h96x/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq61w3e017708jq7jz0h96x/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Add a clip from another video to your timeline 1. **Open your current video** in the Tella editor. 2. Click the **Add clip** button at the bottom of the timeline. 3. Select **Select from existing** from the dropdown menu. This opens the **Library** sidebar. 4. Search for a video, or browse the list. Videos you opened recently come first under **Recent**, then your own under **My videos** and other videos you can access under **Team videos**. 5. Open a video and select a clip to add it to your current video's timeline. If the video has only one available clip, selecting the video adds it directly. To add several clips at once, tick each clip's checkbox, or hold **Shift** or **Cmd** while you click. Use **Select all** to pick every clip, then click **Add 2 clips** (the button shows how many you picked). The clips are added at the end of your timeline in their original order. 6. **Rename the clip** if necessary by clicking on its title and entering a new name (e.g., “Intro”). 7. **Rearrange the clip** by clicking and dragging it to the desired position in your timeline. ## Copy a clip into another video 1. **Open the video** that contains the clip you want to reuse. 2. Click on **Edit** to enter the editing mode. 3. Navigate to the **clip you want to copy**. 4. Click on the **three dots** (…) next to the clip. 5. Select **Copy to existing video**. The clip is copied to your clipboard. 6. **Open the video** where you want to add the copied clip. 7. **Paste the clip** into the video by pressing **Command + V** (Mac) or **Control + V** (Windows). 8. **Rename and reposition** the clip as needed. ## Duplicate a clip within the same video 1. **Open your video** in the Tella editor. 2. Locate the **clip you want to duplicate** in the timeline. 3. Click on the **three dots** (…) next to the clip. 4. Select **Duplicate**. * A copy appears immediately after the original with a spinner while Tella prepares it. * The original clip's action reads **Duplicating…** and stays disabled until the copy is ready. 5. When the spinner disappears, **rename or reposition** the duplicated clip as needed. ## Create a new video from a clip [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwh1f2z022m08l852y596h2/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwh1f2z022m08l852y596h2/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) 1. Open the video that contains the clip in the editor. 2. In the clip bar at the bottom, hover over the clip and click its **three dots** (…). 3. Select **Copy to new video**. Tella creates a new video named after the clip, such as **Clip 2 (Copy)**, and opens it in a new browser tab. If the tab doesn't open, click the link in the **Clip copied!** message. ## Save a clip to your media library Use **Add clip to media library** to render a clip as reusable media. 1. Open the video in the Tella editor. 2. Click the **three dots** (…) next to the clip. 3. Select **Add clip to media library**. 4. Wait for the **Clip added to media library** confirmation. After rendering finishes, the clip appears under **In this video** in the current video's Media Library. To reuse it elsewhere, open its menu and choose **Save to personal** or **Save to team**. Then open the destination video, select a layout section, open **Customize**, and set the desired slot's **Source** to **Media**. See [Add media (B-roll)](/docs/help/editing/use-media) for the full workflow. Rendered media is reused as B-roll rather than as a full timeline clip. To add a clip from another video directly as B-roll, open **Browse** → **Clips from other videos** in the Media Library instead. **Add clip** → **Select from existing** uses the source video's clips to create full timeline clips. ## Save an original source to your media library The same **three dots** (…) menu also offers **Add source to media library**. When the clip was recorded with both camera and screen, you get one entry for each: **Add camera source to media library** and **Add screen source to media library**. This saves the original recording behind the clip. Nothing is rendered, so the item appears under **In this video** straight away, with the **Source added to media library** confirmation. Every editor of the video can access it. ### Add clip vs. add source | | **Add clip to media library** | **Add source to media library** | | - | - | - | | What is saved | A new video file rendered from the clip | The original recording the clip was made from | | Layout, background, zooms, overlays | Baked in | Not included, you get the raw camera or screen track | | Trims and cuts | Applied, you get only what the clip plays | Not applied, you get the full untrimmed recording | | Camera and screen together | Combined into one file | Saved as separate items, one per source | | Size and shape | Your video's dimensions | The recording's original dimensions | | How long it takes | Renders in the background, the item shows as generating until it is ready | Instant | Both options add the item to the current video's library, under **In this video**. To use it in other videos, open the item's menu and choose **Save to personal** or **Save to team**. Saving creates a reusable library entry without removing the original from the video. ### When to use each one * Use **Add clip** when you want the finished look reused elsewhere, for example a styled intro or outro you drop into other videos. * Use **Add source** when you want the raw footage to re-edit from scratch, for example reusing a screen recording behind a different layout, or trimming a different section out of it. > [!NOTE] > > **Add source** points at the original recording rather than copying it. Deleting the source video moves it to the [Trash](/docs/help/account/recover-deleted-video), so you still have 30 days to restore it. Once it is permanently deleted, either by **Delete now** or when those 30 days are up, the library item stops working, unless another video still uses that same recording. ## Tips * **Organize your clips**: Use descriptive names for your clips to make them easier to find when searching your library. * **Search functionality**: Use the search in the **Library** sidebar to find a video, then search its clips by name. * **Keyboard shortcuts**: Remember that **Command + V** (Mac) or **Control + V** (Windows) can be used to paste copied clips into your videos. * **Rearranging clips**: You can click and drag clips in the timeline to reorder them as needed. # Remove silences Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/remove-silences-automatically Open Cut, choose Natural, Fast, or Faster under Silences, and click Remove N silences to cut pauses automatically. A pause only counts as silence when every unmuted audio track is quiet. Remove silences automatically in the editor's **Cut** panel: under **Silences**, choose **Natural**, **Fast**, or **Faster**, then click **Remove N silences** (for example, **Remove 12 silences**). Tella only treats a pause as silence when every unmuted audio track is quiet, and you can undo it with **Reset silences** or **Reset all cuts**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq71yf700uj02qsfunu9sw9/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq71yf700uj02qsfunu9sw9/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Open the silence removal tool 1. **Open your video** in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Cut** to open the Cut panel. 3. In the Cut panel, locate the **Silences** tool. ## What's the difference between Natural, Fast, and Faster? Tella offers different modes to control how aggressively silences are removed: * **Natural**: Removes larger silences, preserving a more conversational flow. * **Fast**: Removes smaller silences for a more concise video. * **Faster**: Removes very short silences, creating the most condensed version of your video. ## See how much time a mode saves 1. In the **Silences** section, choose your preferred mode (Natural, Fast, or Faster). 2. Tella will analyze your video based on the selected mode and display: 1. The **number of silences** detected. 2. The **total time** that will be saved by removing these silences. ## How silence detection works with multiple audio sources If your recording includes more than one audio source (for example, your microphone and your screen recording's audio), Tella analyzes all audio tracks when detecting silences. A region is only marked as silence when **every** audible audio source is quiet at the same time. This means that if you are silent but your screen share is playing audio (such as a demo, a video, or music), that section will not be flagged as a silence. You do not need to do anything extra to enable this. Tella handles it automatically. Tella treats inaudible digital noise as silence, so a screen audio track that sounds silent will not prevent pauses in your microphone audio from being detected. ### Speech-aware detection on voice tracks For voice audio tracks (like your microphone), Tella combines waveform loudness with speech detection and your transcript to decide what counts as silence: * **Noisy microphones**: Constant low-level background noise (fans, HVAC, or mic hiss) does not prevent pauses outside detected speech from being marked as silence. * **Pauses between words**: Dead air close to your room's background noise level counts as silence even right next to your words, so each cut reaches the end of the word instead of leaving a short gap. The fading end of a word is kept. * **Quiet speech**: Speech detection and your transcript protect low-volume speech, like soft consonants or the other side of a call picked up by your mic, from being cut. Loud non-speech content like music, applause, or sound effects is kept as audio. ### Muted layers are excluded If you've muted a layer by setting its volume to zero, that layer is automatically excluded from silence detection. This is useful when your recording includes a screen capture with system audio that you don't plan to keep. Muting that layer ensures silence detection focuses only on the tracks you care about, like your voice. For example, if you recorded your screen with system audio alongside a microphone track, and you mute the screen layer, Tella will detect silences based on your microphone audio alone rather than requiring both tracks to be silent. The timeline also displays waveforms for all audio sources in your recording. Your microphone audio appears in the primary color, while other audio sources (like screen recording audio) appear in a muted gray. This gives you a clear visual overview of where audio activity is happening across all layers. ## Remove the detected silences 1. After selecting a mode, click **Remove N silences** (for example, **Remove 12 silences**). 2. Tella will automatically remove the detected silences from your video. 3. The timeline will update to reflect the changes, showing where silences were removed. After removing silences with **Natural** or **Fast**, the mode selector stays available. After **Faster**, the most aggressive mode, it is hidden. You can choose a stricter mode to analyze the remaining pauses and remove any additional silences without resetting your edits. ## Adjust a silence cut by hand If you wish to adjust the automatic edits: 1. Navigate to the specific area on the timeline where a silence was removed. 2. Click and drag the **handles** of the split created by Tella to adjust where the silence removal begins and ends. 3. **Play back** the video to ensure the edit meets your expectations. ## Undo silence removal If you're not satisfied with the results, click **Reset silences** (the circular arrow next to **Silences** in the Cut panel), or open **More actions** in the Cut toolbar and click **Reset all cuts**. Both restore every cut in the current clip, not only the silences, so any manual cuts you made in that clip are undone too. You can then select a different mode or manually edit the silences. ## Tips and additional info * **Experiment with modes**: Try different modes to see which one best suits your video. The **Natural** mode maintains a conversational pace, while **Fast** and **Faster** make your video more concise. * **Manual adjustments**: Even after using the Silence Removal tool, you can manually adjust or further trim your video using the trim handles. * **Preview before finalizing**: Always preview your video after applying silence removal to ensure the flow and timing meet your expectations. * **Combine with other tools**: You can use the Silence Removal tool alongside other trimming tools in Tella to polish your video further. # Replace a section of your video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/replace-a-section-of-your-video To replace the middle of a clip, split it at the playhead and drop the new clip between the two halves. Dragging a clip onto another only reorders whole clips. To replace or insert footage in the middle of a clip, split the clip at the playhead with **Split at current time**, add the new clip, and drag it between the two halves. Dragging a clip onto the middle of another clip won't insert it there; dragging only reorders whole clips, so you need to split first. To redo a whole clip instead, use [Re-record](/docs/help/recording/re-record-clips). [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqoa2qy007c02l50zz339v6/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqoa2qy007c02l50zz339v6/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Insert a clip in the middle of your video 1. **Open your video:** Launch the Tella editor and open the video you wish to edit. 2. **Place the playhead:** Move the playhead to the exact point where you want to insert the new clip (click or scrub on the progress bar under the video). 3. **Split the clip:** In the clip strip at the bottom, open the menu on the clip (right-click it, or click the ⋯ button) and choose **Split at current time**. You now have two clips. 4. **Add the new clip:** Click **Add clip** at the end of the clip strip and choose **Record new clip**, **Upload a clip**, or **Select from existing**. The new clip is added at the end of the timeline. 5. **Move it into place:** Drag the new clip's thumbnail and drop it between the two halves. Done. You now have 3 clips: original part 1, the inserted clip, and original part 2. Each clip keeps its own transcript, zooms, and layouts, so you can keep editing them independently. ## Replace a section of your video To replace a section instead of just inserting, remove the unwanted section before dropping in the new clip: 1. **Split twice:** Place the playhead where the unwanted section begins and choose **Split at current time**, then do the same where it ends. 2. **Delete the unwanted section:** Select the middle clip and press Delete. 3. **Insert the replacement:** Add your new clip with the **Add clip** button and drag it in between the two remaining clips. # Retranscribe a video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/retranscribe-a-video Retranscribe a video by choosing the spoken language under Transcript language (in Setup, or the Script panel's More actions menu) and clicking Update. Use it when the wrong language was detected; it does not translate. Retranscribe a video by choosing the language that was spoken under **Transcript language** and clicking **Update**. You'll find it in the editor's **Setup** panel and in the **Script** panel's **More actions** menu. Use it when Tella detected the wrong language or to apply new [transcript dictionary](/docs/help/editing/create-your-custom-transcript-dictionary) terms. > [!NOTE] > > **Retranscribing does not translate your video.** The **Transcript language** setting tells Tella which language to transcribe the audio from. It must match what was actually spoken in the video. Selecting English for a Spanish-language recording will not produce English subtitles; use [subtitle translations](/docs/help/editing/translate-subtitles) instead. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqp0qtp009708idemwjf80y/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqp0qtp009708idemwjf80y/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## When is my transcript ready? Tella generates the transcript after your video finishes uploading and processing. Your transcript is ready when the **Script** panel shows words and/or captions are available on the video. * **Recorded clips** usually transcribe automatically within a minute or two of processing. * **Uploaded files** can occasionally fail to transcribe, depending on the audio format. If the transcript doesn't appear after the video is fully uploaded and processed, try [retranscribing](#how-to-retranscribe) below. * If you're waiting a long time, make sure the upload has finished. Check the video's page for a processing indicator and try refreshing. > [!WARNING] > > If captions appear on your video but the **Script** panel still shows no words after the video has fully processed, [contact support](/docs/help/support/support-portal). This is not expected and we can investigate. (A brief delay between subtitles appearing and the Script panel loading is normal.) > [!NOTE] > > Tella transcribes each clip's audio individually. For uploaded video files, this includes the file's audio track. For clips recorded in Tella, audio playing inside a screen recording (for example, a browser tab or another app) is not transcribed separately. Transcription uses the microphone audio captured with the clip. ## How to retranscribe 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Setup** in the left toolbar and find **Transcript language**. Or open the **Script** panel with the **Toggle sidebar** button at the right end of the playbar (or press **Shift + S**), open **More actions**, and click **Transcript language**. 3. Select the language that matches what was spoken in the video. 4. Click **Update**. The button shows **Updating...** while Tella processes the transcription. Once complete, your video's transcript and subtitles refresh automatically. > [!NOTE] > > Retranscribing changes the transcript of the recording itself. If you duplicated the video, or copied its clips into another video, those copies use the same recording, so they're retranscribed in the new language too. ## When to retranscribe * **Wrong language detected**: If the auto-detected language doesn't match what was spoken, select the correct language and update. * **Mixed languages across clips**: If your video has multiple clips with different transcript languages, the **Setup** panel shows **Your clips have mixed languages. Select a language to re-transcribe all clips.** Select the single language that was spoken to unify the transcript across all clips. * **Improve accuracy**: If you've added terms to your [transcript dictionary](/docs/help/editing/create-your-custom-transcript-dictionary), retranscribing will apply those terms to the new transcription. ## Does retranscribing translate my video? No. Changing **Transcript language** does not translate your recording. To add subtitles in another language for viewers, see [Translate subtitles into another language](/docs/help/editing/translate-subtitles). # Add shapes to your video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/shape-overlays Add a square, circle, triangle, diamond, star, hexagon, or arrow from Shapes in Overlay, then set its fill, corners, border, and shadow. Add a square, circle, triangle, diamond, star, hexagon, or arrow from the **Shapes** section of **Overlay** in the editor sidebar. Use shapes to frame part of the screen, point at something, or build a simple graphic behind your text. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvrzksfh001h02meep9x67r0/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvrzksfh001h02meep9x67r0/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Add a shape 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Move the playhead to where you want the shape to appear. 3. Open **Overlay** in the sidebar, or press `V`. 4. Under **Shapes**, click a shape, or click the plus button to add a square. The new shape starts at the playhead, filled with Tella purple, and appears on the timeline. Click it on the canvas or timeline to open its settings. ## Make a rectangle or an oval Every shape stretches to fill its box. Drag a side or corner handle on the canvas to change the box, so a square becomes a rectangle and a circle becomes an oval. Drag the rotation handle to turn the shape. ## Switch to a different shape Select the shape, then click another tile under **Shape** in its settings. The fill, border, shadow, timing, and position stay the same. ## Change the fill 1. Select the shape. 2. Under **Shape**, click the swatch next to **Fill**. 3. Pick a color, gradient, image, video, or animated gradient. The fill is cut to the shape's outline. Ambient backgrounds aren't available for shapes. ## Round a square's corners Select a square, then choose **Square**, **Round**, or **Squircle** under **Corners**. Corners only apply to squares. ## Add a border 1. Select the shape. 2. Under **Decoration**, turn on **Border**. 3. Use **Border color** and **Width** to style it. The border is drawn just inside the shape's outline. Turn **Border** off to remove it. ## Add a shadow Select the shape, then choose **None**, **Subtle**, or **Deep** from **Shadow** under **Decoration**. ## Animate the shape in and out Select the shape and use **Animation** in its settings to choose how it enters and leaves, the same way as for [media overlays](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays). You can also set its **Depth** to **Behind presenter** so you appear in front of it. See [Put overlays behind the presenter](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter). ## Set when it appears Drag the start or end of the shape's card on the timeline to change its duration, or drag the card to move it. Shapes stay attached to the footage underneath, like text: cutting out footage under a shape shortens how long it shows. To copy a shape, open the menu in its detail header and choose **Duplicate**. To remove it, click **Delete shape** below its settings. ## Draw a custom outline The editor has no pen tool. To draw your own outline, use the [MCP server or public API](/docs/help/integrations/mcp-server), which accept SVG path data for a shape. A custom shape shows a **Path** tile in its settings, so you can switch it back after trying another shape. # Share a skill or publish it to the community Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/share-a-skill Share a Tella Agent skill with your workspace, publish it at a public link, or send it to Tella for review to list it on tella.com/skills. You can share a skill you wrote in the [Tella Agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) three ways: with your workspace, with anyone at a public link, or with everyone on the community skills page at [tella.com/skills](https://www.tella.com/skills) once Tella approves it. | Who can use it | How | Reviewed by Tella? | | - | - | - | | Everyone in your workspace | Drag it to **Workspace** in the skill library | No | | Anyone with the link | **Publish to web** | No | | Everyone, listed on [tella.com/skills](https://www.tella.com/skills) | **Share with the community** | Yes | All three start in the skill library: open it with the **Skills** button at the top of the agent sidebar, or from **Add** (**+**) → **Skills**, then click a skill to open it. ## Share a skill with your workspace Drag the skill from **Personal** to **Workspace** in the skill library. Everyone in the workspace can then run it from the **/** menu in their agent chat. Drag it back to **Personal** to keep it to yourself again. You need to be a workspace owner or member to change workspace skills. ## Publish a skill at a public link **Publish to web** gives a skill its own page that anyone can open, even without a Tella account. 1. Open the skill in the skill library. 2. Under its instructions, click **Publish** next to **Publish to web**. 3. Turn on **Publish to web**. 4. Click **Copy link** and send it to whoever you want. The page shows the skill's instructions and files. Anyone signed in to Tella can click **Add to my skills** to save a copy to their **Personal** or **Workspace** skills, or copy the skill ID under **Paste into Tella's AI chat** to try it in one chat. People without an account are asked to sign up first. You can also ask the agent to do it, for example "Publish my demo-polish skill". It asks for your approval before publishing. > [!NOTE] > > Only skills written in Tella can be published or shared, not built-in skills or skills added from GitHub. To publish a workspace skill, you need to be a workspace owner or member. ## Update a published skill The public page keeps the version you published. When you edit the skill afterwards, the library shows **Edited since you published it**: click **Manage**, then **Publish changes** to update the page. ## Unpublish a skill or hide it from search Click **Manage** next to **Published to web** and turn off **Publish to web**. The link stops working; copies people already added stay theirs. In the same window, **Search engine indexing** controls whether search engines can list the skill's page. The window also shows how many people added and used the skill. ## Publish a skill to the community skills page **Share with the community** sends your skill to Tella for review. Once approved, it's listed on [tella.com/skills](https://www.tella.com/skills) with your name, and anyone can use it in their Tella Agent chat. 1. Open the skill in the skill library. 2. Under its instructions, click **Share with the community**. 3. You'll see **Sent for review**. Nothing is public until Tella approves it. Once approved, the skill's instructions and files, including any videos, are public. Anyone can click **Copy** under **Use it in Tella** on its page and paste the ID into a chat, as described in [Use a community skill in one chat](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent#use-a-community-skill-in-one-chat). ## Update a skill on the community skills page Edit the skill in Tella, then click **Share with the community** again. It sends your latest version, which Tella reviews before the page changes. ## Which skills can be shared with the community? * **Skills written in Tella**, for example one you saved with **Save as skill** or asked the agent to create. Built-in skills and skills added from GitHub can't be shared. * **Skills you wrote.** Only the person who created a skill can share it, even if it's a workspace skill. * **Names without "tella", "official", "verified" or "staff".** Those are reserved; rename the skill to share it. * **Up to 25 MB in total**, with each file up to 10 MB. Before you share, check the skill doesn't include anything private: its instructions and every file, including reference videos and images, become public once approved. ## Publish to web or share with the community? Use **Publish to web** to hand a skill to specific people right away: it's live as soon as you turn it on, and you can unpublish it anytime. Use **Share with the community** when you want anyone browsing [tella.com/skills](https://www.tella.com/skills) to find it. You can do both for the same skill. # Show keystrokes on screen Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/show-keystrokes Turn on Keystrokes in Effect to show the keys you pressed over your screen recording. Works on recordings made with the Tella Mac app and on Auto Capture takes. Turn on **Keystrokes** in the editor's **Effect** sidebar to show the keys you pressed while recording, drawn over your screen recording as you typed them. It works on screen recordings made with the Tella Mac app, which capture your key presses alongside the video, and on [Auto Capture](/docs/help/integrations/auto-capture) takes, which record the keys the capture agent pressed. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvw3e2yz000r08jjgysygj9u/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvw3e2yz000r08jjgysygj9u/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Turn on keystrokes 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Effect** in the sidebar, or press `E`. 3. Scroll past **Cursor** and turn on **Keystrokes**. Keystrokes is a video-wide setting: the keys show on every clip whose screen recording has keystroke data, and in your shared and exported video. ## Why is the Keystrokes toggle greyed out? The toggle is greyed out when the selected clip's screen recording has no keystroke data. You'll see "No keystroke data in this recording. Recordings made with the Mac app or Auto Capture include it." * Only screen recordings made with the Tella Mac app and Auto Capture takes include keystroke data. Web recorder and Chrome extension recordings don't, and neither do uploaded videos. * An Auto Capture take leaves out what it typed from a saved login, so a password never appears. * Camera-only clips have no screen recording, so they don't show the Keystrokes settings. * If you see "Couldn't load the keystroke data.", click **Try again**. The Mac app needs macOS **Input Monitoring** permission to capture your key presses. If a Mac app recording has no keystroke data: 1. Open **System Settings** → **Privacy & Security** → **Input Monitoring**. 2. Turn on **Tella** (click **+** to add it if it isn't listed). 3. Quit and reopen Tella, then record again. Keystrokes can't be added to recordings made before the permission was on. ## Show keys in recordings made without the Mac app Web app, Chrome extension and Windows app recordings have no keystroke data. Run a keystroke visualizer such as **Keystroke Pro** while you record instead: it draws each key on your screen, so it's captured in the screen recording itself. ## Show only shortcuts or every key Use **Show** to choose which keys appear: * **Shortcuts**: only key combinations with a modifier, such as ⌘C or ⌃⇧T. Ordinary typing stays hidden. This is the default. Shift on its own doesn't make a shortcut: capital letters and symbols like ? count as typing and stay hidden. Shift still shows with other keys, as in ⇧Tab, ⇧→ or ⌘⇧Z. This matches the Mac app's **Shortcuts only** keystroke setting. * **All keys**: every key you pressed, including any text you typed. > [!WARNING] > > **All keys** shows everything you typed while recording, including text. Check the video for passwords or other private text before you share it. ## Show typing as words With **Show** set to **All keys**, use **Typing** to choose how text you typed appears: * **Keys**: each letter shows as its own keycap. This is the default. * **Words**: what you type builds up as text in one chip, so typing "hello" shows `h`, `he`, `hel` and so on. Space adds a space and Backspace removes the last letter. With **Words**, a pause in typing, Return, an arrow key or a shortcut ends the word. Shortcuts such as ⌘K, and keys you press on their own, still show as keycaps. Long text shows only its last 24 characters. ## Change how keystrokes look * **Style**: **Keys** shows each key as its own keycap; **Pill** shows the whole combination as text in one pill. * **Size**: drag the slider to make the keys smaller or larger. * **Colors**: pick the **Dark** or **Light** preset. * **Align**: place the keys on the **Left**, **Center**, or **Right**. * **Position**: set how far from the top of the video the keys sit, from 0% to 100%. ## Show Mac or Windows key names Expand **Advanced keystroke settings** and use **Labels** to choose the keyboard the keys are named for: * **macOS**: ⌘ ⌥ ⇧ ⌃. * **Windows**: Ctrl, Alt, Shift, Win. Tella starts with the keyboard your recording was made on. Auto Capture takes start with Windows key names. ## Change how long keys stay on screen In **Advanced keystroke settings**: * **Linger**: how long each key stays on screen, from 0.3 to 10 seconds. * **Animation**: how keys appear and disappear. * **Background**, **Key**, and **Text**: set your own colors for the container, the keycaps, and the key labels. # Show one word at a time in captions Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/show-one-word-at-a-time-in-captions Turn on Single-word captions under Active word in the subtitle Edit style panel to show only the word being spoken instead of multi-word lines. Turn on **Single-word captions** under **Active word** in **Subs** → **Edit style** to show only the word being spoken. Use them when you want fast, social-style captions instead of multi-word subtitle lines. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqqcy3b000j08l387a85u7x/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqqcy3b000j08l387a85u7x/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Turn on single-word captions 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Subs** in the toolbar, or press `S`. 3. Click the settings icon on your selected subtitle style. 4. Under **Active word**, turn on **Single-word captions**. Your editor preview updates immediately. The setting also applies to shared videos on devices that support styled subtitles and to exports with burned-in subtitles. On devices where the watch-page subtitle renderer is unavailable, viewers see the browser's default captions instead. See [Style subtitles](/docs/help/editing/style-subtitles#subtitles-on-shared-videos). To return to multi-word subtitle blocks, turn **Single-word captions** off. You can then use **Lines** under **Layout** to choose whether each block can span one, two, or three lines. > [!NOTE] > > **Single-word captions** and active-word effects are different. Single-word captions show one word at a time. The **Text**, **Background**, and **Fade the rest** effects keep the subtitle block visible while emphasizing the current word. # Shrink the camera during zooms Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/shrink-camera-during-zooms Turn on Shrink camera during zooms in Effect → Zooms → Advanced zoom settings to make the camera bubble smaller while the screen is zoomed in. Turn on **Shrink camera during zooms** in **Effect** → **Zooms** → **Advanced zoom settings** to make the camera bubble smaller while the screen is zoomed in, so the detail you are showing stays clear. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvjxyzha000708jsdfz04fx4/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvjxyzha000708jsdfz04fx4/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Turn on camera shrinking 1. Open a video that contains both a screen recording and a camera bubble. 2. Click **Effect** in the editor sidebar, or press `E`. 3. Under **Zooms**, expand **Advanced zoom settings**. 4. Turn on **Shrink camera during zooms**. The camera bubble automatically becomes smaller while a screen zoom is active, then returns to its layout size when the zoom ends. Its size change follows the zoom's **Intro** and **Outro**: **Smooth** animates it, while **Hard cut** changes it immediately. Set these separately by selecting the zoom card and expanding **Advanced**. See [Make a zoom smooth or a hard cut](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom#make-a-zoom-smooth-or-a-hard-cut). For smooth transitions, if you cut out footage during the zoom's entrance or exit, the camera's size transition continues smoothly across the cut instead of jumping. Your recording and layout stay unchanged. New Mac and Windows app recordings made with the **Animated** cursor start with this setting on, unless you turned it off in an earlier video. > [!NOTE] > > This setting has no visible effect on clips without a camera bubble. ## Change the setting on one clip Camera shrinking uses the video-wide setting by default. **Adjust this clip only** appears when your video has more than one clip. To change it for only the current clip: 1. Open **Effect** on that clip. 2. Under **Zooms**, expand **Advanced zoom settings**. 3. Turn on **Adjust this clip only**. 4. Turn **Shrink camera during zooms** on or off. Turn off **Adjust this clip only** to make the clip use the video-wide setting again. ## Keep the camera at the same size Turn off **Shrink camera during zooms** when the speaker should remain equally prominent throughout the video. You can also use [Layouts](/docs/help/editing/use-layouts) to change the camera's normal size and position. # Preview social safe zones Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/social-safe-zones Preview social safe zones on a 9:16 video from the canvas size menu, Setup, or Layout → Adjust to keep content clear of platform UI. Social safe zones overlay where Instagram Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts, or LinkedIn will place captions, buttons, and usernames on your 9:16 video, so you can keep important content clear of them. Turn them on from **Safe zones** in the canvas size menu below the video, or under **Social safe zones** in the **Setup** panel or **Layout** → **Adjust**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvltuln1004508id0s3vf7xe/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvltuln1004508id0s3vf7xe/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Which videos can use safe zones? Social safe zones are available only on portrait videos with a **9:16** canvas. If your video uses another aspect ratio, [change the canvas size](/docs/help/editing/change-canvas-size) to 9:16 first. ## Turn on social safe zones 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Click **Layout** in the sidebar. 3. Click **Adjust** in the panel header. 4. Under **Social safe zones**, turn the preview on. 5. Pick **Instagram Reels**, **TikTok**, **YouTube Shorts**, or **LinkedIn**. The same **Social safe zones** toggle also appears in the **Setup** panel for 9:16 videos. #### From the toolbar below the video 1. Click the canvas size control in the toolbar below the video. It shows the current ratio, **9:16**. 2. Hover **Safe zones** at the bottom of the menu. 3. Pick **Instagram**, **TikTok**, **YouTube Shorts**, or **LinkedIn**. A high-fidelity overlay appears on the canvas showing where the platform's UI will cover your video. The overlay fades while you interact with the canvas so it doesn't get in the way of editing. To switch platforms or hide the overlay, return to **Safe zones** in the canvas size menu, or **Social safe zones** in **Setup** or **Layout** → **Adjust**. In the canvas size menu, choose **Hide** to turn the overlay off. ## Are safe zones included in my export? No. Safe zones are a preview only and are never exported with your video. ## Where should I keep content in a vertical video? * Keep titles, faces, and key visuals inside the clear central area, away from the bottom action bar and the right-side buttons. * Switch between platforms to confirm your composition works everywhere you plan to post. # Add sound effects Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/sound-effects Add built-in or uploaded sound effects from the Sounds section of Overlay. They mix on top of your voiceover, and each has its own volume from 0 to 200%. Add a sound effect from the **Sounds** section of **Overlay** in the editor sidebar to drop a whoosh, click, sting, applause, or any audio clip at a specific point in your video. Your microphone audio keeps playing; the sound effect is mixed in alongside it. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqjy7l8009r08l99bm066wu/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqjy7l8009r08l99bm066wu/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Where to find sound effects 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Open **Overlay** in the sidebar, or press `V`. 3. Find the **Sounds** section. ## Add a sound effect 1. Move the playhead to where you want the sound to start. 2. Preview one of the suggested sounds with its play button, then click the tile to add it. Click **Browse all** to open the full library. 3. In the library, pick a sound: * Browse Tella's built-in sounds under **Default**. They're grouped into **Interface**, **Transitions**, **Reactions**, **Atmosphere**, and **Everyday**. * Choose an audio file from **Personal** or **Team**. **Personal** is selected by default and lists sounds added to the current video under **In this video**. * Upload an audio file or expand the Generate composer to create one with AI. Use the search control in the header to filter sounds by name or category. Starting a preview stops any other preview; click the separate play button to preview without adding the sound. The sound effect is placed on the timeline at the playhead, with its **waveform** shown on the segment. > [!NOTE] > > A selected time range wins over the playhead. If you have a range selected (on the timeline or in the transcript), the sound effect starts at the beginning of that range instead, and selecting several ranges adds one to each. Clear the selection first if you want the playhead to decide. > > A sound shorter than the range does **not** stretch to fill it: the card ends when the sound ends. A longer sound is trimmed to the range. > [!TIP] > > With the library open, you can **paste** a copied audio file (⌘V / Ctrl+V) to upload it to the current video's library. ## Drop audio onto the timeline Drag one or more audio files from your computer and drop them where you want them to start on the playbar, or on the timeline shown in **Cut**, **Effect**, **Overlay**, or **Layout**. Tella uploads each file, adds it to the current video's library, and places it as a sound effect at the drop point. When the uploads finish, the editor opens the Overlay sidebar and selects the first new sound effect. To reuse a sound in other videos, open its menu in the library and choose **Save to personal** or **Save to team**. > [!TIP] > > Drop a file on another clip's section of the playbar to add it to that clip. ## Set when it plays In the timeline: * Drag the **start** or **end** of the sound-effect card to change its duration. * Drag the card left or right to move it earlier or later. * Hold **Option** on Mac or **Alt** on Windows while dragging to turn snapping off. > [!TIP] > > The video preview follows the moving edge while you drag a duration handle, helping you line up the sound with the exact frame where it should start or stop. You can add several sound effects and overlap them. ## Duplicate a sound effect 1. Select the sound effect on the Overlay timeline. 2. Open the menu in the detail header and choose **Duplicate**. The copy keeps the same audio, source range, timing, and volume. It starts at the same point as the original, so move or retime it unless you want both copies to play together. ## Adjust the volume Each sound effect has its own volume control. Select the sound effect on the Overlay timeline, then drag the **Volume** slider in its detail view to set how loud it plays relative to your narration. The slider goes from 0 (silent) up to 200 %, so you can also boost a quiet sound above its original level. The default is 100 % (original volume). > [!NOTE] > > Sound effects are mixed on **top of** your microphone audio. Adding one never removes your voiceover. If a clip's own sound is too loud, turn the sound effect's volume down instead of re-recording. ## Edit or remove a sound effect * Select a sound effect on the Overlay timeline to open its preview, timing, and volume controls. * Click **Delete** below its settings to remove it. # Studio Voice (audio enhancement) Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/studio-voice-audio-enhancement Choose Low or High under Studio Voice in the editor's Audio panel to enhance your voice across the video, or Off to use your original audio. Turn on **Studio Voice** in the editor's **Audio** panel to enhance your voice with AI: it removes background noise, boosts the volume, and gives it a studio-quality finish across the whole video. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqko2xq000208l3hbic6t2q/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqko2xq000208l3hbic6t2q/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Which videos can use Studio Voice? You can use Studio Voice on any video that has a microphone recording: 1. Screen + camera 2. Camera-only 3. Screen-only (with microphone) Studio Voice can't be used on screen-only videos where you didn't also record your microphone. > [!NOTE] > > Studio Voice is also available for external video files that you upload to Tella. Just keep in mind that Studio Voice is optimized for enhancing speech and not other types of audio, e.g., music or sound effects. ## Turn on Studio Voice To enable Studio Voice, open a video in the editor, then click **Audio** in the left-hand toolbar. Under **Studio Voice**, choose **Low** or **High** from the dropdown. Tella starts generating an enhanced version of your audio. The dropdown is unavailable while your uploads are still processing. > [!NOTE] > > When you enable Studio Voice, you're enabling it for the entire video. So the audio for all the clips in your video will be enhanced. ## Choose a Studio Voice level The **Studio Voice** dropdown offers three options: * **Off** — "Your original audio": use your recording without Studio Voice enhancement. * **Low** — "Works in any room": the default enhancement level for new videos. * **High** — "Most natural with a good mic": try this when you have a good microphone and a clean recording. Switching between **Low** and **High** regenerates the enhanced audio using your chosen level. Try both to hear which works best for your voice. Existing videos keep their previous enhancement until you choose a different level. Older videos using the previous default show **High** when Studio Voice is on; their sound doesn't change automatically. > [!TIP] > > You can also set the level from the Public API or MCP server: pass `studioSoundLevel` (`off`, `low`, or `high`) when you create or update a video. See [update\_video](/docs/mcp-tools/videos#update_video). ## How long does Studio Voice take? Depending on the duration of your video, generating the enhanced audio can take a few minutes. While it's generating you won't be able to play or edit your video, but you can record or edit other videos while it generates in the background. You'll see **Enhancing audio…** under the dropdown. You can still choose a different level: Tella waits for the current enhancement to finish, then generates your latest selection. If you change your mind more than once, only the latest choice is queued. Once Tella generates the enhanced audio, the editor updates and uses it. Play the video to hear the difference. ![Screenshot 2025-08-21 at 13.54.05.png](https://mintcdn.com/tella/Isiu-Cd8qYEzKYhq/help/images/editing/screenshot-2025-08-21-at-13-54-05.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=Isiu-Cd8qYEzKYhq\&q=85\&s=89e00906f6d51d6f34591dbfc46d8c1e) ## Turn off Studio Voice Choose **Off** in the **Studio Voice** dropdown in the **Audio** panel to use your original audio. This takes effect immediately, even while enhancement is running, and clears any queued level change. The current enhancement still finishes in the background. Once enhancement finishes, choosing the same level again reuses its generated audio without waiting. Choosing a different level regenerates the enhancement. > [!NOTE] > > If the editor preview keeps playing the previous audio after you switch Studio Voice on or off, refresh the page. Your selection is saved and still applies when you share or export the video. ## Turn off Studio Voice for one clip If your video has more than one clip, you can keep Studio Voice on for the whole video but turn it off for individual clips. This is handy for clips that already sound the way you want, for example, ones with music, sound effects, or audio you'd rather leave untouched. With Studio Voice enabled, select the clip you want to change and open the Audio panel from the left-hand toolbar. Under **Studio Voice** you'll see a **Disable for this clip only** checkbox, shown only when the video has more than one clip. Tick it and that clip plays its original audio, while the rest of your video stays enhanced. Untick it to bring the enhanced audio back. ## Adding clips to a video with Studio Voice If you add new clips to a video with Studio Voice enabled, Tella automatically enhances them using the video's enhancement engine. You need to wait for Tella to generate the enhanced audio before you can edit, share, or export. ## Studio Voice in downloads Once Studio Voice finishes generating, Tella uses the enhanced audio when you share your video or download a regular video export. If you choose **Raw recordings with cuts (.zip)**, Tella also applies Studio Voice to the microphone audio while preserving your timeline cuts. Clips where you selected **Disable for this clip only** keep their original audio. > [!NOTE] > > The **Raw recordings (.zip)** option downloads the original, unedited source files, so editor audio processing such as Studio Voice is not applied. # Style subtitles Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/style-subtitles Turn on subtitles and pick a style in Subs (press S), then use Edit style to change size, position, lines, font, colors, background, background padding, outline, shadow, and active-word highlighting. Save styles as presets. Style subtitles in the editor's **Subs** panel (press `S`): turn them on, pick a style, then open **Edit style** to change the layout, font, colors, decorations, and active-word highlighting. Tella generates the subtitles from your transcript automatically. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvlzxkpg009908jw56675rf5/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvlzxkpg009908jw56675rf5/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Open subtitle styles 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Subs** in the toolbar, or press `S`. 3. Use the toggle beside **Subtitles** to enable them. 4. Choose a style under **Tella styles** to apply it immediately. 5. Click the settings icon on the selected style to open **Edit style**. ## Change the layout Under **Layout**, you can: * Drag **Size** or enter an exact size in pixels. * Adjust **Position** to move subtitles vertically. * Set **Lines** to **1**, **2**, or **3** for each subtitle block. The **Lines** setting is unavailable when **Single-word captions** is enabled. ## Customize the text Under **Text**, choose a font, weight, text color, and letter case. The font picker includes Tella fonts and any personal or workspace fonts you have uploaded. You can also save subtitle styles using the built-in Dela Gothic One, Lato, Georgia, and Arial fonts as presets. Changes appear in the **Preview** above the controls immediately. ## Make subtitles italic In **Edit style**, under **Text**, click the **Italic** button (the slanted **I**) beside the letter-case controls. Click it again to turn italics off. Italics apply to the whole subtitle track, not individual words. You can use them with any subtitle font, including uploaded custom fonts, and changing the font or weight keeps the italic setting. The italic style appears in the editor preview and burned-in exports. On shared videos, it appears when styled subtitles are supported, as described under [Subtitles on shared videos](#subtitles-on-shared-videos). ## Add decorations Under **Decoration**, turn **Background**, **Outline**, or **Shadow** on or off. When you enable an effect, you can also choose its color. The **Background color** picker also controls opacity. Tella applies the opacity you choose exactly, including a fully opaque background at 100%. With **Background** on, drag **Padding** to give the subtitle text more room inside its background. > [!NOTE] > > Existing subtitle styles keep their current background appearance. Choosing a new **Background color** applies the color and opacity shown in the picker. ## Highlight the active word Under **Active word**, choose how Tella emphasizes the word currently being spoken: * **None** applies no active-word effect. * **Text** changes the active word's color. * **Background** places a colored background behind the active word. * **Fade the rest** dims the other words. In multi-word captions, active-word color and dimming ease in and out rather than switching instantly. The background behind an active word shrinks and fades after that word ends. With **Text** active-word highlighting, the Backdrop style shows unspoken words at half opacity and brings them to full opacity as they are spoken; if you choose an active-word color, they also transition to that color. The base Backdrop style now has word highlighting enabled without a separate highlight color. You can also enable **Single-word captions** to show only the word being spoken. See [Show one word at a time in captions](/docs/help/editing/show-one-word-at-a-time-in-captions). ## Caption motion and existing videos Multi-word subtitle blocks spring into view and animate out in the Backdrop, Highlight, Mono, Cannes, and Classic styles. The Backdrop background also has smoothed corners. Single-word captions do not move between words. This motion applies to existing videos too: the next time you render or export one with burned-in subtitles, its captions will use the updated animation. On shared videos, styled subtitle playback depends on the viewer's device and browser, as described below. ## Save and reuse a style 1. Customize a subtitle style in **Edit style**. 2. Click **Save as preset**. 3. Return to the **Subtitles** panel and find it under **Your styles**. Open a saved style's **More actions** menu to **Customize**, **Rename**, **Duplicate**, or **Delete** it. Your saved styles are available in your other videos. ## Edit the subtitle text Click **Edit subtitles** at the top of the **Subtitles** panel. The editable subtitles open in the **Subtitles** view of the right-side **Script** panel. You can also open the **Script** panel, open its menu, and click **Subtitles**. See [Edit with the transcript](/docs/help/editing/edit-the-transcript-of-a-tella-video#edit-the-subtitle-text) for more. To control where subtitle blocks start, [split a block with Enter or join blocks with Backspace](/docs/help/editing/edit-the-transcript-of-a-tella-video#split-a-subtitle-block). These controls work on the original spoken-language subtitles, without changing word timing. ## Subtitles on shared videos On the video watch page and in embedded videos, subtitles use the same drawing style as burned-in subtitles in an export when your viewer's browser and device support hardware WebGPU. If the subtitle renderer is unavailable or fails (including when the selected font cannot load), viewers see the video's caption track in their browser's default caption style instead. Your chosen font, colors, and active-word effects won't appear in that fallback. On iPhone and iPad, viewers always see the video's caption track in the browser's default caption style, both inline and in fullscreen. Styled subtitles still appear in burned-in exports. When subtitles are on by default, the watch page starts loading the subtitle renderer after the page loads and the browser is idle. If a viewer starts playback before it's ready, subtitles appear once the styled renderer is ready; the browser's default captions do not appear temporarily during loading. Viewers can still turn subtitles on or off in the player. # Create motion graphics with Tella Motion Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/tella-motion Add a Tella Motion clip from Add clip, then ask the Tella Agent to build animated titles, shapes and graphics in it, or as overlays and b-roll. Tella Motion adds animated graphics to your video: title cards, animated text, shapes and motion designs. To start one, choose **Add clip → New Tella Motion clip** under the timeline, then describe what you want to the Tella Agent and it builds it. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqm19nl004502mocdcg0y72/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqm19nl004502mocdcg0y72/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Add a Tella Motion clip 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Add clip** at the end of the clips under the preview. 3. Choose **New Tella Motion clip**. Tella adds a blank 10-second clip named "Tella Motion" plus a number at the end of your video and opens it. Tella Motion clips have a rose card in the clip list, so you can tell them apart from your recorded clips. ## Build it with the Tella Agent With the Tella Motion clip selected, describe what it should show in the Tella Agent chat on the right of the editor. For example: * "Make an intro title card that says 'Quarterly update' and fades in word by word." * "Add a dark background with three animated bullet points about our new features." * "Make the title bigger and slow down the animation." The agent edits the clip while you watch, and you can keep asking for changes until it looks right. See [Edit with the Tella Agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) to open the chat. ## Add motion graphics over your recording You don't need a separate clip to use Tella Motion. Ask the agent to add a Tella Motion overlay or b-roll to one of your recorded clips, for example "Add an animated lower third with my name when I first appear" or "Show an animated chart while I talk about revenue." It plays over your recording or in place of it, timed to what you say. ## What you can do in a Tella Motion clip A Tella Motion clip plays its own animation instead of a recording, so it has no transcript, layouts or cuts. You can still add overlays on top of it. * In the toolbar on the left, **Setup**, **Library** and **Overlay** work. The other tools show "Not available in a Tella Motion clip". * Click **Overlay** to add images, videos and text on top of the animation. They're timed from the start of the clip and appear above it in your shared and exported video. * Use the playbar under the preview to play the clip or click to jump to a moment. * Open the clip's menu in the clip list to **Rename**, **Duplicate** or **Delete** it, or drag it to move it. * Open **Setup** to play the whole video, Tella Motion clips included. > [!TIP] > > Tella Motion clips play in your shared and exported video like any other clip. ## Build Tella Motion from your own AI agent or code AI agents connected to the [Tella MCP server](/docs/mcp-server), and scripts using the [Tella API](/docs/introduction), can build Tella Motion clips, overlays and b-roll with the same commands the Tella Agent uses. See [Tella Motion](/docs/mcp-tools/motion) in the developer docs for the tools, endpoints and every command they take. # Add text to your video Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/text-overlays Add editable text from Overlay, then customize its font, color, outline, shadow, background, timing, and fade. Add text from the **Text** section of **Overlay** in the editor sidebar to place a title, label, caption, emoji, or callout directly on top of your recording. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvi4llqo002c02mea4uifxk9/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvi4llqo002c02mea4uifxk9/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Add text 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Move the playhead to where you want the text to appear. 3. Open **Overlay** in the sidebar, or press `V`. 4. Under **Text**, click a text style, or click the plus button for the default style. 5. Type your text directly on the canvas. The new text layer starts at the playhead, selects itself, and appears on the timeline. To change its text later, double-click it on the canvas. Click **Browse all** to see every saved text style. > [!NOTE] > > A selected time range wins over the playhead. If you have a range selected (on the timeline or in the transcript), the text spans that range instead, and selecting several ranges adds one text layer to each. Clear the selection first if you want the playhead to decide. ## Position, rotate, and resize it New text boxes hug their contents and grow as you type. * Drag the text box on the canvas to move it, or select it and press the arrow keys to move it one pixel at a time (10 pixels with **Shift**). * Drag a side handle to set a wrapping width. * Drag a corner handle to scale the box and its font together. * Drag the rotation handle above the text box to rotate it. Unselected text boxes have no visible border. Click the text to select it and show the resize controls. ## Change the style Select the text layer on the canvas or Overlay timeline. Its detail view groups controls under **Text**, **Decoration**, and **Animation**. Change the color, font, size, letter spacing, and horizontal alignment under Text. Fonts that support it also include weight and width controls. **Letter spacing** sets the space between letters, as a percentage of the font size. Drag it below 0% to pull letters closer together, or above 0% to spread them out. A text box that fits its text resizes to match. ## Switch a text's style to another preset You can restyle text you already added without re-adding or retyping it. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmw27dz0v007g08idcbat5ror/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmw27dz0v007g08idcbat5ror/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) 1. Select the text layer on the canvas or Overlay timeline. 2. At the top of **Text** in its detail view, click one of the four presets in the row. The text takes that style right away. 3. To see every preset, click **View all**. The **Presets** menu opens beside the panel, with your saved presets under **Your styles** first, then **Styles**. The menu stays open after each pick, so you can click through presets to preview them on your text. If the current preset isn't one of the first four, it takes the last slot in the row. With several text layers selected, picking a preset restyles all of them, and one undo reverts it. Presets under **Text** in **Overlay** and in **Browse all** still add a new text layer. ## Save and reuse a text style [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwe44m600se08jsgvuh2y5z/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwe44m600se08jsgvuh2y5z/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) 1. Select a text layer on the timeline after customizing its font, size, letter spacing, color, alignment, background, padding, and outline. 2. Open the three-dots menu in the selected layer's detail-panel header. 3. Select **Save as preset**. Your preset appears first in **Text** under **Overlay**, with a name such as **Style 1**. Click it to add a new text layer with the saved style. Hover over a saved preset and open its three-dots menu to **Rename** or **Delete** it. Preset tiles in **Text** and **Browse all** preview your saved font, weight, and width, including uploaded fonts. You can compare styles before adding a text layer, even when that font isn't already used in your video. Saved presets are personal to you in the current workspace. They sync to your account, so you can use them when you sign in from another browser or device. When a text layer uses one of your saved styles, **Save as preset** is hidden to avoid saving a duplicate. Instead, its detail-panel menu offers **Rename style**, **Update style**, and **Delete style**. These saved-style actions aren't available for built-in styles. ## Rename a saved text style Hover over a saved preset under **Text** in **Overlay** or in the text styles library, open its three-dots menu, and choose **Rename**. Type the new name, then press **Enter** or click away to save it. You can also rename a saved style from a selected text layer: 1. Select a text layer that uses your saved style. The detail-panel header shows the style's name. 2. Open the three-dots menu in that header and choose **Rename style**. 3. Type the new name, then press **Enter** or click away to save it. ## Update a saved text style 1. Add a text layer from a saved preset, or save a layer using **Save as preset**. 2. Customize the layer's text styling. Its panel keeps the saved style's name, and the preview shows **Edited**. 3. Open the three-dots menu in the detail-panel header and choose **Update style**. This replaces the saved preset's look with the selected layer's current styling for reuse. **Update style** is disabled while the layer still matches the saved style. > [!NOTE] > > The editor remembers which saved style a layer came from only until you reload. After reloading, it recognizes saved styles by matching the layer's current look. To update a style from an edited layer, do so before reloading. ## Delete a saved text style 1. Select a text layer that uses one of your saved styles. 2. Open the three-dots menu in its detail-panel header. 3. Select **Delete style**. The style is deleted immediately, without a confirmation step. Your text layer keeps its appearance; deleting the saved style does not delete the layer. The panel title returns to **Text**, and the saved-style actions disappear. ## Copy styling from one text layer to another 1. Right-click a text layer on the canvas or timeline and choose **Copy properties**. 2. Right-click the text layer you want to change and open **Paste properties**. 3. Choose what to paste: * **All properties**: everything below at once. * **Style**: font, weight, width, size, letter spacing, color, alignment, background, shape, padding, outline, and shadow. * **Size and position**: the box, position, and rotation. A text box that hugs its text keeps doing so. * **Animation**: the intro and outro transition and animation. You can also open the three-dots menu in a selected text layer's detail-panel header and choose **Copy style** or **Paste style**. Both menus share one clipboard. A paste is a single step, so one undo reverts it. ## Add an outline 1. Select the text layer on the canvas or Overlay timeline. 2. Under **Decoration**, turn on **Outline**. 3. Use **Outline color** to change the outline from its default black. The outline follows the letters, with or without a background box. Turn **Outline** off to remove it. ## Add a shadow Select the text layer, then use **Shadow** under **Decoration** to choose None, Subtle, or Deep. Without a background, the letters and their outline cast the shadow. With a background, the box casts the shadow instead. Choose None to remove it. ## Add a background box 1. Select the text layer on the canvas or Overlay timeline. 2. Turn on the **Background** toggle. 3. Pick a **Background color** for the box. 4. Choose a **Shape**: Square, Round, or Squircle. 5. Drag **Padding** to give the text more room inside the box. A box that fits its text grows to make room. Turn the **Background** toggle off again to remove the box. The **Background color**, **Shape**, and **Padding** controls only appear while the toggle is on. **Shadow** remains available with or without a background. ## Upload your own font 1. Select a text layer and open the **Font** picker. 2. Click **Upload** beside **Personal** or your workspace name. 3. Choose one or more `.ttf` or `.otf` font files. Each file must be 20 MB or smaller. Select all the weights you want from a family in the same upload. Files with the same family name in their font metadata become one library entry. For example, uploading Light, Regular, and Bold files together creates one family with three weights. Italic files appear as a separate entry. The first uploaded font is selected after the upload finishes. Personal fonts are available to you, while workspace fonts are shared with your workspace. Select an uploaded family with multiple weights to show the **Weight** control under **Text**. Its stops match the weights you uploaded; values between them use the matching available face, not a newly generated weight. The family starts at Regular when available, or the available weight matched to 400 otherwise. Single-file fonts have no weight control, and uploaded fonts have no width control. > [!NOTE] > > A video can use up to 16 uploaded font entries, with up to 16 weight files per family. All font files used in the video count toward the combined 50 MB limit. Uploading more weights later creates a new entry rather than adding them to an existing family. If you select two files with the same family and weight in one upload, the second is skipped and reported. If some files fail to upload, the successful files are still saved and the picker lists the files that failed. To remove an uploaded font from a library, open the font picker and click the delete button beside it. Workspace Owners and Members can upload and delete workspace fonts. Viewers can use workspace fonts, but can only upload or delete fonts in their Personal library. ## Set when it appears In the timeline: * Drag the start or end of the text card to change its duration. * Drag the card left or right to move it earlier or later. * Hold **Option** on Mac or **Alt** on Windows while dragging to turn snapping off. Card edges snap to nearby card edges, the playhead, and word boundaries, and the video preview follows the moving edge so you can land on the exact frame. You can add several text layers and overlap them freely. See [Work with the multi-track timeline](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline) for selecting, splitting, and copying cards. ## Animate the text in and out [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwe4b6e001f07kz10h97lqm/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwe4b6e001f07kz10h97lqm/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) By default, text appears and disappears instantly. To animate it: 1. Select the text layer on the canvas or Overlay timeline. 2. Under **Animation** → **Animate**, click the **In** or **Out** row. 3. Choose a preset: **Appear**, **Fade**, **Slide** (up, down, left, or right), **Mask** (up or down), **Grow**, **Shrink**, or **Blur**. Switch between **Whole** and **Text** at the top of the preset picker. **Whole** animates the entire text box; **Text** animates its **Letters**, **Words**, or **Lines** one after another, and you can combine both. After you pick a preset, fine-tune it under **Timing** (duration, acceleration, delay) and **Motion** (move, rotate, scale, opacity, blur, **Clip to box**, and **Motion blur**). Changing a motion value turns the preset into **Custom**. ## Duplicate, reorder, or remove text layers * Select the text layer, open the menu in the detail header, and choose **Duplicate**. The copy keeps the same text, style, position, size, timing, and animation. * Right-click a text layer on the canvas and choose **Send to front** or **Send to back** to place it above or below other visual overlays. * On a clip with a camera recording, set **Depth** to **Behind presenter** to put the text behind you, so you appear in front of it. See [Put overlays behind the presenter](/docs/help/editing/overlays-behind-the-presenter). * Select the text layer and click **Delete** below its settings to remove it. ## Add text as a graphic For a designed title card, logo lockup, or other graphic that you already created elsewhere, you can add the text as an image: 1. Create your text as an image in a design tool, or [generate media with AI](/docs/help/editing/use-media#generate-media-with-ai). 2. In the **Overlay** sidebar, choose an item under **Media**, or click **Browse all** to upload the image. 3. Move and resize it on the canvas, then adjust its timing in the timeline. Image overlays are not editable as text. See [Add media overlays](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays) for more details. ## Show a full title card with Media Use [Media (B-roll)](/docs/help/editing/use-media) when you want a title card or graphic to become the main content of a layout section instead of floating above the recording. Your camera can remain visible in a bubble while the title card fills the rest of the canvas. ## Other ways to add words * **Subtitles:** automatic captions that you can style and edit. See [Style subtitles](/docs/help/editing/style-subtitles) and [Edit with the transcript](/docs/help/editing/edit-the-transcript-of-a-tella-video). * **Chapters:** label sections so viewers can navigate your video. See [Chapters](/docs/help/editing/chapters). * **Your logo:** add a persistent logo with [custom branding](/docs/help/editing/add-your-logo-to-videos). # Translate subtitles into another language Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/translate-subtitles Translate subtitles from the Subtitle language menu in the editor's Subtitles panel: choose Add translation. Paid plans only, up to 10 languages per video; viewers pick a language on your shared video. Translate subtitles from the **Subtitle language** menu in the editor's **Subtitles** panel: choose **Add translation**, and viewers can then choose a language when watching your shared video. Translated subtitles are available on paid plans, with up to 10 languages per video. [https://www.tella.tv/video/how-to-translate-subtitles-0l94/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/how-to-translate-subtitles-0l94/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Add a subtitle translation 1. Open your video in the editor and click **Subs** in the sidebar (or press `S`). The subtitle style settings open on the left, and the **Subtitles** panel with your subtitle text opens on the right of the video. 2. In the **Subtitles** panel on the right, open the **Subtitle language** menu at the top (the language icon followed by the current language code, such as **EN (Global)**) and choose **Add translation**. 3. Search for a language and select it. Tella generates the translated track; its status appears in the menu while it processes. 4. Select the language in the menu to review its subtitles. You can edit the translated text in the panel. You can add up to 10 subtitle languages to a video. To refresh a track after changing the original subtitles, open that language's options and choose **Regenerate out of date** (shown as **Regenerate** when the track is up to date). You can also **Download SRT**, **Download WebVTT**, or **Delete language** from the same menu. ## Choose which language viewers see In your video's **Viewer settings** (in the **More** menu at the top of the editor), use **Subtitle language** to choose the track viewers start with. **Viewer's language** selects a track based on their language; viewers can still switch tracks themselves. This setting appears once a translation is ready. ## Export translated subtitles Click **Download** in the editor. When your video has a finished translation and **Subtitles** isn't set to **None**, the export dialog offers **Subtitle language** so you can choose the original or a translated track for subtitles in your download. To download a translated subtitle file directly, use **Download SRT** or **Download WebVTT** from that language's options in the **Subtitles** panel. ## Does Transcript language translate my video? No. **Transcript language** tells Tella which language was spoken in the recording; it does not translate the audio or the editing transcript. Set it to the spoken language, then use **Add translation** for subtitles in another language. See [Retranscribe a video](/docs/help/editing/retranscribe-a-video) if the spoken language was detected incorrectly. # Cut and split clips Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/trim-and-split-clips Click Cut in the editor's left toolbar (or press C) to trim a clip's start or end, drag across a range and press Delete to remove it, or press X to split at the playhead. Cuts are non-destructive and can be undone. The **Cut** tool in the editor's left toolbar (shortcut `C`) lets you trim the beginning or end of a clip, remove unwanted ranges by selecting them and pressing **Delete**, and split content at the playhead with **Split** or `X`. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmv95zkhx000102nk3k8o2dff/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmv95zkhx000102nk3k8o2dff/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Open the Cut tool 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Cut** in the left toolbar, or press `C`. The Cut timeline starts in a compact view with removed ranges collapsed. Open **More actions → Show cuts** to see the full source, with removed waveform and transcript content dimmed. Outside the Cut tool, the timeline shows only the content that remains in the video. ## Trim the start or end 1. Move to the beginning or end of the clip. 2. Drag the edge handle inward. 3. Use the live preview and audio waveforms to choose the exact frame. While you drag, the video previews the moving trim edge while the red playhead stays parked at your original position. When you release the handle, the preview returns to the playhead. > [!TIP] > > For precise trimming, click a start or end handle, then press the left or right arrow key. Each press moves the handle by one pixel at your current timeline zoom. Hold **Shift** while pressing an arrow key to move it by 10 pixels. If a scene has multiple audio sources, such as a camera microphone and screen audio, their waveforms are overlaid on the timeline. Repeat these steps for each clip you want to trim. ## Navigate and select on the Cut timeline * Click the timeline to move the playhead. Hover over the waveform or transcript to preview a frame before clicking. * Drag the red playhead to scrub through your video. It snaps to nearby clip edges so you can place it precisely on a cut. * While you drag the playhead, you hear the audio under it at the speed you drag, so you can find a word or a pause by ear. Drag backward to hear it in reverse. The voice keeps its pitch, and holding the playhead still is silent. * Drag across the waveform to select any time range, or click and drag across transcript words to select whole words. While you drag across the waveform, the video previews the moving edge while the red playhead stays parked. When you release, the playhead moves to the start of the selection. * Hold **Shift** and drag to add more ranges. **Shift + click** extends the current range instead. * Drag inside a selected range to move it, or drag either edge to resize it. Touching or overlapping ranges merge automatically. * Hold **Option** on Mac or **Alt** on Windows while dragging to turn snapping off. * Scroll to pan. Hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows and scroll to zoom around your pointer. **Shift + scroll** over the timeline zooms too. * Press **Escape** to clear the current selection. Selections and trim edges snap to useful points such as word boundaries and the parked playhead. When cuts are hidden, click a cut marker to zoom into it. At a closer zoom, click the pin labeled **Click to undo…** to restore that individual cut or split. ## Remove a range from the middle 1. Drag across the unwanted range in the Cut timeline or Script panel. 2. Click **Delete** in the Cut toolbar, or press **Backspace** or **Delete** on your keyboard. Tella cuts the selected range from the video. You can also move the playhead and click **Split** (or press **X**) to add a boundary before selecting and deleting a segment. A split needs at least 0.2 seconds of content on each side. If the playhead is closer than that to another split or to the clip's start or end, Tella doesn't add the split and shows a warning; move the playhead further away and try again. If you click a segment to select it and delete it, Tella highlights the next remaining segment (or the last one if there is no next segment), as long as more than one remains. You can press **Delete** again to remove the highlighted segment. > [!NOTE] > > A cut or trim must leave some playable content in the clip. If an edit would remove the entire clip, Tella keeps the clip unchanged and shows **This cut would leave nothing playable in the clip**. Delete the clip from the main timeline instead if you do not want it in your video. ## Remove multiple ranges at once 1. Drag across the first unwanted range in the timeline or transcript. 2. Hold **Shift** and drag across another range. Your first selection stays highlighted. 3. Repeat the Shift-drag gesture for any other ranges you want to remove. 4. Click **Delete**. Tella removes every selected range in one undoable action. > [!TIP] > > On the timeline, drag inside a selected range to move it, or drag either edge to resize it. While you resize a range, the video preview follows the moving edge but the playhead stays parked where you left it. If selected ranges overlap, Tella combines them into one range. ## Right-click menu and Cut toolbar actions Right-click a selected range to choose: * **Add layout:** create layout sections from eligible selected ranges. * **Add zoom:** add a zoom to eligible screen recordings or uploaded videos. * **Add blur** or **Add highlight:** add that effect to the range, when the clip supports them. * **Add overlay:** add **Text**, **Media**, or a **Sound effect** over the range. * **Cut selection:** remove the selected range. * **Copy to new clip:** add the selected content to this video as a separate clip. * **Copy to new video:** create a separate video from the selected content. This is the same menu you get in the Layout, Effect, and Overlay timelines. See [Right-click a selected range](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline#right-click-a-selected-range). When you add layouts from a selection, each eligible range becomes one new layout section that spans exactly that range and replaces any part of an existing layout it covers. Adding layouts to several ranges undoes as one action, and Tella switches you to the Layout timeline. Creating zooms switches you to the Effect timeline. Every selected range must be at least one second, and the new zooms trim, split, or replace overlapping zooms so they do not overlap. > [!NOTE] > > **Copy to new clip** and **Copy to new video** use the primary selected range. Media, text, and sound-effect overlays appear only where they overlap that range. If one is entirely outside it, it stays hidden unless you restore the cut content. Blur and highlight timing is unchanged. > > **Cut selection**, **Add zoom**, and **Add layout** can use every selected range. The Cut toolbar also includes: * **Split** or **X**: add a split at the playhead. * **Delete** or the **Backspace/Delete** key: remove the selected ranges or segment. * **More actions → Show cuts / Hide cuts:** choose whether removed ranges are visible in the Cut timeline. * **More actions → Reset all cuts:** restore all content removed with the Cut tool. Click **Undo** in the confirmation message if you want to bring the cuts back. ## Split one clip into two clips [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwgbcf101n607jngb3s5r57/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwgbcf101n607jngb3s5r57/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) This action creates two independent clips that you can reorder, delete, or place other clips between. It is different from adding a cut boundary in the Cut timeline. 1. Select the clip you want to split. 2. Move the playhead to the split point. 3. Open the clip's menu and choose **Split at current time**. Each half keeps its recording, transcript, subtitle edits, zooms, and layout. Subtitles remain available immediately after the split. Zooms, blurs, highlights, text, and images that span the split point are divided, so each half keeps its side. A video, audio, or sound effect overlay that spans the split plays in the first clip up to the split, then carries on in the second clip from where it stopped instead of starting over. Press **Cmd + Z** (Mac) or **Ctrl + Z** (Windows) to undo it. You can split anywhere at least 0.2 seconds from the clip's start or end. ## Tips * **Split shortcut:** `X` and **Cmd + B** (Mac) both split at the playhead. * **Zoom for precision:** Use the Cut timeline's zoom controls to inspect smaller ranges. * **No audio:** If a clip has no audio, the Cut panel says **This clip has no audio**. You can still trim and cut it with the timeline. * **Remove silences and filler words:** Use Tella's dedicated tools to remove pauses or filler words automatically. # Use an ambient background Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/use-an-ambient-background The Ambient background, under Animated in the editor's Style panel, fills your background with a heavily blurred copy of your own screen recording, or your camera when there's no screen. The **Ambient** background fills the background of your video with a heavily blurred, moving copy of your own screen recording, or your camera when no screen is showing, so the colors around your content always match what's on screen. You'll find it under **Background** in the editor's **Style** panel, on the **Animated** tab. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvjuod17001002nxcc9yhfkd/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvjuod17001002nxcc9yhfkd/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Turn on the ambient background 1. Open your video in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Style** in the toolbar, or press `B`. 3. Under **Background**, open the **Animated** tab. 4. Click **Ambient**. Hover over a thumbnail to see its name. You can also click **Browse all** next to **Background**, open **Animated**, and pick **Ambient**, the first option under **Tella**. ## What does the ambient background show? It shows the recordings in the current clip, blurred until only their colors remain: * **Screen recording:** while your screen is visible, the background follows it. * **Camera:** when the screen is hidden, for example in a camera-only layout, the background shows your camera instead. * **No recordings:** a clip without a screen or camera recording gets a black background. The background moves with your recording, so it changes as your screen or camera changes. You see it wherever your layout leaves the canvas uncovered, such as the padding around your screen recording. ## Use the ambient background on one clip only In **Style**, open the **⋯** menu beside the background controls and select **Apply to this clip only**, then pick **Ambient**. The other clips keep their own background. This option appears only when your video has more than one clip. Each clip's ambient background uses that clip's own recordings, so it also works when you apply it to every clip. For every other kind of background, see [Change the background](/docs/help/editing/pick-a-background). # Generate auto layouts Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/use-auto-layouts Auto Layouts, in the editor's Layout panel, has the Tella Agent add a sequence of layouts to a clip in an editing style picked for your content. It uses Credits. Auto Layouts, in the editor's **Layout** panel, analyzes a clip's transcript and video and adds a sequence of layouts (camera bubbles, screen-only beats, camera cutaways, side-by-side splits, and TV-presenter compositions) in an editing style that fits your content. It works on one clip at a time. The [Tella Agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent) does the work, so each generation uses [Credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits). [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqmsscr004202pc5l3699bu/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqmsscr004202pc5l3699bu/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## How to generate auto layouts 1. Open a clip in the editor and go to the **Layout** section. ![1 2.png](https://mintcdn.com/tella/Isiu-Cd8qYEzKYhq/help/images/editing/1-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=Isiu-Cd8qYEzKYhq\&q=85\&s=49b701e369dd757fe960a501f5636d92) 2. At the bottom of the panel, next to **Auto Layouts**, click **Generate**. Tella picks the editing style based on the content of your clip, so there's no style to choose first. ![3 1.png](https://mintcdn.com/tella/Isiu-Cd8qYEzKYhq/help/images/editing/3-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=Isiu-Cd8qYEzKYhq\&q=85\&s=552879f1ac7ee946d5236f9f2dec423a) The Tella Agent chat opens with a request for auto layouts on your clip, and the agent applies the layouts as it works. ![3 2.png](https://mintcdn.com/tella/Isiu-Cd8qYEzKYhq/help/images/editing/3-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=Isiu-Cd8qYEzKYhq\&q=85\&s=91a9da1fd4bcfb3d509a748f4825568d) 3. Wait for the generation to complete. 4. Review the result. The new layouts show on the clip in the timeline, and the agent's reply in the chat lists what it changed. ## What can I do after generating? Once auto layouts finishes, you can: * Click **Generate** again for an alternative take, or tell the agent in the chat what didn't work well and it adjusts the layouts * Delete individual layouts while keeping the rest * Adjust the start and end of any layout * Undo or redo. You're never locked in * Windows: `Ctrl + Z` to undo, `Ctrl + Y` to redo * macOS: `Cmd + Z` to undo, `Cmd + Shift + Z` or `Cmd + Y` to redo ## Does auto layouts use credits? Yes. Auto layouts runs through the [Tella Agent](/docs/help/editing/edit-with-the-tella-agent), so every generation and regeneration spends your workspace's [Credits](/docs/help/billing/ai-credits), the same as sending the agent a message. The round credits icon next to the **Auto Layouts** title marks this. Hover over it to see your workspace's balance, for example **Requires credits: 2,300 available**. If your workspace is out of credits, the agent can't run auto layouts until a workspace owner adds more or your monthly allowance resets. You can still add and edit layouts by hand. ## Which editing styles are available? Tella picks one of these styles for you based on what you say and show. Each style is tuned for a different kind of content and a different canvas, and the styles available depend on your clip's recording type and canvas size. * **Demo:** high-energy proof + commentary; mixes screen reveals, camera cutaways, and punch-ins for product walkthroughs, page critiques, and feature launches * **Tutorial:** procedural, step-by-step instruction where the viewer needs to follow exact clicks, typing, and configuration * **Presentation:** speaker-led talks, pitches, recaps, and lessons; includes a hosted **TV show** variant on landscape canvases that frames the speaker like a presenter * **Intro & Outro:** only bookends the clip with a camera-led intro and outro and leaves the middle untouched ## Image B-roll Auto layouts doesn't add AI-generated image B-roll. To cut away to an image or video, [add media (B-roll)](/docs/help/editing/use-media) to any layout after generating. ## Which recordings and canvas sizes are supported? Auto layouts works with: * **Landscape (16:9):** two-track (camera + screen), screen-only, and camera-only recordings * **Portrait (9:16):** two-track, screen-only, and camera-only recordings * **Square (1:1) and round:** two-track and camera-only recordings The available editing styles and compositions adapt to the canvas, for example, portrait clips use a presenter-forward split, and landscape presentations can use the TV-presenter framing. ## Best practices * **Start with a clean slate:** auto layouts works best on raw, unedited recordings * **Crop first:** if you need to crop your screen, do it before running auto layouts * **One clip at a time:** generate layouts per clip; layouts won't generate across an entire video in one pass ## What to expect * **Variability:** each generation can produce slightly different results; regenerate to find the version you like * **Pacing:** overrides are used as exceptions to the base layout, so most of the clip stays on the base composition with timed accents around important moments * **Processing time:** longer clips take longer to generate ## What are the limits of auto layouts? * Make all crop changes before running auto layouts. Cropping afterwards affects every layout and can produce unexpected results * After cropping, you can't update the generated layouts # Use the Blob camera style Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/use-blob-camera-style Choose Blob under Camera style in Customize layout for a camera frame that wobbles and expands toward your gestures, with an optional outline. **Blob** gives your camera a softly wobbling frame that expands toward your gestures, such as a waved hand or a leaning head. Choose it under **Camera style** in **Layout** → **Customize layout**. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvwax4il006608kzdh64gih5/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvwax4il006608kzdh64gih5/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Change your camera to Blob 1. Open a video with a camera recording and select the clip you want to change. 2. Click **Layout** in the editor sidebar and choose a layout with a camera bubble, such as **Camera Bubble**. 3. Open **Customize layout**. 4. Under **Camera style**, choose **Blob**. Hover over the shape buttons to see their names. 5. Play your video to see the frame move and expand with your gestures. You can also right-click your camera on the canvas and choose **Shape** → **Blob**. The change applies to the current layout section. Blob needs a camera layer. A screen recording or an uploaded video with your camera already baked into it does not have a separate camera layer to reshape. ## Add an outline to the Blob frame After choosing **Blob**, turn on **Outline** beneath **Camera style** in **Customize layout**. Turn it off to return to the Blob frame without an outline. ## Return to another camera shape Under **Camera style**, choose another shape, such as **Circle**, **Square**, **Landscape**, or **Portrait**. You can also right-click your camera and choose the shape from **Shape**. For a camera with no frame and no background, choose [**Cut-out**](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background) instead. # Add a border or shadow Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/use-borders Choose a border or shadow and a corner shape under Border style and Shape in the editor's Style panel (press O). Snake adds an animated streak around your camera frame. Choose a border or shadow under **Border style**, and a corner shape under **Shape**, in the editor's **Style** panel. The **Snake** style adds an animated streak around your camera frame. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq7sgb0000108jnev9ggaha/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq7sgb0000108jnev9ggaha/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Where are the border settings? 1. **Open your video** in the Tella editor. 2. Click **Style** in the toolbar (or press **B**). 3. Click the **Border style** row to open the border options. You can also press **O** to jump straight to it (as long as you're not typing in a text field). ## Which border styles and shapes are there? In the **Border style** panel, you'll see two sets of options: **Style** * **None**: Removes any border or shadow styling from your video. * **Subtle shadow**: Adds a soft shadow, making your video pop against the background. * **Deep shadow**: A stronger version of the shadow effect. * **Transparent**: Introduces a semi-transparent border for subtle separation. * **Solid shadow**: Draws a solid black border around your video with a bold, offset black shadow. Select it, then use **Direction** to place the shadow on the left or right. * **Snake**: Sends a glowing streak around your camera frame over a muted ring. In a screen-and-camera layout, the streak follows the camera, while the screen keeps a subtle shadow. It also works on camera-only clips. On a screen-only clip, there is no camera to circle, so the clip keeps a subtle shadow instead. * **Glass**: Adds a liquid-glass border to your screen or camera frame. Select it, then adjust **Intensity** for a lighter or stronger glass effect. Select **Snake** to open its controls: **Color**, **Thickness**, **Glow**, **Pulse length** (how much of the frame the streak covers), and **Pulse lap time** (how long it takes to circle the frame). The streak uses a lighter tint of the color you choose. Switching to another style and back restores your last Snake settings. The style thumbnails preview your selected shape and show how each border or shadow will look. **Shape** * **Square**: Hard angles, no corner rounding. * **Round**: Softly rounded corners. * **Squircle**: A smoother, iOS-style corner curve. You can mix and match different styles and shapes to achieve the desired effect. > [!NOTE] > > Tella remembers the last shape you selected and applies it to new layouts, including layouts that ask you to choose Media first. It also remembers your selected border style for new videos and recordings, including co-recordings. Existing videos keep their own settings. ## Use a different border on one clip By default, the border style and shape you choose apply to every clip in your video. This keeps the video's look consistent when you change either setting. To give one clip a different look, open the **⋯** menu beside the **Border style** or **Shape** heading and select **Apply to this clip only**. These options are independent, so a clip can have its own border style while still following the video's shape, or the other way around. While it is on, an **Apply to this clip only** checkbox appears below that setting. Uncheck it to make the setting follow the rest of the video again. The option appears only when your video has more than one clip. # Choose a layout Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/use-layouts A layout is where your camera and screen sit on the canvas. Pick one under Layout in the editor sidebar; the presets depend on what the clip contains. Right-click a gap in the layout timeline and choose Apply to all clips to use one layout everywhere. A **layout** is where your camera and screen sit on the canvas. Pick one under **Layout** in the editor sidebar; the presets offered depend on what the clip contains (camera only, screen only, or both). To use one layout on every clip, right-click a gap in the layout timeline and choose **Apply to all clips**. To change layouts partway through a clip, drag across the timeline and pick a preset for that range. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq8wfh6005d07jt6vqub520/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq8wfh6005d07jt6vqub520/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Why do I see fewer layouts than someone else? The presets you see depend mostly on what the selected clip contains, not on your plan: * **Camera-only** clips get camera layouts: fullscreen, framed camera shapes such as Circle, Punch-in, and Cut out. * **Screen-only** clips get screen layouts. * **Screen and camera** clips, recorded together in Tella, get the full set that combines both: Camera Bubble, Side-by-side, TV Presenter, Cut out. * **Uploaded videos** get the fewest. Tella receives one combined video track, so it cannot move your camera and screen independently. You can still use **Punch-in** with a fullscreen layout, add a second visual with a Media layout, or use [**Cut out**](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background) to remove the background from uploaded footage of a person. If a colleague sees more layouts, they are most likely looking at a clip that was recorded with both screen and camera. To get those options, record the clip in Tella with both sources on. ## Screen and camera layout options When you record with both screen and camera, Tella offers several layout styles: * **Camera Bubble:** your camera appears as a small bubble over the screen recording. * **Side-by-Side:** splits the frame evenly between your screen recording and camera. In landscape videos the split is horizontal, with a **Left/Right** control under **Customize layout** for which side your camera sits on. In portrait and square videos the split is vertical, with a **Top/Bottom** control for which half your camera sits in. In landscape videos, turn on **Perspective** in the Side-by-Side panel to tilt the screen in 3D so it recedes toward your camera; turn it off to return to the style you had before. * **TV Presenter:** available for landscape videos, it places your camera prominently with the screen floating alongside it. The "Full" variants fill the entire canvas with your camera while the screen floats on top, giving a broadcast-style look. * **Cut out:** removes your camera background so only you appear, standing beside your screen recording. In landscape videos, the **Perspective** switch angles the screen toward you while you stand in front of it. Camera-only clips have a Cut out preset too, which places you over your video's background. See [Remove your camera background with Cut out](/docs/help/editing/cut-out-camera-background). * **Screen-only** / **Camera-only**: show a single source full-frame. For a screen-dominant look, use **Camera Bubble** and set **Camera size** to **S**. ## Choose a layout 1\. Open your video in Tella. 2\. Click **Layout** in the sidebar. The layout picker opens with a **Presets** tab listing the available layouts for the type of clip (camera-only, screen-only, or screen and camera). If you have saved layouts, they appear under **Favorites**. 3\. Browse through the presets and select the one that best suits your needs. The Layout panel header also includes: * The current **canvas size**, which you can click to switch ratios. * **Adjust**, where you can crop your camera or screen, mirror your camera, change [clip transitions](/docs/help/editing/clip-transitions) and the [layout animation style](/docs/help/editing/animation-style) without changing zoom animation, and preview social safe zones for 9:16 videos. Press `A` to open this panel directly. For example, if you are recording a product demo with a screen and camera setup, you may want to choose a layout that gives equal importance to both elements, like the side-by-side layout. Alternatively, if your focus is more on the details of your screen, choose a layout where the screen is dominant and the camera feed is minimized. ## Punch in on an uploaded video For a clip whose only footage is an uploaded video, **Layout** labels that footage **Video** rather than **Screen**. You can punch in without adding a screen zoom: 1. Select the uploaded clip and open **Layout**. 2. Choose the fullscreen preset (**Full**) under **Video**. 3. Turn on **Punch-in** in the layout controls. Punch-in enlarges the footage to 1.15× and fills the canvas, cropping the edges instead of leaving letterbox bars. The **Fill / Fit** control is hidden while Punch-in is on; turn it off to use that control again. This toggle is for uploaded footage, not screen recordings. To zoom into part of a screen recording, use the **Effect** tool instead. ## Apply the same layout to every clip Every clip has a **base layout**. It fills the gaps between the layout sections you add to the timeline. Click a bare gap to select the base layout, then choose a preset. The selected preset shows a **Base** badge so you know you are changing the clip's default rather than one layout section. To use that base layout on other compatible clips: 1\. Select a base-layout gap and choose the base layout you want. 2\. Open **Customize layout**. 3\. Under **Base layout**, click **Apply to all clips**. You can also right-click a base-layout gap and select **Apply to all clips**. Tella applies the base layout to other clips with the same compatible recording setup. Explicit layout sections that use a different layout stay in place. ## Screen looks cropped or zoomed to one side: Fill vs. Fit When you select a fullscreen layout or the **Full** Camera Bubble variant, you can choose how your screen recording fits the canvas using the **screen fit** control. * **Fill:** scales your screen recording to fill the entire canvas area. If the screen's aspect ratio differs from the canvas, the edges are cropped. This is the default and gives a clean, edge-to-edge look. * **Fit:** scales your screen recording to fit entirely within the canvas without cropping. If the aspect ratios don't match, you'll see bars (letterboxing) around the content. To switch between Fill and Fit: 1\. Select a clip that includes a screen recording. 2\. Open the **Layout** panel in the sidebar. 3\. Choose a fullscreen layout or the **Full** Camera Bubble variant. 4\. Open **Customize layout** and use the **Fill / Fit** toggle next to the screen fit control. > [!TIP] > > Use **Fill** when you want a polished, full-bleed look. Use **Fit** when it's important that every pixel of your screen recording stays visible, for example, when showing code editors or dashboards with content near the edges. The screen fit setting persists when you change canvas size or switch between landscape, portrait, and square orientations. > [!NOTE] > > With **Auto** canvas size, Tella hides the screen fit control on the layout that sets the canvas size because **Fill** and **Fit** look the same there. If the clip switches to another fullscreen or **Full** Camera Bubble layout later, the control remains available so you can choose **Fit** and keep the entire screen visible. ## Make your camera smaller (or larger) To make yourself appear smaller in the video, shrink your camera bubble. Tella lets you resize the camera directly. You don't need to use zoom or re-record. 1\. Open your video and click **Layout** in the sidebar. 2\. Choose a **Camera Bubble** layout (your camera appears as a smaller bubble over the screen, rather than filling the frame). 3\. Open **Customize layout** and use **Camera size** to choose **S**, **M**, or **L**. Choose **S** to make yourself as small as possible. For a size between the presets, you can also drag the corner handles of the camera on the canvas to resize it freely. This turns it into a [custom layout](/docs/help/editing/custom-layouts) that you can save to your Favorites. > [!TIP] > > The **Camera size** control is the direct way to shrink your camera. Zoom is a separate feature for punching in on screen content during a moment. It is not how you make your camera box smaller. ## Position your camera bubble For Camera Bubble layouts, you can place your camera in any of nine positions on the canvas using the **3×3 position grid**: four corners, four edges, and the center. TV Presenter layouts use a simpler left/right position control. 1\. Open **Layout** and choose a Camera Bubble layout. 2\. Open **Customize layout** and use the 3×3 grid to pick where your camera should appear. The full grid and size selector work for landscape, portrait, and square orientations. ## Customize a layout You can move, resize, and fine-tune the elements of any preset: 1\. After choosing a preset, open **Customize layout** from the sidebar to access the layout's controls (style, variants, camera position and size, screen fit, and more). 2\. Drag and adjust the position of the camera feed or screen recording on the canvas to fine-tune the composition. 3\. Use **Mirror camera** in the camera controls, or right-click your camera and choose **Flip horizontally**, when you want to flip your camera. Open the **⋯** menu beside **Camera**, **Screen**, or **Video** (uploaded footage) to crop that source without leaving Layout. 4\. Once you've adjusted the elements, Tella will indicate that you are using a **custom layout** instead of a preset. You can save this arrangement to your **Favorites** to reuse it across videos. See [Saved layouts](/docs/help/editing/custom-layouts) for the full workflow. Custom layouts are especially useful if you want a non-standard arrangement, such as placing your camera in a corner or resizing the screen recording to fill more of the frame. ## Work with the layout timeline When the **Layout** panel is open, the timeline shows layout sections over the clip's audio waveform, with the transcript underneath and a time ruler on top. Each card is an explicit layout section; the gaps between cards use the base layout. **Move around** * Scroll to pan along the clip. * Hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows and scroll to zoom in and out, centered on your pointer. **Shift + scroll** over the timeline zooms too. * Use the zoom slider next to the timeline, or press `=` and `-`. * Hover over the waveform or transcript to preview that frame before you click. **Select what you want to change** * Click a section to select it. * Drag across the timeline to select a time range. The preview follows the moving edge while the red playhead stays parked, then the playhead moves to the selection's start when you release. * Hold **Shift** and drag to add more ranges, so you can change several places at once. * Hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows and click sections to select them individually, or drag to sweep across several. * Click a word in the transcript row to select it, or drag across words to select a phrase. * Press **Escape** to clear explicit ranges and multi-selected cards. The layout under the parked playhead can become active again immediately. **Adjust a section** * Drag a section to move it, or drag its edge to resize it. * Sections snap to word boundaries, other sections, and the playhead. Hold **Option** on Mac or **Alt** on Windows while dragging to turn snapping off. * Where two sections touch, the shared edge becomes a **seam**. Drag the seam to move the boundary between them with both sections staying joined, or hold **Option**/**Alt** and drag to pull them apart and open a gap. When you drag a section edge or seam, the video previews that moving boundary while the red playhead stays parked. > [!TIP] > > For precise timing, click a section's edge or a seam, then press the left or right arrow key. Each press moves it by one pixel at your current timeline zoom. Hold **Shift** while pressing an arrow key to move it by 10 pixels. **Right-click for more** Right-clicking gives you different options depending on what's under your pointer: * **On a layout section:** **Customize layout**, **Split at playhead**, and **Delete layout**, plus **Add zoom to layout** when the clip can be zoomed, which adds a zoom over the section's full range. If the section contains media, you also get options to trim, mute, adjust the volume of, replace, or remove it. * **On a selected range:** the same menu as every other timeline: **Add layout**, **Add zoom**, **Add blur**, **Add highlight**, **Add overlay**, **Cut selection**, **Copy to new clip**, and **Copy to new video**. Zoom, blur, and highlight appear only when the clip is compatible. Adding a zoom, effect, or overlay switches you to the matching tool, so you can start in the Layout timeline and finish elsewhere. See [Right-click a selected range](/docs/help/editing/multi-track-timeline#right-click-a-selected-range). * **On a base-layout gap:** **Add layout here** (or **Add layout from selection**), **Apply to all clips**, and **Reset layouts**. **Add until end** also appears when no time range is selected. To remove every added layout section and custom layout adjustment from the current clip, open **More actions** in the Layout toolbar and choose **Reset all layouts**. Click **Undo** in the confirmation message if you want to restore them. ## Use multiple layouts in one clip Multiple layouts let you add different layouts to one clip. See [Multiple layouts](/docs/help/editing/use-multi-layouts) for a shorter walkthrough. This is useful when the visual focus should change at specific moments. For example, you might start with a camera-only layout for an introduction, then switch to a screen-and-camera layout when you begin demonstrating something on your screen. Later, you could switch to a screen-only layout to highlight specific details. To add a layout section: 1\. Drag across the time range you want to change, or select the matching words in the transcript. 2\. Choose a preset. Tella creates a layout card for that range. 3\. Move the card or drag its edges to fine-tune the timing. You can also place the playhead and click **Add layout**. Without a selected range, Tella creates a short section using your last non-base layout. Hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows to change the action to **Add until end**. Multiple layouts are particularly effective when you want to switch the visual focus between different elements throughout a single clip. ## Apply a layout in multiple places You can select several timeline ranges or existing layout sections and update them together. 1. Open the **Layout** panel. 2. Select every place you want to change: * To select time ranges, drag across the first range. Then hold **Shift** while dragging each additional range. * To select existing layout sections, hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows while clicking each section. You can also hold the same key and drag across several sections. 3. Choose a layout preset. Tella applies it to every eligible selected range and every selected section. New sections created from eligible selected ranges stay selected as a group, so another layout pick updates the same group. Undo or redo treats the whole change as one action. If you move or resize a selected range, undo restores both its timing and the selection you started with. > [!NOTE] > > Selected ranges shorter than 0.2 seconds are skipped. Other eligible ranges and selected layout sections are still updated. If nothing can be updated, regular layout presets show a warning; Media layouts don't create a section. > [!TIP] > > To create sections with a non-base layout before choosing another preset, click **Add layout**. Tella creates one layout section for each eligible range, usually using the last non-base layout you chose. ## Split a layout at the playhead You can split a layout section in two from the **Layout** toolbar, the same way **Split** works in the Cut tool. 1\. Select the layout section you want to divide. 2\. Move the playhead to the point where you want the split. 3\. Click **Split** in the toolbar, or press `X`. The section is divided at the playhead and the new right half stays selected, so you can immediately apply a different layout to it. Split is disabled when no section is selected or when the playhead is outside the selected section. ## Delete a layout section Select a layout section in the timeline, then click **Delete** in the Layout toolbar or press **Delete** or **Backspace** on your keyboard. To remove several layout sections at once, hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows while selecting them, then delete the selection. Your video always needs a base layout, so you can't delete the base section. If you drag across the timeline to select a time range instead of selecting a layout section, Delete remains disabled and your footage stays unchanged. Open the **Cut** tool when you want to remove part of the video. ## Copy, cut, and paste layout sections You can reuse one or more layout sections elsewhere in your video without rebuilding them. 1. Select a layout section in the timeline. To select several sections, hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows while clicking each one. You can also drag across a time range to include the layout sections it overlaps. 2. Press **Cmd/Ctrl + C** to copy the selection, or **Cmd/Ctrl + X** to cut it. 3. Move the playhead to where you want the copied sections to start. 4. Press **Cmd/Ctrl + V** to paste. Tella keeps each section's duration and the spacing between selected sections. Layout styling and any media in those sections are copied too, including media framing and volume settings. > [!NOTE] > > If the copied group would run past the end of the target clip, Tella moves the group earlier so it fits. If the group is longer than the clip, Tella shows a warning and does not paste it. ## Adjust transitions between layouts Whenever you add multiple layouts to a clip, Tella automatically inserts a **smooth transition** between them. You can customize how a selected layout starts and ends: 1\. Select a non-base layout card. 2\. Open **Customize layout**. 3\. Under **Animations**, set **Intro** and **Outro** to **Smooth** or **Hard cut**. The first layout has no editable Intro, and the last layout has no editable Outro. Use the **⋯** menu beside Animations to **Set as default** for future layout sections, or **Apply to all** transitions in the current clip. This is separate from the base layout's **Apply to all clips** action. For example, a smooth transition works well when switching from a camera and screen layout to a screen-only layout, while a hard cut might be more appropriate for switching between two very different sections of the video. ## When to use one layout or multiple layouts Deciding whether to use one layout or multiple layouts comes down to the style of your video: * Use **single layouts** if your content stays consistent throughout the clip (e.g., a straightforward screen recording or a talking-head video). * Use **multiple layouts** to create variety and highlight different elements within the same clip (e.g., switching between a detailed screen focus and a camera view). For longer videos, you can also combine multiple clips, each with different layouts, to make the video more engaging while keeping your recording sessions simple. # Add media (B-roll) Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/use-media Add B-roll by choosing a Media layout under Layout, or by setting a slot's Source to Media in Customize layout. Upload an image or video, pick from the Media Library, or generate one with AI. Your voice keeps playing. Add image or video B-roll in Tella by choosing a **Media** layout under **Layout** for part of a clip, or by setting the **Screen** or **Camera** slot's **Source** to **Media** in **Customize layout**. Use it to cut to a product screenshot, a stock video, a diagram, or an AI-generated visual while your voice keeps playing. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvltynqr008y08id6vm7a10f/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvltynqr008y08id6vm7a10f/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## What you can use as media Anything you put in the **Media** slot of a layout becomes your B-roll for that section. You have three sources: * **Upload:** drop in an image (PNG, JPEG, WebP, GIF) or a video file (MP4, MOV, WebM, etc.) from your computer. * **Media library:** pick from media in **Personal** (media added to the current video, plus media only you can access), shared with your **Team**, or choose a clip from another video under **Browse** → **Clips from other videos**. * **Generate with AI:** describe what you want and Tella generates an image or a short video clip for you. You can attach a reference image to steer the look. ## Add media to a layout Every layout section has two slots, **Screen** (the main panel) and **Camera** (the bubble), and each slot has its own source. You can put media in either slot, so B-roll works on any clip: two-track recordings, screen-only clips, camera-only clips, and uploaded videos. 1. Open your video and click **Layout**. 2. Drag across the time range where you want the media. You can also select one or more existing layout cards. 3. Under **Presets**, find the **Media** family and choose a full-frame or two-slot arrangement. 4. Pick an item from the Media Library, upload a new image or video, or generate an image or video with AI. Tella creates sections for selected ranges, updates selected cards in place, and attaches the media in one action. ### Change a layout source manually You can also add media from **Customize layout**: 1. Select a layout card and open **Customize layout**. 2. Open the **Screen** or **Camera** section and change its **Source** to **Media**: * **Screen → Media:** media fills the main panel (classic B-roll). Your camera recording, if present, stays in the bubble alongside it. * **Camera → Media:** media takes over the bubble while your recording in the main panel keeps playing. Use this for inset visuals like a reaction GIF, a logo, or an illustration over your demo. 3. The Media Library opens automatically. Choose, upload, or generate an item. That section of your video now shows the media in the slot you picked, while the rest of the layout (your camera, background, borders, and so on) stays the same. > [!NOTE] > > Each slot's **Source** is independent: **Recording**, **Media**, or **None**. You can set one slot to **None** to hide that part of the layout, but at least one slot has to be active. ### On camera-only or screen-only clips The same two-slot controls apply when your clip has only one recording: * **Camera-only clip:** set **Screen → Media** to cut to a full-frame visual with your camera tucked into a bubble, or set **Camera → Media** to keep yourself on camera with media floating beside you. * **Screen-only or uploaded clip:** set **Screen → Media** to fully replace the screen, or **Camera → Media** to add an inset bubble of media over your screen recording. For the most predictable result on a single-recording clip, start with a Media preset that already has the full-frame or two-slot arrangement you want. You can pick another compatible style under **Customize layout**. ## Adjust media (trim, crop, audio) Once a clip is in a B-roll section, you can fine-tune which part of it plays, how it's framed, and how loud it is from a single **Adjust media** modal. Open it from the timeline: 1. Right-click a layout card that uses media. 2. Pick **Trim media** to edit the source range, or **Adjust volume** to open the Audio panel at that media's volume control. To silence video media immediately, choose **Mute audio** from the same menu. Choose **Unmute audio** to restore its sound. If both the Screen and Camera slots use media, the menu labels each action by slot. The modal shows a live preview followed by a timeline of the source clip. When the range you're using is short compared with the clip, the timeline opens zoomed in on it, showing about three times the range's length (at least 3 seconds) so you can trim precisely. ### Trim the inpoint and outpoint * Drag the **start** and **end** handles on the timeline to pick the range of the source clip you want to use. The red playhead above the track tracks playback. Drag it to scrub. * When the timeline is zoomed in, a strip above the track shows the whole clip, your range, and the playhead. Drag the box in the strip, or click anywhere on it, to pan. * Hold a handle (or the whole range) against either end of the track to scroll further through the clip. When you let go, the view pans or zooms out so the whole range is visible. * Press **space** to play just the trimmed range in the preview. * Need exact timing? Double-click the duration below the track to type a duration. You can also nudge a selected handle by 10 ms with the arrow keys, or 100 ms with **Shift + arrow**. > [!NOTE] > > A video B-roll section can't be resized longer than its media has left to play. On the timeline, the section's edges (and the seam between two sections) stop where the media (from its trim start to the end of the clip) runs out, instead of looping to fill a longer section. Images don't have this limit since they don't loop. ### Crop the framing Click the **crop** icon in the modal footer to crop the media to a tighter framing. The preview shows the cropped result, and narrow crops are letterboxed to match your video's aspect ratio. Crop and any explicitly set media volume are preserved when you split a B-roll section, so both halves keep the same framing and audio level. ### Adjust the media's audio Click the **volume** icon in the modal footer to open the media volume slider. This is the same control as **Media volume (this layout)** in the Audio panel. Set it to zero to mute the media's own sound while keeping your voiceover. When you're done, click **Apply** to save your changes to that section. > [!TIP] > > B-roll playback continues across a layout split. If you split a section that uses media, the second half picks up where the first half left off in the source clip instead of restarting from the beginning. ### Replace the media in a section You can pick a different clip for a section at any time (from the Media Library, a new upload, or AI generation) without deleting the section first. Open **Customize layout**, then click the existing media row, or right-click the layout card on the timeline and choose **Replace media**. * If the replacement is **shorter** than the current section, the section shortens to match the new clip's length. * If it's **longer**, the section keeps its current length. Open **Adjust media** afterward if you want to use more of the new clip. ## Does my voice keep playing during B-roll? Yes. Your **microphone audio keeps playing** during a media section. Swapping in media doesn't remove your voiceover. Audio from a recording can also keep playing when its video is hidden. Use the **Audio** controls when you want to mute microphone or system audio too; changing a visual source to **None** does not mute its recording audio. If the media file has its own sound (e.g. a video clip with audio), it's **mixed in on top** of your voice. To balance or mute it: 1. Right-click the media section in the timeline. 2. Select **Adjust volume** to open the **Audio** panel at the volume control for that media. 3. Adjust **Media volume (this layout)**, or drag it to zero to fully mute the media's sound. For a quick toggle, select **Mute audio** or **Unmute audio** directly from the media section's menu. > [!NOTE] > > If your voiceover sounds quiet during a media section, it's usually the media's own audio competing with it. Turn down **Media volume (this layout)** rather than re-recording. > [!TIP] > > You can also click directly on the empty B-roll area in the canvas to open the Media Library. If the section already has an AI prompt saved, the placeholder shows the prompt. Click it to jump back to the generator and edit it. ## The Media Library Selecting **Media** for an empty slot or clicking **Browse media** for a slot that already contains media opens the Media Library panel. Choose **Personal** or **Team**, or click **Browse**: * **Personal:** the default tab. **In this video** at the top lists media added while editing the current video, which every editor of the video sees. Below it, **Your library** holds media only you can access across your videos. * **Team:** media everyone in your workspace can access across videos. * **Browse:** every other source in one list, such as clips from other videos and [vintage videos](/docs/help/editing/vintage-videos). Click **Browse** again to open its menu and pick one source, like **Clips from other videos**. You need edit access to a source video to add its clip. ### Add a clip from another video as B-roll 1. Open the Media Library for the layout slot where you want the clip, then choose **Browse** → **Clips from other videos**. 2. Search for a video or browse the list. Your own videos are under **My videos** and your teammates' under **Team videos**. 3. Open the video and choose a clip. You can search the clips by name and hover over a clip to preview it. Selecting a video with one available clip picks that clip directly. 4. Wait for the clip to render under **In this video**. Tella adds it to the selected layout slot when it's ready, even if you close the library while it renders. To add an editable timeline clip instead of B-roll, use **Add clip** → **Select from existing**. See [Remix and reuse videos and clips](/docs/help/editing/remix-and-reuse-videos-and-clips). You can manage the active library in these ways: * **Search:** type to filter it by name. * **Upload:** drop files anywhere in the panel or use the upload button to add them to the active tab. If you drop files while **Browse** or one of its sources is open, they go to **In this video** and the library switches to **Personal** so you can see them. You can also paste a copied file (⌘V / Ctrl+V) while the library is open; pasted files go to **In this video**. * **Generate:** click the sparkles control in the header to expand or collapse the AI composer. Media generated while editing is added to **In this video**. * **Save for reuse:** open the menu for an item under **In this video**, then choose **Save to personal** or **Save to team**. The original stays under **In this video**, and you can save it to both libraries. If it is already saved in that destination, Tella shows **Already saved to Personal** or **Already saved to Team**. * **Move between libraries:** for an item under **Personal** or **Team**, open its menu and choose **Move to team** or **Move to personal**. * **Rename, download, or delete:** open a tile's menu to manage it. ## Generate media with AI At the top of the Media Library panel, the **Generate** section lets you create an image or a short video clip from a prompt: 1. Describe what you want in the prompt box, e.g. "a soft pastel gradient with abstract shapes" or "a person typing on a laptop, warm lighting." 2. (Optional) Click the **photo** icon at the bottom-left of the prompt box to add a **reference image**. Tella uses it as visual inspiration. You can upload a PNG, JPEG, or WebP up to 10 MB. The selected reference image appears as a thumbnail inside the prompt composer. Click the **×** to remove it. Use the **⋯** menu next to the photo icon to pick **Current image as reference** and iterate on whatever's already in the slot. 3. (Optional) To make a video clip instead of an image, click the arrow next to **Generate image** and choose **Video**. The button changes to **Generate video**. Choose **Image** to switch back. 4. (Optional) Open the **⋯** menu next to the photo icon to pick a model. * For images, choose an option under **Image model**: * **Sunburst · Best quality:** the default and most capable model, with the most precise reference-image matching. * **Flare · Faster:** choose this for faster image generation. * For videos, choose an option under **Video model**: * **Seedance 2.5 · Best quality, 1080p:** the default model. * **Seedance 2.0 Fast · Faster, 720p:** quicker and uses fewer credits. * **Seedance 2.0 Mini · Cheapest, 720p:** uses the fewest credits. 5. Click **Generate image** or **Generate video**. The new item appears as a placeholder while it's processing and turns into a real tile when it's done. > [!NOTE] > > Images and videos use your workspace's [credits](/docs/help/billing/what-uses-credits), and you can't generate either while your balance is empty. Video generation takes a few minutes, and higher-quality video models use more credits per clip. Media generated while editing is added to the current video's library, under **Personal** → **In this video**. To reuse it in other videos, open its menu and choose **Save to personal** or **Save to team**. ## Combine media with layout styles Media works with all of Tella's layout styles, so you can stage it however you like: * **Camera Bubble:** your media (or screen) fills the frame with the other slot as a small bubble in a corner. * **Side-by-side:** the two slots split the frame. * **TV Presenter:** one slot takes the spotlight with the other floating alongside. * **Screen only** / **Camera only**: show just one slot, full-frame. Change the style under **Customize layout** to keep the attached media where the new style supports it. Picking an ordinary preset or preset favorite from the main Layout picker clears the section's media and source overrides. On camera-only, screen-only, and uploaded clips, Media favorites keep media in the slots their layouts support. Saved custom layouts also keep media in supported slots. ## Save and reuse a Media layout You can favorite a **Media** preset from the **Layout** picker or use **Add to favorites** in **Customize layout**. The saved layout appears under **Favorites** for compatible clips. To save your own arrangement instead, use **Save as favorite** in **Customize layout**. On camera-only, screen-only, and uploaded clips, select a Media favorite to reuse its arrangement. If the section has no media yet, Tella opens the Media Library so you can choose an item; canceling leaves the section unchanged. If the section already has media, the favorite changes its arrangement without replacing the item. On screen-and-camera clips, a favorited Media preset behaves like the matching ordinary preset favorite: applying it clears the section's media instead of opening the Media Library or preserving existing media. After you change a two-slot Media layout in **Customize layout**—for example, by turning off **Fullscreen**—the Media tile remains selected and previews the current arrangement. ## Add effects to media When media is in a layout's **Screen** slot, you can apply zooms, blurs, and highlights to it from **Effect**. This also works on camera-only clips during sections where media fills the Screen slot. * Zooms on media use **Manual** mode because image and video B-roll does not include recorded cursor data. * Blurs and highlights stay attached to the media and end when it leaves the Screen slot. * Media in the **Camera** slot is not affected. See [add zooms and screen effects](/docs/help/editing/add-a-zoom) and [blur or highlight part of your video](/docs/help/editing/blurring-and-highlighting) for step-by-step instructions. ## Use media across multiple sections Because each layout section has its own sources, you can cut between camera and different B-roll throughout a clip. A common pattern: 1. Start the clip on your base layout (just you and your screen recording). 2. Add a section, set **Screen → Media**, and pick a product screenshot. 3. Add another section later in the clip. This time try **Camera → Media** for a quick inset cutaway over your screen. 4. The base layout continues between sections, so you cut back to yourself in between. Transitions between sections work the same as for any multi-layout video. See [Multi-layouts](/docs/help/editing/use-multi-layouts) for how to adjust them. ### Add the same media in multiple places You can add one Media layout and media item to several timeline ranges or layout sections at once when the currently active layout section doesn't already contain media. 1. Open the **Layout** panel. 2. Select your targets: * Drag across one time range, then hold **Shift** while dragging each additional range. * Or hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows while clicking the layout sections you want to change. 3. Choose a **Media** layout. 4. Pick an item from the Media Library or upload a new image or video. Tella applies the layout and media to every eligible selected target in one action. Selected ranges shorter than 0.2 seconds are skipped. If every selected range is too short and no layout sections are selected, Tella doesn't create a Media section. If you choose a video that is shorter than a selected section, that section shortens to match the available media. > [!NOTE] > > Canceling the Media Library or an upload that fails leaves your selected ranges and sections unchanged. > [!NOTE] > > If the active section already contains media, choosing a Media layout changes the selected sections' arrangement instead of opening the Media Library for bulk replacement. Use **Browse media** to replace existing media one section at a time. ## Auto Layouts and media [Auto Layouts](/docs/help/editing/use-auto-layouts) doesn't add B-roll. After generating auto layouts, add media to any section the same way you would on a clip you laid out yourself. ## Tips * **Match your aspect ratio**. Tella will fit your media to the layout's frame, but media shot or generated in the same orientation as your canvas (landscape, portrait, square) looks best. * **Keep B-roll short**. Cutting to media for 2–5 seconds at a time keeps the pace lively. * **Reuse media across videos**. Save an item from **In this video** to **Personal** or **Team** so it is available in other videos without re-uploading or re-generating it. # Use multiple layouts in one clip Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/use-multi-layouts Multiple layouts let one clip switch layouts over time, for example hiding your camera or going screen-only for a section. Click Layout, drag across the time range, and choose a preset; the rest of the clip keeps its base layout. Multiple layouts let one clip change layouts over time: click **Layout**, drag across the part of the timeline you want to change, and choose a preset. That section gets its own layout card, and the rest of the clip keeps its base layout. Use it to hide your camera, go screen-only, or cut to Media for part of a clip. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvq9lqp700aq08l68ovq8iq4/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvq9lqp700aq08l68ovq8iq4/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## What are multiple layouts? Every clip has a base layout. Multiple layouts let you add layout cards on top of that base for specific moments, so one continuous recording can move between your camera, screen, side-by-side views, and Media. They work well when you want to: * Start on camera, then bring in your screen for a demo. * Hide your camera while viewers need to focus on a detail. * Cut to an image or video without recording a separate clip. * Punch in on your camera for emphasis. ## Hide your camera or change the layout for part of a clip 1. Open your video and click **Layout**. 2. Drag across the time range you want to change. You can also click or drag across words in the transcript row. 3. Choose a preset. Tella creates a layout card for the selected range. 4. Drag the card to move it, or drag either edge to adjust when it starts and ends. The spaces between cards use the clip's base layout. Click a base-layout gap before choosing a preset when you want to change that default instead of adding another card. > [!TIP] > > Hold **Shift** while dragging to select several ranges, then choose one preset to apply it to every eligible range at once. ## Add a layout from the playhead Place the playhead where you want the change and click **Add layout**. Tella adds a short card using the last non-base layout you chose. Hold **Cmd** on Mac or **Ctrl** on Windows to change the action to **Add until end**. The new card continues to the next layout card or the end of the clip. ## Adjust connected layout cards When two cards touch, their shared edge is a **seam**. Drag the seam to move the boundary while the cards stay connected. Hold **Option** on Mac or **Alt** on Windows while dragging the seam to pull the cards apart and open a base-layout gap. To change how a card enters or exits: 1. Select the card and open **Customize layout**. 2. Under **Animations**, set **Intro** or **Outro** to **Smooth** or **Hard cut**. The first layout has no editable Intro, and the last layout has no editable Outro. The seam controls timing; the Animation controls choose the transition style. ## Multiple layouts or multiple clips? * Use **multiple layouts** when the recording should stay continuous and only its presentation changes. * Use **multiple clips** when sections are easier to record separately or should be independently reordered, replaced, or removed. For selection gestures, splitting, deleting, copying, pasting, and base-layout controls, see the complete [Layouts guide](/docs/help/editing/use-layouts). # Add vintage videos Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/editing/vintage-videos Add free public-domain film shots from the Vintage videos section of Overlay, or from More → Vintage videos in the media library, as an overlay or layout media. Add free, public-domain film shots to your video from the **Vintage videos** section of **Overlay** in the editor sidebar. You can also pick them from **Browse** → **Vintage videos** in the media library to use one as B-roll in a layout. The shots come from public-domain films from the Internet Archive, NASA, Open Beelden, the Library of Congress and Wikimedia Commons. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvqnink300sw02owbkts9cot/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvqnink300sw02owbkts9cot/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Where to find vintage videos 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Open **Overlay** in the sidebar, or press `V`. 3. Scroll to the **Vintage videos** section. The section shows a row of featured shots and a set of topics, such as **Space**, **Cities**, **Cars**, and **Trains**. ## Add a vintage video as an overlay 1. Move the playhead to where you want the shot to appear, or select a time range. 2. In **Vintage videos**, click a featured shot to add it right away. 3. To see more, click **Browse all**, a topic, or the search button (**Search vintage videos**). 4. Click a shot to add it. Tella places the shot on top of your recording at the playhead, the same way as any other [media overlay](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays). The library closes once the shot is placed. > [!TIP] > > Hover over a shot to play a preview inside its tile. Each tile in the full library shows how long the shot is. ## Search for a vintage video In the full **Vintage videos** library, type in the search box in the header to look through film titles and descriptions. Click a topic to search for it, and click it again to clear the search. Scroll down, or click **Load more**, to see more results. You can also type in **Search overlays** at the top of the Overlay panel. Matching shots appear under **Vintage videos** alongside text styles, stickers, and sounds. ## Use a vintage video in a layout Use a media layout when the shot should replace your screen recording for part of your video. 1. Open your video and click **Layout**. 2. Select a time range or layout section, then choose a **Media** layout. You can also open **Customize layout** and change **Screen** or **Camera** to **Media**. 3. In the media library, click **Browse**, open its menu and choose **Vintage videos**. 4. Pick a topic or search, then click a shot. Tella adds the shot to the current video's library and puts it in the layout section you had selected. **Vintage videos** is also under **Browse** when you click **Browse all** in the **Media** section of **Overlay**. ## Edit a vintage video after adding it A placed shot is an ordinary video. Trim it, resize it, fade it in and out, or put it behind you just like any other clip. See [Add media overlays](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays) or [Add media (B-roll)](/docs/help/editing/use-media). ## Why can't I add a vintage video? If a shot can't be added, Tella shows **Could not add that item**. Try another shot, or try again in a moment. If the library shows **Vintage videos are unavailable right now.**, the library couldn't load. Reopen it later. ## Use vintage videos from the API or an AI agent The [Media library API](/docs/media-library-api#bring-in-vintage-film-shots) and the [MCP server's library tools](/docs/mcp-tools/library#vintage-videos) can search vintage shots and bring one into Tella, so the editor agent, another AI agent, or a script can place them in your videos. ## Related * [Overlays overview](/docs/help/editing/overlays) * [Add media overlays](/docs/help/editing/media-overlays) * [Add media (B-roll)](/docs/help/editing/use-media) * [Import a YouTube video](/docs/help/editing/import-a-youtube-video) # Embed Tella videos in email Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/embed-videos/embed-tella-videos-in-email Share → Email gives you an animated GIF or still-image preview to paste into Gmail, Outlook, and most email clients, plus an HTML5 video option that plays inline only in Apple Mail, iOS Mail, and Superhuman. You can embed your Tella video directly in an email, so recipients see a preview of it right in their inbox instead of a bare link. Tella generates the embed content for you, with no HTML knowledge needed. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmvruituy001y08js004b6ajx/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmvruituy001y08js004b6ajx/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) ## Embed a video in an email 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Click **Share** in the top right, then click **Email**. 3. Choose an embed type: * **Animated:** an animated GIF preview of your video. Works in all email clients. * **Static:** a still image preview. Works in all email clients. * **Video:** an HTML5 video that plays inline. Works in **Apple Mail**, **iOS Mail**, and **Superhuman**. Other email clients show a clickable thumbnail that links to the video. 4. Customize the embed (see options below), then copy it: * **Copy content:** copies the rendered preview so you can paste it straight into your email compose window (Gmail, Outlook, and most other clients). Available for Animated and Static embeds. * **Copy code:** copies the raw HTML snippet, for email tools that accept HTML directly. 5. Paste into your email and send. Whichever type you choose, the embed links back to your video on Tella, so recipients can always click through to watch the full video. ## Customize your embed * **Frame start-time:** for Animated embeds and Static embeds without a custom thumbnail, choose the second of the video the preview starts from, so the thumbnail shows the right moment. * **Show play button:** for Animated embeds and Static embeds without a custom thumbnail, overlay a play button on the thumbnail to make it obvious the image is a video. * **Message:** add an optional text message above the video in the email. * **Link text:** change the text of the link below the video (defaults to "Watch on Tella.tv"). ## Requirements for the Video embed type > [!NOTE] > > The Video option requires that your video has been [exported](/docs/help/sharing/share-and-download-a-video#download-your-video) at least once. If no export is available, you will see a message prompting you to export first. > [!WARNING] > > For the Video embed to play, your video must be set to **Anyone with the link**. Email clients and their media proxies cannot authenticate, so the video needs to be publicly accessible. ## Which embed type should I use? * Sending to a broad audience or a mailing list? Use **Animated**. It grabs attention and works everywhere. * Want a clean, lightweight email? Use **Static**. * Know your recipient uses Apple Mail or Superhuman? Use **Video** for inline playback without leaving the inbox. For sharing options beyond email, see [Share & download](/docs/help/sharing/share-and-download-a-video). # Embed Tella videos in Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/embed-videos/embed-tella-videos-in-google-docs-sheets-and-slides Install the Tella add-on from the Google Workspace Marketplace, paste a tella.tv link into Google Docs, Sheets, or Slides, and press Tab to turn it into a video smart chip. Install the Tella add-on from the Google Workspace Marketplace, then paste a Tella link into a Google Doc, Sheet, or Slide and press **Tab** to turn it into a smart chip that previews the video. [https://www.tella.tv/video/vid\_cmkn9pajx00ks04le7y0s39lf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0](https://www.tella.tv/video/vid_cmkn9pajx00ks04le7y0s39lf/embed?b=0\&title=0\&a=1\&loop=0\&t=0\&muted=0\&wt=0) You can embed Tella videos directly in Google Docs, Google Sheets, and Google Slides using the Tella add-on from the Google Workspace Marketplace. This is useful when you want to add extra context to a document you are sharing, or keep video updates and explanations inline with your work. ## Install the Tella add-on You can install the add-on from the Google Workspace Marketplace [here](https://try.tella.com/smart-chips "https://try.tella.com/smart-chips"), or from inside Google Docs. 1. Open **Google Docs**. 2. Go to **Extensions** → **Add-ons** → **Get add-ons**. 3. Search for **Tella**. 4. Click to install the add-on. 5. Grant access so Tella can embed videos in your Docs, Sheets, and Slides. ### Embed a Tella video as a smart chip 1. Copy the link to the Tella video you want to embed. 2. Paste the link into your Google doc, sheet, or slide. 3. Press **Tab** to convert the pasted link into an embedded smart chip. Once embedded, you can hover over the smart chip to see more context, like the video thumbnail, author, and duration. You can also select the option to watch the full video on Tella. > [!NOTE] > > Smart chips only work with `tella.tv` and `tella.video` links. If your > workspace uses a custom domain, links copied on that domain won't convert. > Swap the domain for `www.tella.tv` and keep the rest of the link the same > (for example, `https://videos.yourcompany.com/video/my-video` becomes > `https://www.tella.tv/video/my-video`), then paste that link and press > **tab**. ### Where this works This embedding flow works in: * Google Docs * Google Sheets * Google Slides # Embed Tella videos in Mintlify Source: https://www.tella.com/docs/help/embed-videos/embed-tella-videos-in-mintlify Mintlify docs are MDX, so a Tella video embeds with the iframe code from the video's Share → Embed tab. Good for walkthroughs and feature explainers. Mintlify docs are written in MDX, so you embed a Tella video by pasting the `